Home

NE2A Series Safety Network Controller Operation Manual

1. ta Flashing m OFF Input Indicators These indicators show the status of the input terminals Indicators 0 to 3 cor respond to Si0 to Si3 Indicator name Meaning Input signal ON e Error detected in input circuit e Discrepancy error detected when setting dual channel Error detected in other channel when setting dual channels No error in this channel Input signal OFF e Power for external input circuits of the Safety Input Unit is not being supplied Wire the V1 and G1 terminals on the CPU Unit to supply power e Discrepancy error detected when setting dual channel Soc ON a Flashing m OFF 3 8 3 1 0 Specifications Safety Inputs Specifications Number of inputs 4 Input type Sinking inputs PNP compatible ON voltage 11 VDC min between input terminals and G1 OFF voltage 5 VDC max between input terminals and G1 OFF current 1 mA max Input current 4 5 MA Test Outputs Specifications Number of outputs 2 TO T1 Output type Sourcing outputs PNP compatible Rated output current 21 5 mA max ON residual voltage 1 2 VDC max between output terminals and V Leakage current 0 1 mA max 58 Safety Input Units Section 3 8 3 8 4 1 0 Terminals and Internal Connection Diagram Base Block Main Block Terminal Block Terminal number A1 B1 A3 B3 SiO t
2. Inputs from remote 1 0 Inputs from local I O can can be forcibly changed be forcibly changed Remote 1 0 Local 1 0 User program Outputs from remote I O Outputs from local I O can can be forcibly changed be forcibly changed To force set or force reset variables to which inputs or outputs are assigned the NE2A series Controller must be changed to Force Mode To change to Force Mode you must input a device password The configura tion data must be locked to change the NE2A series Controller to Force Mode Mode change RUN Mode change IDLE Force Mode starts Force Mode Starts Force Mode ends Force Mode continuation time elapses Mode change RUN Force Mode Cpe tN Mode change IDLE 71 NE2A series Controller Status Transitions Section 4 1 Monitoring Force Mode Time Note There is a limit to the time that the NE2A series Controller can continue in Force Mode The duration time is specified when Force Mode is started or restarted The upper limit of the duration time is 24 hours If this time elapses the NE2A series Controller will exit Force Mode and move to IDLE Mode in the normal operating mode After the duration time elapses the data that was force set or force reset will return to the actual I O values Be sure to take sufficient safety precautions Data That Can be Force set reset 72 The following data can be
3. Relation between Variables and the Program in the NE 2A series Controller NE2A Local I O Program gt Local input terminal Input variable Local output terminal Output variable DST1 Status Status Assembly Local input terminal Function Block Input variable Input variable Input variable Y Output variable Local output terminal 77 Creating Variables Section 4 3 4 3 2 Linking I O Tags to Local I O and Remote I O Linking I O Tags to Local I O Signals such as emergency stop safety door and contactor signals con nected to NE2A series Safety I O Units are called local I O When the I O configuration for the Safety I O Units is set the local I O that is set will be displayed in the I O Tag List as I O tags for each Safety I O Unit in the Logic Editor Input tag display selection I O Tag Li vax A NE24 SCPUO1 7B slot 1 GST 1D04 1 S Safety lnp 00 P e EM0 1 S 01 P e EM0 2 S 02 F e DoorSw 1 03 P e DoorSw 2 _ Standard Apo a slot 2 GST OD04 1 _ Standard Input Network DeviceNet_1 Local inputs Linking I O Tags to Remote I O Output tag display selection A 4x DB NE24 SCPU01 JMa slot 2 GST OD04 1 S Safety Outpa O0 P d S afetyRealy 1 5 O1J P d SatetyRealy 2 S _ 02 N
4. 359 Logic Editor Functions Section 15 3 Description Toolbar Offline Online icon Export Exports the current variable data into an external CSV format Variables _ ile Export Exports the current tag list into an external CSV format file Tags Create from I O Tag List Imports variables from the actual I O list if the remote I O con nection is already set or the local I O already exists The I O terminal names will be used as the variable names Add to Watch Window Registers the selected variables to the Watch Window Variable Reference Report Displays a list of the variables that are being used Jump J umps to a location in the program where the selected vari able is used Report changes in variable If this check box is selected any changes to variable assign assignments ments will be reported When designing the system enable reporting of changes in assignments to prevent unintended program operation caused by assignment changes If changes will not be made to variable assignments e g for maintenance clear the selection of this check box to increase the speed of reading and uploading project files Library Menu Description Toolbar Offline Online icon Add to Project Registers the section or user defined function block that is selected in the Library Window in the library Add to Library Registers the section or user defined function block that is selected in the
5. MRON Network Configurator Choose this option to select the device driver from a list Windows does not guarantee that the driver you choose will be the best match for your hardware lt Back Next gt Cancel 4 Ifa warning message appears saying that the driver has not passed the Windows logo test ignore it and click the Continue Anyway Button Hardware Installation The software you are installing for this hardware OMRON NETA Series has not passed Windows Logo testing to verify its compatibility with Windows xP Tell me why this testing is important Continuing your installation of this software may impair or destabilize the correct operation of your system either immediately or in the future Microsoft strongly recommends that you stop this installation now and contact the hardware vendor for software that has passed Windows Logo testing STOP Installation 199 Installing the USB Driver Section 9 3 5 When the driver installation is completed normally the following dialog box will be displayed Click the Finish Button Found New Hardware Wizard Completing the Found New Hardware Wizard The wizard has finished installing the software for ad OMRON NETA Series Click Finish to close the wizard 6 If you are using an NE1A series or NEOA series Controller two different drivers must be installed The Found New Hardware Wizard Dialog Box will be displaye
6. 0 0 e eee eee 292 12 4 2 Setting Safety Connection Parameters 0 294 12 4 3 Convenient Functions for Editing Connections 295 12 4 4 Stopping or Restarting Communications after an Error 295 12 5 Using the NE2A series Controller as a Safety Slave 296 12 5 1 Registering I O Assemblies for Safety Slaves 296 12 5 2 Setting Assembly Data 0 0 0 eee eee eee 296 12 5 3 Registering I O Assembles from the Logic Editor 296 12 6 Communications between the NE2A series Controller and Standard Slaves 297 12 7 Using an NE2A series Controller as a Standard Slave 298 12 7 1 Registering I O Assemblies for Target Devices 298 12 7 2 Setting I O Assemblies 0 0 0 c eee ee eee ee 300 12 7 3 Registering I O Assemblies from the Logic Editor 305 12 7 4 Setting Slave Input Data in IDLE Mode 306 281 EtherNet IP Network Setting Procedure Section 12 1 12 1 EtherNet IP Network Setting Procedure This section describes how to build and set an EtherNet IP network to perform EtherNet IP communications With NE 2A series Controllers any of the follow ing functions can be set for each EtherNet IP Unit Safety Master Safety Slave or Tag Data Links Target The Slave procedure is not required if the NE2A series Controller will not be used as a Safety Sl
7. 14 Preparations for Operation Section 1 4 Operation Control Design i Designing Safety Device Replacement Procedures e Determine the operations to be performed by and the restrictions on the person in charge O 2 5 Section 7 y Designing Master Project Management Procedures e Design change and history control Syst ystem Operation and Maintenance gt C System Operation and Maintenance gt Checking Safety e Check daily or periodically whether there are any faults in the safety devices Section 20 Replacing Safety Devices e Replace any safety device for which safety cannot be assured e After replacing a safety device check to make sure that the new safety device is operating normally Q Sections 20 17 and 13 15 Preparations for Operation Section 1 4 16 SECTION 2 Configuring a System with NE2A series Controllers This section describes how to configure a system using NE2A series Safety Network Controllers including designing performance and control logic 2 1 Devices in the System Configuration 0 00 0 00000005 18 2 2 Safety Control System Configuration 0 0 0 0 00 00008 21 2 2 1 Network System Configuration 0 00000 21 2 2 2 Connecting Safety Devices 0 0 0 0 rre ee eee 23 2 2 3 Designing a Safety Control Interface 0
8. a Adjust the instruction execution cycle time by adding Controllers to distribute processing Adjust the peripheral servicing cycle time and communications cycle time by dividing the network a Checking the NE2A series Controller Cycle Time Section 13 2 13 2 Checking the NE2A series Controller Cycle Time The user must check the following three cycle times of the NE2A series Con troller They are required for the trial calculation of the safety response perfor mance reaction time and Standard Communications response performance e Instruction Execution Cycle Time e Peripheral Servicing Cycle Time Refer to SECTION 8 Calculating System Performance for details of each cycle time 13 2 1 Checking the Instruction Execution Cycle Time and Peripheral Servicing Cycle Time The instruction execution cycle time and peripheral servicing cycle time are automatically calculated by the Network Configurator The NE2A series Sys tem program must be created to calculate the instruction execution cycle time The Communications Unit s configuration and connections must be set to cal culate the peripheral servicing cycle time Use the following procedure to check the instruction execution cycle time and the peripheral servicing cycle time Procedure 1 2 3 1 Selectthe Target NE2A series CPU Unit O NE2A_Backplane_1 DeviceNet _1 DeviceNet_2 C EtherNet IP_t C ma AAA f 00 0
9. 9 6 4 Menu Commands File Menu Menu commands DeviceNet This section describes the function of each menu command of the Network Configurator Online is the state in which the Network Configurator is connected to the network Offline is the state in which the Network Configurator is discon nected from the network Description Toolbar Offline Online icon Creates a new DeviceNet network configuration EtherNet IP Creates a new EtherNet IP network configuration NE2A_ Backplane Creates a new NE2A Backplane configuration Opens an existing network configuration file 222 Saves an existing network configuration file Main Window and Menus Section 9 6 Menu commands Description Toolbar icon Save As Saves the current network configuration under a new name You can also use this command on version 3 3L or higher to save a network configuration file in a format that can be used on version 2 External Export Device Exports in CSV format a file with the device list that is dis data List played in the Network Configuration Pane Export Exports a network configuration file that can be used with Net work Configurator version 2 or lower Import Imports network configuration files that were created with DeviceNet Configurator version 1 or version 2 Change Password Changes the password of the network configuration file R efer to 9 5 3 Password Protection fo
10. The cycle times of the NE2A series Controller read by the Network Configura tor are as follows Instruction execution cycle time 7 ms Peripheral servicing cycle time 14 ms The network reaction time for the Safety Connection will be 72 ms The reaction time is obtained using the following equation Reaction time ms Switch reaction time DST1 series Safety I O Terminal input reaction time Network reaction time NE2A series Controller remote input local output reaction time Safety Output Unit reaction time Actuator reaction time Switch reaction time ON OFF delay time DST1 series Safety I O terminal 16 2 72 7x2 14 3 9 0 3 Actuator reaction time 120 4 ON OFF delay time S witch reaction time Actuator reaction time Calculating Safety Response Performance Section 8 2 Example 2 Remote Input Remote Output In the following configuration the DST1 series Safety I O Terminals are on dif ferent DeviceNet networks but calculations are the same as they would be if the DST1 series Safety I O Terminals were on the same DeviceNet network Instruction execution cycle time 7 ms Peripheral servicing cycle time 14 ms NE2A SCPUO1 Safety Connection EPI 15 ms Network reaction time 1 72 ms Safety Connection EPI 15 ms Network reaction time 2 72 ms DeviceNet 1 DeviceNet 2 DST1 series Safety 1 0 Terminal DST1 series Safety 1 0 Terminal Reactio
11. 0 0 00 eee eee eee 494 19 2 1 Checking the CPU Unit Error Status 0 494 19 2 2 CPU Unit Error Status and Countermeasures 496 19 3 Troubleshooting DeviceNet Unit Errors 0 00 00008 509 19 3 1 Checking the DeviceNet Unit Error Status 509 19 3 2 DeviceNet Unit Error Status and Countermeasures 509 19 4 Troubleshooting EtherNet IP Unit Errors 00 00 0000 522 19 4 1 Checking the EtherNet IP Unit Error Status 522 19 4 2 EtherNet IP Unit Error Status and Countermeasure 523 19 5 Troubleshooting Network Configurator Errors 0000 530 19 5 1 Checking the Network Configurator Error Status 530 19 5 2 Network Configurator Errors and Countermeasures 530 19 6 Connection Status Tables 0 0 eee cee 534 19 6 1 OUMMNEC sss eo Sa ek i ee EE A G lad ae E EN 534 19 6 2 Connection Status for DST1 NEOA Series 535 19 6 3 Connection Status for the NE1A series Controller Safety Slave Function 2 0 eee eee ee eee ene 538 491 Checking the Location of an Error Section 19 1 19 1 Checking the Location of an Error Errors can occur in the NE2A series Units Network Configurator or Logic Editor Error category Description NE2A series CPU Unit Errors that are detected during CPU Unit self diag Uniterrors NE2A SCPUO NOSis
12. NE1A Series NE1A SCPU01 V1 NE1A SCPU02 The NE1A SCPU01 V1 and NE1A SCPU02 are the parts of Safety Con trollers that control safety according to Safety Programs They provide a DeviceNet interface and support DeviceNet Safety Communications NEOA Series NEOA SCPUO1 The NEOA SCPUO1 is a small Safety Controller that supports logic opera tions and Safety Communications Slave functionality DST1 Series Safety I O Terminal 12 Safety Inputs DST1 ID12SL 1 11 Safety I O Terminal 8 Safety Inputs 8 Safety Outputs DST1 MD16SL 1 Safety I O Terminal 4 Safety Inputs 4 Safety Relay Out puts DST1 MRDO8SL 1 Safety I O Logic Terminal 8 Safety Inputs 8 Safety Out puts DST1 XD0808SL 1 The Safety I O Terminals are Remote Safety I O Slaves with safety func tions With a DeviceNet interface they support DeviceNet Safety Slave function ality and they exchange Safety I O data with DeviceNet Safety Masters The DST1 XD0808SL 1 supports logic operations enabling local outputs to be directly controlled without the need for Safety Controller logic CS C series PLCs 18 CS1 CJ 1 CPU Units CJ 2 CPU Units These OMRON PLCs are for Standard Control only Mounting a CS C series DeviceNet Unit or CS C series EtherNet IP Unit enables Standard 1 0 Communications or message communications with the NE 2A series Controller The CJ 2 CPU Units support programming with variabl
13. Single Beam Safety Sensor Used for one input from a Single beam Safety Sensor Noncontact S witch D40A 1 Used for two inputs from a non contact switch Safety Mat 1 Used for two inputs from a safety mat Standard SW Used for an input from a general purpose switch Not Use The input is not used 1 This device type can be selected only when the bit number is an even number 2 This device type can be selected only when the bit number is an even number and only when four or more bits are remaining 9 Make the settings for the other input bits 10 Click the Edit Comment Button to edit the comments for input bits in the Edit I O Comments Dialog Box 339 Setting the I O Configuration from the Wizard Section 14 3 Edit 1 0 Comments Slot Bit Mode Comment EStop 1 02 0 Je EStop 2 02 02 Reset 1 02 03 Feedback 340 The comments set in this dialog box are used as I O tags in the Logic Ed itor 11 Edit the comments for the input bits and then click the OK Button 12 Click the Next Button in the Safety I O Wizard Input Bits Dialog Box A dialog box showing the list of settings configured with the wizard will be displayed Safety 1 0 Wizard Configuration Result 5 G Finish Edit Edit Confirm Output Bits Input Bits Configuration If you need to change the configuration please use parameter edit in the device menu Input Output No Name Test Source Dis
14. a DeviceNet 6 DeviceNet 1 DeviceNet 2 DeviceNet 4 DeviceNet 5 ld Toys iE l M ae Safety Standard S 7 Controller Slaves ye Safety Slaves Selecting Networks The following table shows the special features and the restrictions for each of the communications methods Select the optimum network based on considerations such as the communi cations distance between the Controllers and Standard PLCs or between two Controllers and the amount of data that is to be sent and received EtherNet IP DeviceNet Connection configu Star configuration The multi drop and T branch connections can be combined for ration main lines and branch lines Baud rate 100 or 10 Mbps 500 250 or 125 kbps Communications dis 100 m Baud rate Network length Branch Totalbranch tance With switching hubs there is no length length limit on the number of cascade 500 kbps 100 m max 6 m max 39 m max connections 100 m max 250 kbps 250 m max 6 m max 78 m max 100 m max 125 kbps 500 m max 6 m max 156 m max 100 m max The numbers in parentheses are for Thin Cable Nodes per network 256 max 64 max maximum number that can be set by the Network Configurator 21 Safety Control System Configuration Section 2 2 EtherNet IP DeviceNet Safety Masters 128 connections Unit 64 connections Unit 32 bytes connection 16 bytes connection Maximum total of 160 CIP Safety Master
15. Communication Error Sending Error Configuration Error Node Address duplicated Bus Off occurred Unit Memory Error Slave Function Status Area The Slave Function Status Area provides detailed information on the Slave condition or status The status of the Slave is indicated by the following status icons Gray icon with light blue border Remote I O communications are not operat ing Remote I O communications are operating An error occurred Blue icon Red icon Select the Node ID of the device whose status is to be viewed from the Select Node ID Field The Slave status of the selected device will be displayed The check boxes in the Slave Function Status Area will be selected to show the status of the Slave The items displayed in the Slave Function Status Area are described below D Remote I O Communication Indicates that remote I O communications are operat Running ing Remote I O Communication Indicates that a timeout has occurred in remote I O Error communications with a Slave for which remote 1 0 communications were in progress 481 Monitoring DeviceNet Units Section 18 3 Description Invalid Connection Path Indicates that an attempt to set up a connection path registered in the scan list has failed Invalid I O Size Indicates that the I O size registered in the scan list does not match the I O size of the Slave Unsupported Connection
16. Dimensions and weights are nominal and are not to be used for manufacturing purposes even when tolerances are shown PERFORMANCE DATA Performance data given in this manual is provided as a guide for the user in determining suitability and does not constitute a warranty It may represent the result of OMRON s test conditions and the users must correlate it to actual application requirements Actual performance is subject to the OMRON Warranty and Limitations of Liability ERRORS AND OMISSIONS The information in this manual has been carefully checked and is believed to be accurate however no responsibility is assumed for clerical typographical or proofreading errors or omissions xvii xviii NN WN FE PRECAUTIONS Intend d Audience s tob oia het eA te Sg el ead ee NEL AUR XX General Precautions ss eson s ced FA eA hg Hea De ae eS XX Safety Precautions os erisso es oes beeen dias Ses o48e be SEY bole xxii Precautions for Safe Use 0 eee nee E xxiii Regulations and Standards 0 0 eee eee ee xxvi Conformance to EC Directives 0 00 0 eee nee xxvi 6 1 Applicable Directives sssi 0 00 0 2c xxvi 6 2 CONCEPIS i see ede he N EE ON OE ER eee Bae xxvi 6 3 Conformance to EC Directives 20 00 ee xxvii xix Intended Audience 1 2 XX Intended Audience This manual is intended for the following personnel who must have knowl edge of electrical systems an elec
17. Standard Connections Network Bandwidth Best Average of Cycle Time 125K Bit s Use Rate 250K Bit s 500K Bit s Calculate Section 13 3 3 Set the Network Bandwidth Use Rate for Safety Connections and Stan dard Connections e Using Only Safety I O Communications Input the network bandwidth used by the Safety Connections as 90 or less and input 0 for the network bandwidth used by Standard Con nections e Using Both Safety and Standard I O Communications Input the total network bandwidth used for Safety Connections and Standard Connections as 90 or less e g 40 for Safety Connec tions and 30 for Standard Connections Safety and Standard O Communications will use the bandwidth based on the rates specified here Note Keep 10 or more of the network bandwidth available for establishing con nections and for explicit message communications with the Network Configu rator whether using only Safety I O Communications or using both Safety I O and Standard I O Communications Even if 10 or more is available how ever safety or Standard Communications might time out due to the Network Configurator operation e g monitoring or other operations that create a load on the network or if the user application uses explicit message communica tions If timeouts occur reduce the network bandwidth usage rate i e increase the unused bandwidth 4 Click the Calculate Button The best average of EPI o
18. oK Cancel 247 DeviceNet Network Settings Section 11 3 2 Change the node address and click the OK Button Set the node address so that it matches the rotary switches on the De viceNet Unit An error message will be displayed if an attempt is made to set a node ad dress that is being used by another device Network Configurator EA Specified 10 already used e Co Changing the Device Name You can change the name of a device When you add a device from the Device List the name that is displayed will be the name from the Device List Procedure 1 2 3 1 Selectthe device and then select Change Device Comment from the De vice Menu You can also right click the device and select Change Device Comment The Change Device Comment Dialog Box will be displayed Change Device Comment NE24 DNS21 OK Cancel 2 Entera device name and click the OK Button Note Upto 32 characters can used for the device name Deleting a Device Itis possible to delete a device from the virtual network Procedure 1 2 3 1 Selectthe device and select Delete from the Edit Menu You can also select the device and click the Delete Button on the toolbar Or right click the device and select Delete A dialog box will be displayed to confirm the deletion Network Configurator 1 Selected Devices will be deleted e OK Yes No 2 Press the Yes Button to delete the device 248 Communicat
19. Offline The some of the commands from the Device Menu and Edit Menu can be dis played by right clicking in the Network Configuration Pane Online Create Creates a new EDS file and adds a device to the Hardware List Delete Deletes a device from the Hardware List The installed EDS file is also deleted Save As Names and saves the EDS file of a device on the Hardware List Find Searches for a specified EDS file from the Hardware List Add to Network 226 Adds a device on the Hardware List to the virtual network Main Window and Menus Section 9 6 Menu commands Description Toolbar Offline icon Property Displays the properties of an EDS file Create EDS Index File Recreates the EDS index file If the devices are not correctly dis played in the Hardware List Pane restart the Network Configu rator Version 3 30 or higher Note The EDS File Menu can be displayed by right clicking in the Hardware List Pane Note Start the Network Configurator as the system administrator to install create or delete EDS files or create EDS index files Refer to 9 4 1 Starting and Exit ing the Network Configurator On Window 2000 or XP these operations are not possible unless you are logged on with administrator rights On Windows Vista or 7 if the above operations are preformed when the Net work Configurator is started without administrator rights
20. gt Browse my computer for driver software Locate and install driver software manually Cancel 204 Installing the USB Driver Section 9 3 4 Under Search for driver software in this location click the Browse Button select the SafetyDrivers USB folder in the folder in which the Network Configurator was installed or the drivers USB folder in the Network Con figurator Master Disk CD ROM and the click the Next Button f x r o L Update Driver Softwares NELA USB Port Browse for driver software on your computer Search for driver software in this location ogram Files OMRON Network Configurator v3 SafetyDrivers USE MB Browse Vl Include subfolders gt Let me pick from a list of device drivers on my computer This list will show installed driver software compatible with the device and all driver software in the same category as the device cones 5 The Windows Security Dialog Box will be displayed Click the Install But ton m 1 Windows Security Would you like to install this device software Name CDM Driver Package I Publisher Omron Corporation Always trust software from Omron Corporation Don t Install WW You should only install driver software from publishers you trust How can I decide which device software is safe to install 6 When the driver installation is completed normally the fol
21. y Allocate I O data to variables Refer to 15 5 SEE Check the programs Refer to 15 8 t Exit the Logic Editor Refer to 15 2 i Exit the Network Configurator Saving projects Refer to 9 5 352 Starting and Exiting the Logic Editor Section 15 2 15 2 Starting and Exiting the Logic Editor With the NEA2 series Controller programs are created by using the Logic Editor The Logic Editor is started from the Network Configurator Starting the Logic Editor Procedure 1 2 3 1 Exiting the Logic Editor Double click NE2A SCPU01 in the Network Configurator or select the NE2A SCPU0O1 and then select Parameter Edit from the Device Menu The Edit Device Parameters Window will be displayed Edit Device Parameters Safety Connections Safety Slave 120 Slave 1 0 DeviceNet Target 1 0 EtherNet IP KO Unit Communication Unit Mode Cycle Time ExtendMode Logic i Edit Click the Logic Tab and then click the Edit Button The Logic Editor will start Exit the Logic Editor Procedure 1 2 3 1 Select Exit from the File Menu If changes were made butnot saved a message box will be displayed ask ing whether you want to save the changes cg dd The project has been changed Yes Na Cancel Click the Yes Button to save the project Click the No Button to not save the project The display will return to the Edit De
22. 400 byte 16 8 5 3 Checking the This example shows how to calculate the Tag Data Link delay when the fol lowing Tag Data Link connection settings have been made In this case 17 EtherNet IP Units are being used and one Unit is receiving 256 bytes of data from each of the other Units at a packet interval RPI of 5 ms Thus 16 Tag Data Link connections are used The length of the cables between the Units is 50 m for all connections Send processing delay 15 of 5 ms 0 75 ms Cable delay 545 ns x 50 100 272 5 ns Switching hub delay 0 4 ms Receive processing delay 1 16 x 0 043 1 688 ms Tag Data Link delay 0 75 ms 0 000272 5 ms 0 4 ms 1 688 ms 2 84 ms Standard NE2A series Standard NE2A series Controller PLC 1 Controller 2 PLC 3 17 400 byte Network Reaction Time The network reaction time can be calculated when the EPI is set in the Net work Configurator R efer to the reaction time for each safety connection to see how the network reaction time will function depending on the EPI settings for each Safety connection 189 Calculating Communications Response Performance Section 8 5 Edit Device Parameters Slave 1 0 DeviceNet Target 1 0 EtherNet IP 170 Unit Communication Unit _Mode Cycle Time Extend Mode Logic Safety Connections Memory Info Safety Target 1 0 Connections 12 160 tt E x Auto allocation Register Device List Product Name EPI Reactio Type Si
23. Connection Stop Mode The Safety I O Connection where the error occurred will be stopped e Automatic Recovery Mode Repeated attempts will be made to establish the Safety I O Connection again All other operations will be continued 528 Troubleshooting EtherNet IP Unit Errors Communications Unit Network Configurator Indi cators 7 segment display Error history MS NS Error Detail dA IP Target node address Error Detail 2102 01 IP address Saved Displayed message Safety I O Connection Timeout Section 19 4 Cause Recovery method Status after error A communications timeout occurred during Safety I O Com munications with a Slave Consider the following items els the Safety Slave IP address correct ls the Safety Slave configuration correct The recovery method depends on the setting for when an error occurs in Safety Communications Connection Stop Mode The Safety I O Connection where the error occurred will be stopped e Automatic Recovery Mode Repeated attempts will be made to establish the Safety I O Connection again All other operations will be continued L9 IP Target node address 03D5 02 IP address Tag Data Link Error A timeout occurred during Tag Data Link communications by the Target function Consider the following items ls the Originator operating properly ls the cable
24. No Name 02 00fe EStop 1 TO Mechani 1x5 01 00 Safety_Relay 1 02 01 e EStop 2 T1 Mechani 1x5 01 01 Safety_Relay 2 02 02 Reset 1 TO Mechani 01 02 EStopLamp 02 03 Feedback T1 Mechari 01 03 ResetLamp el Equiv c Comp m Mat P Pulse Test s Safety IP Test Pulse slSafetu STStandard lt Back I Finish J Cancel The following settings are displayed Test Source A pulse is output from the test output bit to diagnose the Safety Devices The pulse is output at different times from the output bits test output 0 and test output 1 Discrepancy Time For two inputs setin a Dual Channel Mode the time is moni tored from a change in the value of one input to a change in the value of the other input This is called the discrepancy time The meanings of symbols used for with I O bit number are described in the following table Input Mode Symbol Dual channel channel mode Symbol Not Used N Single Channel None Test pulse from test output P Dual Channel Equivalent e Setting the I O Configuration from the Wizard Input Mode Used as Safety Input Section 14 3 Dual channel channel mode Dual Channel Complementary Used as standard input Output Mode Not Used Dual channel channel mode Single Channel Safety Dual Channel Safety Pulse Test 13 Check the settings and then click the Finish Button This completes the setting of I O bits
25. Refer to 11 5 Using the NE2A series Controller as a Safety Slave 11 7 Using an NE2A series Controller as a Standard Slave and 12 7 Using an NE2A series Controller as a Standard Slave for details on allocating variables Edit Safety Slave 1 0 Name Input ssembly1 Data E lt Sw Variable DUMMY BYTE Displayed for data that can be allocated New Variable Offset Type Allocated to I O assembly If the usage type is set to internal i e internal variable it cannot be used for Slave I O The setting to use it as Slave I O or Target I O will not be enabled A comment can be set for each bit if the data type is BYTE WORD or DWORD 1 Click the Edit Bit Comment Button The Edit Bit Comment Dialog Box will be displayed Creating Variables Section 15 5 Output Input 00 0 02 03 04 05 06 oF OK Cancel 2 Enter a comment for each bit and press the Enter Key 3 Clicking the OK Button will set the bit comment Note Up to 48 characters can be used for the bit comment 48 byte max The characters that can be input are the same as those that can be input for variables Refer to Variable Specifications on page 80 Creating Variables from the I O Tag List If the remote I O connection settings and local I O settings are already set variables can be automatically created from the actual I O tag list In this case the variable name will be generated from the I O comment name
26. Reference Programming with variables Variables are used to assign I O status and other data to variables for use in programming It enables programming without any need to pay attention to local I O allocations or to remote I O connection settings and allocations Once a program has been created it does not have to be changed when the sys tem configuration is changed Programming with variables also improves program reusability SECTION 4 Naming Networks and NE2A series CPU Units can be named and names can also be given to each I O terminal on I O Units These names can then be displayed in the I O list in the Program Editor Programming with function blocks Function blocks are supported such as logic functions AND OR etc emergency stop pushbutton monitoring and safety door monitoring User defined function blocks New function blocks can be defined by combining function blocks sup plied for the NE2A series Controller Library management of pro gram components The Controller has a function that lets you manage program components as library objects Designing can be made more efficient by reusing pro gram components from the library User program ID Any 4 digit number can be registered as the ID of a user program Then the program can be known by displaying the registered ID on the 7 seg ment display Program Execution and Testing Monitoring variables Watch Window M
27. Update device configuration Standard Connections Network Bandwidth Best Average of Cycle Time 125K Bits 45 ms Use Rate 250K Bit s 23 ms 500K Bits 12 ms Update device configuration Eae eee The Change Device Settings Dialog Box will be displayed 2 Select the baud rate to use and then click the OK Button With this procedure is possible to set the Standard I O Communications cycle time for the Standard Master on the target DeviceNet network Note Select Custom EPI Option in the User setup Area and set the Standard I O Communications cycle time to seta Standard I O Communications cycle time that is not automatically calculated If an NE2A DeviceNet Unit is used as the Standard Communications Master the Standard I O Communications cycle time of the NE2A DeviceNet Unit Standard Communications Master cannot be set to a value lower than the value automatically calculated by the NE2A DeviceNet Unit The Standard I O Communications cycle time for NE2A DeviceNet Units can be checked in the Edit Device Parameters Dialog Box of the NE2A DeviceNet Unit 318 Checking the Communications Response Performance Section 13 3 Update Device Configuration EJ Please select a baud rate that you would like to use Baud rate 125K Bits 45 ms g 23 ms 500K Bits 12 ms User setup O Custom EPI 10 ing Range 1 500ms Cancel The following message will be displayed in the Message Reporter Pane
28. Use DeviceNet compliant cables Communications power supply 24 VDC Power Supply Tap Trunk orT branch Tap line Ground to 100 Q or less M Trunkline M Trunk line T branch Branch line T branch tap T T branch connection M Multi drop connection Trunk line Branch line Use five line DeviceNet compliant cable DeviceNet Communications Specifications Connection methods Specifications Multidrop and T branch connections can be combined for trunk line and branch lines Baud rate 500 kbits s 250 kbits s or 125 kbits s Communications medium Special DeviceNet cable with 5 lines 2 communications lines 2 power lines 1 shield line Communications distance Baud rate Maximum network length Branch length Total length 500 kbits s 100 m max 100 m max 6 m max 39 m max 250 kbits s 250 m max 100 m max 6 m max 78 m max 125 kbits s 500 m max 100 m max 6 m max 156 m max The numbers in parentheses are the lengths when Thin Cable is used Communications power supply 11 to 25 VDC Connected nodes 64 nodes max The total number of Standard Devices and Safety Devices that can be connected to the same network is 64 This includes the Network Configurator if it is con nected Connected Slaves Note 63 units max One NE2A series Controller can function simultaneously
29. mm Bottom 15 Simm Bight 10 From Edge Header 10 mm Eooter mm m mm 2 Setthe distance from the edge of the paper and then click the OK Button The items displayed in the Page Setup Dialog Box are described in the fol lowing table Tab name Margins Top Sets the size of the upper margin of the paper Bottom Sets the size of the lower margin of the paper Right Sets the size of the right margin of the paper Left Sets the size of the left margin of the paper Header Sets the print position of the header Footer Sets the print position of the footer Title Set ting Lines Sets the number of title lines Position Sets the display position of the titles Line Sets the title line Edit Line Line Style Sets the style of the title line Edit Line Title Sets the title for each column Edit Line Contents Sets the contents for each column title Font Font Name Sets the font name to use for the title Font Style Sets the style of the title Font Size Sets the font size to use for the title Font Character Set Sets the language to use for the title Left Sets the items to be printed in the left header Center Sets the items to be printed in the center header Right Sets the items to be printed in the right header Left Sets the items to be printed in
30. Cancel I O tag names for NE1A series programs will be converted to variables names that are not assigned to I O when the I O tag names are imported to the NE 2A series Controller Importing NE1A series User defined Function Blocks User defined function blocks that were created with an NE1A series Control ler can be used as user defined function blocks for an NE2A series Controller The NE1A series user defined function block to import is exported using the Logic Editor of the NE1A series Controller A fbd file is created Refer to the DeviceNet Safety System Configuration Operation Manual Cat No Z905 Procedure for Importing to an NE2A series Controller 400 1 2 3 1 Select Import NE1A Function Block from the File Menu Creating and Reusing Program Objects Section 15 9 2 Selectthe NE1A series user defined function block file fod to be import ed in the Open File Dialog Box Note Ifa NE1A series user defined function block with a password is read into an NE 2A series Controller the password setting will be removed 401 Printing Section 15 10 15 10 Printing Programs can be printed The printer settings can be made and a print pre view can be viewed 15 10 1 Printing Use the following procedure to print the program Procedure 1 2 3 1 Select Print from the File Menu The Print Dialog Box will be displayed ME Variables Name f Properties CPU _ S DST M E User F
31. Door SW 1NC 1NO 1 Used for one NC and one NO contact input from a door switch DoorSW 1NC Used for one input from a door switch Limit SW 2NC 1 Used for two NC contact inputs from a limit switch Limit SW 1NC 1NO 1 Used for one NC and one NO contact input from a limit switch Limit SW 1 NC Used for one input from a limit switch Enable SW 2NO 1 Used for two inputs from an enabling switch Enable 2NO INC 1NC 2 Used for four inputs from an enabling switch Two Hand Switch 1 Used for two inputs from a two hand switch Other 2NC 1 Used for two NC contact inputs other than the above Other 2 NO 1 Used for two NO contact inputs other than the above Other 1INC 1NO 1 Used for one NC and one NO contact input other than the above Other INO 1NC 1 Used for one NO and one NC contact input other than the above Other 1 NC Single Contact Used for a contact input other than the above SLC 2 outputs 1 Used for two inputs from a light curtain SLC 1 output Used for one input from a light curtain Other PNP 2 outputs 1 Used for two inputs from a semiconductor Other PNP 1 output Used for one input from a semiconductor Reset SW Used for input from reset switch Feed back EDM Input Used for EDM feedback signal Mechanical Contact Used for one input from a mechanical contact
32. EN 60947 5 1 Door interlocking switch or Use approved devices with a direct opening mechanism compliant with IEC limit switch EN 60947 5 1 and capable of switching micro loads of 4 mA at 24 VDC Safety sensor Use approved devices compliant with the relevant product standards regula tions and rules in the country where they are used Relay with forcibly guided Use approved devices with forcibly guided contacts compliant with EN contacts 50205 For feedback signals use devices with contacts capable of switching micro loads of 4 mA at 24 VDC Contactor Use contactors with a forcibly guided mechanism and monitor the auxiliary NC contact to detect contactor failures For feedback signals use devices with contacts capable of switching micro loads of 4 mA at 24 VDC Other devices Evaluate whether devices used are appropriate to satisfy the requirements of the safety category level 4 Precautions for Safe Use m Handling with Care Do not drop the NE2A series Controller or subject it to excessive vibration or mechanical shock The NE2A series Controller may be damaged and may not function properly alnstallation and Storage Environment Do not use or store the NE2A series Controller in any of the following loca tions e Locations subject to direct sunlight e Locations subject to temperatures or humidity outside the range specified in the specifications e Locations subject to condensation as the result of severe change
33. Error history Displayed message MS Error NS Detail d6 Target node address Error Saved Detail 0344 Verification errors Stan 02 Slave node dard 1 0 address Section 19 3 Cause Recovery method Status after error The Slave vendor ID does not match with the vendor ID registered in the scan list Check that the communications target Slave is set correctly and that the vendor ID registered in the scan list is correct Correct the settings if necessary Repeated attempts will be made to establish the Standard I O Connection again Other operations will be continued d6 Target node address 0344 Verification errors Stan 03 Slave node dard 1 0 address The Slave device type does not match what is regis tered in the scan list Check that the communications Target Slave is set correctly and that the Slave device type registered in the scan list is also correct Correct the settings if necessary Repeated attempts will be made to establish the Standard I O Connection again Other operations will be continued d6 Target node address 0344 Verification errors Stan 04 Slave node dard 1 0 address The Slave product code does not match what is reg istered in the scan list Check that the communications Target Slave is set correctly and that the Slave product code registered in the scan list is also correct Correct the settings if necessary Repe
34. IMPORTANT The NE2A series Controllers must not be connected to open transmission systems 5 6 2 Setting the Safety Connections Set the Safety Connections to perform Safety I O Communications between the Safety Master and Safety Slaves Set the connections for EtherNet IP Safety Communications in the same way as for DeviceNet Safety Communi cations 111 EtherNet IP Safety Communications Setting the Connection Information for the Safety Master 112 Safety Slave Set the connections Input Area in I O Memory Assembly data A Assembly data B Output Area in 1 0 Memory Section 5 6 Safety Master Input Area in I O Memory Assembly data A Output Area in I O Memory Assembly datac lt Assembly data D Assembly data C Refer to 5 4 2 Setting Safety Connections for information on the settings EtherNet IP Standard Communications Section 5 7 5 7 EtherNet IP Standard Communications 5 7 1 Outline of EtherNet IP Tag Data Link Communications Tag Data Link communications Targets only can be used by mounting an EtherNet IP Unit on a NE2A series Controller Data can be shared between devices i e Controllers that support Tag Data Links EtherNet IP Tag Data Links can be used mainly in the following applications e Data communications between Controllers that support EtherNet IP Tag Data Links and NE 2A series Controllers Data communications bet
35. Installing the USB Driver Section 9 3 9 3 Installing the USB Driver 9 3 1 Installing the USB Driver You must install the USB driver to go online with the NE1A series NEOA series or NE2A series Controller via USB Preparing for Installation Check the following items before beginning with the installation E Connection to a Safety Network Controller Turn ON the power supply to the Safety Network Controller NE1A NEOA or NE2A and then use a USB cable to connect the USB port on the Safety Net work Controller to the USB port on a computer on which the Network Configu rator has already been installed E Windows Environment Make sure that you are logged onto the computer as a user with administrator rights Installing on Windows XP Operating Procedure 1 2 3 1 The computer will automatically detect the Safety Network Controller when the cable is connected and display a message saying that new hardware has been detected The Found New Hardware Wizard will be displayed Found New Hardware Wizard Welcome to the Found New Hardware Wizard Windows will search for current and updated software by looking on your computer on the hardware installation CD or on the Windows Update Web site with your permission Read our privacy policy Can Windows connect to Windows Update to search for software O Yes this time only O Yes now and every time connect a device Oio not this time Click Next
36. NE2A Series Safety Network Controller OPERATION MANUAL OMRON NE 2A Series Safety Network Controller Operation Manual Revised May 2011 Notice OMRON products are manufactured for use according to proper procedures by a qualified operator and only for the purposes described in this manual The following conventions are used to indicate and classify precautions in this manual Always heed the information provided with them Failure to heed precautions can result in injury to people or damage to property Z N WARNING Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which if not avoided will result in minor or moderate injury or may result in serious injury or death Additionally there may be signifi cant property damage Z Caution Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which if not avoided may result in minor or moderate injury or property damage SO Indicates general prohibitions for which there is no specific symbol CD Indicates general mandatory actions for which there is no specific symbol OMRON Product References All OMRON products are capitalized in this manual The word Unit is also capitalized when it refers to an OMRON product regardless of whether it appears in the proper name of the product The abbreviation PLC means Programmable Controller PC is used however in some P rogram ming Device displays to mean P rogrammable Controller Visual Aids The following
37. Parameter Wizard Displays the network properties The network name and Safety Network number can be set This function can also get network numbers from actual net works when the Network Configurator is online Description Configures the device parameters in a wizard format This function is not supported by all devices Toolbar icon Offline Online Edit Edits the device parameters Open Reads the parameters from the device parameter file Save As Saves the device parameters to a file Upload Uploads the device parameters from a device in the net work Download Downloads the device parameters to a device in the net work Verify Verifies the device and the device parameters in the net work Lock Locks the configuration of a device in the network Unlock Unlocks the locked configuration of a device in the net work Monitor Monitors the parameters and status of a device in the network Not all devices support this function Reset Resets a device in the network 225 Main Window and Menus Menu commands Idle Change Mode Description Changes the status of a device in the network Not all devices support this function Toolbar icon Section 9 6 Execute Changes the status of a device in the network Not all devices support this function Change Password Changes the password of a de
38. Restores all configuration information stored in the then restart device nonvolatile memory to the default settings and then restarts Restore default settings Restores all configuration information stored in the except for specified variables device nonvolatile memory to the default settings and then restart except for specified information and then restarts The following information can be specified TUNID Device password CFUNID OCPUNID Safety Devices save the following configuration information in their internal non volatile memory Once this information is set it is not cleared by cycling the power To clear this information perform the procedure for restoring the default settings and restarting For details on this procedure refer to 17 8 Resetting Devices Default Set when Description setting Device parameter Notcon Parameters are Parameters and programs set by figured downloaded the user TUNID Not set First time The identifier of the local node in Target Unique Net parameters are the Safety Network as well as work Identifier downloaded the combined values of the net work number and node address Device password No pass Password is Device password word changed CFUNID Not set First time UNID of the configuration source Configuration Own parameters are ing UNID downloaded OCPUNID Not set Start of first UNID of the Safety Master that Output Connection safety communi opens a Safety Output
39. Troubleshooting DeviceNet Unit Errors Communications Unit Network Configurator Indi cators 7 segment display Error history MS NS Error Detail Al Target node address Error Detail 2100 00 Safety Slave node address Saved Displayed message Part of the Sys tem stopped due to Safety 1 0 Communi cations error Section 19 3 Cause Recovery method Status after error The Safety Master connection supported by the DeviceNet Unit was disconnected while part of the System was stopped due to a Safety I O Communi cations error Establish communications from the Network Config urator again The Safety I O Connection where the error occurred will remain stopped without establishing the connec tion again Any other operations will be continued d5 Target node address 0344 01 Slave node address Verification errors Stan dard I O No Standard Slaves exist in the network when the Standard Master connection is established Consider the following items eIs the Standard Slave power supply OFF ls the Standard Slave node address correct Are the baud rates for the Standard Master and Standard Slaves on the network the same Are the cable lengths branch main lines suitable Are any cables disconnected or loose els there a terminator at each end of the main line els there a lot of noise Repeated attempts will be made to establish the Standar
40. adding an input assembly 261 adding an output assembly 262 adding connections 251 adding devices to a network 246 289 adding objects to the library 397 adjusting EPI 185 adjusting RPI 185 Advanced Connection Settings Dialog Box 256 Advanced Setup Button 256 alarm 472 allowed Unit communications bandwidth 186 alternate DNS server 99 arranging function blocks 378 arranging text boxes 383 assembly data 121 Auto Allocation 251 automatic connection setting 272 automatic operation 453 automatic operation at startup 453 automatic recovery 136 automatic refreshing of device status display 471 automatically registering and unregistering connections 254 Backplane 232 284 bandwidth 186 bandwidth usage 321 bandwidth use rate 319 baud rate 99 baud rate DIP switch 48 Bit strobe 109 BOOTP 288 BOOTP client 98 boots 419 Build 389 C Calculate EPI Button 313 Calculate EPI Dialog Box 313 318 calculated PDF values 545 calculated PFH values 545 calculating communications response performance 183 calculating response performance 183 calculating system performance 170 centralized control 22 Change Device Comment 234 248 290 Change Device Settings Dialog Box 318 Change IP Address 290 Change Mode 445 changing device addresses 247 289 changing I O assemblies 262 changing the communications cycle time for Standard I O Communications 318 changing the connect
41. address node address ls the Master functioning properly Are baud rates for the Standard Master and Stan dard Slaves on the network the same Are the cable lengths branch main lines suitable Are any cables disconnected or loose ls there a terminator at each end of the main line els there a lot of noise An error will be returned for communications requests to the Master with the error Data output to the CPU Unit i e data from the Mas ter is cleared Communications can be restarted by reconnecting to the Master LA 2102 Safety I O Con A communications timeout occurred during Safety nection Time 1 O Communications with the Master device Target node 01 Safety out Consider the following items address Master node eIs the Safety Master node address correct address Is the Safety Master configuration data correct The recovery method depends on the setting for when an error occurs in Safety Communications Connection Stop Mode The Safety I O Connection where the error occurred will be stopped e Automatic Recovery Mode Repeated attempts will be made to establish the Safety I O Connection again All other operations will be continued Note Errors occurring during I O communications result in the indicator flashing red In any other situation the indicator is OFF 518 Troubleshooting DeviceNet Unit Errors Section 19 3 Errors Related to Explicit Messag
42. ii Designing the Safety Standard Control Interfaces e Design the safety stop and safety start signals e Design the information for display and monitoring e Determine the assembly data and connections D 2 2 3 2 2 4 5 8 Sections 11 and 12 j Designing the Response Performance e Verify the network bandwidth e Verify the safety response performance reaction time e Verify the response performance in standard communications D 2 3 Sections 8 and 13 y y lt Electrical Design D Operation Mana ement Design gt C Program Design D 11 Preparations for Operation 12 Z Program Design gt y Designing Software Specifications e Design the interlock signals e Configure the system J 2 4 1 4 3 Section 15 4 Programming e Define the variables e Divide up the functions and create the program q9 2 4 2 4 3 Section 15 Debugging e Check the consistency of variables from when programs were integrated e Check the cycle execution time m 4 5 y C Assembly D Section 1 4 Preparations for Operation Section 1 4 lt Electrical Design D Designing I O e Use the Wizard to design the local I O and Slave 1 0 q Section 14 Designing Circuits for Interfacing with Safety Devices e Design the wiring for I O Units and network Slaves cy Section 6 Designing Wiring e Design t
43. tions are executed on the same network Tag Data Links can be sent at higher priority to prevent problems such as transmission delays due to message communications traffic and packet losses due to buffer overflow Settings must be made in the switching hub to enable this function and give higher priority to safety packets and Tag Data Link packets 5 10 3 Precautions When Selecting a Switching Hub The functionality supported by the switching hub may affect Tag Data Link transmission delays and the configuration Select a switching hub based on the kind of communications that will be performed 137 Selecting the Ethernet Switching Hub Section 5 10 Selecting the Switching Hub Based on the Type of Network Communications Executing Safety Communications or Tag Data Links We recommend using an L2 switching hub without multicast filtering or an L2 switching hub with multicast filtering Using a switching hub with the multicast filtering prevents increased traffic due to unnecessary multicast packets so the Safety Communications and Tag Data Links can operate at higher speed If either of the following conditions exists the amount of traffic will be the same for both kinds of switching hubs with or without multicast filtering e The Safety Communications and Tag Data Links are set to share the same data with all nodes in the network The multicast packets are trans ferred to all nodes in the network just like broadcasting e The safet
44. y Closing the Logic Editor Refer to 15 2 Registering DeviceNet Units to the CPU Unit Section 11 2 11 2 Registering DeviceNet Units to the CPU Unit This section describes the procedure for registering DeviceNet Units to an NE2A series CPU Units to build a DeviceNet network 11 2 1 Associating the CPU Unit and DeviceNet Units An NE2A series CPU Unit does not have a communications port for DeviceNet or EtherNet IP communications To perform DeviceNet or EtherNet IP communications mount an NE2A DNS21 DeviceNet Unit or an NE2A ENS21 EtherNet IP To associate these Communications Units with a CPU Unit register them to the NE 2A series Backplane of the CPU Unit The following figure shows display examples of the Unit configuration in the Network Configurator a amp O Ne2A_Backplane_1 DeviceNet_1 C EtherNet IP_1 Ss a 0 1 NE24 ENS21 T NE24 DNS21 T a E e EtherNet IP m n a a a a a a a a a T a amp a G as 3 e i 5 NE2A_Backplane_1 DeviceNet1 EtherNet IP_1 x NE24_Backplane_1 DeviceNet_1 EtherNet IP_1 192 168 250 1 NEZA DNS21 NE2A ENS21 T e atl amp Registering DeviceNet Units Register the NE2A DNS21 DeviceNet Unit to the NE2A series Backplane Procedure 1 2 3 1 Double click NE2A DNS217 in the Hardware List Pane You can also drag NE2A DNS21 from the Hardware List Pane and drop it in the Network Con figuration Pane
45. 0003 Arrangement information for programs Download the parameters to the NE2A series Controller again Replace the CPU Unit if the error recurs Operation continues with the default values for the applicable configuration data Non volatile A Unit ON time error occurred or the memory area for saving Memory the Unit ON time cannot be used Error Restart the CPU Unit Replace the CPU Unit if the error recurs Operation continues with 0 as the Unit ON time 504 Troubleshooting CPU Unit Errors CPU Unit Network Configurator Section 19 2 Cause Indi cator 7 segment display Error history Displayed message MS Error Detail Error Detail Saved Tem porary Non volatile Memory Error Recovery method Status after error None of the areas for saving the error history can be used Restart the CPU Unit Replace the CPU Unit if the error recurs Only the error history data in RAM is updated and operation continues This error is saved only to RAM Non volatile Memory Error None of the areas for saving the operating history can be used Restart the CPU Unit Replace the CPU Unit if the error recurs Only the operating history data in RAM is updated and oper ation continues Non volatile Memory Error An error was detected in the maintenance information Restart the CPU Unit Replace the CPU Unit if the
46. 11 4 1 Registering Safety Slaves 0 0 00 00 2 eee 249 11 4 2 Setting Safety Connection Parameters 254 11 4 3 Convenient Functions for Editing Connections 256 11 4 4 Stopping or Restarting Communications after an Error 258 11 5 Using the NE2A series Controller as a Safety Slave 259 11 5 1 Registering I O Assemblies for Safety Slaves 259 11 5 2 Setting Assembly Data 0 0 0 0 02 263 11 5 3 Registering I O Assemblies from the Logic Editor 267 11 6 Communications between the NE2A series Controller and Standard Slaves 269 11 6 1 Registering Standard Slaves 0 00 000000 269 11 6 2 Setting Standard Connections 000 271 11 7 Using an NE2A series Controller as a Standard Slave 273 11 7 1 Registering I O Assemblies for Standard Slaves 273 11 7 2 Setting Assembly Data 0 0 0 0 eee eee 276 11 7 3 Registering from the Logic Editor 00 277 11 7 4 Setting Slave Input Data in IDLE Mode 277 11 8 Communications between an NE2A series Controller and a Standard Master 278 239 DeviceNet Network Setting Procedure Section 11 1 11 1 DeviceNet Network Setting Procedure This section describes how to build and set a DeviceNet network to perform DeviceNet communications With NE2A series Controllers a
47. 15 9 1 Creating User defined Function Blocks 394 15 9 2 Creating Program Objects 00 0 0 eee eee 397 15 9 3 Reusing Programming 0 0 ee eee 398 15 9 4 Importing NE1A series Programs 0 2000 400 T5 JOPRNtN Gs oo est whi SAN RE BAS a BAAS eek OS Si ase ee eA ules 402 15 102 Printing coe Qos era ee be Ga ee eet he 402 1521022 Print Previews ses gas k BARR 4 RONG SES MARE TERS 403 15 10 3 Page Setup 2 6 2 d4 h Sonne Sab teas Oo Rs Leas 404 15 10 4 Printer Settings 0 0 cee ee eee ee 404 351 Overall Programming Procedure Section 15 1 15 1 Overall Programming Procedure This section describes the overall procedure for creating safety control logic using the Logic Editor Overall Programming Procedure The following diagram shows the steps that are necessary to program an NE 2A series Controller Start the Network Configurator Read the project Refer to 9 4 y Start the Logic Editor from the Network Configurator Refer to 15 2 y Create the program project Refer to 15 4 y Create the Variables e Create the input output and internal variables e Set the Slave I O variables Refer to 15 5 t Create the programs Arrange variables Arrange function blocks Connect variables and function blocks Refer to 15 6and 15 7 y Is the I O data set in the variables
48. 154 Edit All Connections Dialog Box 256 Edit Connection Dialog Box 251 253 254 Edit Device Parameters Dialog Box 249 260 273 Edit I O Comments Dialog Box 339 Edit Local Input Terminal Dialog Box 347 Edit Local Output Terminal Dialog Box 343 edit menu 223 Edit Safety Target I O Dialog Box 263 Edit Target I O EtherNet IP Dialog Box 301 editing all connections 256 editing bit comments 266 304 368 editing connections 253 EDS file menu 226 End Cover 41 End Unit 42 EPI 105 189 255 313 EPI calculation 184 error category 496 error codes 495 error connection 136 error detection during self diagnosis 150 154 Error Device List Dialog Box 435 error handling 150 154 Error History Tab 484 487 error latch time 151 155 error status 125 126 errors during downloading 435 Ethernet connector 55 Ethernet I F 428 Ethernet Information Tab 489 Ethernet Switching Hub 101 137 Ethernet switching hub functions 187 EtherNet Unit errors 522 Ethernet wiring 419 EtherNet IP communications 97 EtherNet IP network setting procedure 282 EtherNet IP Safety Communications 111 EtherNet IP Safety Unit 51 EtherNet IP Standard Communications 113 execution delay 75 Expected Packet Interval 105 exporting 83 exporting variables 371 Extend Mode 236 Extend Mode Tab 456 F Fault Present 126 file menu 222 finding a variable 373 Force Mode 71 466 force sett
49. 192 168 250 1 New Configuration TCP IP Configuration Get the IP address via BOOTP server Not use DNS Use the following IP address O Use DNS IPAddress 192 168 250 Subnet Mask 255 255 255 Default Gateway 9 0 0 Set to the Device Speed amp Ouplex Speed amp Duplex Auto Set ta the Device Reset the Device Get from the Device i 287 EtherNet IP Network Settings Section 12 3 Note Note 6 Setthe presentIP address of the EtherNet IP Unitin the Target IP Address Field IP address 192 168 250 Host ID set on IP address setting switches 7 Select the Use the following IP address Option and then set the new IP address subnet mask and default gateway Set the host ID to the value set on the IP address setting switches 8 Click the Set to the Device Button in the New Configuration Area to down load the settings to the EtherNet IP Unit 1 If the node address IP address is not set correctly a connection may be made with an unintended device and incorrect device parameters may be set Therefore check the connection destination device before down loading the settings 2 NE2A series Controllers do not support DNS Always select Do not use DNS in the TCP IP settings 9 Ifanew IP address is set the EtherNet IP Unit will be restarted and the set IP address will be enabled as long as Safety I O is not currently operating If Safety I O is operating confirm system s
50. 1ms Peripheral servicing Cycle Time 4s x0 1ms The instruction execution cycle time and peripheral servicing cycle time can be set within the ranges indicated below as long as they are above the values calculated by the Network Configurator e Instruction Execution Cycle Time From the value calculated by the Network Configurator to 50 ms 0 1 ms increments e Peripheral Servicing Cycle Time From the value calculated by the Network Configurator to 100 ms 0 1 ms increments 312 Checking the Communications Response Performance Section 13 3 13 3 Checking the Communications Response Performance The user must check the following performance items to verify the safety response performance reaction time and Standard I O Communications response performance e The network reaction time and Standard I O Communications cycle time in a DeviceNet network e The network reaction time and RPI requested packet interval in an EtherNet IP network 13 3 1 Checking the Communications Response Performance in a Procedure DeviceNet 1 2 3 When the network bandwidth used by Safety I O Communications and Stan dard I O Communications in a DeviceNet are set by the Network Configurator the best average EPI expected packet interval and best Standard I O Com munications cycle time are calculated In turn when the EPI is set the net work reaction time for Safety Connections is automatically calculated by the Network Configurato
51. 2 DeviceNet 1 DeviceNet 2 Mm ae Standard Slave Safety Slave 1 Connections Set for NE2A 1 DeviceNet 1 e Safety Master Input data and output data are set for four Slaves 8 con nections DeviceNet 2 e Safety Master Input data and output data are set for two Slaves 4 con nections e Standard Master Poll connection is set for one Slaves 1 connection EtherNet IP 1 e Safety Slave Input data and output data are set NE2A 2 Master 2 con nections e Tag Data Link Communications Target An input connection and output connection are set with CS CJ 1 2 connections Safety Connections Standard Connections As Master As Slave As Master As Slave DeviceNet 1 IN 4 OUT 4 DeviceNet 2 IN 2 OUT 2 As Master As Slave As Target EtherNet IP 1 0 IN 1 OUT 1 Input amp O utput Total for NE2A 12 160 2 32 1 Number of connections for CIP Safety Communications set number maxi mum number 94 Communications Specifications for NE2A series Controllers Section 5 2 2 Number of connections per Unit set number maximum number 5 2 2 DeviceNet Communications DeviceNet Network Configuration Connect terminating resistance to both ends of the trunk line Use DeviceNet compliant cables Trunk line The DeviceNet network configuration is shown in the following diagram Connect terminating resistance to both ends of the trunk line
52. 264 512000 15 5 1 Creating and Editing Variables Creating New Variables Procedure 1 2 3 366 If the I O configuration is set beforehand variables can be automatically cre ated from the I O tag list see details in following section or they can be auto matically created by inserting them into sections in the Program Window from the I O tag list Refer to 15 6 1 Arranging Input Variables for information on inserting variables into sections 1 Select Add from the Variable Menu The Add Variable Dialog Box will be displayed Creating Variables Section 15 5 x Name Usage Input Data Type BOOL v 0 Device v 170 Tag Use this variable as a target 1 0 or slave 1 0 OK Cancel 2 Specify the variable parameter values and click the OK Button The parameters are described in the following table fem SCS S S escrito SCSCSC Specifies the variable name Up to 48 characters 48 bytes max can be used Names are not case Sensitive if ASCII alphabetic characters are used The following characters cannot be used F amp N lt gt Also the following cannot be used The first character cannot be a number Reserved characters cannot be used Select from input output or internal Select from BOOL BYTE WORD or DWORD Assigns the Select the device of the I O tag to assign to the variable device s I O from the list tag to the vari D
53. Bito l Pl ase select a device type that you would like to connect with each bit Output BitO1 dP 2 Safety Relays with welding check BitO2 d P 2 Safety Relays w o welding check BitOs d P 1 Safety Relay with welding check Bito4 d P 1 Safety Relay w o welding check Bit05 d P Other 2 Safety Outputs BitO6 d P Other Safety Output BIO AIP Door SW Lock Other 2 Safety Outputs w o pulse Other Safety Output w o pulse Other Standard Output Edit Comment d Dual P Pulse Test s Satety 336 Setting the I O Configuration from the Wizard Section 14 3 Note The number of output bits depends on the number of Output Units that is set Number of bits Number of Output Units x 4 3 Inthe Safety I O Wizard Output Bits Dialog Box specify the type of device to connect to each output bit You can specify any of the following types 2 Safety Relays with welding check 1 Used to connect two safety relay outputs and perform a welding check 2 Safety Relays w o welding check 1 Used to connect two safety relay outputs but no perform a welding check 1 Safety Relay with welding check Used to connect one safety relay output and perform a welding check 1 Safety Relay w o welding check Used to connect one safety relay output but no perform a welding check Other 2 Safety Outputs 1 Used to connect two outputs without weld ing check Other Saf
54. Change the slot arrangement of the Communications Unit by pressing the Up Button or Down Button Edit Device Parameters _ Slave l 0 DeviceNet Target O EtherNetAP 1 0 Unit Safety Connections Safety Slave 0 Communication Unit Mode Cycle Time Extend Mode Logic Connection Error Mode Slot Unit Type Communication Eror Mode GEES Auto Recovery i 01 No1J NE24 DNS21 Auto Recoven 02 No 2 NE24 DNS21 Auto Recovery Slot numbers are assigned in order 00 01 etc to Communications Units from the right side of the Power Supply Unit 242 Registering DeviceNet Units to the CPU Unit Section 11 2 1 02 Slot 00 Associating an NE2A series Backplane with Other Networks Associations can be made to the NE2A series Backplane after creating the DeviceNet network O NE2A_Backplane_1 O Devicenet_t DeviceNet_1 S s 00 n NE2A SCPU01 aeae L NE2A_Backplane_ C DeviceNet _1 g yy n Association S 5 00 01 DST14D125L 1 DST1 4D125L 1 Procedure 1 2 3 1 Add a NE2A DNS21 to the NE2A series Backplane of the NE2A series Controller 2 Selectthe NE2A DNS21 3 Select Register to Routing Network from the Device Menu You can also right click the NE2A DNS21 and select Register to Routing Network from the menu The Select Network Dialog Box will be displayed Select Network Target Network Create new network Use the existing network DeviceNet_t Cancel
55. Compatibility NE1A compatible Routing Routing Allocates an input signal to multiple signals NE1A compatible 89 Function Blocks Section 4 6 90 SECTION 5 Communications This section describes communications for the NE2A series Safety Network Controllers 5 1 Designing the Network System Configuration 0 92 5 2 Communications Specifications for NE2A series Controllers 93 5 2 1 Connection Specifications 00 0 eee eee eee ee 93 5 2 2 DeviceNet Communications 0 0 0 0 eee eee 95 5 2 3 EtherNet IP Communications 0 00000 97 5 3 DeviceNet and EtherNet IP Routing 0 00 rrr 101 5 3 1 Routing between DeviceNet and EtherNet IP Networks 101 5 3 2 Routing with an Ethernet Switching Hub 101 5 4 DeviceNet Safety Communications 0 002 e eee 102 5 4 1 Outline of DeviceNet Safety Communications 102 5 4 2 Setting Safety Connections 0 000000 0 eee eee 102 5 5 DeviceNet Standard Communications 0 0 0 0 00008 107 5 5 1 Outline of DeviceNet Standard Communications 107 5 5 2 Standard Connection Settings 00 00 0000 00 108 5 6 EtherNet IP Safety Communications 0 0 0 0 00 002 e ee 111 5 6 1 Outline of EtherNet IP Safety Communications 111 5 6 2 Setting the Safety
56. Description Reserved I O communications error Indicates that an I O communications timeout has occurred between Slaves per forming I O communications Indicates that an I O communications error has not occurred or that this bit was turned OFF when the I O communications error was cleared Reserved I O communications Reserved Indicates that the Unit is performing I O communications with one or more Slaves The Unitis not performing I O communications with the Slave Description Reserved I O communications error Indicates that a communications error occurred on at least one Slave I O connec tion This bit will not turn ON if there is a network power supply error or Busoff or if the system goes offline Indicates that an I O communications error has not occurred or that this bit was turned OFF when the I O communications error was cleared Reserved I O communications Indicates that I O communications is being performed correctly with the Master on an I O connection This bit turns ON when any one connection is established and then remains ON unless an error occurs Indicates that I O communications is not being performed correctly with the Master on the I O connection including idle status 129 Remote I O Allocations 130 Section 5 8 10 DeviceNet Unit Registered Slave Table This table indicates the Slaves communicating with the DeviceNe
57. DeviceNet Hardware GS Vendor Omron Corporation Gy DeviceType 2 a AC Drives Ea Communications Adapter H a General Purpose Discrete 1 0 Eda Generic Device Eda Human Machine Interface E a Position Controller S a Safety Discrete 1 0 Device DST14D128L 41 E DST1 MD16SL 1 E DST1 MRDOaSL 1 0st1 xpoa08sL 1 my Safety Network Controller EtherNet IP Hardware NE2A_Backplane Hardware ra 3 S x Message Code x S amp GE X 2238 amp a O NE2A_Backplane_ DeviceNet_1 S 00 NE2A DNS21 K Z a Usage of Network Bandwidth of Safety Connections 125K Bit s 250K Bit s 0 ox 100 0 500K Bit s oz 100 0 oz 100 Description Changing Device Addresses Allocated node addresses can be changed When a device is added and unused node address from 0 to 63 will be automatically allocated in the order LiDeviceNet T Unknown OMRO TOOLBUS CJ2 CPUxx 115200Bit s Off line that the device is added Set the node addresses so that they match the rotary switches on the devices added Refer to the manual of the relevant device for information on how to set the rotary switches Procedure 1 2 3 1 Menu Select the device and select Change Node Address from the Device You can also right click the device and select Change Node Address The Change Node Address Dialog Box will be displayed Change Node Address New Node Address Setup Range 0 15
58. Function Block Displays the connected function block name Section Displays the section name in use Busy Displays whether a variable is being used Yes Busy No Unused Device Displays devices with I O allocations 1 0 Tag Displays I O tags with I O allocations Multiple items will be displayed if the same variable is used in multiple loca tions If you double click a variable in use the locations where it is in use will be dis played and the variable will flash Updating the Information If you click the Update Button the information of the Variable Reference Report Window will be updated to the most recent information 390 Checking Programs Section 15 8 Once the Variable Reference Report Window is displayed it will turn gray when there is a change in a variable Click the Update Button to update the display Displaying Unused Variables If you select the Hide busy variables Check Box only the unused variables will be listed in the window VAA fe an vel Ce fon ANU sys whol He 4a mL a gt Dopp ee as ud s au eH Variable telerener Remart Satt diet r Select this check box ide b u Bt oe TesTaot JQ TESTO BYTE ty 00 Boot on BOUL No Only unused variables will be displayed No og ps A ET Function Blocks 211609 Variaties 20 3072 Prox ae Soe 20512000 Deleting Unused Variables If you click the Remove all unused variables Button th
59. I O Unit con figuration mismatch The I O Unit configuration downloaded to the CPU Unit is dif ferent from the configuration of the actually installed Units Set the correct configuration and restart the CPU Unit Alter natively change and download the NE 2A series Controller parameters Operation is aborted Troubleshooting CPU Unit Errors CPU Unit Network Configurator Indi cator 7 segment display Error history MS Error Detail Error Detail Saved Displayed message Section 19 2 Cause Recovery method Status after error Flash EC 11 2003 Yes Communica The number of Communications Units in the configuration ing tions Unit downloaded to the CPU Unitis different from the actual num Red 0000 number mis ber of Units installed match Set the correct configuration and restart the CPU Unit Alter natively change and download the NE 2A series Controller parameters Operation is aborted Flash EC 12 2004 Yes Communica The Communications Unit configuration downloaded to the ing tions Unit CPU Unitis different from the configuration of the actually Red configura installed Unit Communica Communica tion mis tions unit tions unit tch Set the correct configuration and restart the CPU Unit Alter number number matn natively change and download the NE2A series Controller parameters Operation
60. InputAssembly0 TI I O assembly name E Sa Variable a Status a General Status a Eror Status 4 Safety Connection Normal Status List of data that can be registered 4 4 Safety Connection Error Status 5 Fault Present F a Remote Standard 1 0 ise Lars Unregister New Variable Registered data Name Offset Type Size Fl General Status 0000 WORD 2 Byte Total size Number of registrations Number of registered variables Use as default I O data Option Use as default 1 0 data Specify the connection Disabled for EtherNet IP tag data links OK Cancel I O Assembly Name The I O assembly name can be edited Note AnI O assembly name can contain up to if 48 characters The characters that can be input are the same as those that can be input for variables Refer to Variable Specifications on page 80 List of Data That Can Be Registered This list displays the data that can be registered to I O assemblies For details refer to 5 8 2 Configuring Assemblies Note Dummy data is used if the Master can transfer only an even number of bytes Registered Data List This list displays data that was registered from the list of data that can be reg istered The following information is displayed in the Registered data List Information displayed The name of the registered data is displayed The position in I O assembly data of allocated data is dis played The type of the registered data is displayed The size
61. NE2A USB port 3 Ethernet Ethernet NE2A series NE2A series NE2A series Controller Controller Controller 2 DeviceNet DeviceNet F Safety Slave SafetySlave Safety Slave Standard Safety Slave Safety Slave Controller The Network Configurator can be connected to the system shown above in any of the following three ways 1 Connecting to the USB port of an NE2A series CPU Unit 2 Connecting to a DeviceNet network by inserting a DeviceNet Interface Board in the computer 3 Connecting to an EtherNet IP network through the Ethernet port on the computer 17 2 1 Connecting to a Network through the USB Port 1 2 3 1 Turn ON the power supply to the NE2A SCPU01 and connectit to the USB port of the computer If the USB driver is notinstalled on the computer i e if the computer finds new hardware refer to 9 3 Installing the USB Driver and install the USB driver NE2A SCPU01 NE2A Series 2 Select Select Interface NE2A USB Port from the Options Menu Select Connect from the Network Menu You can also right click the mouse in an open area of the Network Config uration Pane and select Connect from the pop up menu Or you can click the Connect Icon amp in the toolbar The Setup Interface Dialog Box will be displayed The Select Connect Network Port Dialog Box will be displayed Computer 425 Connecting Online Section 17 2 Select Connect Network Port Sel
62. Node address on DeviceNet Bottom row Detail code 2 Gives the lower 2 digits of the detail code Gives the address distinguished by detail code 1 Network Con Error Error Gives the error and detailed information recorded figurator History Detail in the error history table Information displayed in the Error History Monitor Dialog Box Top row Error code Not saved in error history Not saved in error history table Bottom row Detail code Not saved in error history Not saved in error history table Indicates whether a record is saved in the error history No No record is saved in the error history Temporary A record is saved in the error history but it is deleted when the Unit power is turned OFF Yes A record is saved in the error history and itis not deleted when the Unit power is turned OFF Displayed mes Gives the message displayed in the Safety Con sage nections Monitor Dialog Box Errorname Names are used to identify errors Error names are not displayed in the Error History Monitor Dia log Box of the Network Configurator Cause Top row Cause Recovery method Gives the cause of the error Status after error Middle row Reset Gives the method of resetting the error Bottom row Status after error Gives the status of the NE2A series Controller after the error has occurred 523 Troubleshooting EtherNet IP Unit Errors Section 19 4 S
63. Or you can click the Monitor Device Icon 2 in the toolbar The Monitor Device Dialog Box will be displayed The tab pages and details are described below 18 4 1 Status Tab Page The following tab page will be displayed when you click the Status Tab in the Monitor Device Dialog Box Monitor Device Status Error History Ethernet Information Unit Status On Line Network Status Ethernet Link Status 486 Section 18 4 Monitoring EtherNet IP Units Unit Status Area Network Status Area The items displayed in the Unit Status Area are described in the following table Unit Error Description Indicates that an error has occurred in the operation of the EtherNet IP Unit Network Error Indicates that one or more errors have occurred in the network Unit Memory Error Indicates that an error occurred while trying to access the internal nonvolatile memory of the Unit Com Controller Error Indicates that an error occurred in the communica tions controller IP Address Duplicated Indicates that a duplication was found for the speci fied IP address LINK OFF Error Indicates that an error occurred while trying to establish a link between switching hubs On Line Indicates that the device is online Internal commu nications processing of the EtherNet IP unit can be executed Change IP address in Run mode Indicates that th
64. Push in the hooks on the main block and pull the block toward you Push in the hooks on the top and bottom of the main block and pull it out toward you Removing Individual Base Blocks 414 1 First remove the main block on the ride side of the I O Unit to be replaced 2 Release the top and bottom hooks holding I O Unit to be replaced to the DIN Track 3 In a straight line pull out the I O Unit to be replaced Pull out the top and bottom hooks holding I O Unit to the DIN Track with a flat head screwdriver and pull out the Unit in a straight line Pull out the mounting hooks at the top and bottom of the DIN Track Pull toward you lt The NE 2A series Controller will not operate normally if a Base Block without a Main Block and Terminal Block is connected Installation Procedure Section 16 1 16 1 7 Removing a Communications Unit Slide the yellow sliders on the top and bottom until they click to release the lock and then pull out the Unit to the left i e to the side of the Controller Release the locked slides on the top and bottom and pull out the Unit to the left 415 Wiring Section 16 2 16 2 Wiring 16 2 1 General Precautions and Reference for Performing Wiring Placement and Wiring e Always turn OFF the power supply before performing wiring External devices connected to the NE2A series Controller may operate unexpect edly e Properly apply the specified voltage to the inp
65. Q QoS 137 Quality of Service 137 R reaction time 171 189 reaction time calculation 172 reading network configuration files 212 Register Device List Area 251 Register to Routing Network 242 243 284 Register Unregister Button 254 registering data 264 302 registering DeviceNet Units 241 registering EtherNet IP Units 283 registering I O assemblies 305 registering I O assemblies for Safety Slaves 259 registering I O assemblies for Standard Slaves 273 registering I O assemblies from the Logic Editor 267 registering Safety Slaves 249 292 registering Standard Slaves 269 registering the CPU Unit 234 regulations xxvi remote I O 78 remote I O allocation 121 Remote Safety I O area 135 Remote Standard I O related data 127 removing a Communications Unit 415 removing an I O Unit 413 replacing a variable 374 Requested Packet Interval 119 reset types 455 resetting 73 454 resetting a device 454 resetting DeviceNet Unit 73 resetting errors 151 155 resetting EtherNet IP Unit 74 response performance 26 177 178 response performance of DeviceNet Standard I O Communi cations 177 response performance of EtherNet IP Tag Data Link com munications 178 response performance of Standard Communications 177 553 Index 554 RESTART 39 restart 73 restarting 164 restarting operation 461 restore default settings and then restart 73 restore default settings excep
66. Switch Change during Oper Indicates that the hardware switch was changed ation during operation Send Time Out Indicates that a timeout occurred while sending data due to one of the following reasons Not even one Slave exists The baud rates are not the same Network Power Error Indicates that power is not being supplied to the net work Node Address duplicated Indicates that an error was found in the node address duplication check performed during Unit startup Bus Off occurred Indicates that a Bus Off error communications stopped due to heavy communications traffic occurred Unit Memory Error Indicates that an error exists in the internal memory where the error history is saved Slave Function Error Indicates that one or more errors have occurred in Occurred the Slave Master Function Error Indicates that one or more errors have occurred in occurred the Master Master Function Status Area The items displayed in the Master Function Status Area are described in the following table a e I O Data Communication Indicates that remote I O communications are in Running progress with one or more Slaves Remote I O Communication Indicates that a timeout has occurred in remote I O Error communications with a Slave for which remote I O communications were in progress Slave Function Status Area The items displayed in the Slave Function Status Area are described in the following table ltem Description 1
67. The following message box will be displayed Network Configurator LD The configuration parameter of device is marked as Verified configuration parameter OK 6 Ifthe parameters matched click the Yes Button The safety mark displayed next to the device icon on the virtual network will turn green to indicate that the configuration has been verified 00 NE24 SCPU01 440 Verifying Parameters and Checking Safety Signatures Section 17 4 After verification the following message box will be displayed Network Configurator i L The device that was marked as Verified configuration parameter will be locked s OK 7 Click the Yes Button A dialog box will appear to enter the password 8 Enter the password and click the OK Button The safety mark displayed next to the device icon on the virtual network will change to a mark indicat ing that the configuration is locked ani 00 NE24 SCPU01 a 4 Note e Make sure to save the network configuration file after verifying the param eters of all devices e The mark indicating that the configuration is verified shows that the device parameters saved in the network configuration file are correct This infor mation is saved in the network configuration file but not in the device itself Therefore even when the network configuration is obtained from a verified device by uploading it from the network the mark indicating that the configuration has been verified will not a
68. The peripheral servicing cycle time of the NE2A series CPU Unit b The cycle time of the Safety Slave e If the communications partner is an NE2A series Slave the cycle time of the communications partner will not be checked Use the Network Config urator to check that the EPI is longer than the peripheral servicing cycle time of the NE2A series CPU Unit Changing the RPls of Tag Data Link Connections Method 1 Changing a Particular Device s RPI Setting The Usage of Capacity of the allowed communications bandwidth can be adjusted for a particular device by changing the packet intervals RP I for all of the device s Tag Data Link connections together In this case the Usage of Capacity will also change for the devices that are the Target devices of the connection which was adjusted Procedure 1 2 3 1 Click the Set Packet Interval RPI Button in the Usage of Device Band width Dialog Box Total usage of IP multicast addresses 3 Set Packet Interval RPI Close Network Total of Max Mbit s 0 152Mbit s me 324 Checking the Communications Response Performance Section 13 3 The Set Packet Interval RP Dialog Box will be displayed 2 Inthe Target Device Area deselect the Target devices that are not being adjusted by removing the check marks Set Packet Interval RPI Packet Interval RPI 60 ins 0 5 10000 0 ms Target Device 192 168 250 1 NE24 ENS21 O OK Cancel 3 Inputa new Packe
69. Timer Counter 1 Counter Off Delay Timer On Delay Timer 1 Pulse Generator f Serial Parallel Converter Cross Reference Function Block EDM 1 A a Name K Data Type EStop 1_0_1_DeviceNet 1 iam EStop EStop 2 DeviceNet hm EStop 2 NE2A CPU DNS2L DST1 EStop pit EStop r Section Program DST1 NE24 SCPUO1 CPU NE2A SCPUOI7 E StopLamp 1 J Zien g Device outl BOOL ouw2 BOOL ssouts BOOL 2 out BOOL 5 Yg EStopLamp_3_1_DeviceNet_1 BOOL Safety_Relay_0_1_DeviceNe BOOL Safety_Relay_T_1_DeviceNe BOOL 2 YO TagList alk NE2A SCPU01 Network DeviceNet_1 392 Function Blocks 6 1600 Input or Output Variables 14 2048 Internal Variables 1 1024 Program Size 0 Byte 512000 Byte Creating and Reusing Program Objects Section 15 9 15 9 Creating and Reusing Program Objects IMPORTANT Sections and user defined function blocks can be saved as objects and reused Itis also possible to import programs created using an NE1A series Controller and reuse them on an NE 2A series Controller Procedure for Creating and Reusing Program Objects Creating Program Objects Create the program object user defined function block or section Set and confirm operation rights if a user defined function block is created
70. Windows Vista 7 user account management will redirect you to the local folder of the user that started the Network Configurator The results of these operations will there fore not be applied for other user accounts Tools Menu Menu commands Description Offline Setup Parameters Sets parameters by using explicit message communica tions Setup Node Address Baud Rate Sets the node address and baud rate of a device in the only when DeviceNet is selected DeviceNet network Setup TCP IP Configuration only Makes TCP IP settings such as the IP address and subnet when EtherNet IP is selected mask of a device on an EtherNet IP network Option Menu Menu commands Description Select Interface Selects an interface for the Network Configurator to use for the network connection Edit Configuration File Edits various setup files Normally not required Setup Monitor Refresh Timer Sets the monitor refresh timer values monitoring cycles in device monitoring Install Plug in Module Installs a Plug in Module Normally not required Install Interface Module Installs an Interface Module Normally not required Update Parameter automati The Slave parameters registered in the Master will be cally when Configuration was updated automatically when a Slave parameter is changed Changed This options is cleared by default do not update Under nor mal conditions do not select this option Update Device Status a
71. in the toolbar The Monitor Device Dialog Box will be displayed 3 Click the Local I O Status Tab The Local I O Status Tab Page will be displayed Monitor Device Status General Error Status Safety Connection Error History Local 1 0 Status Operation Log List Production Information Unit Conduction Time 13 days 5 hours 12 minutes 21 770000 seconds Paramater Name 01 NE24 SIDO4 1 S Safety Input Port Value OFF Logical Value OFF Status Alarm Reason for Alarm No alarm Safety Inputl Safety Input2 Safety Input3 02 NE24 SOD04 1 The displayed items are described in the following table Description Unit Conduction Time Displays the conduction time after the power supply to the Unit is turned ON Input Power Supply Error Selected if an input power supply error has occurred Output Power Supply Error Selected if an output power supply error has occurred 477 Monitoring Device Status in Maintenance Mode Parameter Name 1 0 port value Section 18 2 Description Value before evaluation for safety I O 1 0 logic value Value after evaluation for safety I O Status OK Normal NG Error Cause of error Refer to 19 I O Unit Error Sta tus on page 134 18 2 7 Monitoring the Operation Log The NE2A series Controller saves a log of the operations performed for the Controller This log can be monitored cleared and saved in the computer with the he
72. istered as COPY serial number _name lf the length of the section name exceeds the limit you cannot paste the section You cannot copy cut or paste folders Moving Sections Up and Down 388 Operations are executed first for the section listed at the top and then for the sections listed below You can change the order in which to operate the sec tions by moving the sections either by dragging and dropping them using the mouse or by selecting Move Upward or Move Downward from the Edit Menu For example you can move the section Line03 below the section Initial in the following three ways Project wax Project vw Ax 2 GS NE2A SCPUO1 2 3 NE2A SCPUO1 S Initial S Initial S LineO1 S Linell B Line02 2 22 P B Line03 B Lineo 77777 5 Line02 2 BJ User Fucntion Blocks M ove 2 BJ User Fucntion Blocks fo Application01 o Application01 amp Modual01 Modual01 lt gt lt gt e Drag the section Line03 with the mouse and drop it above the section Line01 e Select the section Line03 and press the T Key twice while keeping the Ctrl Key pressed e Select the section Line03 and click Move Upward twice in the Edit Menu Checking Programs Section 15 8 15 8 Checking Programs Programs must be checked to be sure they are written correctly and to be sure that variables are used correctly Z N WARNING Serious injury may possibly occur due to loss of required safety functions Be sure to suf fici
73. lt Set Packet Interval RPI Total usage of IP multicast addresses 2 Network Total of Max Mbit s 0 141 Mbit s You can set the packet interval RP I for the Tag Data Links in the Set Packet Interval RPI Dialog Box 185 Calculating Communications Response Performance Section 8 5 Set Packet Interval RPI Packet Inlerval API EIR ns 05 10000 0 ms s 192 168 250 1 NE2A ENS21 192 168 250 2 NE24 ENS21 192 168 250 3 CJ1W EIP21 C32 Allowed Unit Communications Bandwidth for EtherNet IP Units 186 The number of packets that the Unit can transfer in one second in EtherNet IP Safety Communications and Tag Data Links is called the allowed Unit commu nications bandwidth or packets per second PPS The maximum number of packets that an NE2A ENS21 Unit hereafter EtherNet IP Unit can send or receive in one second i e the allowed communications bandwidth is 6 000 pps Make the connection settings within this range The PPS is calculated for each EtherNet IP connection from the EPI and RPI by using the following equations PPS value pps used in Safety Connection 1 000 EPI ms PPS value pps used in Tag Data Link connection 1 000 RPI ms The total number of packets sent or received in one second by each EtherNet IP Unit is calculated by using the following equation Total PPS for EtherNet IP Units Total PPS for Safety Master connections Total PPS for Safety Slave connections
74. munications The Controller provides the functions of a DeviceNet Standard Master and a DeviceNet Standard Slave It can communicate with devices that support DeviceNet Systems can be constructed for operations such as coordinating with Standard Controllers and monitoring Safety Controls EtherNet IP Tag Data Links The Controller has a Tag Data Link Target function so that it can commu nicate with Originator devices Controllers that support EtherNet IP Tag Data Links Systems can be constructed for operations such as coordi nating with Standard Controllers and monitoring Safety Controls Assembly definitions Defining the I O data used for communications by DeviceNet and EtherNet IP enables the intended data to be sent and received with no need for special programming Communications stop con tinue when a safety com munications error occurs I O communications operations at the connection where the error occurs can be set to stop or continue when a communications error connection timeout occurs during Safety I O Communications with a Safety Slave That connection can be restored or replaced without having to stop the entire system E xplicit message communi cations NE2A series Controller status information can be read by using the explicit message service I O Control Functions Building block local I O Local I O is configured from building block I O Units The number of I O points can be
75. 0 Data Communication Indicates that the Slave is performing remote 1 0 Running communications normally with the Master Remote I O Communication Indicates that a communications error occurred in Error the Slave I O connection 483 Monitoring DeviceNet Units Section 18 3 18 3 3 Communications Cycle Time Tab Page The following tab page will be displayed when you click the Communications Cycle Time Tab in the Monitor Device Dialog Box Monitor Device Status Unit Status Communication Cycle Time Error History Current Value Maximum Value Minimum Value The value for the Communications Unit will be cleared when you click the Clear Button for the maximum value or minimum value 18 3 4 Error History Tab Page The following tab page will be displayed when you click the Error History Tab in the Monitor Device Dialog Box Monitor Device Status Unit Status Communication Cycle Time Error History Time of Error Error Information Detailed Information Content 31 days 10 hour 0349 0200 Switch changed during operal 31 days 10 hour 0349 0200 Switch changed during operal Q 31 days 10 hour 0214 031C Logic error in configuration da Q 31 days 10 hour 0214 031C Logic error in configuration da Q 31 days 10 hour 0214 031C Logic error in configuration da 31 days 9 hours 0349 0200 Switch changed during operal Q 31 days 9 hours 0349 0211 Switch changed during operal Q 31 days 9 hours
76. 1 2 3 1 Select Create from I O Tag List from the Variable Menu The Create from I O Tag List Dialog Box will be displayed Please check 1 0 Tag to create variable and click OK Input NE24 SCPUO1 a slot 1 GST1004 1 S Safety Input ols L rea 5 e a a Creates variables from BLS 02INNo Nare selected I O tags CIS 031N No Name C Standard Input FL slot 1 Lecal Input Status 0 Output NE2A SCPU0I slot 2 ST 0D04 1 S Safety Output IS ooys 67S4_Lettt IS 1011S 6754_Righti IS 021S Lamp_Ready1 IS 1031S Lamp_EM01 Selecta Clear OK J Cancel 2 Select the I O tags for the variables that you want to create and click the OK Button The I O tags selected in the Variable Window will be registered as vari ables Note Click the Select All Button to select all I O tags Click the Clear Button to clear the selection of all I O tags Dragging and Dropping from the I O Tag List Window You can automatically create a variable by dragging and dropping an I O tag from the I O Tag List Window to the Variable Window 369 Creating Variables Section 15 5 The variable type will be determined by the type of the I O tag input or out put By dropping the selected I O tag on top of an existing variable you can per form the procedure for setting I O tags Acu Aos section x Variables ZERA a gt o Name Data Ty
77. 1 Byte Gh Safety Output 21ms 66 ms 1 Byte 04 DST1 MD16S Safety Inout As 21 ms 66 ms n 1 Bute Connections 20 160 Reactio Type Size A e Set the EPI for each Safety Connection to a value that is larger the maxi mum value of the following times The peripheral servicing cycle time of the NE2A series CPU Unit 2 The EPI for which operation is possible for Safety I O Communications for the NE2A series DeviceNet Unit 317 Checking the Communications Response Performance Section 13 3 3 The cycle time of the Safety Slave DST1 Slave 6 ms NEOA Slave 7 m min e When using Slave operation to communicate with a NE2A NE1A NE0A series Controller the cycle time of the Controller will not be checked Use the Network Configurator to check that the EP value is longer than the NE2A NE1A NEOA series Controller cycle time Changing the Communications Cycle Time for Standard I O Communications The resulting calculated best average cycle time for standard connections is the best Standard I O Communications cycle time Set the result of calculation as the Standard I O Communications cycle time for the Standard Master Procedure 1 2 3 1 Click the Update device configuration Button in the Standard Connec tion Field in the Calculate EPI Dialog Box Calculate EPI Safety Connections Network Bandwidth Best Average of EPI 125K Bit s 42 ms 250K Bit s 21 ms Use Rate 500K Bits 11 ms
78. 15 4 1 Creating Program Projects 0 0 cece eee eee eee 364 15 4 2 Setting Information in Projects 0000 364 15 5 Creating Variables 0 00 0 0 cece eee 366 15 5 1 Creating and Editing Variables 0 0004 366 15 5 2 Exporting and Importing Variables 004 371 15 5 3 Finding and Replacing Variables 0 000 373 15 6 Creating Programs 00 cece ccc eee eee 376 15 6 1 Arranging Input Variables 00 00 0000 2 ee eee 376 15 6 2 Arranging Function Blocks 0000 02 ee eee 378 15 6 3 Function Block Settings 0 0 00 ee eee eee eee 379 15 6 4 Arranging Output Variables 00 0000 0000 381 15 6 5 Arranging Internal Variables 0 00 000000 381 15 6 6 Connecting Function Block Input Output Signals 382 15 6 7 Arranging Text Boxes 0 0 0 eee eee eee eee 383 15 7 Creating Sections ossi coe ke BRASS SSA ne oh ea es Sale lies Gove 385 15 7 1 Creating Sections 0 0 ee eee ee 385 15 8 Checking Programs lt lt cs06 sje sea PES a Ah SES SS 389 15 8 1 Checking Programs for Syntax Errors 00 389 15 8 2 Displaying the Variable Reference Report 390 152823 Searching a seb pss ast g hg bse ese g nel satey S4obe punts ee EEN 391 15 9 Creating and Reusing Program Objects 0 0 0 00008 393
79. 2 Desam NE2A DNS21 NE24 DNS21 NE24 ENS21 Ya jago a J go Ya a 00 2 Select Device Parameter Edit The Edit Device Parameters Dialog Box will be displayed Edit Device Parameters Slave 1 0 DeviceNet Target 1 0 EtherNet IP 140 Unit Communication Unit Mode Cycle Time Extend Mode Logic Safety Connections Safety Slave 1 0 Connections 20 160 Fy Se X v Auto allocation Register Device List Product Name EPI Reactio Type Size N 01 DST1 MD165 a Safety Input As 17ms 58ms 1 Byte EA Safety Output A 17 ms 58 ms 1 Byte 03 NEQA SCPUD Sa Input Assembly1 10ms 44ms 1 Byte oh Output Assembl 10 ms 44 ms 1 Byte 00 NE24 SCPUD oh Input amp ssembly3 10 ms 50 ms 1 Byte Gh OutputAssembly2 10ms 50 ms 1 Byte 02 DST1 MD165 oh Safety Input As 17 ms 58 ms 1 Byte Gh Safety Output A 17ms 58ms 1 Byte 03 DST1 MD165 oh Safety Input As 17 ms 58 ms 1 Byte ch Safety Dutput A 17ms 58 ms 1 Byte 04 DST1 MD16S Ja Safety Inout As 17ms 58ms 1Byte New Register Unregisterd 311 Checking the NE2A series Controller Cycle Time Section 13 2 3 Click the Mode Cycle Time Tab and check the Instruction Execution Cycle Time and Peripheral Servicing Cycle Time Edit Device Parameters Slave 1 0 DeviceNet Target 1 0 EtherNet IP 140 Unit Safety Connections Safety Slave 1 0 Communication Unit Mode Cycle Time Extend Mode Logic a Instruction Execution Cycle Time 30 0
80. 24 2 2 4 Designing a Standard Control Interface 24 2 3 Designing Response Performance 0 00 c eee eee eee 26 2 3 1 Verifying the Network Bandwidth 04 26 2 3 2 Verifying Safety Response Performance Reaction Times 26 2 3 3 Verifying Response Performance in Standard Communications 26 2 4 Designing Safety Control Logic 0 0 cee eee 27 2 4 1 Designing the Program 0 0 0 cece eee eee eee 27 2 4 2 Programming with Variables 0 000000 28 2 5 Managing Operation 00 eee eee eee 30 2 5 1 Restricting Access to Safety Control Systems 30 2 5 2 Using Memory Cards to Download and Lock Parameters 30 17 Devices in the System Configuration Section 2 1 2 1 Devices in the System Configuration The following table lists the devices used in a Safety Control System config ured with an NE 2A series Controller Series name product name NE2A Series model number Safety CPU Unit NE2A SCPUO1 Description The NE2A SCPUO1 Safety CPU Unitis the part of the Safety Controller that controls safety according to a Safety Program It provides interfaces for Safety I O Units and Communications Units so it can be used to build the optimum system configuration Safety Input Unit NE2A SID4 1 The NE 2A SID4 1 is a building block Safety Input Unit that can be mounted to the NE2A series Controller and use
81. 3 is also set for communications with Output Assembly 1 does not appear to be part of the group on the dis play but the same communications settings as for Input Assembly 1 are used so it is part of multicast group 1 For the NE2A ENS21 each multicast group can contain a maximum of four originators You cannot set more than four originators in one multicast group Requested Packet Interval RPI The RPI is the interval for data communications between an Originator and a Target A device that transmits data on the network sends the data at the set time interval Example Two Tag Data Link connections are set between node 2 the Originator and node 1 the Target The RPI for connection 1 send data 1 is setto 10 ms The RPI for connection 2 Send data 2 is setto 15 ms In this example data 1 is transmitted from node 1 to node 2 every 10 ms and data 2 is transmitted from node 1 to node 2 every 15 ms 119 EtherNet IP Standard Communications Section 5 7 Node 1 Node 2 Slaves Data 1 Master 10 ms 15 ms 10 ms An RPI is set for each connection 120 Remote I O Allocations Section 5 8 5 8 Remote I O Allocations 5 8 1 Outline of Remote I O Allocations A NE2A series Controller defines assembly data for communications as a DeviceNet Safety Slave EtherNet IP Safety Slave DeviceNet Standard Salve and EtherNet IP Tag Data Link Target Tag sets are also defined in the same way as assembl
82. 6 1 Setting Device Passwords 0 0 0 e eee ee eee 447 17 6 2 Lost Device Passwords 0 0 rrene enerne 448 17 7 User Test and Automatic Operation 0 0 0 0 0002 eee eee 451 17 7 2 Locking Configurations 0 00 00 2 eee eee eee 451 17 7 3 Unlocking the Device Configuration 0 452 17 8 Resetting Devices sc 20 eo eke e Sta Pete ee caine tae baos an pes 454 17 8 1 Resetting a Device 0 eee eee 454 17 8 2 Reset Types and Device Status 00 0000 0000 455 17 9 Changing Device Parameters and Operating Modes Using a Memory Card 456 17 9 1 Creating and Checking the Configuration Restore File 456 17 9 2 Validating the Configuration Restore File 458 17 9 3 Downloading Parameters and Locking the Configuration 458 17 9 4 Changing the Operating Mode 0 000 461 423 Overall Procedure for Downloading Parameters and Operating the Safety Control System Section 17 1 17 1 Overall Procedure for Downloading Parameters and Operating the Safety Control System This section describes how to download parameters and then operate the safety control system Overall Procedure for Downloading Parameters and Operating the Safety Control System The procedure for connecting the Network Configurator downloading param eters from the Network Configurator and then operating the safety control system is desc
83. 6 Dimensions Reference Values 0 000 cee eee eee 40 3 3 Enid CoveP viscera ee Cheek Oh ee ea ees SOM 41 3 3 1 Nomenclature 0 0 ccc cee eee 41 3 3 2 Dimensions Reference Values 0 0000 cee eee eee 41 34 End Witt e niesha a na e an a a ee Re eee 42 3 4 1 Nomenclature esorare aR eae Eh R E AR a E ERTE amp 42 3 4 2 Dimensions Reference Values 000 cee cence eens 42 3 5 Power Supply Unit 0 ee eee ee 43 325 1 Nomenclature sinoi bids stead oan ten oe ina Cake 6 teak asa 43 3 5 2 Indicators os a ee Ow RR ee Sb a R 43 3 5 3 SIntertac sx 42 sia eee kd ed be Sa eins then eh 44 3 5 4 General Specifications 0 00 eee 44 3 5 5 Dimensions Reference Values 0 0 cee cence eens 45 3 6 DeviceNet Safety Units 0 eee eee 46 3 6 1 Nomenclature 0 0 cece tenes 46 320 2 Indications rase en he Ge WO ae eb ee a 47 326 3 SWItCHES ec el eta ee ale tlt ie ti he 48 3 6 4 Interface 2 ees ain awed ba hea ei ewan 49 3 6 5 General Specifications 0 0 0 cece ee ee eee 50 3 6 6 Dimensions Reference Values 0 00 eee ence eeee 50 3 7 EtherNet IP Safety Units 0 00 eee eee 31 37 1 Nomenclature serey 62 2 ce eke odd cee ee dee ee ee 51 3 7 2 Indications eessen a ee ee ee ee ee ee ee 52 32723 SS WICKES 1228 85 bee BE cee EN AR Send toe de Saad et 54 S14 Interface 225 2d cketoet athe oA eee lands la
84. 6 Dimensions Reference Values Dimensions 15x90 x95 mm W xH x D Weight 95 g max El ai opolotolog d olojolof of EOP Eg i Unit mm 66 SECTION 4 Status Transitions and Program Design This section describes the operating modes and other status of the NE2A series Safety Network Controllers and describes programming the NE2A series Safety Network Controllers 4 1 NE2A series Controller Status Transitions 000 68 4 1 1 Operating Modes and Confirmation Methods 68 4 1 2 Moving between Operating Modes 04 69 4 1 3 Functions Supported in Each Operating Mode 70 4 1 4 Force setting and Force resetting Variables 71 4 2 Setting the Operation for Resetting and Starting 73 4 2 1 RESCH Se uc cna thle abate EEE EEE EE EEEE otek bs A 73 4 2 2 Setting NE2A series Operation at Startup 75 4 3 Creating Variables 2 5 6 006 certs Gee Oh See eG Re ee 76 4 3 1 Types and Uses of Variables 0 0 0 0 0 000 0000 76 4 3 2 Linking I O Tags to Local I O and Remote I O 78 4 3 3 Creating Variables 0 0 0 eee eee ee eee 79 4 4 Creating Programs s eorias e levees eon E dled See ee R R a 84 4 4 1 Structured Design 0 0 00 eee eee 84 4 4 2 Programming Using Function Blocks 84 4 4 3 Creating Library Obj
85. Buffer capacity This is the amount of data that can be buffered when packets accumulate at the switching hub Multicast filter function This function transfers multicast packets to the specific nodes only QoS function This function performs priority control on packet transfers When the settings for Safety I O Communications and Tag Data Links exceed the capabilities of the switching hub being used increase the values for the EPI and RPI and make the settings again In addition if the required Tag Data Link performance cannot be achieved with the switching hub s capabilities reevaluate the overall network configuration and correct it by taking steps such as selecting a different switching hub or splitting the network Delay Time in Tag Data Links In an EtherNet IP network the Tag Data Link packets are sent once each packet interval RPI but several delays occur between the transmission of packets from each node and the arrival of the packets at the destination nodes The following diagram shows the 4 major delay sources Total network delay 1 Send processing delay 2 Cable delays 3 Switching hub delay 4 Receive processing delay 187 Calculating Communications Response Performance Section 8 5 Send me EtherNet IP 4 Receive Al Unit Unit processing A delay delay Data Switching hub RH oo or 2 Cable delay 3 Switching hub delay 2 Cable delay The lengths of these delays depe
86. Button under the Usage of Device Bandwidth The Usage of Device Bandwidth Dialog Box will be displayed Usage of Device Bandwidth Comment P 192 168 250 1 NE24 ENS21 p 192 168 250 2 NE24 ENS21 P 192 168 250 3 CJ1W EIP21 C 2 Usage of Capac Mbit s without Usage of IP mult 3 12 3 46 0 141 0 155 Mbi 2 3 12 3 46 0 141 0 155 Mbi 1 1 33 2 52 0 058 0 114 Mbi 0 Close Set Packet Interval RPI Total usage of IP multicast addresses 3 Network Total of Max Mbit s 0 169Mbit s Checking the Communications Response Performance Section 13 3 The network bandwidth actually used by the Safety I O Communications and Tag Data Link will be displayed for each device according to the connections set by the Network Configurator e The displayed content is described in the following table Displayed content or operation IP address Comment Device name Usage of Capacity Displays the proportion of transferred packets supported by the allowed communications bandwidth of the device Value outside parenthesis Proportion of transferred packets when a multicast filter is used Value inside parenthesis Proportion of transferred packets when a multicast filter is not used Number of bits processed in 1 second by the device s Ethernet port Value outside parenthesis Number of processed bits when a Multicast filter is used Value inside parenthesis Number of processed bits when a Mu
87. C preserve the following parameters and then emulate cycling power Password 0K Cancel The Reset Device Dialog Box fora Communications Unit is shown below Reset Device Reset Type Emulate cycling power A Return to the out of box configuration and ther emulate cycling power i Cancel Refer to 4 2 1 Resetting for details on the reset types 454 Section 17 8 Resetting Devices 3 Specify the reset type and password and then click the OK Button If you select more than one device in step 1 the Use this password for all device Check Box will be enabled If you select the Use this password for all device Check Box you can use the password to check all devices The following dialog box will be displayed and the reset process will start Resetting Device 00 Abort The reset has been completed when the dialog box shown above closes If the TUNIDs of the Network Configurator and device do not match the following message box will be displayed Check if the selected device is the device to be reset and click the Yes Button if you want to proceed with the reset process Network Configurator Invalid TUNID of Device 00 NEZ4 SCPLIOL Device will be reset by Device s TUNID OK Z N WARNING Before connecting a device to the network make sure to clear the previous configuration data Failure to do so may lead to loss of safety functions possibly causing serio
88. Communications At least one of the following communications ports is required ports See note USB port To go online via a USB port USB 1 1 on the NE2A SCPU e Ethernet port To go online via Ethernet DeviceNet Interface Card 3G8F7 DRM21 or 3G8E2 DRM21 V1 To go online via DeviceNet Note 1 The computer cannot be placed on standby while it is connected to an NE2A series Controller with a USB cable 2 The DeviceNet Interface Card is not compatible with a 64 bit OS 9 1 2 Required Software Installations The Network Configurator must be installed In addition communications soft ware must be installed to connect to the NE2A series System USB driver To connect online via USB e DeviceNet Interface Card driver To connect online using a DeviceNet Interface Card Installing the Network Configurator Refer to 9 2 Installing the Network Configurator Installing the USB Driver Refer to 9 3 Installing the USB Driver Installing the DeviceNet Interface Card Driver Refer to the manual for the 3G8F7 DRM21 or 3G8E2 DRM21 V1 DeviceNet Interface Card and install the DeviceNet Interface Card driver 194 Installing the Network Configurator Section 9 2 9 2 Installing the Network Configurator This section describes how to install and uninstall the Network Configurator 9 2 1 Installing the Network Configurator Preparing for Installation Check the following items before beginning with the installat
89. Device for the connection to be added from the Register Device List Area on the Safety Connections Tab Page in the edit Device Parameters Dialog Box Edit Device Parameters Slave 0 DeviceNet Target 0 EtherNet IP 170 Unit Communication Unit Mode Cycle Time Extend Mode Logic Safety Connections Safety Slave 1 0 Connections 1 160 4 a X Auto allocation Register Device List Product Name EPI Feactio Tyr C Ai DST14D12SL 1 DevineNet Sw Safety Input Assembly 1 10ms 35ms In Select the name of the Safety Slave 2 Click the New Button A dialog box will be displayed to register the connection for the device 02 DST1 1D1 2S11 DeviceNet_1 Edit Connection Eal 1 0 Connection Name 120 Type In 1 0 Size 2 Byte Detail Open Type Contigure the safety slave Check the Safety Signature Open only Contection Type Multi cast connection Single cast connection Data Expected Packet Interval EPI Advanced Ems Value 10 ms 100 ms Reaction Time 35 ms ok Cancel 251 Communications between an NE2A series Controller and a Safety Slave Section 11 4 Deleting Connections Procedure 1 2 3 252 3 Select the connection name to be added 02 DST1 1D12SL 4 DeviceNet 1 Edit Conmention 1D Cormeicion Select the assembly name Name Safety Input Assembly 2 displayed in the dropdown Safety opt Asserbo j 1 0 Type Safety Input Assembly 3 l IS t __
90. DeviceNet DeviceNet y ii 5 k The response time is calculated for the following delays 1 The Slave input does not arrive in time for the DeviceNet communications cycle and processing is delayed until the next DeviceNet communica tions cycle 2 The DeviceNet Unit reads the Slave input in the middle of peripheral ser vicing and so processing is delayed until the next peripheral servicing cycle 3 The signal does not arrive in time to update the memory in the NE2A CPU Unit and processing is delayed until the next time the memory is updated 4 The send data from the CPU Unit arrives in the middle of the peripheral servicing cycle and processing is delayed until the next peripheral ser vicing cycle 5 The send data to the DeviceNet Unit does not arrive in time for the DeviceNet communications send cycle and processing is delayed until the next DeviceNet communications cycle Maximum I O Response Time 177 Calculating Response Performance of Standard Communications Section 8 3 CPU Unit memory updated Instruction execution Peripheral servicing Communications cycle time miei Communications cycle Slave ON ON Maximum I O response time Input Slave ON OFF delay Communications cycle time x 4 Peripheral servicing cycle time x 4 Instruction execution cycle time x 2 Output Slave ON OFF delay Note Refer to the manual of the relevant Slave for information on the input Slave ON
91. Dialog Box 260 Using the NE2A series Controller as a Safety Slave Section 11 5 Edit Device Parameters Slave 1 0 DeviceNet Communication Unit Target 1 0 EtherNet IP Mode Cycle Time Safety Connections 140 Unit Extend Mode Logic Safety Slave 1 0 Name Type Size New Input New Output Register 0 8 Register 0 8 terest The following will be displayed when I O assemblies are registered Edit Device Parameters Slave 1 0 DeviceNet Communication Unit Target 0 EtherNet IP Mode Cycle Time Safety Connections 170 Unit Extend Mode Logic Safety Slave 1 0 Name Type Input Output Size oa InputAssembly1 1 Byte Sa OutpulAssembly1 1 Byte The following information is displayed in the Safety Slave I O Tab Page Information displayed The name of the registered I O assembly icon is displayed The type of input and output of the I O assembly is displayed Input Input to Slave output assembly e Output Output form Slave input assembly The size of the I O assembly is displayed Adding an Input Assembly Procedure 1 2 3 1 Click the New Input Button on the Safety Target I O Tab Page The Edit Safety Target I O Dialog Box will be displayed 261 Using the NE2A series Controller as a Safety Slave Section 11 5 Edit Safety Slave 1 0 Name InputAssembly1 Data AR E_STOPI S E_STOP2 T Sa Dummy Data New Variable Offset Type Size Tota
92. Edit Device Parameters General Communication Cycle Time Safety 170 Communication Minimum EFI 17 ms Standard 1 0 Communication Cycle Time 23 ms Setup Range 1 500 ms t Please configures the value more than Safety 1 0 Communication Minimum EPI value to Safety Connection EPI Reconfirming the Bandwidth Use Rate If the EPI settings in the Safety Connection parameters or the Standard I O Communications cycle time setting of the Standard Master has been changed based on the calculation results check that the network bandwidth usage when Safety Connections are used displayed at the bottom of the Network Configuration Pane is less than the value input in the Calculated EP Dialog Box It is particularly important to check the bandwidth usage rate if the best aver age EPI has been adjusted for each connection rather than applied as a batch setting O Devicenet_1 C Devicenet_2 Ethernet 1P_1 O NEA_Backplane_2 DeviceNet_4 as P P P P p 00 NE24 DNS21 fe zi 63 2 2 Hi 08 63 DST1 MD16SL 1 DST1 MD16SL1 CJ1W DRM21 a z 01 02 03 04 05 06 DST1 MDI6SL 1 DST1 MD16SL 1 DST1 MD16SL 1 DST1 MDI6SL1 DST1 MDI6SL1 DST1 MD16SL 1 al ia a a al a Usage of Network Bandwidth 125K Bits 250K Bits M 500K Bitks 0 8 100 m 0 136 1007 0 34 100 Note The EPI is setin 1 ms units so the
93. Errors related to message communications or the program The detail code can be one of three codes the I O slot number Communica tions Unit number or a combination of the Communications Unit number and node address The type of detail code displayed depends on the error code Detail code Meaning 1 0 Unit slot number The I O Unit slot number is displayed as a 2 digit decimal number An underscore indicates a blank digit The slot on the right side of the NE2A series CPU Unitis slot 1 Slot numbers are assigned to the remaining slots in sequence There can be up to 20 slots Example _ _ 0 2 indicates slot 2 of the Safety Input Units Communications Unit number The Communications Unit number is displayed as a single digit hexadecimal number An underscore indicates a blank digit Example __ _ A indicates DeviceNet Unit 10 Target Unit node address This code is used when changing the operating mode using the RUN STOP RESTART switch or when the system is in RESTORE CONFIGURATION Mode If an error occurs between the CPU Unit and Target device the source Commu nications Unit number will be displayed in the upper 2 digits and the Target node address in the lower 2 digits The Communications Unit number is displayed as a single digit hexadecimal number The upper 2 digits and the lower 2 digits are separated by a dot Example _ F 0 9 indicates that an error occurred at node address 9 which is a dev
94. EtherNet IP Standard Communications of NE2A series Controllers sup port only Target functionality They do not support Originator functionality Therefore setting functionality for Standard Connections is not supported For information on setting Standard Connections refer to the manual for the Communications Unit to be connected for the NE2A series Controller 297 Using an NE2A series Controller as a Standard Slave Section 12 7 12 7 Using an NE 2A series Controller as a Standard Slave This section describes how to make settings to use the NE 2A series Control ler with Target functionality in an EtherNet IP network To operate an NE2A series Controller with Target functionality create an I O assembly as a Target link The I O assembly can be selected with a CS C series Controller that has Originator functionality Computer Network Navigator CS C series Controller NE2A series Controller originator target EtherNet IP ee i Diee Using the NE2A series Controller as a target device DeviceNet DST1 series Controller DST1 series Controller Safety Slave Safety Slave Note This setting is not required if the NE2A series Controller will not be used as a Target device 12 7 1 Registering I O Assemblies for Target Devices Register I O assemblies for a Target devices to enable NE2A series Control lers to function as Target devices The input assembly is data from the Target device to the Origina
95. Find by 0 Enables the user to find a variable by its I O tag Device Select the device to searched for 1 0 Tag Select the I O tag to searched for Direction Sets the direction in which to search for variables Upward Search upward Downward Search downward 4 To continue searching for more variables click the Find Next Button 5 Replacing a Variable To end your search click the Close Button You can replace a variable name Procedure 1 2 3 1 2 Select the Variable Window Select Replace from the Edit Menu The Replace Variable Dialog Box will be displayed 374 Creating Variables Section 15 5 Name Replace 7 Match Case V Exact Match E Ignore bit comment Close Direction C Upward Downward 3 Specify the variable name to be replaced and then click the Find Next Button The items displayed in the Replace Variable Dialog Box are described in the following table LS Name Input the variable name to search for Replace Input the variable name to be replaced Match Case Sets whether the search is case sensitive Not selected Do not match case Selected Match case Exact Match Sets whether to find only exact matches Not selected Do not find only exact matches Selected Find only exact matches Ignore bit comment Sets whether to find and replace bit comments Not selected Find and replace bit comments Selected Do not find and repl
96. I Library L4 NE24_ DATA Section01 S UserFB_01 Faia Select a user defined object function block or section 2 Select Add to Project from the Library Menu You can also drag the selected user defined function block or section using the mouse and then drop it in the Project Window a User defined Function Block The Import Authentication Dialog Box will be displayed Import Authentication EJ Authentication Method Use Password Input Cancel a 1 Selectthe Use Activation Key Option or the Use Password O ption When a valid value has been set the OK Button will be enabled a 2 Click the OK Button The Add to Project Dialog Box will be displayed x p S Name SectionO1 Settirig C Add Prefix to variable name OK Cancel b 1 Section The Add to Project Dialog Box shown above will be displayed 3 Specify the items to be set and then click the OK Button The items displayed in the Add to Project Dialog Box are described in the following table tem SSSCSCSC iscription CS Name Set the name for the selected object to be used in the program Settings Adds a suffix to the variable name used in the object If the vari able name in the program being created and the variable name in the object are the same they will be treated as the same variable A prefix is added to enable differentiating the variable in the object The setting is enabled if the object is a section T
97. I O Terminal output reaction time Actuator reaction time Switch reaction time 16 2 ON OFF delay DST1 series Safety I O Terminal 75 7x24 14 75 7 5x2 14 5 77 6 2 Actuator reaction time 306 9 ON OFF delay Switch reaction time Actuator reaction time Calculating Response Performance of Standard Communications Section 8 3 8 3 Calculating Response Performance of Standard Communications 8 3 1 Response Performance of DeviceNet Standard I O Communications This section describes the performance of Standard I O Communications when a DeviceNet Unit functioning as a Master and an OMRON Slave are used Refer to this information if strict I O timing is required The calculation shown here assumes that the following conditions are satis fied in the DeviceNet network e All required Slaves are participating e There is no error displayed on the DeviceNet Unit e There is no message on the network occurring from a configurator made by another company Note 1 The calculation results shown here may not match if the system also uses Masters or Slaves made by other companies 2 NE2A series DeviceNet Units NE2A DNS21 do not have a Scan List Disabled Mode for Master operation Therefore itis necessary to register Slaves that will perform communications This section shows calculations for the maximum and minimum I O response times in the following configuration NE2A f
98. IP 1 ian P roduction line B Production line A and production line B outputs are stopped by an emergency stop at production line A The emergency stop is communicated from DST1 1 to NE2A 1 and an emergency stop signal is setin the data from NE2A 1 to NE2A 2 2 2 4 Designing a Standard Control Interface 24 By using the NE2A series DeviceNet Safety Unit as the Master Standard Control Data can be used for Safety Starting Signals between DeviceNet Slaves for displays etc Also NE2A series Controller I O and status can be monitored by a Standard PLC Design the Standard Data assembly data to be sent and received between the NE2A series Controller and the network Slaves and between the NE 2A series Controller and the Standard PLC In addition design the timing con nections with the remote devices for sending and receiving the Standard Data For details refer to 5 5 DeviceNet Standard Communications and 5 7 EtherNet IP Standard Communications Safety Control System Configuration Section 2 2 an EtherNet IP Ta NE2A 1 Standard Master DeviceNet ae Safety error monitoring input DST1 1 Start ready output 4 s yy gt Reset input Indicator output 25 Designing Response Performance Section 2 3 2 3 Designing Response Performance 2 3 1 Verifying the Network Bandwidth Verify that the bandwidths used for DeviceNet and EtherNet IP communica tions do not exceed the bandwidth allowe
99. Master Function Status Area The items displayed in the Master Function Status Area are described in the following table Remote I O Communication Running Description Indicates that remote I O communications is operat ing for the Master Error Indicates that one of the following errors has occurred verification error communications error transmission error configuration error duplicated node address Bus Off error or unit memory error Message Communication Permitted Indicates that the device is connected online I O Data Communication not Running This is the reverse of the Remote I O Communica tion Running Check Box Comparison Error Indicates that the Slave information registered in the scan list is different from the information in the Slave Indicates that a communications error occurred in the Slave I O connection Indicates that either a network power error or a send timeout occurred Indicates that one of the following errors occurred Invalid message monitoring timer list data Invalid scan list data e Master I O refresh error Indicates that an error was found in the node address duplication check performed at Unit startup or thata Bus Off error communications stopped due to heavy communications traffic occurred The device will remain offline and all communications will be stopped Indicates that an error exists in the internal memory where the error history is saved
100. No Name 5 03N NoName Network DeviceNet_1 Local outputs Signals such as emergency stop safety door and contactor signals con nected to remote communicating Slaves are called remote 1 0 NE2A series Controllers exchange remote I O data To achieve this connec tions must be set between the Master NE 2A and Slaves such as DST1 When the NE 2A series Controller and Slave configuration is set the remote I O that is set will be displayed in the I O Tag List as I O tags for Logic Editor Slaves Input tag display selection I O Tagtist ax Ma NE24 SCPUO1 Network DeviceNet_1 H01 DST1 MD16SL 1 S Safety Inpa 5 KOP e EM0 NE Y 01 P e EMO NC O2 N e S afety Inpu 2 O3 N e S afety Input 3 k O6 N Safety Input 6 OF N Safety Input 7 ST1 MD16SL 1 ety Input O0 P e Door Sw NC 01 P e Door Sw NC Borg pS g o coador 03J N e Safety Input 3 O4 N e S afety Input 4 O5 N e S afety Input 5 OB N Safety InpyY 6 het eat 78 02 N e Safety Input Remote inputs Output tag display selection yo mi vax afa NE2A SCPUOI Network DeviceNet_1 a 01 0ST1 MD16SL 1 Safety O 5 tput 0 SY 01 N Safety Du sut 1 6 02 N d Safety Output 2 5 O3 N d Satety Qutpul 3 5 O4 N d Safety Output 4 5 O5 N d S afety Output 5 O6 N d Safety Output 6 5 O7 N d Satet
101. Ntc Setup for Safety exe files where indicates any number in the Network Configurator Master Disk and install the patch according the instructions from the installer 1 Insert the Network Configurator Master Disk into the CD ROM drive Open the CD ROM drive from the Explorer and execute the setup exe file 2 Complete the installation process following the instructions provided on screen You can specify the folder in which to install the Network Configurator during the installation process However if the same version of the Network C onfigu rator has already been installed from a different package such as the CX One the installation folder cannot be changed because an update installation will be performed 195 Installing the Network Configurator Section 9 2 Update the Network Configurator i The Network Configurator is already installed on C Program Files OMRON CX One Network Configurator This setup program will install and update the Network Configurator to this Folder 9 2 2 Uninstalling the Network Configurator This section describes the procedure for installing the Network Configurator Procedure 1 2 3 1 2 196 Select Control Panel from the Windows Start Menu For Windows Vista or Windows 7 select Programs and Features For Windows XP select Add or Remove Programs For Windows 2000 select Add Remove Programs A dialog box will be displayed The dialog box will depends on the ope
102. O Dialog Box Edit Safety Slave 1 0 Name InputAssembly1 Data E Variable s E_STOP1 4 E_STOP2 3 Dummy Data List of data that can be registered I O assembly name New Variable Registered data Name Offset Type Size SE_STOP1 0000 0 BOOL 1Bit Total size Number of registrations Saager 1 IE ariables 2 2048 Copy Clip Board Specify the connection ye Number of registered variables OK Cancel I O Assembly Name The I O assembly name can be edited Note An O assembly name can contain up to 48 characters The characters that can be input are the same as those that can be input for variables Refer to Variable Specifications on page 80 List of Data That Can Be Registered This list displays the data that can be registered to I O assemblies For details refer to 5 8 2 Configuring Assemblies New variables can be created and registered For details refer to Creating New Variables on page 265 below Note Dummy data is used if the Master can transfer only an even number of bytes Dummy data cannot be registered at the start 263 Using the NE2A series Controller as a Safety Slave Section 11 5 Registered data List This list displays data that was registered from the list of data that can be reg istered The following information is displayed in the registered data List Information displayed The name of the registered data is displayed The position in I O assembly data of allocated data
103. OFF delay and output Slave ON OFF delay Minimum I O Response Time The minimum I O response time is calculated as the I O response time when the communications cycle is executed immediately after input is read by the DeviceNet Unit CPU Unit memory updated 7 Instruction execution rr Peripheral servicing t Communications cycle Slave ON ON Minimum I O response time Input Slave ON OFF delay Communications cycle time x 2 Peripheral servicing cycle time x 2 Instruction execution cycle time Output Slave ON OFF delay 8 3 2 Response Performance of EtherNet IP Tag Data Link 178 Communications This section describes the performance of Tag Data Link communications when an NE2A series EtherNet IP Unit CJ CS series EtherNet IP Unit and Ethernet switching hub are used Refer to this information if strict I O timing is required This example shows how to calculate the minimum and maximum 1 0 response times for the following configuration Calculating Response Performance of Standard Communications Section 8 3 NE2A DeviceNet 1 DeviceNet 2 E om E Fo Maximum I O Response Time The following delays occur 1 The Slave input does not arrive in time for the DeviceNet communications cycle and processing is delayed until the next DeviceNet communica tions cycle 2 The DeviceNet Unit reads the Slave input in the middle of NE2A periph eral servicing cycle and so processing is del
104. Output Dialog Box will be displayed 342 Setting the I O Configuration of Individual I O Bits Section 14 4 Local Output Error Lateh Time ES ms 100ms 0 255 default 0 Genetal Maintenance Name Mode Safety Relay Not Used Safety Relay Not Used Safety Relay Not Used Safety Relay Not Used OK Cancel Error Latch Time The setting of the error latch time is described in the following table Set value Description Default 0 to 255 You can set the time to latch the error state when x 100 ms an error occurs in a bit of the Safety Output Unit The error state will continue until the error latch time passes even if the cause of the error is removed Duration of error latch time 0 to 25 500 ms Setting the Parameters for Individual Bits The details of the parameters displayed by clicking the tabs are described in the following table Description General I O Comment Displays the comments for the bit Channel Mode Displays the operation of the bit Maintenance Monitor Mode _ Displays the monitor value for the number of bit operations fixed Value Displays the current number of bit operations Setting the Channel Mode Edit Local Output Terminal Dialog Box 1 2 3 1 Click the General Tab in the Local Output Dialog Box 2 Select the bit number to set and then click the Edit Button The Edit Local Output Terminal Dialog Box will be displayed Edit Local Output Termin
105. Present Ey Remote Standard 1 0 Register Unregister New Variable i Name Bitset Type Size F General Status 000 WORD 2Byte BYTEL24 The total size and number of registrations will be updated Creating New Variables I O assembles can be created in the Target I O EtherNet IP Dialog Box It is also possible to create variables to register to I O assembles with the Logic Editor Refer to 15 5 Creating Variables for information on creating variables with the Logic Editor Procedure 1 2 3 1 Click the New Variable Button in the Target I O EtherNet IP Dialog Box The New Variable Dialog Box will be displayed New Variable Name Data Type BYTE Bit Comment Cancel 303 Using an NE2A series Controller as a Standard Slave Section 12 7 2 Set the variable data and click the OK Button The following table de scribes the settings in the New Variable Dialog Box Settings Description Specifies the variable name Up to 48 characters 48 bytes max can be used Names are not case sensitive if ASCII alphanumeric charac ters are used The following characters cannot be used H SHE N 4 3 5 gt 7 1 Also the following cannot be used The first character cannot be a number Reserved characters cannot be used Select from BOOL BYTE WORD or DWORD The Edit Bit Comment button will be enabled if BOOL is not selected for the data type For details refer to Editing
106. Preview for details on the Print Preview 402 Printing Section 15 10 Printing Printing is performed with the following page format Page Description NE2A SCPUO1 Variable list The variable names data types devices I O of the I O tags and internal variables will be printed in that order Program The program will be printed User defined Variable list The variable names data types devices I O of Function Block the I O tags and internal variables will be printed in that order Program The program will be printed 1 0 Unit The set values of the I O Unit will be printed System Settings The set values from the system settings will be printed Target I O The values of the Target I O assembly data will be printed 15 10 2 Print Preview The print results can be checked on the computer Procedure 1 2 3 1 Select Print Preview from the File Menu The Print Preview Dialog Box will be displayed The operation performed by each button is described in the following table The Print Dialog Box will be displayed Refer to 15 10 1 Printing for details on the Print Dialog Box Next Page Switches to the next page This button is disabled on the last page Prev Page Switches to the previous page This button is disabled on the first page One Page Two Switches between One Page Two Page display in the preview The Two Page Button is enabled when one page is being viewed and simil
107. Project Window If you click a section it will be displayed in the P rogram Window Changing Section Names Procedure 1 2 3 Note Creating Folders Procedure 1 2 3 386 You can change the names of sections 1 Selectthe section whose name is to be changed from the P roject Window 2 Select Rename from the Edit Menu You can also press the shortcut key and select Rename from the menu You will be able to change the section name in the Project Window Project w Ax NE2A SCPU01 S Section S Section A E User Fucntion Ble The section name can be changed 3 Change the section name and then press the Enter Key Up to 48 characters 48 bytes max can be used for the section name The characters that can be input are the same as those that can be input for variables Refer to Variable Specifications on page 80 Folders can be created and used to group multiple sections 1 Select Create New Folder from the Project Menu or select a project or section from the Project Window press the shortcut key and select New Folder from the menu A folder will be added to the project in the Project Window Creating Sections Section 15 7 Project 4x Project w AX lS NE2A SCPU01 ff NE2A SCPU01 S Section S Section S Section2 Section2 E User Fuention Block C Foldert ee By User aorta Added Note Only one level of folders can be created You cannot create folders within folders Up to 256 fo
108. Project Window in the library Map Folder Registers a folder for display in the Library Window Disconnect Folder Deletes a folder from the library Refresh Updates the Library Window display New Folder Creates a folder Delete Deletes the section or user defined function block that is selected in the Library Window from the library Property Edits the property information of the library file Window Menu Description Toolbar Offline Online icon Hide All Hides all windows Close All Closes all Program Windows Section Shows the sections that are in the Program Window Sections being displayed will be checked Window Closes the pane Switches the section displayed in the Program Window to the selected section Close Window Closes the selected section in the Program Win dow Help Menu Command Description Toolbar icon Topic Displays help on the selected function block About Displays version information 360 Logic Editor Functions Section 15 3 15 3 3 Using the Shortcut Keys in the Logic Editor You can perform most operations with the shortcut keys in an NE2A series Safety Network Controller The details on operations performed with the shortcut keys in each window are described in different sections This section describes how to select a menu or window Switching between Menus and Windows Press the F10 Key to switch from the Windows Area
109. Register Device List Advanced Setup The default I O assembly will be registered if the Auto allocation as is reg istered Option is selected Unregistering Slave Devices Procedure 1 2 3 1 Selectthe Slave to be unregistered in the Register Device List on the Gen eral Tab Page Lel Register Device List Product Name Dut Size In Size 5 01 DST1D12SL 1 1 Byte 4 Byte fC 4it02_ DST1 MD16SL 1 1 Byte 5S Byte q __Select the slave device to be unregistered 2 Click the __ Button The Slave will be unregistered and removed from the Register Device List 11 6 2 Setting Standard Connections This section describes how to set parameters for a Standard Connection Click the Advanced Setup Button in the Edit Device Parameters Dialog Box to make the settings in the following Advanced setting Dialog Box 271 Communications between the NE2A series Controller and Standard Slaves Section 11 6 Advanced setting Advanced setting Device Information Connection Device Information Connection Device Information Auto Connection Vendor Check Vendor OUT Size Byte IN Size 4 Device Type C Check Device Type User Setup Product Code C Check Product Code cancel Device Information Use the Device Information Tab Page to verify device information when the Standard Master is online to the network with the actually connected Slaves For details refer to 5 5 2 Standard Conn
110. Register the object in the library Reusing Program Objects y computer where itis to be used Copy the library object file to a folder on the y Register the copied folder in the library v Add the program object to the project Enter the activation key if a user defined function block is used program i Arrange the object in the To perform the following procedures start the Network Configurator as the system administrator Refer to 9 4 1 Starting and Exiting the Network Config urator e Saving deleting and importing user defined function blocks e Registering folders in the library or deleting folders from the library e Registering user defined function blocks and sections in the library 393 Creating and Reusing Program Objects Section 15 9 On Window 2000 or XP these operations are not possible unless you are logged on with administrator rights On Windows Vista or 7 if the above operations are preformed when the Net work Configurator is started without administrator rights Windows Vista 7 user account management will redirect you to the local folder of the user that started the Network Configurator The results of these operations will there fore not be applied for other user accounts Operation Rights for User defined Function Blocks Operation rights for user defined function blocks are controlled by passwords and activation keys The follo
111. Replace the I O Unit and restart the CPU Unit Operation is aborted EE 04 1 0 Unit Slot Number 2014 1 0 Unit Slot Number 1 0 Unit con figuration failed An error occurred because the configuration data for an I O Unit was incorrect at startup Download the parameters and restart the I O Unit If the problem recurs replace the I O Unit and restart Operation is aborted EE 11 Communica tions unit number 2010 Communica tions unit number Communica tions Unit not sup ported A Communications Unit that is not supported by the NE 2A series Controller is connected Remove the Communications Unit and restart the CPU Unit Operation is aborted EE 12 Communica tions unit number 2011 Communica tions unit number Invalid Unit Number The Communications Unit number is outside the valid range Correct the unit number setting and restart the CPU Unit Operation is aborted EE 13 Communica tions unit number 2012 Communica tions unit number Duplicate Unit Num ber The same Communications Unit number is set for two differ ent Units Correct the unit number setting and restart the CPU Unit Operation is aborted 500 EE 14 Communica tions unit number 2013 Communica tions unit number Communica tions Unit Connection Error The Communications Unit could not be correctly recogni
112. Routing Safety Communications is possible when the connection type is set to Single Cast but not possible when it is set to Multicast A timeout error will occur Routing Standard Communications is possible when the connection type is set to Point to Point but not possible when it is set to Multicast A timeout error will occur 101 DeviceNet Safety Communications Section 5 4 5 4 DeviceNet Safety Communications 5 4 1 Outline of DeviceNet Safety Communications A remote Safety I O system can be constructed using DeviceNet Safety Up to six DeviceNet Safety Units can be connected in one NE2A series Controller Slaves can be distributed using more than one DeviceNet Safety Unit when the safety control area expands This reduces the area of usage per network and improves response performance The mounted Units can be flexibly used as Safety Masters Safety Slaves Standard Masters and Standard Slaves As a Safety Master Number of connections Up to 64 connections per DeviceNet Unit There can be a maximum of 160 CIP Safety Master connections for one NE2A series Controller I O size Up to 16 bytes per connection As a Safety Slave Number of connections Up to 4 connections per DeviceNet Unit There can be a maximum of 32 CIP Safety Master connections for one NE2A series Controller I O size Up to 16 bytes per connection lt gt DeviceNet Safety communications A teres vot ps vos wm sms sos ema conn can easa
113. Slice I O Units Safety Safety remote output data Safety Data sent to Safety Slaves as a Safety Master Remote O NE2A series Controller to Slaves Safety Connection communications Non safety Software switch for restarting Safety Connections restart software switch Master stopped by communications errors Standard DeviceNet Master output data Non safety Data sentto Slaves as a DeviceNet Master Remote I O NE2A series Controller to Slaves 82 Creating Variables Section 4 3 Variable Data Files for Importing and Exporting The variable data file when importing or exporting will be in CSV format It will store the variable names variable types e g input output external data types devices and I O tags The character encoding for the output file is Shift J IS The CSV file uses the following format Line 1 Identifier and version information 4NEXA Logic Editor Variable Export File V1 00 Note The file will not be read if the identifier does not match Lines 2 or Higher Column 1 Name Column 2 Variable type VAR VAR_INPUT VAR_OUTPUT Column 3 Data type BOOL BYTE WORD DWORD Column 4 Device Column 5 I O tag The bit members for BYTE WORD and DWORD data and are name and data type only The address indicates the continuous area starting with the parent variable The name is the parent_variable_name bit_name The default value will be used if there are no bit member lines or not enough bit
114. Total PPS for Originator connections Total PPS for Target connections Example Node 1 has EPI of 20 ms for connections to send and an EPI of 20 ms for connections to receive at the Safety Master and e RPI of 1 ms to send and RPI of 2 ms to receive for Target connections Node 2 has RPI of 2 ms to send and RPI of 1 ms to receive for Originator connections Node 3 has EPI of 20 ms for connections to send and EPI of 20 ms for connections to receive at the Safety Slave and e RPI of 1 ms to send at the Target connection Calculating Communications Response Performance Section 8 5 Node 1 M Tow S S EPI 20 ms T RPI 2 ms N EPI 20m5 S RPI 1 ms M Safety Master O O A S Safety Slave Node 2 Node3 O Originator O RPl lms T T Target The total PPS for each node is calculated as follows Total PPS for EIP Unit of Node 1 1000 20 ms 1000 20 ms 1000 1 ms 1000 2 ms 50 50 1000 500 1600 pps e Total PPS for Unit of Node 2 1000 2 ms 1000 1 ms 1000 1 ms 500 1000 1000 2500 pps Total PPS for Unit of Node 3 1000 20 ms 1000 20 ms 1000 1 ms 50 50 1000 1 100 pps Data can be sent and received for any of the above because the allowed Unit communications bandwidth is 6 000 pps max Ethernet Switching Hub Functions The switching hub functions shown in the following table determine the com munications performance of EtherNet IP Description
115. Units Connectno more than six Communications Units and restart ee the CPU Unit exceeded Operation is aborted the limit With Power Supply Unit 499 Troubleshooting CPU Unit Errors CPU Unit Network Configurator Indi cator 7 segment display Error history MS Error Detail Error Detail Saved Displayed message Power sup ply adapter not con nected Section 19 2 Cause Recovery method Status after error A CJ series CPU Unit CJ series I O Control Unit CJ 1W IC 101 or CJ series I O Interface Unit CJ 1W II101 is mounted Set the correct configuration and restart the CPU Unit Replace the Power Supply Unit Communications Unit or CPU Unit if the error recurs Operation is aborted EE 01 1 0 Unit Slot Number 200D 1 0 Unit Slot Number Incorrect I O Unit con nected The type of I O Unit that is mounted is not defined Change the I O Unit and restart the CPU Unit Operation is aborted EE 02 1 0 Unit Slot Number 200E 1 0 Unit Slot Number Allocated I O Unit address mismatch An error occurred in setting an address for an I O Unit at star tup Replace the I O Unit and restart the CPU Unit Operation is aborted EE 03 1 0 Unit Slot Number 200F I O Unit Slot Number 1 0 Unit con figuration failed An error occurred in setting the configuration of an I O Unit at startup
116. Watch Window Refer to 18 1 3 Force setting resetting Variables for details 465 Monitoring Programs and Force setting resetting Variables Section 18 1 18 1 3 Force setting resetting Variables Note Variables that have been allocated local I O or remote I O can be force set or force reset in the Monitoring Window of the safety program When force set ting resetting a variable the value of the variable used in the program can be turned ON or OFF regardless of the actual ON OFF status of the local or remote I O data Variables can be force set reset only when the configuration data of the NE2A series Controller is unlocked Z N WARNING possible effects before performing it The outputs may operate occasionally resulting in When data of a physical output are changed by forcing directly or indirectly consider S serious injury Force Mode Starting Force Mode Itis necessary to change the NE2A series Controller to Force Mode to force set reset variables Refer to 4 1 4 Force setting and Force resetting Variables Force setting resetting Variables for details on Force Mode You must input the device password to start Force Mode Also you can start Force Mode only when the configuration data of the NE 2A series Controller is unlocked Monitoring Force Mode Time Note Ending Force Mode A limit can be set for the time that the NE2A series Controller will continue in Force Mode The duration time is spec
117. an error was detected at the test output termi nal associated with a Safety Input Overcurrent was detected or the output was stuck at high Check the external input devices and the wiring and remove the cause of the error Input OFF to the input terminal after the error latch time has passed CPU Unit operation continues At the applicable I O Unit the 1 0 indicator lights red for the terminal where the error occurred When dual channels are set the I O indicator for the other terminal flashes red 505 Troubleshooting CPU Unit Errors CPU Unit Network Configurator Indi cator 7 segment display Error history MS Error Detail P1 03 I O Unit slot number Error Detail 2053 I O Unit slot number Saved Displayed message Internal Input Failure at Safety Input Section 19 2 Cause Recovery method Status after error An error was detected in the internal circuit of the Safety Input terminal Input OFF to the input terminal after the error latch time has passed Replace the I O Unit if the error recurs CPU Unit operation continues At the applicable I O Unit the I O indicator lights red for the terminal where the error occurred When dual channels are set the I O indicator for the other terminal flashes red P1 04 1 0 Unit slot number 2054 1 0 Unit slot number Discrep ancy Errorat Safety Input A logic error was detected between the Safety In
118. as a Safety Master Safety Slave Standard Master and Standard Slave Network Numbers and Node Addresses Multiple DeviceNet networks can be constructed in a NE2A series System Network numbers are used to uniquely identify and mutually confirm the devices within a configuration containing more than one DeviceNet network as shown in the following diagram To uniquely identify a device a TUNID Target Unique Network Identifier that combines the network number and device node address is used 95 Communications Specifications for NE2A series Controllers Section 5 2 DeviceNet network 1 DeviceNet DeviceNet network 2 network 3 Network Configurator setae PL Lat het es st estt nett a Ae Setting TUNIDs Pig oot ase Q DeviceNet santt o O get Ph ets Deyi eNet DST1 DST1 DST1 DST1 DST1 Setting TUNIDs The TUNID is automatically set when parameters are first downloaded from the Network Configurator to a device in out of the box configuration See note Note Out of the box configuration indicates the status when a reset type device is returned to its default status and restarted Users do not normally need to be aware of the existence of network numbers because they can visually identify a device on the Network Configurator The default network number is automatically generated based on the date and time the Network Configura
119. be OFF e The data sent in I O communications will be IDLE data so it will not be treated as valid data by the receiving devices Program Execution Conditions Program execution will start when any one of the following conditions is satis fied after the Controller moves to RUN Mode All of the CIP safety connections that were set for the Safety Master are established e The program execution delay that was set has elapsed The program execution delay can be set from 10 ms to 200 s in units of 1 ms The default time is 20 ms 75 Creating Variables Section 4 3 4 3 Creating Variables 4 3 1 Types and Uses of Variables Variables are used in place of device I O tags in NE2A series programming aS atetyRelay 1 iSafetpRelay 2 L mFt RESET Output variables Input variables Using variables provides the following programming advantages and improves program reusability e Programming is possible without having to consider whether Safety 1 0 devices are connected to NE2A series Safety I O Units or to Slaves on the network e Once a program has been created it does not have to be changed when the system configuration is changed Types of Variables The following table shows the types of variables that can be used Type Description Input variables Variables that can be linked to local inputs remote inputs and sta tus Variables
120. be displayed Edit Device Parameters Slave 1 0 DeviceNet Target 1 0 EtherNet IP 170 Unit Communication Unit Mode Cycle Time Extend Mode Logic Safety Connections Safety Slave 1 0 Connections 20 160 4 Tae X Auto allocation Register Device List Product Name EPI Reactio Type Size a LA 01 DST1 MD165 S Safety Input s 21 ms 66 ms n 1 Byte oh Safety Output 21 ms 66 ms 1 Byte 03 NEQA SCPUD oh Input Assembly 1 10 ms 44 ms 1 Byte oh Output Assembl 10 ms 44 ms 1 Byte 00 NE24 SCPUD oh Input ssembly3 10ms 50 ms 1 Byte oh OutputAssembly2 10 ms 50 ms 1 Byte 02 DST1 MD165 S Safety Input As 21 ms 66 ms 1 Byte Safety Dutput A 21ms 66 ms 1 Byte 03 DST1 MD16S S Safety Input s 21 ms 66 ms n 1 Byte oh Safety Output A 21 ms 66 ms Out 1 Byte 04 DST1 MD16S ___ SLSafety Input As __66ms In 1Bwe New Register Unregisterd The calculated Best Average EPI value will be setas the EPI in all Safety Connection parameters in the Target DeviceNet If required adjust the EPI setting for the whole network making the EPI smaller for those connections that need a faster reaction time e g Safety Curtain connections and making the EP I larger for those connections that do notneed a fast reaction time e g for door switches not used in hazard ous areas Select a connection to adjust and click the Edit Button The following Edit Connection Dialog Box
121. be displayed Click the Install But Would you like to install this device software Name CDM Driver Package Publisher Omron Corporation SF p El Always trust software from Omron Corporation Don t Install W W You should only install driver software from publishers you trust How can I decide whi ice software is install Installing the USB Driver Section 9 3 7 When the driver installation is completed normally the following dialog box will be displayed Click the Close Button kej L Found New Hardware OMRON NELA Series The software for this device has been successfully installed Windows has finished installing the driver software for this device OMRON NELA Series 8 If you are using an NE1A series or NEOA series Controller two different drivers must be installed The Found New Hardware Dialog Box will be dis played again Perform the installation using the procedure in step 1 7 Installing on Windows 7 Operating Procedure 1 2 3 1 Right click Computer on the Start Menu and then select Manage Network Configurator omron i Documents Pictures Music Games Computer Open Control Pan Manage Map network drive Disconnect network drive Show on Desktop Rename gt All Programs Srqpenies Search programs and files Shutdown gt 203 Installing the USB Driver Section 9 3 2 Selectthe Device Manager on the navigation pane Right
122. bottom surfaces for ventilation and wiring e Secure the Units including the Communications Units End Cover and Power Supply Unit with the sliders at the top and bottom of the Units e Be sure to lock all locking mechanisms such as those on I O Units I O terminal blocks and connectors before attempting to use the Controller Turn the power supply OFF before performing any of the following e Connecting or disconnecting Power Supply Units I O Units Communica tions Units or any other Units e Assembling the Controller e Connecting cables or wiring e Connecting or removing terminal blocks ginstallation and Wiring Use the following to wire external I O devices to the NE2A series Control ler Solid wire 0 2 to 2 5 mm AWG 24 to AWG 12 Stranded wires 0 34 to 1 5 mm AWG 22 to AWG 16 e Disconnect the NE2A series Controller from the power supply before starting wiring Devices connected to the NE2A series Controller may operate unexpectedly e Properly apply the specified voltage to the NE 2A series Controller inputs Applying an inappropriate DC voltage or any AC voltage will cause the NE2A series Controller to fail e Be sure to separate the communications cables and I O cables from near high voltage high current lines e Be cautious not to get your fingers caught when attaching connectors to the plugs on the NE2A series Controller e Tighten the power supply terminal block connector screws and DeviceNet connecto
123. box However this node is considered to be in the same multicast group for the input data If the output data is set at the same time make sure the inputs settings are the same on the Edit Con nection Dialog Box for the originator 2 When More Than Four or Less Than Nine Originators Perform Multicast Communications If multicast communications are necessary for more than the maximum num ber of originators 4 that can communicate in one multicast connection you can configure two multicast groups for the NE2A ENS21 First set the input tag set for each multicast group in the Target I O EtherNet IP settings of the NE2A SCP U01 117 E therNet IP Standard Communications Section 5 7 Edit Device Parameters Communication Unit Mode Cycle Time Extend Mode Logic Safety Connections Safety Slave 1 0 Slave 1 0 DeviceNet Target 1 0 EtherNet IP 140 Unit Name Type Size Aa Input ssembly1 ID 104 Input 2 Byte Input tag set for multicast group 1 7 InputAssembly2 ID 105 Input 2 Byte Input tag set for multicast group 2 S OutputAssemblyt ID 1 00 Output 2 Byte New Input New Output Edit Delete Register 2 2 Register 1 2 Cancel Then use the procedure given above in When Less Than Five Originators Perform Multicast Communications to set each of the multicast groups in the settings on the Edit Connection Dialog Box for the originator Set the same connection type target device NE2A ENS21 input dat
124. calculate the best EPI and best communications cycle time a Set safety connections with individual E Pls Is the use rate of network bandwidth within the set range Yes Calculate the safety response performance Yes J s the safety response performance adequate Calculate the standard I O communications response performance Is the standard I O communications response performance adequate 309 System Performance Verification Section 13 1 13 1 2 EtherNet IP Performance Verification Procedure 310 C Enen et IP Performance Verification gt EE Check the NE2A series Controller cycle time e Instruction execution cycle time e Peripheral servicing cycle time y AA Set the best EPI for the Safety Connections and the RPI for tag data link connections for all connections at the same time y Set safety connections with individual EP Is Set tag data link connections with specific RPls s the use rate of network bandwidth within the set range Yes Calculate the safety response performance Is the safety response performance adequate Yes Calculate the response performance of the data tag links Is the response performance of the data tag links adequate Yes lt a Finish
125. can be obtained by using the Password Recovery Tool installed in the Network Configurator If you enter the recovery key obtained from the Support Center in the Pass word Recovery Tool you can return the device to the no password setting For details refer to 17 6 2 Lost Device Passwords Forgotten Program Passwords Passwords for the following items cannot be recovered if forgotten Project files e Parameters including programming e User defined function blocks 159 Access Control with Passwords Section 7 1 160 Note To use password protection prepare and manage two files one file with a password setting and another without a password Download the file with a password to the Safety Network Controller If you forget a password the network configuration file can be opened only in read only mode You will not be able to edit the file Operation and Maintenance Using a Memory Card Section 7 2 7 2 Operation and Maintenance Using a Memory Card 7 2 1 Applications Constructing a System Changing a System Replacing a Faulty Device By mounting a Memory Card that contains the Operation Rights File in the NE2A series Controller parameters and configuration locks can be set and the operating mode can be changed for CIP compatible devices on the same network within the system A Memory Card can be used for functions such as downloading parameters locking the configuration and changing the operating mode This en
126. change the connected network If the identifiers are displayed as shown above you need to change the con nected network from EtherNet IP to DeviceNet Refer to 17 2 5 Changing the Connected Network for details on how to change the connected network 430 Connecting Online Section 17 2 17 2 5 Changing the Connected Network This section describes how to change the connected network Procedure 1 2 3 1 Select Change Connect Network from the Network Menu The Change Connect Network Dialog Box will be displayed Select Cormeci Network Port Select a network port that you would like to connect 0 NEZA DNS21 3 DeviceNet 2 9 H NE24 DNS21 3 DeviceNet 2 te 2 NE24 ENS21 Gevice Atarmeation Vendor ID Product Name Device Type Revision Aetresh oK Cancel 2 Select the network to connect to and then click the OK Button The Select Connected Network Dialog Box will be displayed Select Connected Network Please select a network where the connected network was supported Target Network Create new network Use the existing network DeviceNet_1 3 Select the Target network to connect to and then click the OK Button When the online connection has been established successfully the Con nected Network Identifier in the Network Configuration Pane will turn blue Refer to 9 6 2 Network Configuration Pane for details on the Connected Network Identifier A Ne2A_Backplane
127. circuit diagnosis and diag nosis of an externally connected device with test pulses from a test output ter minal e Input circuit errors e Externally connected device errors including overcurrent detection and output ON error for test output terminals 142 Safety Input Functions Section 6 2 6 2 3 Connecting Input Devices Connecting a Safety Device with a Contact Output Note If the channel mode is set to Test pulse from test output select Mechanical contact as the test output mode for the test output terminal The test output signal a pulse output is input to the input safety terminal through a contact output device The following input signal line errors can be detected by inputting the test output signal e Contact with the power supply line positive side e Ground faults e Short circuits between input signal lines If detecting short circuits between input lines is necessary specify a different test output terminal Examples 11 21 11 21 12 22 12 22 Circuit for Detecting Short Circuits Circuit for Which Detecting Short Circuits between Input Signals between Input Signals Is Not Necessary Example Connecting to a Two hand Switch oe eo SIl z e te F 12 Cee Job When connecting the switch connect the NO terminals to INO and IN2 and connect the NC terminals to IN1 and IN3 143 Safety Input Functions Section 6 2 Connecting a Single beam Safe
128. click NE1A USB Port NEOA USB Port or OMRON PLC under Other Devices and then select Update Driver Software File Action View Help 1 gt IMEHA 2 Fes Computer Management Local a g omron PC Ac a System Tools Mi Computer Le Task Scheduler wa Disk drives iPE E Event Viewer EX Display adapters Shared Folders Local Users and Groups DVD CD ROM drives Floppy disk drives R Performance wid Floppy drive controllers a Device Manager Os Human Interface Devices a 23 Storage tam IDE ATA ATAPI controllers iaf Disk Management Keyboards gt Services and Applications I Mice and other pointing devices EE Monitors EP Network adapters gt Other devices Ti NELA USB Port T Ports COM amp LPT Update Driver Software BD Processors Disable Ma System devices Universal Serial Bug Uninstall b Scan for hardware changes Properties 4 i Y Launches the Update Driver Software Wizard for the selected device 3 The Update Driver Software Dialog Box will be displayed Select the Browse my computer for driver software Option r _ o Neo L Update Driver Software NELA USB Port How do you want to search for driver software Search automatically for updated driver software Windows will search your computer and the Internet for the latest driver software for your device unless you ve disabled this feature in your device installation settings
129. conduction time of the device when the error occurred Error Information Displays the error code Detailed Information Displays detailed information on the error code Content Describes the error Updating the Error History Click the Update Button to monitor the most recent error history Clearing the Error History Click the Clear Button to delete the error history saved in the EtherNet IP Unit Saving the Error History The error history information can be saved in the CSV format Click the Save Button to save the error history 488 Monitoring EtherNet IP Units Section 18 4 18 4 3 Ethernet Information Tab Page The following tab page will be displayed when you click the Ethernet Informa tion Tab in the Monitor Device Dialog Box Monitor Device Status Error History Ethernet Information General Speed 100MBps Half Duplex MAC Address 00 00 04 36 88 BA Send Octets Octets Unicast Packets Unicast Packets Non Unicast Packets Non Unicast Packets Discards Discards Errors Errors Error Counter Alignment Errors FCS Errors Excessive Collisions Carrier Sense Errors Frame Too Long Safety 1 0 T ag Data Link Bandwidth Average of TxAx Packets Maximum Average of Rx Packets Maximum Average of Tx Packets Maximum Receive Multicast Packets Link OFF Errors Clear Information Collection s Start Time 1972 01 01 00 00 00 000 Close The received and sent data that is displayed on t
130. configu Point Owning UNID cations ration Resetting DeviceNet Units There are two types of resets for DeviceNet Units as shown in the following table TONE Restart Resets in the same way as cycling the power The configuration data is left unchanged Restore default settings and Restores all configuration information stored in the then restart device nonvolatile memory to the default settings and then restarts 73 Setting the Operation for Resetting and Starting Section 4 2 The DeviceNet Unit saves the following settings in nonvolatile memory inside the Unit Once these settings have been made they are not cleared when the power supply is cycled To clear these settings and return them to the default values select the Return to the out of box configuration and then emulate cycling power Option when resetting Refer to 17 8 Resetting Devices for the procedure Type Default Description setting Device parameter Notcon Parameters are These parameters are set by the figured downloaded user Resetting EtherNet IP Units 74 Note There are two types of resets for EtherNet IP Units as shown in the following table TONE Restart Resets in the same way as cycling the power The configuration data is left unchanged Restore default settings and Restores all configuration information stored in the then restart device nonvolatile memory to the default settings and the
131. configuration data cannot be changed Restricting Access to Safety Control Systems With the NE2A series Controllers access to Safety Control Systems can be restricted by the person in charge by setting passwords for the following items e Project files e Parameters including programs e Devices For details refer to 7 3 Examples of Security According to Roles 2 5 2 Using Memory Cards to Download and Lock Parameters With NE 2A series Controllers a Memory Card can be used to set parameters and lock the configuration for devices in the NE2A System For details refer to 7 2 Operation and Maintenance Using a Memory Card 30 SECTION 3 Configuration Unit Specifications and Nomenclature This section provides the specifications and describes the nomenclature of the Units used in a NE2A series Safety Network Controller 3 1 General Specifications of NE2A series Controllers 33 3 1 1 General Specifications of NE2A series Controllers 33 3 1 2 Dimensions and Weights 00 00 e eee eee eee 34 3 2 Safety CPU Unit s ac 0 eae tek eee Od AA A A EARO RETARA 35 3 2 1 Nome nclature lt 34 4 504445 40 ra ea hk hacia Seta oath es 35 3 2 2 IndiGators ts4 2 2 c4cce titted teh iow ede i heeded 35 3 2 3 SS WICKES oie cea ADEA Er wh ete ns ERE gate E A DAE e E ES 37 3 2 4 Interfaces anren tee eee oe e E a bee bere 39 3 2 5 General Specifications 0 0 e eee eee eee eee 40 3 2
132. cycle time the Slave communications time for each Slave and the refresh processing time For details refer to 8 3 Calculating Response Performance of Standard Com munications EtherNet IP Tag Data Link Response Performance With EtherNet IP Tag Data Links the data transmission period is set as a package interval RPI for each connection A delay occurs from when each node sends a packet until the packet reaches the destination node The delay varies depending on factors such as the Tag Data Link connection settings the number of connections and the data size the number of nodes the Switching Hubs to be used and the cable length For details refer to 8 3 Calculating Response Performance of Standard Com munications 26 Designing Safety Control Logic Section 2 4 2 4 Designing Safety Control Logic 2 4 1 Designing the Program Designing a Basic Program Design interlock signals so that control devices can perform the following operations e Start the machinery only if safety can be confirmed when an operation instruction signal is input e Stop the machinery if safety cannot be confirmed e Design the system so that the stopped machinery can be restarted by a method such as a manual reset switch once the safety functions are oper ating Non safety related Operation components instruction e Standard PLC signal eReserenien J udgement P ower control oe elements n Controller e Machinery Safety devices C
133. data device type for the device on the Configurator and the device used in the actual system does not match Use Safety Slave Verification Device Parameter Verify to check that the device in the system and the device registered to the Safety Mas ter match eif they do match delete then re register the connections registered to the Safety Master 538 Revision Error The device data revision for the device on the Configurator and the device used in the actual system does not match Use Safety Slave Verification Device Parameter Verify to check that the device in the system and the device registered to the Safety Mas ter match eif they do match delete then re register the connections registered to the Safety Master Section 19 6 Connection Status Tables Status Countermeasures 01 0117 Connection Path Error Two ore more single cast safety I O connections or a multicast safety I O connection with a different EPI has been set for a safety slave I O eTo share one safety slave I O on a Safety Slave with more than one Safety Master make the EPI all the same and set the connection type to Multicast NE1A series Safety Slaves cannot have more than one single cast safety I O connection for each Safety Slave I O Set multiple connection paths for the NE1A series Safety Slave Safety Slave I O e If the connection is not restored with the above remedy delete then re register the connectio
134. device for which the name will be changed 2 Select Change Device Comment from the Device Menu Or right click the device and select Change Device Comment The Change Device Comment Dialog Box will be displayed Change Device Comment NE24 SCPUO1 OK Cancel 3 Entera device name and click the OK Button Note Up to 32 alphanumeric characters can be entered as the device name 234 Setting Device Parameters Section 10 2 10 2 Setting Device Parameters This section describes how to set the parameters for devices set for the NE2A series CPU Unit Edit Device Parameters Communication Unit Mode Cycle Time Extend Mode Logic Slave I O DeviceNet Target 1 0 EtherNetyIP 1 0 Unit Safety Connections Safety Slave 1 0 Connections 0 160 Auto allocation Register Device List Product Name EPI Reactio Type Size OK Cancel Tab page Description Safety Connections Used to set the Safety Connections Refer to Sections 117 and 12 Safety Slave I O Used to create and display the assembly data when the applicable NE2A series Con troller communicates over DeviceNet and EtherNet IP networks as a Safety Slave Refer to Sections 17 and 12 Slave I O DeviceNet Used to create and display the assembly data when the applicable NE2A series Con troller communicates over a DeviceNet network as a Standard Slave Refer to Section 11 Target I O EtherNet IP Used to create and display the assembly dat
135. device status area displays the status of the device The device can be in any of the following status Device status Description Waiting for TUNID setting Waiting for the configuration data to be downloaded Idling Initialization is complete and the Controller is waiting to move to RUN Mode This is called IDLE Mode Running All functions including the Safety Logic are running This is called RUN Mode Self test error An error occurred during self testing Abort A minor error has occurred System Failure A critical error has occurred Self testing Self diagnosis is being performed to ensure safety func tions Configuring Alarm Warning Area Downloading the configuration data The Alarm Warning Area shows errors that have occurred in the device Click the Detail Button to see information on the error that has occurred An alarm is indicated with the Icon A warning is indicated with the 1 Icon 472 Monitoring Device Status in Maintenance Mode Section 18 2 Detail of Alarm Warning General Description Q Manufacturer specific ALARM exception detail 7 0x00 Q Manufacturer specific ALARM exception detail 8 0x00 Q Manufacturer specific ALARM exception detail 9 0x00 Q Manufacturer specific ALARM exception detail 10 0x00 Q Manufacturer specific ALARM exception detail 11 0x00 Q Manufacturer specific ALARM exception detail 12 0x08 Q Manu
136. devices NE1A compatible Function Blocks Function Block Abbreviation E STOP Name Emergency Stop Switch Monitor ing Description Monitors the status of the emergency stop switch Section 4 6 Compatibility NE1A compatible Light Curtain Monitoring Light Curtain Monitoring Monitors a Type 4 Safety Light Curtain NE1A compatible Muting Muting Temporarily disables the light interrupted signal AOP D input of a light curtain when the muting signal is detected During muting the equipment is not stopped and the sensing object can pass through the detection area of the light curtain NE1A compatible Muting Paral lel Parallel Muting with Two Sen sors Performs the same Parallel Muting with 2 Sensors operation as the Muting function block Muting For ward Direc tion Sequential Mut ing in Forward Direction Performs the same parallel Sequential Muting in Forward Directions operation as the Muting function block Muting Both Direction Sequential Mut ing in Both Directions Performs the same Sequential Muting in Both Directions oper ation as the Muting function block Muting Posi tion Detection Muting for Posi tion Detection Performs the same Position Detection operation as the Muting function block NEW Safety Gate Monitoring Safety Gate Monitoring Monitors the status of a safety gate e g safety door switch or safety l
137. eee eee 136 5 10 Selecting the Ethernet Switching Hub 0 00 0 0 eee eee eee ee 137 SECTION 6 Local I O Control Functions e0eee002 139 6 1 NE2A series Controller Local I O Specifications 0 00 02 e eee eee eee 140 6 2 Safety Input Functions 0 6 cl ee eee Shee Geek tne Sh eee oe 141 6 3 Safety Output Functions 0 eee teens 152 SECTION 7 Functions for Operation and Maintenance 157 7 1 Access Control with Passwords 0 0 0 ee eee een eee 158 7 2 Operation and Maintenance Using a Memory Card 0 00 00 2 eee eee 161 7 3 Examples of Security According to Roles 0 2 0 0 2c eee eee eee eee 166 SECTION 8 Calculating System Performance 169 8 1 Calculating System Performance 0 0 c eee ec eee 170 8 2 Calculating Safety Response Performance 0 0 00 c cece ee eee eee 171 8 3 Calculating Response Performance of Standard Communications 177 8 4 Calculating Cycle Times of NE2A series Controllers 00 0 00000000 181 8 5 Calculating Communications Response Performance 00 00 0002 eee 183 8 6 Checking and Adjusting the System Response Performance 0 04 191 SECTION 9 Basic Network Configurator Operations 193 9 1 Checking before Installation 0 0 eee eens 194 9 2 Installing the Network Configurator 0 2 0 ee ee
138. eee eee 195 9 3 Installing the USB Driver cercan ara e A cc cece eee 198 TABLE OF CONTENTS 9 4 Starting and Exiting the Network Configurator 00 0 0 eee eee eee eee 207 9 5 Saving and Reading Network Configuration Files 00 0000000005 210 9 6 Main Window and Menus 00 cece ce teen eee eee 218 SECTION 10 Designing the System Configuration 231 10 1 NE2A series Controller Setup 2 0 2 cee eee nes 232 10 2 Setting Device Parameters 0 0 cent ences 235 SECTION 11 Setting DeviceNet Networks cccceeeeeccees 239 11 1 DeviceNet Network Setting Procedure 2 0 0 2 cee eee ee eee 240 11 2 Registering DeviceNet Units to the CPU Unit 0 00 eee 241 11 3 DeviceNet Network Settings 2 00 0 ec cent eeee 245 11 4 Communications between an NE2A series Controller and a Safety Slave 249 11 5 Using the NE2A series Controller as a Safety Slave 00 00 0000 0005 259 11 6 Communications between the NE2A series Controller and Standard Slaves 269 11 7 Using an NE2A series Controller as a Standard Slave 00 00000 273 11 8 Communications between an NE2A series Controller and a Standard Master 278 SECTION 12 Setting EtherNet IP Networks eeeee002 281 12 1 EtherNet IP Network Setting Procedure 00 0 0 eee 282 12 2 Registering EtherNet IP Units to th
139. els there a terminator at each end of the main line Already set to the specified operating mode The device is already set to specified mode 531 Troubleshooting Network Configurator Errors Network Configurator message The device is locked Error description Configuration data is locked LOCK indicator is lit Section 19 5 Reset and Relevant sections Unlock the configuration Locking 17 7 2 The device cannot be accessed or the device type or password is different The device is in a state imme diately after being reset or the power supply was switched OFF and ON Communica tions is not enabled Online status or NS indicator is flash ing green or lit red Check that communications is enabled for the device and then begin the communica tion Device status 9 6 2 The device may not support services when an operating mode change is requested Check that the device node address is cor rect Node address 9 6 2 Configuration data is locked LOCK indicator is lit Unlock the configuration Unlocking 17 7 3 The configuration cannot be reset because the NE2A series Controller is conducting Safety I O Communications Change the operating mode of the relevant Safety Master to IDLE Mode Operating mode change 17 5 1 Could not access the device The NE2A series Controller was reset from another node while downloading It is wait ing
140. error flag An error occurred This flag indicates errors in data exchanges between the CPU Unit and Communications Units It does not indicate errors in the Communications Units themselves Errors in Communications Units are indicated in the Com munications Unit status No error occurred or no Communications Unit is mounted Parameter error flag An error occurred An error has not occurred Setting error flag An error occurred An error has not occurred System error flag An error occurred An error has not occurred 125 Remote I O Allocations Program execution error flag Section 5 8 Description An error occurred This flag is turned ON when an error occurs in one more function blocks An error has not occurred 12 to15 Reserved 126 3 Safety Connection Normal Status This status indicates that the connection is normal for safety communications Master and Slave There is 1 bit per connection sk Connecion staus beseipion Network No Node address Executing I O communications Assembly data name I O communications is not being executed or there is an error 0 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 1 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 22 184 183 182 181 180 179 178 177 23 192 191 190 189 188 187 186 185 4 Safety Connection Error Status This status indicates the connection error statu
141. for all nodes i e Masters and Slaves on the same network DeviceNet Safety Units 3 6 4 Interface DeviceNet Connector Note Section 3 6 aS 2 SEEE 1 Baud rate Refer to the following table Reserved Reserved Pin settings Baud rate 2 125 Kbit s default setting 250 Kbit s 500 Kbit s Do not set The Unit will not start Be sure that the power supply is turned OFF before setting this DIP switch If the baud rate is changed during operation the MS indicator will flash red and communications will be as follows e Safety I O Communications will stop Standard I O Communications will continue Safety I O Communications will start again when the baud rate is returned to the original setting The DeviceNet connector is labeled with the colors of the wires in the DeviceNet cable Check that wiring is correct by matching the colors of the wires in the DeviceNet cable with the colors of the labels The following table gives the wire colors Color Signal Negative power V Communications data low side CAN L Shield Communications data high side CAN H Positive power V e Before connecting the DeviceNet cable be sure to turn OFF the power supply to the NE 2A series Controller the power supply to all nodes on the network and the communications power supply e Secure the DeviceNet connector to the specified torque 0 25 t
142. force set reset e Input variables linked to I O tags local inputs remote inputs status e Input variables assigned to assemblies Output variables linked to I O tags local outputs remote outputs software switches Output variables linked to assemblies The following data cannot be force set reset e Input variables not linked to I O tags or assemblies e Output variables not linked to I O tags or assemblies e Internal variables including connection signals between function blocks e System variables e Remote I O data e Local I O data e Status Signals set for dual channels can be force set or force reset as dual channels according to their equivalent complementary setting In addition when vari ables linked to EDM outputs are force set reset the feedback signals will also changed I ir put variable linked 7 Y amp ystem variable pe put variable not linked Can be A Output variable ernal variable Cannot be force set reset Setting the Operation for Resetting and Starting Section 4 2 4 2 Setting the Operation for Resetting and Starting This section describes the settings for NE2A series Controller operation for reconfiguration restarting and execution 4 2 1 Resetting There are three ways to reset a Safety Device Reset type Description Restart Resets in the same way as cycling the power The configuration data is left unchanged Restore default settings and
143. gi ke gt 1 Pulse Generator ad t Serial Parallel Converter y UpDown Counter oh Safely Device of E STOP q EDM Drag the function block that you want to insert Drop itin the desired position EStop 1 DeviceNet T h EStop 2_1_1_DeviceNet 1 Wh 1 Muting position detection 1 Muting t Non Contact Door Switch i Redundant Input Safety Gate Monitoring y Moving Function Blocks Use one of the following procedures to move a function block Drag and drop the function block with the mouse e Move the function block by using the keys 1 2 3 1 Selectthe function block to be moved with the Tab Key 2 Move the function block with the J or gt Key Section1 yx EStop 1_0_1_Devicel Neti p Estop 2_1_1_Devicel Neti 378 Creating Programs Placement Errors Section 15 6 An error message will be displayed if you attempt to place a function block ata location where it cannot be inserted NEXA LogicEditor es r Can not put a object here e ak If the function block cannot be inserted insert it at another location tempo rarily and then move it with the mouse to the desired location The mouse pointer will change to an prohibited mark at locations where you cannot insert a function block If an error message is displayed when you cannot insert a user defined func tion block or a variable insert it at another location temporarily and then move i
144. headings appear in the left column of the manual to help you locate different types of information IMPORTANT Indicates important information on what to do or not to do to prevent failure to operation malfunction or undesirable effects on product performance Note Indicates information of particular interest for efficient and convenient opera tion of the product 1 2 3 1 Indicates lists of one sort or another such as procedures checklists etc Trademarks and Copyrights DeviceNet DeviceNet Safety EtherNet IP and EtherNet IP Safety are registered trademarks of the Open DeviceNet Vendors Association Other product names and company names in this manual are trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective companies OMRON 2009 All rights reserved No part of this publication may be reproduced stored in a retrieval system or transmitted in any form or by any means mechanical electronic photocopying recording or otherwise without the prior written permission of OMRON No patent liability is assumed with respect to the use of the information contained herein Moreover because OMRON is con stantly striving to improve its high quality products the information contained in this manual is subject to change without notice Every precaution has been taken in the preparation of this manual Nevertheless OMRON assumes no responsibility for errors or omissions Neither is any liability assumed for damages resulting f
145. i e the lower two bytes of the IP address Check the status code error code shown on the Safety Connection Tab Page in the Monitor Device Window and take the corresponding countermeasure 534 Connection Status Tables Section 19 6 19 6 2 Connection Status for DST1 NEOA Series Normal communications The Safety I O connection status is normal A number between 1 and F hexadecimal will be displayed for The num ber of Safety Masters that are communicating on the same multicast con nection will be shown Safety I O Connection Timeout The Safety I O connection has timed out Check the following items Do all nodes have the same baud rate els the cable length correct trunk lines and branch lines els the cable disconnected or slack els the terminating resistance only on both ends of the main line els there a lot of noise els the network bandwidth allocation suitable Configuration Owner Error The Safety Slave was configurated from a configuration tool or Safety Master at a different node address last time Reset the Safety Slave to the default settings and download the device parameters again Output connection Owner Error The Safety Slave established output safety I O connections with a Safety Master ata different node address last time Reset the Safety Slave to the default settings and download the device parameters again Device Not Configurated The Safety Slave has not been configur
146. icon indicates the error status of the network Refer to SECTION 19 Troubleshooting for information on how to handle these errors a Device icon Icons are displayed for devices that comprise the network You can change the icons by selecting Properties in the Device Menu Device description This is a character string that describes the device The default setting is the product name The product name is displayed when a device is added to a virtual network You can change the comment by selecting Change Device Comment in the Device Menu Status This mark indicates the status of the device It is displayed only for devices that are safety compliant The following marks are displayed Indicates a safety compliant device E Indicates that the device has been verified Note For information on verification refer to 17 4 1 Verifying Device Parameters amp Indicates that the device is locked Note For information on unlocking devices refer to 17 7 2 Locking Configurations Indicates that a locked device was edited Node address Node address of the device Routing network reg istration status Note ping them This mark indicates the registration status of the routing net work It is displayed only for devices that support routing T The routing network is not registered JA The routing network is registered The network tabs that are displayed can be switched by drag
147. is displayed The type of the registered data is displayed The size of the registered data is displayed Total Size This area displays the total size of the I O assembly A maximum of 32 bytes can be registered for one input assembly and 32 bytes for one output assem bly An I O assembly of up to 32 bytes can be set for an EtherNet IP Safety config uration but the maximum for an I O assembly in a DeviceNet Safety configu ration is 16 bytes Note The data size will be set as one byte if the data size is less than one byte e g for BOOL variables and local I O input data Number of Registrations The number of data items registered to the I O assembly is displayed here A maximum of 64 status information items can be registered for one input assembly and 64 for one output assembly Number of Registered Variables The total number of input and output variables that has been registered is dis played Up to 2 048 variables can be registered total for input and output vari ables Registering Data Procedure 1 2 3 1 Selectthe data to be registered from the list of data that can be registered Edit Safety Slave 1 0 Name Input ssembly1 Data E JR Variable SE lt S elect the data to be registered Dummy Data Reaister New Variable Edit Variable Name Offset Type Size 2 Click the Register Button The data will be displayed in the list of registered data 264 Using the NE2A series Cont
148. is aborted Flash EC 13 2005 Yes Communica The Communications Unit configuration ID downloaded to ing tions Unit the CPU Unitis different from the actual Communications Red configura Unit ID Communica Communica tion mis tions unit tions unit tch Set the correct configuration and restart the CPU Unit Alter number number match natively change and download the NE2A series Controller parameters Operation is aborted Flash Ed 01 2006 Yes Numberof The number of I O Units connected to the CPU Unit has ing I O Units exceeded the limit Up to 20 Units can be connected Red 0000 eee Set the correct configuration and restart the CPU Unit exceeded Operation is aborted the limit Flash Ed 02 2007 Yes End Unitnot The End Unit is not connected to the right of the CPU Unit Kad connected Set the correct configuration and restart the CPU Unit 0000 Operation is aborted Flash Ed 11 2008 Yes Number of More than three Communications Units are connected but a ing Communica Power Supply Unit is not connected Red 0000 tions Units Connect no more than three Communications Units and connected restart the CPU Unit Alternatively connect a Power Supply has Unit and restart the System exceeded ay the limit Operation is aborted Without Power Sup ply Unit Flash Ed 12 2009 Yes Number of More than six Communications Units are connected when a ing Communica Power Supply Unit is connected Red 0000 tions
149. made by other manufacturers contact the switching hub manufacturer The following values are the delays when cascade connections are not being used If cascade connections are used more nodes can be connected but the switching hub delays will increase Number of connections 16 32 64 128 256 used for reception Data size per connection bytes 32 byte 0 2 0 3 0 6 1 2 2 4 128 byte 0 3 0 5 1 1 2 2 4 4 256 byte 0 4 0 9 1 8 3 5 7 0 512 byte 0 8 1 5 3 1 6 1 12 2 1024 byte 1 4 2 8 5 7 11 4 22 7 Unit ms 188 Calculating Communications Response Performance Section 8 5 Receive Processing Delay The receive processing delay is the delay that occurs within the EtherNet IP Unit from the reception of the data packet at the Unit until the completion of reception processing in the Unit This delay depends on the size of the con nections used in the Tag Data Links and the number of connections In prac tice the delay depends on the number of connections used in Tag Data Links with less than 400 bytes If the number of connections is n the maximum delay can be calculated with the following equation Maximum reception processing delay 1 n x 0 043 ms The size of the connections may cause a delay when the data sizes are smaller and a large number of packets may be received in a fixed interval because the data may wait for receive processing Example Calculation of the Tag Data Link Delay
150. making the EPI smaller for those connections that need a faster reaction time and making it larger for those connections that do not need a fast reaction time 3 Selectthe Target EtherNet IP Safety Connection and click the Edit Button Set the EPI using the slider in the Data Expected Packet Interval The network reaction time can be checked under Reaction Time in the Data Expected Packet Interval field 00 NEZA SCPU01 NE2A_Backplane_1 Edit Connection 1 0 Connection Name i Input ssemblp0 lt YO Type In I O Size 5 Byte Open Type Check the Safety Signature Open only Connection Type Multicast connection Single cast connection Advanced Pier eee eee aa 5 Reaction Time 100 ms 323 Checking the Communications Response Performance Section 13 3 5 Click the OK Button The EPI of the selected connection will be changed Edit Device Parameters Slave 1 0 DeviceNet Target 1 0 EtherNet IP 140 Unit Communication Unit Mode Cycle Time Extend Mode Logic Safety Connections Safety Slave 1 0 Connections 2 160 k el Auto allocation Register Device List Product Name EPI Reactio Type Size 00 NEZA SCPUD Gm Input4ssemblyO 20 ms 100 ms In 5 Byte h OutputAssembly0 1Oms 50ms Out 8 Byte 6 Setthe EPI for all Safety Connections that need to be changed by repeat ing step 4 Note e Set the EPI for each Safety Connection to a value that is higher than the following times a
151. member lines Any line thatis not preceded by a parent variable name will be ignored Example Conversion data file Variable Window NEXA LogicE ditor Variable Export File V1 00 ar S Variable1 VAR_INPUT BOOL Devicel Tag00000 ate eg gy rene Variable2 VAR_INPUT BYTE Device1 Tag00100 Variable BOOL Variable2 BOOL BIIN eme Variable2 BOOL 01 BOOL Variable2 BOOL ane Variable2 BOOL gt Ru eoi Variable2 BOOL Ze m Variable2 BOOL Importing y 07 BOOL Variable2 BOOL Variable2 BOOL 83 Creating Programs Section 4 4 4 4 Creating Programs 4 4 1 Structured Design Structuring a safety control system into control units such as by production line or area makes design more efficient and improves maintenance With the NE2A series Logic Editor sections and user defined function blocks can be used to make this type of structured design NE2A 1 Control panel Robot 1 Production line A Production line B Defined using user defined Defined using Differentiated by folders function blocks sections System designed by line or area using folders and sections Project 7x A Area 1 A Area 2 B Area 1 B Area 2 ControlBox Robot vx G NF24 ScPIo1 n naa A 4 Lines S AAi Rest n B AArea 2 Line B Ft RESI S B Area 1 EMO gt B a ControlBox x n ao ControlBox Eal a Robot DoorSw 1 p aa a B Robot gt DoorSw 2 Fu
152. monitor flag voltage Voltage Error or Power Supply OFF Normal Input port error flag Indicates that an input port error has occurred Normal Reserved 20 Local I O Cause of Error The cause of error for each I O terminal of the Safety I O Unitis displayed offset 7 6 5 4 3 2 2 o 00000 Sil Sol Si0 S 00 00001 Si3 So3 Si2 So02 Remote I O Allocations Section 5 8 Safety Input Unit NE 2A ID04 1 Value hex Description No error Incorrect configuration Reserved Safety Input terminal internal circuit error Safety Input terminal discrepancy error Error on other channel of dual channels Description No error Incorrect configuration Overcurrent detected at Safety Output terminal Short circuit detected at Safety Output terminal Safety Output terminal fixed at high Error on other channel of dual channels at Safety Output terminals Reserved Reserved Data error between dual channel outputs at Safety Output terminals Remote Safety I O Area 21 Output Data This the same data as the output data that is sent to the Safety Slave that is set in a connection for which the NE 2A series Safety CPU Unit is set as the Safety Master Each connection is allocated an area of 32 bytes 22 Input Data This the same data as the input data that is received from the Safety Slave that is setin a connection for which the NE2A series Safety CP
153. network bandwidth usage rate may be smaller than the input value if the calculation result is input directly 319 Checking the Communications Response Performance Section 13 3 13 3 2 Checking the Communications Response Performance in an EtherNet IP Procedure 1 2 3 320 The EPIs of the Safety Connections and the RP Is of the Tag Data Links can all be set from the Network Configurator using the Set Packet Interval RP Button The EP Is of the Safety Connections can also be set individually The network reaction times for Safety Connections are automatically calcu lated by the Network Configurator There are two methods that can be used to set the RP Is for Tag Data Links e Method 1 The RP Is of all Tag Data Link Connections for a specific device can be set to the same value e Method 2 The RP Is for specific Tag Data Link Connections can be set The network reaction times and RP Is are calculated for each EtherNet IP net work To calculate them all devices must be registered and all connections must be set in the target EtherNet IP network 1 Click the target EtherNet IP Tab in the Network Configuration Pane The following dialog box will be displayed C NE2A_Backplane_1 DeviceNet_1 _ EtherNet IP_1 ana amp 192 168 250 2 NE24 ENS21 250 _ NE2A_Backplane_2 192 168 250 1 NE24 ENS21 192 168 250 3 C 1w EIP21 CJ2 3 Usage of Device Bandwidth Detail 2 Click the Detail
154. oO D 5 Safety Input S Safety 0 5 O0 P e Door Sw NC S O0 P d Safety Relay 5 O1 P e Door Sw NC S O1 P d Safety Relay O2 N e Safety Input 2 5 02 N d Safety Output 2 O3 N e Safety Input 3 S O3 N d Safety Output 3 5 O4 N e Safety Ir S O4 N d Safety Output t S 051N e Safetyr Input assembly S 05INc Safety ups Output assembly O6 N S afety Ing data 5 O6 N d Safety Output data S 07 P Feedback 5 O7 N d Safety Output 7 Setting the Connection Information for the Safety Master The parameters that are set are listed in the following table Parameter 1 0 connection Description Specify the data that you want to allocate to the Safety Master from the I O data setin 5 8 Remote I O Allocations Configure the Safety Slave Check the safety signature The Safety Slave is configured when the connection is established Open type The safety signature is checked in the Safety Slave when a connection is estab lished to make sure that the configuration is correct This is normally set when establishing a connection between a Safety Network Controller and DST1 series Safety I O Terminals The Safety Slave establishes the connection without checking the safety signature This is normally set when establishing a connection between Safety Network Con trollers Connection type Multicast connec This connection type can be selected
155. ojej ojej o oj o9 o j o9 o9o o e oleje ojojo n Even number Dual channel Status of Safety Input variables Meaning of status channel mode Mat INO IN1 MAT No load Active ON With load 0 Inactive OFF Discrepancy Time Evaluation For two inputs set in a Dual Channel Mode the time is monitored from a change in the value of one input to a change in the value of the other input called the discrepancy time An error occurs if the value of the other input does not change within the set discrepancy time The discrepancy time can be set in increments of 500 ms between 0 dis abled and 63 500 ms The discrepancy time cannot be set in Single Channel Mode Note Set the discrepancy time to 0 disabled when connecting an OMRON D40A Non contact Door Switch so that disconnection of the Safety Input terminal will be detected 148 Safety Input Functions Section 6 2 Operation for Dual Channel Equivalent Inputs Normal Operation INO terminal IN1 terminal lt Discrepancy time Discrepancy time I O tag INO I O tag IN1 Normal INO IN1 status Operation for Dual Channel Equivalent Inputs Discrepancy Error Discrepancy time Discrepancy time I O tag INO I O tag INO I O tag IN1 I O tag IN1 Normal Normal INO IN1 Error INO IN1 Error Status Status 149 Safety Input Functions Section 6 2 6 2 5 Preventing the Effect of Chattering from External Devices A
156. or hides the I O Tag List Window al Watch Displays or hides the Watch Window Library Displays or hides the Library Window Cross Refer Displays or hides the Cross Reference Window ence Program Chain Displays a window that shows the program chain from a pro gram output to a program input Standard Displays or hides the Standard Toolbar View Displays or hides the View Toolbar Project Displays or hides the Project Toolbar Variable Displays or hides the Variable Toolbar Device Displays or hides the Device Toolbar Status Bar Displays or hides the Status Bar a 4 a g 357 Logic Editor Functions Section 15 3 Description Toolbar Offline Online icon Input Changes the Variable Window to display input variables Output Changes the Variable Window to display output variables Internal Changes the Variable Window to display internal variables 1 0 Tag List Input Changes the displayed 1 O tag list to input tags Output Changes the displayed I O tag list to output tags Zoom In Zooms in the Program Window Zoom Out Zooms out of the Program Window Zoom to Fit Adjusts the Program Window display to fit the width of the window Project Menu Description Toolbar Offline Online icon Section Creates a new section Folder Creates a new folder User Function Creates a new user defined function block Block Edit E
157. outputs Signals of Safety Output device connected to Slaves on the network Designing Safety Control Logic Section 2 4 Variables that can be used only in programming They cannot be linked to local I O remote I O or status Variables with specific functions assigned in advance The names of the system input variables cannot be changed and the system input variables cannot be deleted Always ON e Always OFF ON for one cycle at operation startup For details on linking variables and I O signals refer to 4 3 Creating Variables The same I O tag can be assigned to more than one variable 29 Managing Operation Section 2 5 2 5 Managing Operation 2 5 1 Restricting Access to Safety Control Systems Safety control system operation and maintenance must be performed under the supervision of a manager Equipment safety can be protected by restrict ing access to Safety Control Systems This section describes the security functions for protecting Safety Control Systems from changes that the manager did not approve For details refer to 7 1 Access Control with Passwords Protecting Safety Control Systems after Operation Has Been Checked After the operation of a Safety Control System has been checked the configu ration data can be locked to protect it from changes that the manager did not approve A locked Safety Control System cannot be stopped by an operator who does not know the password to unlock it and
158. ral 2 aaa slot 1 GST4D04 1 2 5 Safety Input S 00 P e EMO Doorswe2 LS 01 P e EM0 A S 02 P e DooS w S 03 P e Door _ Standard Input Ba slot 2 GST OD04 _ Standa 2 y 8 Newer An I O tag can be assigned gt When an I O tag is dragged and dropped gt Output Automatic Definition by dragging and dropping to a defined variable for use in the program it is automatically registered in the Variable List Function Blocks 4 1600 Variables 8 3072 Program Size 1844 512000 Drag and drop local I O remote O and status entities from the I O Tag List to the Programming Pane When an entity is dropped in the Programming Pane a variable linked to the I O tag will be created in the Variable List With this method local I O names I O comments remote I O names assemblies and status names are used as variable names e Rules for Automatically Created Variable Names Tag name _ Bit _ Node Network name For local networks variable names are created from nodes Restricted characters are converted to underscores Example Local I O and status Tagl_00 01 DeviceNet Safety I O and Standard Remote I O gt Tag2_00 02 DeviceNet 1 EtherNet IP Safety I O and Standard Remote I O gt Tag3_08 EtherNet_IP_192_ 168 250 1 If more than 48 bytes are used the last four characters serial numbers from _000 to _000 will be omitted TagNameAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAA_01_00_DeviceNet__000 TagNameAAAAAAA
159. rating Q Note Ifa safety pulse test is set an OFF pulse signal pulse width 640 us will be output due to output circuit diagnosis when the Safety Output is ON Be care ful of the input response time of the control devices to be connected so as not to cause incorrect operation due to this OFF pulse 63 Safety Output Units Section 3 9 Output Circuit Power Supply im O Specifications Power supply voltage 20 4 to 26 4 VDC Current capacity 1 2 A Unit 3 9 4 Output Terminals and Internal Connection Diagram Base Block Main Block Terminal Block Internal Safety circuit output circuit I O power Supply circuit Terminal number Description A1 B1 A3 B3 So0 to S03 Safety Output terminals A2 B2 A4 B4 G2 A5 A6 V2 Power supply terminals for output B5 B6 G2 circuits The V2 terminals A5 and A6 are connected internally The G2 terminals A2 A4 B2 B4 B5 and B6 are connected internally 3 9 5 Power Supply Terminal Wiring and Wiring I O Terminals Refer to 16 2 2 Applicable Wire Sizes Crimp Terminals and Tightening Torque for information on wire sizes recommended materials and tools Refer the following figure to connect output devices 64 Safety Output Units Section 3 9 V2 O oa i 24 VDC NE2A series Controller O Sox l Jal d Oe i Z N WARNING Serious injury may possibly occur due to breakdown of Safe
160. registering EtherNet IP Units to an NE2A series CPU Units to build an EtherNet IP network 12 2 1 Associating the CPU Unit and EtherNet IP Units An NE2A series CPU Unit does not have a communications port for DeviceNet or EtherNet IP communications To perform DeviceNet or EtherNet IP communications mount an NE2A DNS21 DeviceNet Unit or an NE2A ENS21 EtherNet IP To associate these Communications Units with a CPU Unit register them to the NE 2A series Backplane of the CPU Unit The following figure shows display examples of the Unit configuration in the Network Configurator 2 x Q NE2A_Backplane_1 oO DeviceNet_1 Oo EtherNet IP_1 8 cae een 0 m iNE24 SCPUOT NE24 DNS21 NE24 ENS21 Ya Ya L a amp m s EtherNet IP m amp C t Lad a D t T ta x L a a y ta 2 NE2A_Backplane_1 e DeviceNet_1 Ether Net IP 1 a NE24_Backplane_1 DeviceNet EtherNet IP_1 192 168 250 1 00 NEZA ENS21 NE24 DN521 l a Registering EtherNet IP Units Register the NE2A ENS21 EtherNet IP Unit to the NE2A series Backplane Procedure 1 2 3 1 Double click NE2A ENS27 in the Hardware List Pane You can also drag NE2A ENS21 from the Hardware List Pane and drop itin the Network Con figuration Pane y M NE2A_Backplane_1 ey Network Configurator DeviceNet Hardware n 4 EtherNet IP Hardware anf NE2A_Backplane Hardware Vendor 00 G Omron Corporation NE24 SCPUO1
161. relat ed Systems xxi Safety Precautions 3 3 Safety Precautions WARNING Electric shock may occur Do not touch any terminals while power is being sup plied Serious injury may possibly occur due to loss of required safety functions Do not use non safety data as safety signals Serious injury may possibly occur due to loss of required safety functions Do not use the NE 2A series Controller s test outputs as Safety Outputs Serious injury may possibly occur due to loss of required safety functions Do not use DeviceNet Standard I O data EtherNet IP Standard I O data UDP IP message data or explicit message data as Safety data Serious injury may possibly occur due to loss of required safety functions Do not use indicators on the NE 2A series Controller for safety operations Serious injury may possibly occur due to breakdown of Safety Outputs or test outputs Do not connect loads beyond the rated value to the Safety Outputs and test outputs Serious injury may possibly occur due to loss of required safety functions Wire the NE 2A series Controller properly so that the 24 VDC line does NOT touch the outputs accidentally or unintentionally Serious injury may possibly occur due to loss of required safety functions Ground the 0 V line of the power supply for external output devices so that the devices do NOT turn ON when the Safety Output line or the test output line is grounded Serious injury m
162. restarted HF Local node address CPU Unit watchdog timer error An error occurred in the CPU Unit Check for the presence of noise and remove the noise source Replace the CPU Unit if the error recurs Interaction with the CPU Unit will be stopped Safety and Standard I O Communications will be stopped and all other functions will be continued 513 Troubleshooting DeviceNet Unit Errors Section 19 3 Communications Errors for DeviceNet Units Communications Unit Network Configurator Indi cators 7 segment display Error history MS NS Error Detail EO Local node address Error Detail Saved Displayed message Network PS Voltage Low Cause Recovery method Status after error The power supply from the network is not provided properly Check the network power supply and the network cable wiring The Unit will be offline and communications will be disabled An error will be returned for all communi cations requests Data exchange with the CPU Unit will be continued E2 Local node address Transmission Timeout The transmission request was not completed suc cessfully due to the following reasons There are no Slave devices on the network The baud rate setting is different between nodes There was an error with the CAN Controller Consider the following items The baud rates for the Master and Slaves may n
163. s See eens ee earee JSL 15 1 Overall Programming Procedure 11 0 0 00 0 352 15 2 Starting and Exiting the Logic Editor 0 0 0 cee eee 353 15 3 Logic Editor Functions 0 0 0 ec E A E ene nen eens 354 15 4 Creating Program Projects issn nerna sates SR dS AS REE EE AE REECE RR SOR 364 15 5 Crating Variables umoru a E de cikbwesiidige E eesibares 366 15 6 Cr ating Programs se ce ces ce hee ode sts A REEE ESAS AE AEE RTEA k 376 15 7 Creating Sec Hons EA ae Raed a oa ele omelets 385 15 8 Checking Programs 0 0 ee cnn eee AA E 389 15 9 Creating and Reusing Program Objects 00 0 e eee eee ee 393 T5210 Prana ging od set eter ete ee eet E gee tsa el E gaten aed dered dee ee 402 SECTION 16 Mounting Wiring and Hardware Settings 407 16 1 Installation Procedure 0 00 0 cece ee ee ee eee eee eens 408 1622 WATE ieee ie oe cite vate Wee ee ew Hee wae Gee beaks eG Dee EEE E LG 416 16 3 Hardware Settings 2 0 cic ac bee sek bole wh seh eb Ste he UR T ype R oh Age Sb pte 422 SECTION 17 Downloading Device Parameters and Operating the Safety Control System aii danced Cane aiid a a aa tease aes ALO 17 1 Overall Procedure for Downloading Parameters and Operating the Safety Control System 424 17 2 Connecting Online ssop esii yera ee eee ee ea be SAG dN eg ee 425 17 3 Downloading and Uploading Device Parameters 00 00 0000 e eee eee 432 17 4 Verifying Parameters
164. security itis recommended that passwords be set for network config uration files Once a password has been set do not forget it If the password is forgot ten that network configuration file cannot be edited In the Set Password Dialog Box input the password to be set for the net work configuration file In the Confirm Password Dialog Box input the password that was set when the network configuration file was saved When the file has been successfully saved it will be displayed in the Mes sage Report Pane as shown below Message Code Date Description i MSG 0100 2008 08 08 15 45 26 Save file was completed Ready L NE2A_Backplane T Unknown Realtek RTL8139 Family PCI Fast Ethernet NIC 0 0 0 0 10M Off line Saving Network Configuration Files by Network Procedure 1 2 3 210 Network configurations can be reused Itis possible to save the network con figuration file by network and specify the network when opening the file 1 Select Save As from the File Menu The Save As Dialog Box will be displayed Saving and Reading Network Configuration Files Section 9 5 Savein LJ work File name Test080519 02 Save Save as type Network Configuration File v3 nwt Cancel Opler E Select target network 2 All network data will be saved if you click the Save Button without selecting the Select Target network Option Select the Select Target network Option and click the Save Button The Confirm Passw
165. switch is changed The system will recover from the error when the switch is returned to the original setting It is not necessary to turn OFF the power supply and reset the CPU Unit 2 After startup this indicator will not turn OFF if the node goes offline once it has gone online 52 EtherNet IP Safety Units Seven segment Display IP Address Display Example Section 3 7 Display Display description Lower 8 bits of IP address Lower 8 bits hexadecimal of IP address of local node Switches between error Switches between the error code hexa code and lower 8 bits of IP_ decimal and lower 8 bits hexadecimal address for error node of the IP address for the error node The codes for all the current errors are repeatedly displayed in order No connection settings Connection Connection Flashing set not estab lished Connection Lit established The display will flash if both a flashing condition e g Safety Master connec tion not established and a lit condition e g Standard Slave connection not established occur at the same time The characters will flash while the configuration data is being saved to show that the data is being saved Also all digits of the IP address will be dis played at startup After the display type the IP address will be displayed flowing from right to left Display Type IP Address for EtherNet IP rity mie D
166. terminal So x OUT x Single Channel Inactive OFF Active ON X 0 to 3 Dual Output variable Output signals Meaning of status channel from output channel safety terminals mode So n So n 1 OUT n OUT n 1 Dual Channel 0 0 0 OFF O OFF Inactive load OFF 0 1 0 OFF O OFF Output data error load OFF 1 0 0 OFF O OFF Output data error load OFF 1 1 1 ON 1 ON Active n Even number 6 3 5 Error Handling Operation on Error Detection Operation in Single Channel Mode The following actions are performed if an error is detected during self diagno sis e The Safety Output for which a errors is detected is made inactive regard less of the status of the user program e The indicator of the Safety Output with the error lights red The error appears in the error history e The NE 2A series Controller continues to operate 154 Safety Output Functions Section 6 3 Operation in a Dual Channel Mode The following actions are performed if an error is detected in one of the two outputs e The outputs to external devices are immediately made inactive regardless of the status of the user program e The indicator of the Safety Output with the error lights red and the indica tor of the other output flashes red e The error appears in the error history e The NE 2A series Controller continues to operate The following actions are performed if the two outputs from the user program to
167. that can be assigned to reception assembly Output variables Variables that can be linked to local outputs and remote outputs Variables that can be assigned to transmission assembly Internal variables Variables that can be used only in the program Internal variables cannot be linked to local I O remote I O or sta tus or assigned to assembly System input Variables with specific functions assigned in advance The names variables of the system input variables cannot be changed and the system input variables cannot be deleted e Always ON e Always OFF ON for one cycle at operation startup Note NE1A series Controllers use jump addresses to pass data between function blocks the NE2A series Controllers use internal variables 76 Creating Variables Section 4 3 Differences between NE1A series I O Tags and NE2A series Variables I O tags for NE1A series Controllers indicate local I O terminals remote I O assemblies and status I O tags can be used in the program as if performing I O directly with the terminal or assembly Although the method is intuitive the programming cannot be separated from the I O terminals assemblies and status and so the degree of reusability is low In contrast variables with NE2A series Controllers are separate from the I O terminals assemblies and status The I O terminals assemblies and status are associated with the variables so that the I O can be reflected in the var
168. the EPI or RPI decreases the allowed Unit bandwidth usage Each type of communications will time out however if a connection is set that exceeds the network bandwidth usage in each type of communications Therefore itis necessary to set the EPI and RPI so that the allowed Unit com munications bandwidth is not exceeded 1 For details on the allowed Unit communications bandwidth refer to the next page 1 For details on the EPI refer to 5 4 2 Setting Safety Connections 2 For details on the RPI refer to 5 7 2 Setting Tag Data Link Connections EPI and RPI Settings and Allowed Unit Communications Bandwidth Usage When the safety connection and tag data link connection are set the allowed Unit bandwidth usage will be calculated for each device The EPI RPI and allowed Unit communications bandwidth must be check for each network Usage of Device Bandwidth Detail NE24_Backplane_1 DeviceNet_ _ EtherNet IP_1 NE24_Backplane_2 i i The bandwidth usage status is displayed for 192 168 250 1 192 168 250 2 192 168 250 3 each device when a virtual network is created NE2A ENS21 NEZA ENS21 CJ1W EIP21 CJ2 4 a a a Usage of Device Bandwidth Comment Usage of Capacity witho Mbit s without Usage of IP mul 192 168 250 1 NE24 ENS21 3 12 3 12 0 141 0 141 Mbi 192 168 250 2 NE24 ENS21 2 46 2 79 2 0 112 0 126 Mbi P 192 168 250 3 CJTW EIP21 CJ2 0 67 1 86 0 029 0 085 Mbi
169. the I O Configuration from the Wizard Section 14 3 14 3 Setting the I O Configuration from the Wizard The parameters of the I O bits of an I O Unit in an NE2A series Controller be set using a wizard 14 3 1 Setting the Parameters for Safety I O Bits The steps for setting parameters with the wizard are as follows Safety 1 0 Wizard Output Bits Start Finish Edit Edit Confirm Dutput Bits Input Bits Configuration Settings Edit Output Bits Set the types of devices and comments for the devices to connect to the output bits Edit Input Bits Set the types of devices and comments for the devices to connect to the input bits Confirm Configuration Check the settings Note If either a Safety Output Unit or Safety Input Unit has been specified only the step for setting the bits of the specified Unit will be displayed If no I O Unithas been specified the above steps will not be displayed and it will not be possi ble to set parameters with the wizard Procedure 1 2 3 1 Inthe Network Configuration Pane select the NE2A SCPU01 CPU Unitto set Q NE2A_Backplane_2 NE2A_Backplane_3 DeviceNet _1 3 2 1 NE24 DNS21 NE24 DNS21 NE24 ENS21 YY jlziHoo Me LA 2 Select Parameters Wizard from the Device Menu The following dialog box will be displayed Safety 1 0 Wizard Output Bits rN i gt on Start Edit Confirm Output Bits Input Bits Configuration Bit Made Comment Type
170. the Logic E ditor Procedure 1 2 3 1 Select Setting Target I O from the Device Menu of the Logic Editor The Target S lave I O Settings Dialog Box will be displayed 2 Click the Safety Target I O Tab 267 Using the NE2A series Controller as a Safety Slave Section 11 5 Target Slave 1 0 Settings Safety Slave 1 0 Target 1 0 EtherNet IP Slave 1 0 DeviceNet Name Type Size New Input New Output Register 0 8 Register 0 8 3 Click the New Input Button or New Output Button The Edit Safety Tar get I O Dialog Box will be displayed The procedures for adding changing and deleting I O assemblies are the same as the procedures using the Network Configurator For details refer to 11 5 1 Registering I O Assemblies for Safety Slaves 268 Communications between the NE2A series Controller and Standard Slaves Section 11 6 11 6 Communications between the NE 2A series Controller and Standard Slaves This section describes how to make settings to use an NE 2A series Controller as a Standard Master in a DeviceNet network To operate an NE2A series Controller as a Standard Master register the device that will be the Standard Slave and set the connection 11 6 1 Registering Standard Slaves Register the Standard Slave to communicate with and set the connection Refer to 11 3 DeviceNet Network Settings for information on building DeviceNet networks This section describes how to set a Standard Connection with
171. the Safety Con nection 3 Select the connection for which you will change the setting and click the Edit Button You can also double click the connection A dialog box will be displayed to register the connection 01 DST1 ID12SL 1 DeviceNet_1 Edit Connection 170 Connection Name COTTA 120 Type In 1 0 Size 2 Byte Open Type Configure the safety slave Check the Safety Signature Open only Connection Type Mult cast connection Single cast connection Data Expected Packel Internal EPI Advanced Value 10 ms Reaction Time 64 ms 257 Communications between an NE2A series Controller and a Safety Slave Section 11 4 Refer to 11 4 2 Setting Safety Connection Parameters for information on how to use the dialog box to register the connection 11 4 4 Stopping or Restarting Communications after an Error With the NE2A Series the user can specify whether to stop or continue 1 0 communications if a connection timeout occurs during Safety I O Communica tions with a Safety Slave If I O communications are stopped because of a tim eout error the communications can be restarted from the Network Configurator or logic program Edit Device Parameters Slave 1 0 DeviceNet Target 1 0 EtherNet IP 120 Unit Safety Connections Safety Slave 1 0 Communication Unit Mode Cycle Time Extend Mode Logic Connection Error Mode Slot Unit Type Communication Error Mode i eee e
172. the error recurs despite correct wiring CPU Unit operation continues At the applicable I O Unit the TS indicator lights red and operation stops PA O1 2073 Slice Bus A timeout was detected during Safety I O Communications Communica or Standard Communications with the I O Unit I O Unit slot 1 0 Unit slot tions Error Replace the I O Unitif the error recurs when the Controller is number number restarted CPU Unit operation continues At the applicable I O Unit the TS indicator lights red and operation stops PF O1 2074 I O Unit Sys An error was detected during self diagnosis by the I O Unit tem Error Replace the I O Unitif the error recurs when the Controller is I O Unit slot 1 0 Unit slot restarted number number CPU Unit operation continues At the applicable I O Unit the TS indicator lights red and operation stops Errors Related to Communications Units CPU Unit Network Configurator Cause Indi 7 segment Error history Displayed Recovery method cator display message Status after error MS Error Error Saved Detail Detail UE 01 Communica An error was detected during the bus check for the Communi g tions Unit cations Unit Bus Error Check the power supply voltage of the NE2A PD025 Power Supply Unit to see if it has dropped or is unstable CPU Unit operation continues Servicing stops for all Com munications Units so all Safety I O Communications and Standard I O Communica
173. timeouts i e only one timeout is allowed Network delay This parameter is used when calculating the reaction time as a percentage of the multiplier EPI The default is 100 ID allocation This parameter is used to allocate an ID to the Safety Connection There is a limit to the ID numbers that can be allocated by the Master and Slave If the limit is exceeded for one ID numbers for the other can be used The Master allocates produced connection IDs The Safety Slave checks the produced IDs NE2A series Controllers do not use this parameter Z N WARNING Serious injury may possibly occur due to loss of required safety function Make D sure that the Safety Master and Slave have the correct configuration when setting an open type to open only Expected Packet Interval EPI The EPI is the communications interval for Safety Data between a Safety Controller and the Safety Slaves A device transmits data to the network dur ing the set interval and the receiving device monitors to see if the data is received normally within the data transmission interval If the data is not received normally the connection is broken and the devices go to the safe state The EPI values affect the safety response performance reaction time Example One connection each is set between node 1 the Master and nodes 2 and 3 Slaves The EPI for the connection with node 2 data 1 is set to 10 ms The EPI for the connection with node 3 dat
174. to PLC Support Soft ware such as the CX Programmer The assembly format created in the Slaves can be used in the Master for connections for DeviceNet Safety Communications DeviceNet Standard Communications and EtherNet IP Safety Communications For EtherNet IP Tag Data Links tag sets must be created in both the Origina tor and Target Refer to 5 7 2 Setting Tag Data Link Connections The data that can be set for assemblies and tag sets are described on the following pages 121 Remote I O Allocations Section 5 8 Slave Target IN Output p variables Inputassembly 1 D Status Input assembly 2 OUT Input lt q _ variables Outputassembly 1 hag Output assembly 2 a Input assembly 1 out i EEE Output variables out_bit2 out_byte 1 __ eee Status status_byt 1 in_bitl Output assembly 1 Input variables in_ bit2R _ ___T _7_L in_ byte 1 _ Note BOOL data can be arranged in BYTE WORD or DWORD data If longer vari ables such as BYTE variables are placed between continuous BOOL vari ables the total data size will change 5 8 2 Configuring Assemblies Safety Communications Data That Can Be Setin an Input Assembly Category Type Allocatable units Variables Output variables BOOL BYTE W
175. to continue Cancel In the Found New Hardware Wizard Dialog Box select the No not this time option and click the Next Button 198 Installing the USB Driver Section 9 3 2 Selectthe nstall from a list or specific location Advanced Option and click the Next Button Found New Hardware Wizard This wizard helps you install software for NE14 USB Port E If your hardware came with an installation CD lt gt or floppy disk insert it now What do you want the wizard to do O Install the software automatically Recommended OF Click Next to continue lt Back Next gt J Cancel 3 Select the Search the best driver in these locations Check Box and select the Include this location in the search Option Click the Browse Button se lect the SafetyDrivers USB folder in the folder in which the Network Con figurator was installed or the drivers USB folder in the Network Configurator Master Disk CD ROM and the click the Next Button Found New Hardware Wizard Please choose your search and installation options Search for the best driver in these locations Use the check boxes below to limit or expand the default search which includes local paths and removable media The best driver found will be installed Search removable media floppy CD ROM x Include this location in the search EEE eal Browse O Dont search will choose the driver to install
176. used in the program will also be updated when it is saved Note 1 I O tags cannot be used in user defined function blocks 2 It is not possible to use user defined function blocks in a user defined function block IMPORTANT When you change the parameters of the NE2A series Controller always be sure that all of the user defined function blocks that are used in the program are installed first When parameters are changed for a NE2A series Controller that includes user defined function blocks in the program information that is included in the user defined functions blocks is used not only in the program but it is also used in other ways such as in calculating the cycle time IMPORTANT If a user defined function block that is used in more than one NE2A program is changed you must rebuild all the programs that use the user defined func tion block to reflect the changes 395 Creating and Reusing Program Objects Section 15 9 Example If program A and program B use the same user defined function block and the user defined function block is changed in program B after program A has been built the changes in the user de fined function block will not be reflected in program A To reflect the changes you must rebuild program A You can restrict access to user defined function blocks to prevent uninten tional changes to them Refer to 7 1 4 User defined Function Block Pass words for the setting procedure Importing User defined Fu
177. using the Network Configurator or a Memory Card COMM Yellow Data transmission reception in progress USB i No data transmission reception in progress MC VALID Yellow A validated Memory Card is inserted A Memory Card is not inserted or the Memory Card has not been validated Power is being supplied to Memory Card Turn OFF the power supply to the Memory Card before removing it Power to the Memory Card is OFF MC BUSY Yellow lt Memory Card access in progress Memory Card access not in progress Soar ON a Flashing m OFF Note Referto SECTION 19 Troubleshooting for information on handling errors 36 Safety CPU Unit Section 3 2 Seven segment Display The 4 digit 7 segment display on the Safety CPU Unit shows the status and error codes for the NE 2A series Controller Status Display Normal Operating mode displayed operation CONFIGURING Operating mode A 4 digit user set ID number for the program RUN mode IDLE mode in the NE2A series Controller is displayed The characters will be displayed if a user program ID number has not been set Operating mode The status of restoring the configuration is CONFIGURATION displayed For details refer to SECTION 20 RESTORE Mode Inspections and Maintenance Errors CRITICAL FAULT Mode The display will alternate between a 4 digit ABORT Mode error code
178. with the wizard Refer to 14 4 Setting the VO Configuration of Individual I O Bits for details on changing the test source test bit or discrepancy time and setting the maintenance parameters 341 Setting the I O Configuration of Individual I O Bits Section 14 4 14 4 Setting the I O Configuration of Individual I O Bits Although the Safety I O bits can be set easily with the wizard this section describes how to make detailed settings for the Safety I O bits The parame ters for the Safety I O bits are set according to the type of Safety Device that is connected to the I O Unit 14 4 1 Setting Safety Output Bits You can set the error latch time for the Safety Output Unit and you can set parameters for individual bits in the Local Output Dialog Box displayed from the I O Unit Tab Page Procedure 1 2 3 1 Inthe Network Configuration Pane select the NE2A SCPU01 CPU Unitto set 2 Select Parameters Edit from the Device Menu The Edit Device Parameters Dialog Box will be displayed 3 Click the I O Unit Tab The I O Unit Tab Page will be displayed Edit Device Parameters Communication Unit Mode Cycle Time Extend Mode Logic Safety Connections Safety Slave 120 Slave 1 0 DeviceNet Target 1 0 EtherNet IP 1 0 Unit Configuration Slot Unit Type NE24 SOD04 1 02 NE24 SIDO4 1 03 a Gory 4 Inthe Slotcolumn of the tab page select the slot of the Output Unit to set and then click the Edit Button The Local
179. 0 e NE24 ENS21 NE24 DNS21 Ta t Message Code Date Description i MSG 0200 2009 02 25 11 33 19 Download of device parameter was completed E MsG 0300 2009 02 25 11 32 38 Network download was completed lt Ready LiNEZA_Backplane T NE2A Backplane NEZA TOOLBUS NE2A SCPUO1 115200 Bit s On line Moving to Maintenance Mode The icons displayed at this time indicate the following status Gray with white border Online status Gray with green border Default status not configured Green Idle status Blue Normal execution status Yellow Warning status g Red Alarm status Refer to 9 6 2 Network Configuration Pane for details on the status Refreshing the Device Status Display The display of device status is refreshed automatically if any of the following operations is executed in the Network Configurator e Uploading the network Downloading the network Downloading parameters e Updating maintenance information e Changing the device mode RUN IDLE e Resetting a device The display can also be refreshed at any time while connected online by selecting Update Device Status from the Network Menu 470 Monitoring Device Status in Maintenance Mode Section 18 2 Automatic Refreshing of Device Status Display When the Network Configurator is connected to the system and is connected online device information is received automatically and can be displayed To have the device status refreshed and dis
180. 00 Mbps fixed Full duplex Half duplex 100 DeviceNet and EtherNet IP Routing Section 5 3 5 3 DeviceNet and EtherNet IP Routing 5 3 1 Routing between DeviceNet and EtherNet IP Networks Note Safety Communications and Standard Communications cannot be used to route data transmissions between NE 2A series DeviceNet Safety Units and EtherNet IP Safety Units To transfer data between a DeviceNet Safety Unit and an EtherNet IP Safety Unit with Safety Communications additional programming is required for example to apply the values of input variables to output variables Data can be transferred with Standard Communications by allocating DeviceNet Master input data data for monitoring to EtherNet IP tag link data eliminating the need to create a program to copy the data Explicit message communications can be used to route transmissions between Communications Units 5 3 2 Routing with an Ethernet Switching Hub Same Network Addresses Different Network Addresses This section explains EtherNet IP communications routing with an OMRON W4S 1 series Ethernet Switching Hub Safety Communications can be used when the connection type is set to either Single Cast or Multicast Standard Communications can be used when the connection type is set to either Point to Point or Multicast However you cannot specify the delay for calculating the response time when the connection type is set to Multicast
181. 01 03 ResetLamp The comments set in this dialog box are used as I O tags in the Logic Ed itor Edit the comments for the output bits and then click the OK Button 7 Click the Next Button in the Safety I O Wizard Output Bits Dialog Box The dialog box displaying the settings of input bits a ire displayed Safety VO Wizard iint Bits r f Finish Edit Edit Output Bits Input Bits Confirm Configuration Please select a device type that you would like to connect with each bit Slot Bit Mode Comment Type 00 02 01 EMO 2b 02 02 EMO 1b 02 03 Feedback 01 00 Door SW 2NC Door SW INC IND Door SW 1NC Limit SW 2NC Limits INC ING Limit SW INC Enable SW 2ND Enable 2NO 2NO Edit Comment e Dual Equiv ct Dual Comp mJDual Mat Ph Test Pulse s Safety ST Standard lt Back Next gt Cancel Note The number of input bits depends on the number of Input Units that is set Number of bits Number of Input Units x 4 338 Setting the I O Configuration from the Wizard Section 14 3 8 Inthe Safety I O Wizard Input Bits Dialog Box specify the type of the de vice to connect to each input bit You can specify any of the following types Device type Description EMO 2b 1 Used to connect two inputs from the Emergency Stop Button EMO 1b Used for one input from the Emergency Stop Button Door SW 2NC 1 Used for two NC contact inputs from a door switch
182. 0214 031C Logic error in configuration da lt gt Update J Clear l Save 484 Monitoring DeviceNet Units Updating the Error History Clearing the Error History Saving the Error History Section 18 3 The items displayed on the tab page are described in the following table Description Displays the conduction time of the device when the error occurred Time of Error Error Information Displays the error code Detailed Information Displays detailed information on the error code Content Describes the error Click the Update Button to monitor the most recent error history Click the Clear Button to delete the error history saved in the DeviceNet Unit The error history information can be saved in the CSV format Click the Save Button to save the error history 485 Monitoring EtherNet IP Units Section 18 4 18 4 Monitoring EtherNet IP Units Description You can monitor detailed information such as the status of the EtherNet IP Unit or devices and also the error history Monitoring an EtherNet IP Unit with the Network Configurator Procedure 1 2 3 1 Select the NE2A ENS21 device whose status is to be monitored NEzA_Backplane_1 Devicenet_1 EtherNet 1P_1 ie me ow aA 00 1 i 0 NE24 SCPUO NE24 ENS21 NE24 DNS21 Tt lt Ta Zo 2 Select Monitor from the Device Menu You can also right click the device and select Monitor from the pop up menu
183. 1 Select Settings Target I O from the Device Menu of the Logic Editor The Target Slave I O Settings Dialog Box will be displayed 2 Click the Slave I O DeviceNet Tab The Slave I O DeviceNet Tab will be displayed in the Target Slave I O S et tings Dialog Box 3 Click the New Input Button or New Output Button The Edit Slave I O Di alog Box will be displayed The procedures for adding changing and deleting I O assemblies are the same as the procedures in 11 7 1 Registering I O Assemblies for Standard Slaves 11 7 4 Setting Slave Input Data in IDLE Mode You can set to hold or clear the previous data in any of the following cases for input assembles transferred from an NE 2A series Standard Slave to a Stan dard Master e The NE2A series Controller is changed from RUN Mode to IDLE Mode e A communications error or other error is detected in a safety chain that sets data to I O tags of input assemblies 277 Communications between an NE2A series Controller and a Standard Master Section 11 8 11 8 Communications between an NE2A series Controller and a Standard Master This section describes how to makes settings to perform communications with a Standard Master device such as a Standard PLC with an NE 2A series Controller used as a Standard Slave NE 2A series Controller CS C PLC Standard Master Register the NE2A DeviceNet series Controller to a Standard PLC asa a aaa Standard Slave Co Co Co D es
184. 1 J 00 NE2ZA SCPUO1 No configuration differences Found lt 4 Click the OK Button A message box will be displayed to indicate the progress of conversion to HTML Generating to HTML Format 439 Verifying Parameters and Checking Safety Signatures Section 17 4 After the HTML data is created the uploaded parameters will be displayed Configuration Report 400 NE2A SCPU01 Save l Print J Close Configuration Report 00 NEZA SCPU01 Generated by Network Configurator 00 NE2ZA SCPUO1 General Information Product Name NE2A SCPUO1 Description D No Data Node Address 70 Vendor Omron Corporation Device Type Safety Network Controller Prodact Code 1413 Revision 1 01 Parameters Signature Code E1314F0B Last Modified 2009 02 10 19 01 10 875 Ox34F3 Ox0414C85B Safety Connection List You can check all displayed parameters and confirm if they match the input values Note e You can save the results of verification To save the results click the Save Button at the top left of the window e You can also print the displayed parameters and logic To print click the Print Button e The displayed parameters may not fit into the specified size during print ing If this occurs edit the saved file with software for editing HTML files and then print it 5 After checking the parameters click the Close Button at the top left of the window and close the window
185. 168 250 3 CJ1W EIP21 CJ2 1 39 2 22 0 060 0 099 Mbi 0 Set Packet Interval RPI Total usage of IP multicast addresses 3 Network Total of Max Mbit s 0 155Mbit s 326 Verifying the Safety Response Performance Reaction Time Section 13 4 13 4 Verifying the Safety Response Performance Reaction Time The Network Configurator checks the following values and calculates the safety response performance reaction time e NE2A series Controller Instruction Execution Cycle Time e NE2A series Controller Peripheral Servicing Cycle Time e Network Reaction Time Check the safety response performance of each safety chain based on the formulas and calculation examples in 8 2 2 Calculating the Reaction Time Checking the Network Reaction Time The Network Configurator automatically calculates the Safety Connection net work reaction time when the EPI is set Procedure 1 2 3 1 Select the Target NE2A series CPU Unit in the Network Configuration Pane 2 Select Device Parameter Edit The Edit Device Parameters Dialog Box will be displayed 3 Click the Safety Connections Tab in the Edit Device Parameters Dialog Box and check the Reaction Time Edit Device Parameters Slave 1 0 DeviceNet Target 1 0 EtherNet IP 140 Unit Communication Unit Mode Cycle Time Extend Mode Logic Safety Connections Safety Slave 1 0 Connections 20 160 Se v Auto allocation Register Device List Product Name EPI Re
186. 23 Remote I O Allocations Section 5 8 Data That Can Be Setin an Output Assembly Reference Allocatable units Variables Input variable BOOL BYTE WORD or DWORD Status Safety Connection communications reopen switch eAll BOOL connection Remote Stan DeviceNet Master I O Output data Communications Unit dard 1 0 5 8 3 Data Elements Setin Assemblies Status Related Data 1 General Status This is the status of the NE2A series Controller Description Overall Unit status Executing normal program This bit is an AND of the following bits 1 2 3 4 and 5 There is an error there is a connection that is not established or a program has stopped I O status Normal This bit will be ON if bits 0 1 2 3 and 4 in 2 Error Status are all OFF Error Safety I O Communica An AND ofthe I O communications status for the Safety Master and the tions status Safety Slave is given Safety Master In normal execution or communications not set Safety Slave In normal execution or communications not executed ON if no Communications Unit is mounted An AND of the I O communications status for the Safety Master and the Safety Slave is given Safety Master An error occurred or communications not executed Safety Slave An error occurred Standard I O Communi An AND of the communications status of the DeviceNet Standard Master cations status DeviceNet Standard Slave and EtherNet IP tag data link
187. 3 9 6 4 9 6 5 Man Window eect aa vehi es heres Ha gebhuesitdecnt we Network Configuration Pane 0 00 00 eee eee Network Configuration List 00 0 0000005 Menu Commands 0 00 e eee eee eee ee StAtUs Bare igs ieee bob ste Ebsco sel fase E Ea NN e nowhere bub eee bes SECTION 9 Basic Network Configurator Operations 194 194 194 195 195 196 198 198 207 207 208 210 210 212 214 216 217 218 218 218 221 222 228 193 Checking before Installation Section 9 1 9 1 Checking before Installation Before installing the Network Configurator check items such as system requirements 9 1 1 System Requirements To install the Network Configurator the following system requirements must be satisfied The applicable operating systems depend on the version of the Network Configurator System requirements Operating system Windows XP Service Pack 3 or higher except for 64 bit ver OS Japanese or sion English Windows Vista Service Pack 2 or higher Windows 7 Computer A computer with a processor recommended by Microsoft Corporation Memory The memory capacity recommended by Microsoft Corporation Hard disk At least 200 MB of available space is required Display SVGA 800 x 600 pixels or better high resolution display with at least 256 colors Disk drives CD ROM drive Mouse A mouse or other pointing devices that is compatible with Windows is required
188. 3 Switching Hubs These switching hubs use the Ethernet or IP addresses to switch ports 5 10 2 Switching Hub Functionality This section describes the switching hub functionality that is important when using an EtherNet IP network Make a selection by dividing the switching hubs as follows according to functionality when using an EtherNet IP Unit e L2 switching hub without multicast filtering e L2 switching hub with multicast filtering e L3 switching hub with multicast filtering and L4 QoS Multicast Filtering The multicast filter transfers multicast packets to the specific nodes only This function is implemented in the switching hub as IGMP snooping or GMRP Specific nodes are the nodes that support an IGMP client that have made transfer requests to the switching hub NE2A series Controllers and EtherNet IP Units support an IGMP client When the hub does notuse multicast filtering multicast packets are sent to all nodes just like broadcast packets which increases the traffic on the network Settings must be made in the switching hub to enable this function QoS Quality of Service for TCP UDP Port Numbers This function controls the priority of packet transmissions so that packets can be sent with higher priority to a particular IP addresses or TCP UDP port The TCP and UDP protocols are called transport layer protocols leading to the name L4 layer 4 QoS When Safety Communications or Tag Data Links and message communica
189. 3 Monitoring DeviceNet Units 18 3 1 Monitoring DeviceNet Units Description You can monitor detailed information such as the status of the DeviceNet Unit or individual devices and also error histories Monitoring DeviceNet Units from the Network Configurator Procedure 1 2 3 1 Select the NE2A DNS21 device whose status is to be monitored NE2A_Backplane_1 Devicenet_1 EtherNet IP_1 00 1 1 I 1 i 0 i NE24 SCPUO1 NE24 ENS21 NE24 amp DNS21 ta Ya 00 2 Select Monitor from the Device Menu You can also right click the device and select Monitor from the pop up menu Or you can click the Monitor Device Icon 34 in the toolbar The Monitor Device Dialog Box will be displayed The tab pages and details are described below Status Tab Page The following tab page will be displayed when you click the Status Tab in the Monitor Device Dialog Box Monitor Device Status Unit Status Communication Cycle Time Error History Master Status Z Remote 1 0 Communication Running Message Communication Permitted Slave Status 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 1213 141516171819 fi 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 6061 6263 lt EEE v 4 Select Node ID Femte 1 0 Communication Running 480 Monitoring DeviceNet Units Section 18 3
190. 4 Creating Program Projects Section 15 4 Author Company Comment Creation date 6 7 2008 3 29 17 PM Last updated date OK Cancel The date and time when the project was first opened or created will be dis played for the creation date and the date and time when the project was last saved will be displayed for the last updated date 2 Inputthe author company name and comment and then click the OK But ton Note Up to 256 characters 256 bytes max can be used for the author company name and comment 365 Creating Variables Section 15 5 15 5 Creating Variables A NE2A series Safety Network Controller uses variables instead of I O com ments when creating programs By using variables you can make programs without considering memory addresses I O allocations or connection settings This improves the reusabil ity of program logic because I O addresses are not used directly Er Jox Fie ER vew Project Dever Esbe V ibie Library Widow Hep Sn tst toe BOG elelalm aaa aog Ss nade z Protect 9x Sectiont x Votis x nezasceunt a Sea r ai heme get TEREN Ooa 15 5 1 Creating and Editing Variables 15 5 2 Exporting and Importing Vari Wo Topti 5x Function Blocks vax ables 1 aaa ma A E ASer Ei Function bods Lig Opt 3 Watch x Cross Referee Ix None vas Variable Furion Block Section Functions Blocks 0 1600 Variables 0 3072 Proz arn Sioe
191. 4 Select the Use the existing network Option and select the network name to be associated 5 Click the OK Button The network associations will be made 243 Registering DeviceNet Units to the CPU Unit Section 11 2 as s3 _ NE2A_Backplane_1 D Device Nefsl bunu sunus gt P f 00 01 02 DSTI ID12SL 1 DSTI ID12SL 1 NE2A DNS21 a The NE2A DNS21 will be added to the network 244 DeviceNet Network Settings Section 11 3 11 3 DeviceNet Network Settings More than one Communications Unit can be connected in an NE2A series Controller so itis often necessary to manage multiple networks This section describes how to make settings for network numbers and node addresses to manage DeviceNet networks DeviceNet DeviceNet DeviceNet 11 3 1 Setting Network Addresses Here we will make the settings for the DeviceNet network created in 11 2 1 Associating the CPU Unit and DeviceNet Units Network Numbers Network numbers are used in configurations with more than one DeviceNet network to uniquely identify devices To uniquely identify devices a Target Unique Network Identifier TUNID value that combines the network number and the device node address is used For details refer to 5 2 2 DeviceNet Communications Setting Network Numbers 1 2 3 1 Select Properties from the Network Menu The Network Property Dialog Box will be displayed Network Property Generic P Type De
192. 6 E Overall width mm 219 5 15 x A B 31 x C D Height 90 mm Depth 113 mm including connectors E Weight g 850 90 x A 95xB 118xC 100xD Front a Side 90 mm Power Communications Units CPU Unit 1 0 Units 95 mm Supply Unit 31mm x No of Units 120 mm 15 mm x No of Units 113 mm 80 mm End Unit 19 5 mm 34 Safety CPU Unit Section 3 2 3 2 Safety CPU Unit 3 2 1 Nomenclature NE2A SCPUO1 Indicators Seven segment display RUN STOP RESTART switch Memory Card power supply switch omron NE2A SC SAFETY NETWORK C Memory Card DIP switch SERVICE switch Communications Unit connector N USB port under Memory Card cover Memory Card slot Safety I O connector 3 2 2 Indicators Indicators I Power supply terminal block The status indicators on the NE 2A series Safety CPU Unit show the operating status of the Safety CPU Unit program and Memory Card Indicator name MS Module Status Green red Meaning Indicates the operating status of the CPU Unit RUN Green Lit when the program is being executed FORCE Yellow Lit when force setting resetting enabled PERR Red Lit when there is a program error LOCK Yellow Lit when the configuration is locked COMM Yellow Flashing when USB data is being sent or received MC VALID Yellow Lit when the user has verified that the in
193. 68 250 Host ID set on IP address setting switches To change the network ID refer to Setting the IP Address from the Network Configurator in the next section Setting the IP Address from the Network Configurator Set the IP address from the TCP IP Settings Dialog Box of the Network Con figurator with the Network Configurator connected online 286 EtherNet IP Network Settings Section 12 3 Procedure 1 2 3 1 Setthe IP address setting switches on the EtherNet Unit to the host ID of the IP address to be set IP address Network ID default 192 168 250 Host ID 2 Display the EtherNet IP Tab Page in the Network Configuration Pane and select the EtherNet IP Unit to be set EtherNet 1P_1 NEzA_Backplane_1 Devi 192 168 250 1 NE24 ENS21 A er 3 Select Reset from the Device Menu Reset Device Reset Type Emulate cycling power Return to the out of box configuration and then Emulate Cycling POWER mem Cancel 4 Selectthe Return to the out of box configuration Option and then click the OK Button 5 Select Setup TCP IP Configuration from the Tools Menu Tools Option Help 3 Setup Parameters Setup TCP IP Configuration Y IMPORTANT The Setup TCP IP Configuration command will be displayed if the Tool Menu is selected from the EtherNet IP Tab Page in the Network Configuration Pane The TCP IP Settings Dialog Box will be displayed Setup TCP IP Configuration Target IP Address
194. 87 network menu 224 network number settings 233 network numbers 95 Network Property Dialog Box 233 245 network reaction time 173 313 320 Network Status Area 487 network system configuration 92 network upload 437 New User Function Block Dialog Box 394 New Variable Dialog Box 303 node address 97 node address duplication error 97 node address switch 48 non fatal errors 496 non safety data 107 115 normal status 126 Not Used 141 152 number of local I O points 140 O online connection 425 online monitoring 464 open type 104 operating modes 68 operation and maintenance using a Memory Card 161 operation rights for user defined function blocks 394 option menu 227 Output Bits Dialog Box 337 output terminals 64 output variables 381 P page setup 404 parameter protection 236 password 158 password for network configuration files 214 password protection for network configuration files 214 periodic inspection points 542 peripheral servicing cycle time 181 311 point to point connection 115 Poll 109 power supply terminal block 39 Power Supply Unit 43 precautions when selecting a switching hub 137 preferred DNS server 99 print preview 403 printer settings 404 printing 402 program execution delay 75 program execution delay time 236 program size 85 Program Window 465 project file 398 project file password 158 Index Protection Mode 216
195. A series Controller is RUN the operating mode of the device will not change even if the switch is changed from STOP to RUN If the switch is in the STOP position and the operating mode of the NE2A series Controller is STOP the operating mode of the device will change if the switch is changed from STOP to RUN RESTART The NE2A series Controller will be restarted if the switch is pressed from the STOP position to the RESTART side for 1s or longer The switch will return to the STOP position Memory Card Slot A special Memory Card can be inserted When you take out the Memory Card use the following procedure to make sure that the power supply to the Memory Card is stopped 1 2 3 1 Press the Memory Card power supply switch 2 Check that the MC PWR indicator turns OFF A Dust Cover is included Memory Card Models Memory capacity Remarks HMC EF183 128 MBytes The supported Memory Card HMC EF283 256 MBytes formatis FAT 16 HMC EF583 512 MBytes Memory Card Power Supply Switch This switch is used to stop the power supply to the Memory Card 3 2 4 Interfaces USB Port The port complies with USB version 1 1 USB bus power is not supplied A Dust Cover is included Power Supply Terminal Block This terminal block is used to supply power for the internal circuits and input circuits m Power Supply Terminal Block Signal Arrangement Terminal Function Power supply terminal for internal circuits 24 VDC
196. A series Backplane after creating the EtherNet IP network Q NE2A_Backplane_1 EtherNet IP_1 i M oe 00 0 7a NE24 ENS21 T a Association NE24 SCPUO1 n Xa CO NE2A_Backplane V C EtherNet IP_1 192 168 250 1 192 168 250 2 CJTW EIP21 CJTW EIP21 1 Add a NE2A ENS21 to the NE2A series Backplane of the NE2A series Controller 2 Select the NE2A ENS21 3 Select Register to Routing Network from the Device Menu You can also right click the NE2A ENS21 and select Register to Routing Network from the menu The Select Network Dialog Box will be displayed Registering EtherNet IP Units to the CPU Unit Section 12 2 Select Network Target Network Create new network Use the existing network EtherNet IP_1 OK Cancel 4 Select the Use the existing network Option and select the network name to be associated 5 Click the OK Button The network associations will be made x NE2A Backplane Ethel N E7IP T tnt z E E o 192 168 250 1 192 168 250 2 192 168 250 3 GJ1W EIP21 GJIW EIP21 NE2A ENS21 ra The NE2A ENS 21 will be added to the network 285 EtherNet IP Network Settings Section 12 3 12 3 EtherNet IP Network Settings More than one Communications Unit can be connected in an NE 2A series Controller so itis often necessary to manage multiple networks This section describes how to make TCP IP settings to manage EtherNet IP networks Et
197. AAAAAAAAAAAAA_01_00_DeviceNet__001 TagNameAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAA_01_00_DeviceNet__ 002 If a variable with the same name already exists the next number will be assigned If 999 is exceeded an error will occur 79 Creating Variables Section 4 3 Variable Specifications The following table gives the specifications of the variables that can be used in the program Specifications Number of vari Total 2 048 max excluding system variables ables that can be if all variables are BOOL data 2 048 defined If all variables are BYTE data 256 2 048 8 If all variables are WORD data 128 2 048 16 If all variables are DWORD data 64 2 048 32 BOOL 1 byte of data consisting of one Boolean bit BYTE 1 byte of data consisting of eight Boolean bits WORD 2 bytes of data consisting of 16 Boolean bits DWORD 4 bytes of data consisting of 32 Boolean bit Variable names Up to 48 characters 48 bytes can be used With BYTE WORD and DWORD data 48 byte names can be set for individual bits in the configuration Names are not case sensitive when ASCII characters are used The following characters cannot be used L amp N ti lt gt 7 0 Also the following cannot be used The first character cannot be a number Reserved characters Examples of using variable data types are shown below BOOL Data In this example the variable ESTOP1 is setas BOOL data It can be used as ES
198. Applicable to this device only is set e The Memory Card that contains the Configuration R estore File is inserted and the user confirms that it is the correct Configuration Restore File e The configuration information of the NE1A NEOA series Controller that is set as the Target is included in the Configuration Restore File 164 Operation and Maintenance Using a Memory Card Section 7 2 Starting and Stopping Execution of All NE_lA series Controllers on the Networks Global Change The RUN STOP RESTART switch can be used to start or stop program exe cution of not only the NE2A series Controller whose switch is operated but also for the other NE1A series and NEOA series Controllers on the same net works e Devices connected to the networks are set as the Targets for starting and stopping program execution by the RUN STOP RESTART switch in the NE2A series system settings i e Applicable to all devices on the net work is set e A Memory Card that contains the Configuration Restore File is inserted and the user confirms that it is the correct Configuration Restore File e The configuration information of the NE1A NE0A series Controller that is set as the Target is included in the Configuration Restore File Note 1 Restarting program execution applies only to the NE2A series Control lers It cannot be applied globally 2 If the configuration restore function is also used device replacement and system restarting can
199. Bit Comments on page 304 in the following section A new variable will be added to the list of data that can be registered in the Target I O EtherNet IP Dialog Box Edit Target 1 0 EtherNet IP Name InputAssembly1 Data uh Variable _ E S DATA_M e e DATA_D2 ty P ay Stats I Sy Remote Sager r t Sa Dumny Data The new variable will be displayed Resister Unregister_ New Variable Edit Variable Editing Bit Comments 1 2 3 1 Click the Edit Bit Comment Button The Edit Bit Comment Dialog Box will be displayed Edit Bit Comment Output Input Ok Cancel 2 Enter a comment for each bit and press the Enter Key 3 Click the OK Button The bit comments will be set Note Up to 48 characters 48 bytes can used for the bit comment The characters that can be input are the same as those that can be input for variables Refer to Variable Specifications on page 80 304 Using an NE2A series Controller as a Standard Slave Section 12 7 Editing You can edit registered variables For information on the procedure refer to Creating New Variables on page 303 above Changing the Order of Registered Data You can change the order of registered data Procedure 1 2 3 1 Select the registered data that you will change the order of 2 Clickthe Button move up or Button move down The registered data that is selected will move Example Name Type Size Name T
200. Check the level of vibra tion or shock Vibration and shock must be within speci fications Refer to 3 1 Install cushioning or shock absorbing equipment if necessary Check for noise sources near the Controller No significant noise sources Refer to 3 1 Either separate the Controller and noise source or protect the Controller Installation and wiring Check that each Unit is connected and locked to the next Unit securely No looseness Refer to SECTION 16 Press the connectors together com pletely and lock them with the sliders Check that cable con nectors are fully inserted and locked No looseness Refer to SECTION 16 Correct any improperly installed connec tors 542 Check for loose screws in external wiring No looseness Tighten loose screws with a Phillips screwdriver NE2A series Unit Replacement Precautions Section 20 2 20 2 NE2A series Unit Replacement Precautions When replacing an NE2A series Unit after discovering a problem during inspection pay attention to the following points Do not attempt to disassemble repair or modify the Unit Doing so may impair the original safety functions e Make sure that safety can be assured when replacing the Unit e To prevent electric shock or unexpected operation always turn OFF the power before replacing the Unit After replacing the Unit check the new Unit to make sure that there are no
201. Communications Unit you can perform online operations such as uploading and downloading parameters not only with the connected network but also with any other net works that the connected device is part of A system connected to more than one network DeviceNet_1 EtherNet_1 and DeviceNet_2 as shown in the following figure is described below NE2A series Controller Se NE 2A series Controller m DeviceNet_1 DeviceNet_2 Displaying the Network Connection Window When the Network Configurator is connected to a network you can identify the online network by the color of the Connected Network Identifier on the Network Configuration Pane SEP Na l NE2A_Backplane_1 Devicenet_1 Ethernet 1P_1 DeviceNet_2 oe m Connected network Usable network Unusable network Color of the Connected Description Network Identifier The identifier changes to this gray either when the Net work Configurator is offline or when the network is not connected online Indicates a network to which the Network Configurator is directly connected online Indicates a network that is indirectly connected online via a router device on another online network Indicates the error status of a network If you want to communicate perform operations with a network whose Con nected Network Identifier is gray you must
202. Connection Name cont Connection 1 0 Type Output and Input Packet Interval RPI 40 0 ins 0 5 10000 0 ms Timeout Value Packet Interval RPI x 4 Input from Target Device Consume Variable 0011 2Byte Produce Variable Input Assembly 0 2Byte Connection Type Multi cast connection Output to Target Device Produce Variable 0020 2Byte Consume Variable Output Assembly 0 2Byte Connection Type Point to Point connection Originator Device Target Device Node Address 192 168 250 3 Node Address 192 168 250 1 Comment CJ1 w EIP21 CJ2 Comment NE24 ENS21 OK Cancel 4 Input a new packet interval RPI value and click the OK Button Reconfirming the Bandwidth Use Rate If the connection settings have been changed click the Detail Button in the Usage of Device Bandwidth Area at the bottom of the Network Configuration Pane Verify that the allowed communications bandwidth used Usage of Capacity is less than 100 and that the Mbit s value is less than the baud rate of the Ethernet It is particularly important to check the Usage of Capacity when an individual connection s packet interval RPI setting was changed rather than all set at the same time Usage of Device Bandwidth Comment Usage of Capac Mbit s without Usage of IP mult P 192 168 250 1 NE24 ENS21 2 93 3 21 0 131 0 143 Mbi 2 p 192 168 250 2 NE24 ENS21 2 65 3 07 0 119 0 136 Mbi 1 p 192
203. Connections 000002000 111 5 7 EtherNet IP Standard Communications 000000000 113 5 7 1 Outline of EtherNet IP Tag Data Link Communications 113 5 7 2 Setting Tag Data Link Connections 0 114 5 8 Remote I O Allocations 0 0 c cece eee 121 5 8 1 Outline of Remote I O Allocations 004 121 5 8 2 Configuring Assemblies 0 0 0 0 0 00 eee ee eee 122 5 8 3 Data Elements Set in Assemblies 0000 124 5 9 Operation after a Communications Error 000000 136 5 9 1 Data and Operation after a Communications Error 136 5 10 Selecting the Ethernet Switching Hub 0 00 137 5 10 1 Switching Hub Types 0 0 137 5 10 2 Switching Hub Functionality 000 137 5 10 3 Precautions When Selecting a Switching Hub 137 91 Designing the Network System Configuration 5 1 Designing the Network System Configuration 92 This section describes DeviceNet Safety Communications DeviceNet Stan dard Communications EtherNet IP Safety Communications and EtherNet IP Standard Communications that can be used with the NE 2A series Controllers The following points must be considered when designing the network system configuration Section 5 1 Select DeviceNet or EtherNet IP e Select the communications protocol based o
204. D Network Configurator S DeviceNet Hardware S EtherNet IP Hardware amp NE2A_Backplane Hardware S Us Vendor Le Omron Corporation Li DeviceType Commun 00 NE24 SCPUO1 oa Safety Network Controller NE24 SCPUOT 2 Select the NE2A DNS21 added in step 1 241 Registering DeviceNet Units to the CPU Unit Section 11 2 3 Select Register to Routing Network from the Device Menu You can also right click the NE2A DNS21 and select Register to Routing Network from the menu A dialog box will be displayed to confirm whether to add to the network Network Configurator 1 4 network will be added as new one e OK Yes 4 Click the Yes button A DeviceNet Tab will be added to the Network Configuration Pane Q NE2A_Backplane_1 Devicenet_D D Network Configurator DeviceNet Hardware E EtherNet IP Hardware f J NE2A_Backplane Hardware E E B Vendor 00 0 5 Omron Corporation NE2A SCPU01 e G B DeviceType Sa Communications Adapter NE2A DNS21 NE24 ENS21 F Safety Network Controller 3 NE24 5CPU01 Note The slot numbers of the device parameters will be assigned in the order that the Communications Unit is added to the NE2A Backplane Change the slot number to match the actual configuration by using the tab page for the Com munications Unit in the Edit Device Parameters Dialog Box This dialog box is displayed by selecting Parameter Edit from the Device Menu
205. DLE Download starts 69 NE2A series Controller Status Transitions Section 4 1 4 1 3 Functions Supported in Each Operating Mode The following table shows the status of each NE 2A series Controller operating mode and the operations that are supported from the Network Configurator in each mode Operating Safety functions Standard Operations from Network Configurator mode functions Safety I O Communications Local I O controls including test output tenninals Standard I O Communications Message communications Configuration download Configuration lock unlock Password changes Online monitoring Force setting resetting variables RUN Mode Exe Sup Sup Sup cuted ported ported ported See IDLE Mode Stopped note 4 CONFIGUR Stopped Stopped ING Mode CONFIGURA Not TION sup RESTORE ported Mode ABORT Mode Sup ported CRITICAL Stopped Not FAULT Mode sup INITIALIZING ported Mode Note 1 Local I O are OFF in IDLE mode 2 The safe state means the following Local safety outputs are OFF e Safety I O communications data is OFF 3 The configuration can be downloaded and locked only from the NE2A CPU Unit not by using the Network Configurator 4 Whether resetting is possible depends on the reset type and on the con figuration settings For details refer to 4 2 1 Resetting 5 Force set reset can be performed only wh
206. Devices must be locked e The operating mode before turning OFF the power supply must be RUN Mode If you change the device parameters after unlocking the configuration make sure to lock the configuration again after verifying the parameters IMPORTANT The slave input signals can be reflected in the program when the program is executed automatically by enabling the program execution delay Refer to 4 2 2 Setting NE2A series Operation at Startup 453 Resetting Devices Section 17 8 17 8 Resetting Devices You may not be able to reconfigure a device because information such as the TUNID is recorded in a device that has been configured You must therefore reset the device to its default settings This section describes how to reset Safety Devices 17 8 1 Resetting a Device You can reset a device by using the following procedure A device can be reset only when the Network Configurator is connected online Procedure 1 2 3 1 Select one or more devices in the Network Configuration of the Network Configurator 2 Select Reset from the Device Menu You can also right click the device and select Reset from the pop up menu The Reset Device Dialog Box will be displayed The Reset Device Dialog Box fora CPU Unit is shown below Reset 00 NE2A SCPU01 Reset Type Emulate cycling power E Return to the out of box configuration and then emulate cycling power _ Return to the out of box configuration except to
207. Drag the variable that you want to insert from the variable list in the Vari able Window 3 Drop the variable in the desired position in the Program Window 376 Creating Programs Note Section 15 6 Input variables displayed x mariables Ix Dls DEEE DataType Beviees OTage ween 8 BOOL NE2A S 00 P e EStop1 Pou f eee Drag the variable to insert no tts ees BOO NEQASOP n 0PeHeStorz 7 amp ind BOOL NE2A SCP 03 N Feedback 7 in3 BOOL NE24 SCP 02 N Reset1 Drop it at the insertion location Ecru Est FS Section lt gt YO Tag List vax DB NE2A SCPU01 Local 1 0 slot 2 NE2A SID04 1 5 Safety Input 5 00 P e EStop 1 S 01 P e EStop 2 S 02 N Reset1 When a variable is used in a program the variable name will change to bold in the Variable Window If an I O tag is assigned to a variable the I O tag name in the I O Tag List Window will change to bold Inserting Variables from I O Tags Procedure 1 2 3 Variables can be directly pasted in sections of the P rogram Window from the I O tag list in the I O Tag List Window 1 Drag the I O tag that you want to insert from the I O Tag List Window 2 Drop the I O tag in the desired position in the Program Window The vari able allocated to the I O will be added to the Variable Window vx Variables amp Section1 mZ EStop 1_0_1_Devic
208. E 2A series Controller in function blocks The NE2A series Controller supports the follow ing function blocks including all function blocks that are supported by the NE1A series Controllers For details on function block specifications refer to the Command Reference Manual Cat No Z920 Function Blocks for Logic Functions Function Block Description Compatibility Abbreviation Name NOT Outputs the logical complement of the input condition NE1A compatible AND Outputs the logical AND of the input conditions NE1A compatible OR Outputs the logical OR of the input conditions NE1A compatible NAND Outputs the logical complement of the logical AND of the input NEW conditions NOR Outputs the logical complement of the logical OR of the input NEW conditions Exclusive OR Outputs the exclusive OR of the input conditions NE1A compatible Exclusive NOR Outputs the exclusive NOR of the input conditions NE1A compatible Reset Set F lip Flop When the input turns ON RS FF holds the ON status in the function block and the output continues to Output E nable When RESET is turned ON the signal held in the function block turns OFF NE1A compatible Comparator Comparator Compares multiple signals with the comparison value set in the configuration and outputs when all the signals match the set value NE1A compatible Fun Comparator2 ction Blocks for Timer
209. E24 SODO4 1 IMa Remote Standard 1 0 _ Status Network DeviceNet_1 3 Bue Input Mode Channel Mode Not used Single Channel Test pulse from test out Dual Channel Equivalent Used as Safety input Dual Channel Complementary Used as standard input Output mode Not used MAT Channel Mode Single Channel Dual Channel Safety Safety pulse test Switching Displays You can switch the display between input variables output variables and internal variables by clicking the buttons at the top of the Variable Window You can also sort the data by clicking on the column header by Name Data Type Device or I O Tag You can arrange the data in ascending or descend ing order by clicking on the header 370 Creating Variables Changing Types Procedure 1 2 3 Section 15 5 Variables 4x mene I Changes the display Name Data Type Device I O Tag _0_0 BOOL NE24 S 00 S e Sort data by clicking on a header The input variable output variable and internal variable types can be changed 1 Selectthe variable for which you wantto change the type from the Variable Window 2 Select Change Variable Type from the Variable Menu and selectthe type or press the shortcut key and select Change Variable Type and the type from the menu The name and data type will be retained after changing the type but the I O tag allocation will be cance
210. E2A ENS21 192 168 250 2 CJ1W E1P21 CJ2 4 Input the packet interval and click the OK Button e The EPIs for all Safety Connections in the specified EtherNet IP net works will be set e The RPIs for all Tag Data Link Connections in the specified EtherNet IP networks will be set Changing the EPI for Each Safety Connection The EPI can be set for each EtherNet IP Safety Connection Procedure 1 2 3 1 Select the NE2A series CPU Unit that has the EtherNet IP connection to be changed NE2A_Backplane_1 DeviceNet_1 DeviceNet_2 EtherNet IP_v C NE2A_Backplane_2 w f 00 0 NE24 SCPUO1 NE24 ENS21 a 2 Select Device Parameter Edit The following Edit Device Parameters Dialog Box will be displayed 322 Checking the Communications Response Performance Section 13 3 Edit Device Parameters Slave 0 DeviceNet Target 1 0 EtherNet IP 140 Unit Communication Unit Mode Cycle Time Extend Mode Logic Safety Connections Safety Slave 70 Connections 2 160 fr E x F Auto allocation Register Device List Product Name EPI Reactio Type Size 00 NE24 SCPUN N Gu nputAssembly0 10ms 50ms In 5 Byte EA Dutput ssembly0 10ms 50ms Out 8 Byte Register Unregisterd OK Cancel Check the EPI values for Safety Connections in the Target EtherNet IP The EPI values will be those setin 12 4 1 Registering Safety Slaves If required adjust the EPI settings for the whole network
211. EtherNet IP Units N WARNING Failure to read and understand the information provided in this manual may result in per sonal injury or death damage to the product or product failure Please read each section in its entirety and be sure you understand the information provided in the section and related sections before attempting any of the procedures or operations given xiii xiv Read and Understand this Manual Please read and understand this manual before using the product Please consult yourOMRON representative if you have any questions or comments Warranty and Limitations of Liability WARRANTY OMRON s exclusive warranty is that the products are free from defects in materials and workmanship for a period of one year or other period if specified from date of sale by OMRON OMRON MAKES NO WARRANTY OR REPRESENTATION EXPRESS OR IMPLIED REGARDING NON INFRINGEMENT MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR PARTICULAR PURPOSE OF THE PRODUCTS ANY BUYER OR USER ACKNOWLEDGES THAT THE BUYER OR USER ALONE HAS DETERMINED THAT THE PRODUCTS WILL SUITABLY MEET THE REQUIREMENTS OF THEIR INTENDED USE OMRON DISCLAIMS ALL OTHER WARRANTIES EXPRESS OR IMPLIED LIMITATIONS OF LIABILITY OMRON SHALL NOT BE RESPONSIBLE FOR SPECIAL INDIRECT OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES LOSS OF PROFITS OR COMMERCIAL LOSS IN ANY WAY CONNECTED WITH THE PRODUCTS WHETHER SUCH CLAIM IS BASED ON CONTRACT WARRANTY NEGLIGENCE OR STRICT LIABILITY In no
212. File Menu You can also click the Open Network Configuration Button in the toolbar The standard Open File Dialog Box in Windows will be displayed 2 Select the file and click the Open Button The confirm password dialog box will be displayed 3 Enter the password that you set when you saved the network configuration file If the data reading is completed successfully a message such as the fol lowing will be displayed in the Message Report Pane x Message Code Date Description MSG 0100 2008 08 06 14 46 13 Load file was completed Download Configuration to Network LiDeviceNet T Unknown OMRO TOOLBUS CJ2 CPUxx 115200 Bit s Off line cE RE A Ny Selecting a Network and Reading the Network Configuration File Procedure 1 2 3 1 Select Open from the File Menu You can also click the Open Network Configuration Button in the toolbar The standard Open Dialog Box in Windows will be displayed 212 Saving and Reading Network Configuration Files Section 9 5 2 3 Look ih work a Sample080421 Test080519 Test080519 02 Files of type Network Configuration File v3 nvf Cancel Open E Select target network Cl Add ta current network Select the Add to current network Check Box and click the Open Button The network data read from the file will be added to the network being used Select the Select Target network Check Box and click the Open Button Use the following procedure to read the config
213. Function Blot lt Function Blocks 6 1600 Input or Output variables 14 2048 Internal Variables 1 1 389 Checking Programs Section 15 8 When a program is built by selecting Build from the Project Menu function blocks that have unconnected I O will be displayed in the Output Window Double click the message to display the function block with unconnected 1 0 15 8 2 Displaying the Variable Reference Report The sections in which the variables are being used and the function blocks to which the variables are connected can be displayed in a list Procedure 1 2 3 1 Select Variable Reference Report List from the Variable Menu The Variable Reference Report Window will be displayed in the Program Window Tee be n ot Dawe DSa yebe Library Wide h ap annassa a Update Button lg ssi ar wo Nire imatype Des Q0 EMO Amd DOOL NED Tunenon Block Section Huey Dawe tesim 00 z Nw 1 TESTOM wyte Hide busy variables Check Box 1 Select Project a No y BOM Y 5 o noo j Ver amp aa NORIN Irad i 5 z ox a 04 noot in 5 0 Ho od B00 Ne TO Teg um Jx M Ss EDMI at cL EDM et Srna n Remesi Remove All Unused Variables Button Ona pal 2 Selecta project in the Select Project Area The usage status of all of the variables in the project will be displayed Variable Displays all variables of the selected project Data Type Displays the data type of the variables
214. Hot P Pipii j 4 299 Using an NE2A series Controller as a Standard Slave Section 12 7 2 Setthe data for the input assembly and click the OK Button Refer to 12 7 2 Setting I O Assemblies to set the I O assembly data Adding an Output Assembly Procedure 1 2 3 1 Click the New Output Button on the Target I O EtherNet IP Tab Page The Target I O EtherNet IP Dialog Box will be displayed The subsequent steps are the same as those given above in Adding an Input Assembly Changing I O Assemblies Procedure 1 2 3 1 Selectthe I O assembly to be changed 2 Click the Edit Button on the Target I O EtherNet IP Tab Page The Edit Target I O EtherNet IP Dialog Box will be displayed 3 Change the I O assembly data and click the OK Button Refer to 12 7 2 Setting I O Assemblies to set the I O assembly data Deleting I O Assemblies Procedure 1 2 3 1 Selectthe I O assembly to be deleted 2 Click the Delete Button on the Target I O EtherNet IP Tab Page A dialog box will be displayed to confirm the deletion NEXA LopicEditor Input Assembly 0 will be deleted OK 3 3 Click the OK Button The I O assembly will be deleted 12 7 2 Setting I O Assemblies This section describes how to define data for I O assemblies 300 Using an NE2A series Controller as a Standard Slave Section 12 7 Edit Target I O EtherNet IP Dialog Box Edit Target 1 0 EtherNet IP Name
215. I O Units and network Slaves to which the Safety Device are to be connected Depending on the required safety category Safety Input device and Safety Output device wiring must be redundant and test outputs must be set Connecting to NE2A series I O Units A maximum of 20 I O Units can be connected to an NE2A series Controller The maximum numbers of local I O control points are as follows e Safety Inputs 80 e Test Outputs 40 e Safety Outputs 80 Connectable Safety Input Devices Refer to 6 2 Safety Inout Functions Connectable Safety Output Devices Refer to 6 3 Safety Outout Functions Connecting to Network Slaves For details on the devices that can be connected to network Slaves refer to the individual network Slave manuals 23 Safety Control System Configuration Section 2 2 2 2 3 Designing a Safety Control Interface Production line A NE2A 1 DeviceNet Design the signals for detecting the safety status the stopping range for when safety cannot be confirmed and the safety confirmation conditions and start signals at startup Design the Safety Data assembly data for sending Safety Signals between the NE2A series Controller and network Slaves and between NE 2A series Controllers In addition design the timing connections with the remote devices for sending and receiving the Safety Data For details refer to 5 4 DeviceNet Safety Communications and 5 6 EtherNet IP Safety Communications EN EtherNet
216. IP Safety v3 Use the Following Information to get technical support For Network Configurator for CIP Safety v3 Version 3 03 1413 5 Check the version and click the Close Button 209 Saving and Reading Network Configuration Files Section 9 5 9 5 Saving and Reading Network Configuration Files This section describes network configuration file management procedures Network configurations created with the Network Configurator can be saved to files and read from the files Files can be saved and read in any of the following units normal all net work or device In addition network configuration files can be protected by passwords 9 5 1 Saving Network Configuration Files This section describes how to save all files normal or to save files by network or device Normal Saving All Procedure 1 2 3 Note The entire system can be saved as a batch When opening the files itis also possible to specify the network Select Save or Save As from the File Menu or click the Save Network Configuration Button in the toolbar The standard Windows dialog box for saving will be displayed Specify the save location and the file name and click the Save Button If the file is being saved for the first time the Set Password Dialog Box will be displayed From the second time onwards the Confirm Password Dialog Box will be displayed For details refer to 9 5 3 Password Protection for Network Configuration Files For
217. IP settings Changing the Device Name You can change the name of a device When you add a device from the Device List the name that is displayed will be the name from the Device List Procedure 1 2 3 1 Select the device for which the device name will be changed 2 Select Change Device Comment from the Device Menu You can also right click the device and select Change Device Comment The Change Device Comment Dialog Box will be displayed Change Device Comment NE24 ENS21 OK Cancel 3 Entera device name and click the OK Button Note Up to 50 characters can used for the device name Deleting a Device Itis possible to delete a device from the virtual network 290 EtherNet IP Network Settings Section 12 3 Procedure 1 2 3 1 Select the device to delete 2 Select Delete from the Edit menu You can also click the Delete Button on the toolbar You can also select the device and click the Delete Button on the toolbar Or right click the device and select Delete A dialog box will be displayed to confirm the deletion Network Configuraton t The network EtherNekjIP_1 will Be deleted e OK ves No 3 Press the Yes Button to delete the device 12 3 3 TCP IP Settings Make the TCP IP settings of the EtherNet IP Unit such as the local IP address and subnet mask The settings in the Setup TCP IP Configuration Dialog Box are shown below Setup TCP IP Configuration Target IP Add
218. Indicates that the Slave does not support the connec tion registered in the scan list Invalid Product Code Indicates that the product code registered in the scan list does not match the product code of the Slave Invalid Device Type Indicates that the device type registered in the scan list does not match the device type of the Slave Invalid Vendor Indicates that the vendor registered in the scan list does not match the Slave vendor Slave not Exist Indicates that the Slave registered in the scan list does not exist Comparison Error Indicates that the Slave information registered in the scan list is different from the actual Slave information 18 3 2 Unit Status Tab Page The following tab page will be displayed when you click the Unit Status Tab in the Monitor Device Dialog Box Monitor Device Status i Communication Cycle Time Error History Unit Status Online Remote 1 0 Communication Running Change Switch in the Running Master Function Status Remote 1 0 Communication Running Slave Function Status Unit Status Area The items displayed in the Unit Status Area are described below a scription Online Indicates that the device is connected online Remote I O Communication Indicates that the remote I O communications for the Running Master are operating 482 Monitoring DeviceNet Units Section 18 3 Description
219. Input port 2 Safety Input port 3 18 Local I O Status Safety Output Unit NE2A OD04 1 This is the terminal status of the Safety Output Unit There is one bit per termi nal Safety Output port status 0 0 Error Safety Output port status 1 1 Normal Safety Output port status 2 Safety Output port status 3 133 Remote I O Allocations 134 Section 5 8 Safety Input Unit NE2A ID04 1 This is the terminal status of the Safety Input Unit There is one bit per termi nal Safety Input port status 0 0 Error Safety Input port status 1 1 Normal Safety Input port status 2 Safety Input port status 3 19 I O Unit Error Status Safety Output Unit NE2A OD04 1 This status data indicates the Safety Output Unit error status There are 8 bits per Unit The status is ON when there is an error and OFF during normal operation Description Output power sup Indicates the error status for I O power supply ply monitor flag voltage Voltage Error or Power Supply OFF Normal Output port error Indicates that an output port error has flag occurred Normal Reserved Safety Input Unit NE 2A ID04 1 This status data indicates the Safety Input Unit error status There are 8 bits per Unit The status is ON when there is an error and OFF during normal operation Description Input power supply Indicates the error status for I O power supply
220. Kbytes 4 4 3 Creating Library Objects and Reusing Programming User defined Function Blocks You can define new function blocks by combining the function blocks that are provided by the Network Configurator 001009 8 put User Defined Function Bleck i K TAEI bese ESTOP utoutt BOCCO S Gutout IESTOPE ICOOR Security can be set for a user defined function block to prevent unauthorized personnel from accessing or changing the function block For details refer to 7 1 Access Control with Passwords Converting Programs into Library Objects Programs can be managed as library objects Programs can be registered and reused in the following units e All or part of a program 85 Creating Programs Section 4 4 e User defined function blocks When a program is registered in the library the variables and function blocks that are being used will be registered without any changes If the variable has an association to local I O remote I O or status the association will be deleted and registered as an internal variable Importing NE1A Programs 86 Programs for an NE1A series Controller can be imported into an NE 2A series Controller by using the Network Configurator It is not possible however to import I O tags from an NE1A series Controller After the program is imported to the NE 2A series Controller it is necessary to allocate variables to the func tion block I O and to associate th
221. Locking the Configuration The configuration of the parameters for the following devices can be locked using a Memory Card that contains the Operation Rights File e The NE2A series Controller containing the Memory Card and devices on the same DeviceNet networks excluding NE 2A series Controllers e The NE 2A series Controller containing the Memory Card Note To download or lock the configuration for an NE2A series Controller insert the Memory Card into the NE2A series Controller The configuration cannot be downloaded or locked for NE2A series Controllers across a network or for Safety Devices that are connected through an ED Router Applicable Range The following table shows the range of devices that are subject to download ing and locking by using a Memory Card The actual devices for downloading and locking within the applicable range are registered when the user creates the Operation Rights Files devices that have parameters in the Memory Card If only the local device is registered in the Operation Rights File parameters are not downloaded and the configura tion is not locked in the other devices in the applicable range Device Download from Memory Card Lock by Memory Card NE2A series Controller con CPU Unit taining the Memory Card 1 0 Units DeviceNet Units EtherNet IP Units NE2A series Controllers with CPU Unit out the Memory Card 1 0 Units DeviceNet Units EtherNet IP Units Safety Devices that are con NE1A
222. OOTP server Requests to the BOOTP server will continue until there is a response If the address received from the BOOTP server is invalid the IP address will be discarded In the mean time the Unit will go offline and communica tions will be disabled An error will be returned for all com munications requests Data exchange with the CPU Unit refresh will be contin ued Invalid mes An unexpected frame was received and therefore dis sage dis carded carded Check Target device messages Operation continues 19 5 Troubleshooting Network Configurator Errors 19 5 1 Checking the Network Configurator Error Status Errors can occur when configuration data is downloaded to the NE 2A series Controller reset or the operating mode is changed The causes of the errors are determined according to the display in the Message Report Pane in the Network Configurator 19 5 2 Network Configurator Errors and Countermeasures Interpreting the Error Status and Countermeasures D Downloading Reasons why a message is displayed Procedure for enabling download R Resetting or the state of NE2A series Controller reset and operating mode change M Changing the operating mode Network Configurator Brror description Reset method and references LD R M message r Device is locked Configuration data Unlock the device configuration is locked Unlocking 17 7 2 Message displaye
223. ORD or DWORD Data That Can Be Setin an Output Assembly Category Type Allocatable units Variables Input variables BOOL BYTE WORD or DWORD 122 Remote I O Allocations Section 5 8 Standard Communications Refer to 5 8 3 Data Elements Set in Assemblies for information on the data elements The Reference column in the following table gives the section in 5 8 3 Data That Can Set in an Input Assembly Reference Allocatable units Variables Output variable BOOL BYTE WORD or DWORD All BOOL bit Status General status Error status Safety Connection normal status Safety Connection error status Fault present Remote Stan DeviceNet Status Unit status 1 2 dard I O Unit Master status Slave status Registered Slave table Normal Slave table Master I O Node Input data Communications Unit data EtherNet IP Unit Unit status 1 2 All Communications status 1 2 3 Communications Unit BOOL bit Output Unit Output data All Local I O status BOOL terminal I O Unit error status Local I O cause of the error Input Unit Input data Local I O status I O Unit error status Local I O cause of the error Remote Safety Network Output data Input data or output data 1 0 Input data BOOL bit m N Ww gt N ol r e e Il uo All All Communications Unit BOOL bit ec 1
224. OnOff Delay ON Delay Displays the ON Delay time Discrep OF Delay Displays the OFF Delay time ancy Time Discrepancy Time Displays the Discrepancy time Test Output Channel Mode Displays the mode of the test bit Test Pulse Displays the pulse for an externally connected device Setting the Channel Mode 1 2 3 1 Select either the General Tab or the OnOff Delay Discrepancy Time Tab in the Local Input Test Output Dialog Box 346 Setting the I O Configuration of Individual I O Bits Section 14 4 2 Select the bit number to set and then click the Edit Button The Edit Local Input Terminal Dialog Box will be displayed Edit Local Input Terminal 120 Comment EMO NC Channel Mode Not Used Off On Delay On Off Delay 0 Dual Channel Channel Mode Single channel OK Cancel 3 Select and enter all parameters The settings are described in the following table stem Set value Contents Default 1 0 Comment Set the I O comment for the Safety Input bit The I O comment specified here is used as an I O tag in the Logic Editor Up to 48 characters can be specified The characters that can be input are the same as those that can be input for variables Refer to Variable Specifications on page 80 Channel Mode NotUsed Specifies that no external device is connected Not Used Used as standard Used when connecting a non safety device Input Used as Sa
225. P address dur This bit turns ON when the IP address is changed after the power sup ply is turned ON In any situation other than the above Reserved Error log Reserved Indicates that error log data is registered Indicates that there are no errors registered in the error log Also turns OFF when a request to clear the error log is received 15 EtherNet IP Unit Communications Status 1 This is the EtherNet IP Unit communications status data Description Tag Data Link Standard 1 0 Target connection error Indicates that there is an error on at least one Tag Data Link Standard I O Target connection Indicates that there are no errors on the Tag Data Link Target connection or that this bit was turned OFF when the error on the Tag Data Link Target con nection was cleared Reserved Tag Data Link Standard 1 0 communication Indicates that at least one Tag Data Link Standard I O connection is used in communications Reserved In any situation other than the above Reserved Reserved EtherNet IP Unit Communications Status 2 Description Link status 1 A link is established with the hub The link with the hub is stopped Reserved 1 This bit will have the opposite status of the LINK OFF error bit bit 9 of EtherNet IP Unit status 1 EtherNet IP Unit Communications Status 3 Description 0
226. Power supply terminal for internal circuits 0 VDC Not used Do not connect Power supply terminal for input circuits 24 VDC Power supply terminal for input circuits 0 VDC FG Ground this terminal Note Do notuse a cable that is longer than 3 m for the power supply 39 Safety CPU Unit Section 3 2 Safety I O Connector This connector is connected to the first I O Unit An End Cover must be attached if an I O Unit is not connected Communications Unit Connector This connector is connected to the first Communications Unit An End Cover must be mounted if a Communications Unit is not connected 3 2 5 General Specifications Refer to 3 1 1 General Specifications of NE2A series Controllers 3 2 6 Dimensions Reference Values ltem Specifications O Dimensions 120 x 90 x 113 mm W x H xD Weight 415 g max Me Oo PEAN FUN D D Jock afore A OMAS OO MVA a to omron NEZA SCPU01 SAFETY NETWORK CONTROLLER 40 End Cover Section 3 3 3 3 End Cover 3 3 1 Nomenclature NE2A TERO1 3 3 2 Dimensions Reference Values O em O speto O Dimensions 15 x 90 x 65 mm W xH x D Weight 30 g max 41 End Unit 3 4 End Unit 3 4 1 Nomenclature NE2A END 3 4 2 Dimensions Reference Values 42 Section 3 4 O em O speto O Dimensions 19 5 x 90 x 95 mm W x H x D Weight 55 g max 19 5 N o a v Unit mm Power Supply
227. R_INP BYTE VAR_OU BYTE Close 15 5 3 Finding and Replacing Variables Finding a Variable You can find a variable either by its name or by its I O tag 373 Section 15 5 Creating Variables Procedure 1 2 3 1 2 Select the Variable Window Select Find from the Edit Menu The Find Variable Dialog Box will be displayed Finding by name Find By Name Name Match Case Exact Match Ignore bit comment Find By 1 0 Direction Upward Downward Finding by I O tag Ee OC Find By Name v Close Close Find By 1 0 Device he 1 0 Tag v Direction Upward Downward 3 Select whether you want to find the variable by name or by I O Specify ei ther the name or the I O tag of the variable and then click the Find Next Button The items in the dialog box are described in the following table eem o oson O Find By Name Enables the user to find a variable by its name Name Input the variable name to search for Match Case Sets whether the search is case sensitive Not selected Do not match case Selected Match case Exact Match Sets whether to find only exact matches Not selected Do not find only exact matches Selected Find only exact matches Ignore bit comment Sets whether to search for bit comments Not selected Search for bit comments Selected Do not search for bit comments
228. Referring to SECTION 3 Configuration Unit Specifications and Nomenclature match the switch settings on the new Unit to the settings on the Unit that was replaced Replacing and Wiring the Unit Referring to SECTION 16 Mounting Wiring and Hardware Settings remove the faulty Unit and mount and wire the new Unit Downloading Parameters and Checking Operation When any Communications Unit or I O Unit is replaced the parameters must be downloaded to the NE2A series CPU Unit to which that Unit is mounted even if the CPU Unit itself has not been replaced Operation Using the Network Configurator Referring to SECTION 17 Downloading Device Parameters and Operating the Safety Control System download the parameters to the NE 2A series Control ler to which the new Unit is mounted and check the system operation Operation Using a Memory Card and the Setting Switch Referring to SECTION 17 Downloading Device Parameters and Operating the Safety Control System download the parameters to the NE 2A series Control ler to which the new Unit is mounted and check the system operation Network Configurator E ag ar Ry Soca 2 NE2A 1 Standard PLC a a m If the NE2A 1 DeviceNet Unit or an I O Unit is faulty replace the faulty Unit and download the NE2A 1 parameters Check the operation of the entire system including the NE2A 1 NE2A 2 and Standard PLC and confirm the Safety of the system 544 Appendix A Calcula
229. Reserved OFF 1 Reserved OFF 2 Ethernet basic settings ON This bit turns ON when an error is found during the basic parameter check of error the EtherNet IP This check if performed only when the power is ON OFF In any situation other than the above 132 Remote I O Allocations Reserved Section 5 8 Description Ethernet advanced set tings error This bitturns ON when an error is found during the advanced parameter check of the EtherNet IP In any situation other than the above BOOTP server error This bit turns ON when the following error occurs while using the BOOTP server Illegal IP address received from the server Timeout occurred in communications with the server In any situation other than the above Reserved EEPROM error Local I O Data This bit turns ON when an EEPROM error occurs This bit is turned OFF when EEPROM is operating normally 16 Output Data Safety Output Unit NE2A OD04 1 This is the monitor data received from the Safety Output Unit It is the output readback values Safety Output port readback 0 Safety Output port readback 1 Safety Output port readback 2 Safety Output port readback 3 17 Input Data Safety Input Unit NE2A ID04 1 This is the input data received from a Safety Input Unit It is the value after sin gle channel and dual channel evaluations Safety Input port 0 Safety Input port 1 Safety
230. Reset 2 outputs Reset E Displays comment text 3 inputs Arranging User defined Function Blocks User defined function blocks can be inserted by using the same steps as inserting existing function blocks Procedure 1 2 3 1 Drag the user defined function block that you want to insert from the Project Window 2 Drop the function block in the desired position in the P rogram Window Acu sT A Sectioni yx NE2A SCPUO1 cpu B DSTI Sectiont S User Function Blocks NE Siole Bey Drag the function block that you want to insert Function Blocks t Comparator H cpana exon Drop itin the desired position I NAND NOR i NOT oR i RS FF 5 Timer Counter Counter Off Delay Timer i On Delay Timer Pulse Generator Serial Parallel Converter t UpDown Counter Safety Device E E STOP i EDM a Enable Switch E L Light Dirtain hdanitarinn EStopLamp 2 MEStop 1 EStop PANCENE ONTE te MEStop 2 Lamp 380 Creating Programs Section 15 6 If you delete a user defined function block from the list of user defined func tion blocks in the Project Window the user defined function block in the P ro gram Window will be deleted 15 6 4 Arranging Output Variables Like input variables output variables can be inserted by dragging and drop ping them or by using the menus For information on the procedure refer to 15 6 1 A
231. S21 EtherNet IP Unit for the NE2A The NE2A ENS21 EtherNet IP Unit supports EtherNet IP Safety The EtherNet IP Unit for the OMRON CJ Series is referred to as the CJ EtherNet IP Unit or the CJ 1W EIP 21 EtherNet IP DeviceNet Router ED Router The name of the NE1A EDRO1 I O Unit A Unit used to expand the Safety I O functionality of an NE2A series Controller a few I O points ata time I O Unit is the collective name for the NE2A SID4 1 and NE2A SOD4 1 Network Configurator The name of the WS02 CFSC J E Power Supply Unit The name of the NE2A P D025 Remote I O Terminal A Remote I O Terminal for use in Standard controls Safety Refers to devices functions or data for which special safety measures for use in safety controls have been implemented Safety I O Terminal A Remote I O Terminal for use in safety controls Safety I O Terminal is the name of the terminals in OMRON s DST1 Series Safety Input device An input device for which special measures for use in safety controls have been implemented Emergency stop switches and safety door switches are examples of Safety Input devices Safety Input Unit The name of the NE2A SID4 1 Safety Network Controller Controller A controller that supports Safety Networks and has a high reliability for use in safety controls Safety Network Controller is the name of the controllers in OMRON s NEOA Series NE1A Series
232. ST_HEN csv E Z TEST_TAG csv Desktop My Documents Au gt 5 My Computer a My Network File name Save as type CSV Format csv Importing Variables Procedure Specify the file name and folder to which to export the data and click the Save Button 1 2 3 1 Select Import from the Variable Menu The Import Dialog Box will be displayed 2 Select the file to be imported 372 Creating Variables Section 15 5 Import Cs Please check variable to import and click OK Data Type Device VAR_INPUT BOOL fw OUT_TEST VAR_OUTPUT BOOL t E Import and overwrite variables SelectAll Cear e If you click the Select All Button all variables will be selected e If you click the Clear Button the selection of all variables will be cleared e If you clear the selection of the Import and overwrite variables Check Box variables will not be overwritten if variables with the same names are imported 3 Select the variables to be imported and then click the OK Button The selected variables will be displayed in the Variable Window If the I O tags specified in the variable data file do not exist the file will be imported without any I O allocations Import Errors A list that shows the results of importing will be displayed Detailed results of importing will be displayed in the Output Window The following variables could not be imported Usage Data T Device VA
233. Safety I O Communications and Standard I O Communications can be calculated by inputting the network bandwidth usage for Safety I O Communications and the network bandwidth usage for Standard I O Communications in the Network Configurator It is necessary to check the EPI Standard I O Communications cycle time and network bandwidth usage for each network 183 Calculating Communications Response Performance Section 8 5 The network bandwidth usage will be calculated for each baud rate when a Safety Connection or Standard Connection is set _ NE2A_Backplane_1 _ DeviceNet_1 O EtherNet IP_1 _ NE2A_Backplane_2 0 P P P P P F NE2A DNS2I DST1 MD16SL 1 DST1 MDISSL DST1 MDI6SL 1 DST1 MDIESLA DST1 MDIGSLA DST1 nores 1 a 00 2 00 2 00 2 00 2 00 P P The network bandwidth usage at each baud rate will be displayed Usage of Network Bandwidth of Safety Connections DSTIMDIESLA DSTIMDIESLI 125K Bit s 250K Bit s 500K Bis M Calculate EPI 2 00 0 g4 100 0 49 100 0 21 100 The EPI and Standard I O Communications cycle time will be automatically calculated if you set the use rate for the Safety Connections and Standard Connections in the Calculate EP Dialog Box Calculate EPI Safety Connections Network Bandwidth Best Average of EPI 125K Bit s 42 ms 250K Bits 21 ms Use Rate 40 x 500K Bits 11 ms Update device configuration Standard Connections Net
234. Section 13 1 13 1 System Performance Verification 308 The user must check that the safety response performance reaction time in all the safety chains and the Standard I O Communications response perfor mance meet the required specifications To verify the reaction time in the safety chains and the Standard I O Commu nications response performance check the following NE2A series Controller parameters e NE2A series Controller Instruction Execution Cycle Time e NE2A series Controller Peripheral Servicing Cycle Time For the response performance between communication nodes also check the following values e The network reaction time of Safety I O Communications in each network e The Standard I O Communications cycle time in each network The following diagrams show the steps for verifying the performance of DeviceNet and EtherNet IP systems System Performance Verification Section 13 1 13 1 1 DeviceNet Performance Verification C Devren et Performance Verification Check the NE 2A series Controller cycle time Adjust the instruction execution cycle time by adding Controllers to distribute processing e Instruction execution cycle time e Peripheral servicing cycle time Adjust the peripheral servicing cycle time and communications cycle time by dividing the network A NN y Adjust the network bandwidth usage by the safety connections and the standard connections and then
235. Slave setting 1 O refresh error Indicates that none of the above errors have occurred or the bit was turned OFF when all the above errors were cleared Unit memory error Indicates thatan EEPROM memory access READ WRITE error has occurred Indicates that the above error has not occurred Once this error occurs it will not return to a normal status It will remain ON Bus Off detected Indicates that a Bus Off error occurred When a Bus Off error occurs the Unit goes offline and all communications operations will be stopped scanning Slave operation and message communications Indicates that the above error has not occurred Once this error occurs it will not return to a normal status It will remain ON Node address dupli cation Indicates that an error was found during the MAC ID duplication check when the Unit was started If this occurs the Unit will remain offline and all communications operations will be disabled Indicates that the above error has not occurred Once this error occurs it will not return to a normal status It will remain ON Network power sup ply error Indicates that power is not supplied to the network Indicates that the above error has not occurred or the bit was turned OFF when the network power supply was re applied Transmission time out Indicates that the send request timed out There are no Slave Units The baud rate settings are diffe
236. Slaves NE2A_Backplane_1 C DeviceNet_1 C EtherNet IP_1 Comment HH Vendor Device Type Re F DST1 ID12SL 1 01 00 Omron Corporation Safety Discrete 1 0 Device 1 0 ia NE24 DNS21 00 Omron Corporation Communications Adapter 1 0 Fd DST1 MD16SL 1 02 00 Omron Corporation Safety Discrete 1 0 Device 1 0 a NE24 DNS21 00 Omron Corporation Communications Adapter 1 0 For information on these items refer to Detailed Display Mode 1 Based on Master on page 220 above Network Configuration List The Network Configuration List Pane displays the configurations of the virtual networks created using the Network Configurator 221 Main Window and Menus Section 9 6 Procedure Toolbar Bt 3B SB Network Configurator B DeviceNet_1 a EtherNet IP_1 NE2A_Backplane_1 3 DeviceNet_1 3 EtherNet IP_1 You can double click on a network name to switch the Network Configuration Pane display to the applicable network Select Network Configuration from the View Menu The following table describes the functions of the toolbar icons at the top of the Network Configuration Pane Icon Description Hide Router Devices Displays the router devices in the network configuration list Display Router Devices Displays the router devices in the network configuration list Open All Opens the tree display and displays all of the items Close All Closes the tree display and displays only the uppermost networks
237. Status Monitor Refer to 18 2 2 Monitoring Device Status for details Communications Unit Errors If an error occurs when the NE2A series Controller is attempting to establish a connection the error code will be displayed on the 7 segment display on the Communications Unit The error status can be checked from the Network Configurator on the DeviceNet Unit Monitor and EtherNet IP Unit Monitor Select Monitor from the Device Menu Click the Safety Connections Tab and check Status Take the corresponding countermeasure Safety Communications errors can be observed from the CPU Unit Safety Connections Monitor Safety Device Errors The NE2A series Safety Input Units and Safety Output Units display the oper ating status using LED indicators Refer to 3 8 2 Indicators for details on Safety Input Units and to 3 9 2 Indicators for details on Safety Output Units Errors occurring at the input terminals output terminals or test output termi nals can be observed from the CPU Unit Status Monitor Refer to 18 2 2 Mon itoring Device Status for details Network Configurator Execution Errors These are errors that occur when the NE 2A series Controller is reset config uration data is downloaded or the operating mode is changed The cause of these errors can be determined by checking the error messages displayed in the Message Report Pane of the Network Configurator Logic Editor Build Errors Errors can occur when building program using t
238. TOP 1 in the program BOOL ESTOP1 BYTE Data In this example the variable DST1 MD 12 is setas BYTE data When BYTE variables are declared variable names can also be specified for individual bits In the program the first bit can be used as DST1 MD 12 ESTOP1 DST1 MD 12 ESTOP1 ESTOP2 DOOR1 BYTE WORD Data In this example the variable Robot Plate Slave is setas WORD data J ust as with BYTE data variable names can also be specified for individual bits In the program the first bit can be used as Robot Plate Slave ESTOP 1 80 Creating Variables Section 4 3 Restrictions on Variables WORD Robot Plate Slave For NE 2A series Controllers information on variables cannot be accessed by using variable names from an external device such as a PT or personal com puter For OMRON CS CJ series Standard PLCs it is possible to import variable information and I O comment information set for I O Terminals 81 Creating Variables Section 4 3 Data That Can Be Linked as Variables With NE 2A series Controllers the following types of data can be linked to vari ables and used in the program Data That Can Be Linked as Input Variables Safety Meaning Non safety Local I O Local input data Safety Input values for Safety Input terminals The values after evaluation according to I O settings Local I O status Non safety Safety I O status evaluation result C
239. Tag tt ox SS a nn pear og Functen inas za PE S NEASOUN 5 x H AND dt rt T Corpas a 1 Congas 4 oas par T mano E or Tj wor CHOR E Rs Tirnnontleds fag dpe x Wott x Cross Rolerenee Ix Kme vas Dota Tyre Vanstie Frain i 1600 Varies SIPS roge Sn SA l Stopping Online Monitoring To stop monitoring select Monitor from the Device Menu while online moni toring is being performed You can also click the Monitor Icon 4 in the toolbar Variables and connections are displayed in light green or black when monitor ing is not being performed 18 1 2 Watching Variables 464 In an NE 2A series Controller the values of multiple variables within a program can be monitored at the same time using the Watch Window of the Logic Edi tor When the NE2A series Controller is in Force Mode variables can be force set reset from this window Monitoring Programs and Force setting resetting Variables Section 18 1 Registering Variables 1 2 3 1 Deleting Registered Variables 1 2 3 Moving Registered Variables 1 2 3 Sorting Registered Variables Select a variable either from the Variable Window or from the Program Window Select Add to Watch Window from the Variable Menu You can also right click a variable in the Variable Window or P rogram Win dow and select Add to Watch Window from the pop up menu Or you can drag and drop a variable from the Variable Window to the Watch Wind
240. The Safety I O Connection where the error occurred will be stopped e Automatic Recovery Mode Repeated attempts will be made to establish the Safety I O Connection again All other operations will be continued E2 Local node address Transmission Timeout Due to the following reasons the transmission request was not completed successfully There are no Slaves on the network The baud rate setting is different between nodes There was an error with the CAN Controller Consider the following items Are baud rates for the Standard Master and Stan dard Slaves on the network the same Are the cable lengths branch main lines suitable Are any cables disconnected or loose els there a terminator at each end of the main line els there a lot of noise Remote I O communications will be stopped while transmission is timed out Message transmission requests will be returned with an error Communications will be restarted when the DeviceNet Unit recovers from the transmission time out 517 Troubleshooting DeviceNet Unit Errors Section 19 3 Communications Unit Network Configurator Cause Indi 7 segment Error history Displayed Recovery method cators display message Status after error MS Error Error Saved NS Detail Detail L9 0345 Standard I O A timeout occurred during remote I O communica Connection tions with the Slave Target node 02 Master Timeout Consider the following items
241. These passwords are called device passwords User defined function block protection Passwords can be setto restrict access to user defined function blocks to prevent unintentional access and changes to user defined function blocks These passwords are called used defined function block pass words Monitoring from the Netwo rk Configurator Online monitoring Controller status information and I O data can be monitored online using the Network Configurator Device status monitoring Status held in the Controller can be monitored Local I O status monitoring The local I O status of the Controller can be monitored Maintenance parameters status monitoring The present values of Controller maintenance parameters can be moni tored Functions Section 1 3 Reference Function CIP Safety Connection sta CIP Safety Connection status can be monitored 18 2 tus monitoring If an error occurs in establishing a connection the error code will be dis played and a help screen can be opened to show the details of the error That error status will also be displayed when a Safety I O Communica tions timeout error occurs CIP Standard Connection DeviceNet connection status and EtherNet IP Tag Data Link connection 18 2 status monitoring status can be monitored If an error occurs in establishing a connection the error code will be dis played and a help screen can be opened
242. U Unitis set as the Safety Master Each connection is allocated an area of 32 bytes TA ae TN Same data as for CS C J series PLC Safety ea Master Same data as for DAA Standard Standard A O Slave Master yf a Output data P Input data Safety Slave 135 Operation after a Communications Error Section 5 9 5 9 Operation after a Communications Error 5 9 1 Data and Operation after a Communications Error Data after a Communications Error DeviceNet Safety Communications EtherNet IP Safety Communications and DeviceNet Standard Communications e Input data from a Slave Slave to NE2A will be cleared if a communica tions error occurs in the Slave when the NE2A series Controller is the Master e Output data from the Master Master to NE2A will be cleared if a commu nications error occurs with the Master when the NE 2A series Controller is the Slave EtherNet IP Tag Data Links e Input data Originator to NE2A will be cleared if a communications error occurs with the Originator Setting the Operating Mode after a Communications Error One of the following modes can be selected for the Safety Master when there is a connection timeout during Safety I O Communications with the Safety Slave This function is set for Safety Masters in each Communications Unit Mode after Description communications error Automatic recovery Specify this mode to re establish the Safety I O connection af
243. Unit Section 3 5 3 5 Power Supply Unit 3 5 1 Nomenclature NE2A PD025 Indicator Power Supply Unit Power Supply Unit Connection Diagram 3 5 2 Indicators Power This indicator is lit when 5 VDC is output from the Power Supply Unit 43 Power Supply Unit Section 3 5 3 5 3 Interface Terminal Block m Power Supply Terminal Block Signal Arrangement Terminal Function Supplies 24 VDC power LG Ground separately to 100 Q or less to provide stronger noise immu nity and prevent electrical shock GR Ground separately to 100 Q or less to help prevent electrical shock Not used Do not connect Note Do notuse a cable that is longer than 3 m for the power supply Note The power supply input terminal block uses M4 self rising screws Tighten the terminal block screws to a torque of 1 2 N m 3 5 4 General Specifications Specifications Power supply voltage 24 VDC Allowable power supply volt 19 2 to 28 8 VDC age range operating frequency range Current consumption 50 W max Inrush current 24 VDC input 30 A max cold start 20 ms max Power supply output capacity 5VDC 5 0A 24VDC 0 8A 25 W total Insulation resistance 20 MQ min at 500 VDC between all external DC terminals and GR terminal Dielectric strength 1 000 VAC 50 60 Hz for 1 min with leakage current of 10 mA max between all external DC terminals and GR terminal Specifications tha
244. Using the NE2A series Controller as a Safety Slave Section 11 5 Procedure 1 2 3 1 Click the New Variable Button in the Edit Safety Target I O Dialog Box The New Variable Dialog Box will be displayed New Variable Name Data Type BYTE Bit Comment 2 Setthe variable data and click the OK Button The following table describes the settings in the New Variable Dialog Box Setting Description Name Specifies the variable name Up to 48 characters 48 bytes max can be used Names are not case sensitive if ASCII alphanumeric charac ters are used The following characters cannot be used H SHE N lt gt Also the following cannot be used The first character cannot be a number Reserved characters cannot be used Data type Select from BOOL BYTE WORD or DWORD The Edit Bit Comment button will be enabled if BOOL is not selected for the data type For details refer to Editing Bit Comments on page 266 in the following section A new variable will be added to the list of data that can be registered in the Edit Safety Target I O Dialog Box Edit Safety Slave 1 0 Name InputAssembly1 Data EJ Variable E_STOPI SESTI a DEED Bie ieee N The new variable will be displayed Register Unregister New Variable Edit Variable Editing Bit Comments 1 2 3 1 Click the Edit Bit Comment Button The Edit Bit Comment Dialog Box will be displa
245. _ Devicenet_1 EtherNet IP_1 Changes to blue The connection status will change to On line in the status bar dis played at the bottom of the window Refer to 9 6 5 Status Bar for details on the connection status LiDeviceNet T DeviceNet NE24 TOOLBUS NEZ24 SCPUO1 115200 Bit s On line x aE 431 Downloading and Uploading Device Parameters Section 17 3 17 3 Downloading and Uploading Device Parameters This section describes how to download and upload parameters to and from network devices By downloading the parameters the parameters that have been specified for a particular devices on the Network Configurator can be set up in the physical devices By uploading parameters the parameters that have been set up in the physical devices can be read to the Network Configu rator 17 3 1 Downloading Device Parameters You can download parameters in two ways downloading to the selected device and downloading to the entire network Parameters can be down loaded only when the Network Configurator is connected online You can perform this operation only for devices present in a network for which the Connected Network Identifier is either blue or green when the Network Configurator is connected to the network This does not include when an NEOA series Controller NELA SCPUO1 CPU Unit Pre Ver 1 0 NE1A SCPU01 V1 CPU Unit or NE1A SCPU02 CPU Unit is connected to a USB port Downloading Parameters to Select
246. _ Safety Input Assembly 4 WO Size Safety Input Assembly 5 Safety Input Assembly 6 4 Click the Detail Button to display detailed information on assemblies 1 2 Detail of 1 0 Connection Name Offset Type 5 Safety Input 0 BOOL 4 Safety Input 1 BOOL 5 Safety Input 2 BOOL Safety Input 3 BOOL 5 Safety Input 4 BOOL 5 Safety Input 5 BOOL 4 Safety Input 6 BOOL Safety Input 7 BOOL 3 Individual Safety ji BOOL 5 Individual Safety 3 BOOL 5 Individual Safety BOOL Individual Safety BOOL Individual Safety 5 Individual Safety Set the connection parameters and click the OK Button Refer to 11 4 2 Setting Safety Connection Parameters for information on parameters The connection will be added in the Register Device List Area in the Edit Device Parameters Dialog Box Edit Device Parameters Slavel O DeviceNet Target 1 0 EtherNet IP 120 Unit Communication Unit Made Cycle Time Extend Mode Logic Safety Connections Safety Slave 1 0 Connections 2 160 ts ae x F Auto allocation Register Device List Product Name EPI Reactio Tye 801 DSTIAD125L4 DeviceNet Sa Safely Input Assembly 1 ans 1Oms 35ms In Seb ay InputAssembly 2 Aims me T are Safety Input Assembly 2 will be added Select the name of the I O assembly to be deleted from the Register De vice List Area on the Safety Connections Tab Page in the Edit Device Pa rameters Dialog Box Edit Dev
247. a packet interval RPI and timeout value for each of the multicast groups in the originator set tings After you finish the settings right click on the EtherNet IP Network Window and select View Device s Connection Structure Tree In the Device s Con nection Structure Tree Dialog Box select the Based on Slave Device Target Option in the Display Type Area The communications settings for the target devices will be displayed If there are eight originators in two multicast groups the Structure Dialog Box will appear as shown below EtherNet IP Standard Communications Section 5 7 Device s Connection Structure Tree Display Type Based on Master Device Originator Based on Slave Device Target Display Option Structure 2 X EtherNet IP_1 B amp 192 168 250 1 NE2A ENS21 InputAssembly1 M 1 0ms 2 192 168 250 2 CJ1W EIP21 192 168 250 4 CJ1W EIP21 2 192 168 250 5 CJ1W EIP21 CJ2 S InputAssembly1 M OutputAssembly1 S 1 0ms 2 192 168 250 3 CJ2M EIP21 v InputAssembly2 M 1 0ms 2 192 168 250 6 CJ1W EIP21 CJ2 2 192 168 250 7 CJ1W EIP21 CJ2 E Display the detail of Connection Multicast group 1 Uses Input Assembly 1 Multicast group 2 2 192 168 250 8 CJ2M EIP21 Uses Input Assembly 2 192 168 250 9 CJ2M EIP21 Note In this example two multicast groups are configured for the NE2A ENS21 The originator with IP address 192 168 250
248. a 2 is set to 15 ms In this example data 1 is transmitted from node 2 to node 1 every 10 ms and data 2 is transmitted from node 3 to node 1 every 15 ms Node 3 Node 2 Node 1 Slaves Data 1 Master 10 ms Data 1 10 ms 15 ms Data 2 An EPI is set for each connection The minimum EPI that can be set for an NE2A series Controller is the larger of the following two values a The NE2A peripheral servicing cycle time 105 DeviceNet Safety Communications Section 5 4 b The time required for Safety I O Communications c The cycle time of the Safety Slave being communicated with If the communications partner is a DST1 series Slave the cycle time is 6 ms If the communications partner is an NE 2A series Slave check its pe ripheral servicing cycle time d The time required for Safety I O Communications with the NE 2A se ries Slave that is being communicated with If the communications partner is an NE2A series Slave check its EPI required for Safety I O Communications Note 1 Set the EP for each Safety Connection to a time longer than the periph eral servicing cycle time of the Safety Network Controller 2 If the communications partner is a NE2A series NE1A series or NE QA series Slave its cycle time is not checked Use the Network Configurator to confirm that the set EPI is longer than the cycle time of the NE 2A se ries NE1A series or NEQA series Slave 106 DeviceN
249. a DeviceNet network that is already built Refer to 5 5 2 Standard Connection Settings for information on Standard Connections NE2A series Controller Standard Master CS C PLC Register the Standard Slave to the NE 2A series Controller to be used as the Standard _ Master Li Standard Slave DST1 series Controller 5s Standard Slave Procedure 1 2 3 1 Select the NE2A DNS21 of the NE2A SCPUO1 for which Master settings will be performed L I NE24 Backplane DeviceNet T P P NEQA a en DSTHIDI2SL 1 DSTI MDIESLA AG 2 00 Select the NE2A Communications Unit to be used as the Standard Master Steps 4 and 5 can be eliminated by dragging and dropping the Standard Slave to the NE2A series NE2A DNS21 to be used as a Standard Master in the Network Configuration Pane NE24_Backplane_ DeviceNet_1 lt 3 00 01 NE2A DNS21 _DSTI ID12SL 1 269 Communications between the NE2A series Controller and Standard Slaves Section 11 6 2 Select Parameter Edit from the Device menu You can also right click the device to set as a Standard Master and then select Parameter Edit from the menu Or you can double click the Master to be set The Edit Device Parameters Dialog Box will be displayed 3 Click the General Tab All devices registered in the same network will be displayed in the Unreg ister Device List Area except local devices Edit Device Parameters General Communication Cycl
250. a for when the applicable NE 2A series Controller communicates over an EtherNet IP network as a Target Refer to Section 12 I O Unit Used to set the I O Units to be mounted to the CPU Unit Refer to Section 14 Communications Unit Used to set the Communications Units DeviceNet and EtherNet IP to be mounted to the CPU Unit Refer to Section 11 Mode Cycle Time Used to display the instruction execution cycle time and the peripheral servicing cycle time Refer to 10 2 1 Mode Cycle Times Extend Mode Used to set the program execution delay time restore operation settings RUN IDLE operation settings user program ID and parameter protection Refer to 10 2 2 Extend Mode Logic Used to start the Logic Editor for program development Refer to Section 15 235 Setting Device Parameters Section 10 2 10 2 1 Mode Cycle Times m Cycle Times Set the cycle times the instruction execution cycle time and the peripheral servicing cycle time for system operation Edit Device Parameters Slave 1 0 DeviceNet Target 1 0 EtherNetAIP 120 Unit Safety Connections Safety Slave 1 0 Communication Unit Mode Cycle Time Extend Mode Logic Instruction Execution Cycle Time 30 6 x0 1ms Peripheral servicing Cycle Time 35 xD ims m Changing the Mode The operating mode can be changed between IDLE and RUN if the Network Configurator is connected online to the NE2A series Controller 10 2 2 Extend Mod
251. abbreviations that appear in the tables of error codes Description Communica Indicators Gives the status of the MS and NS indicators tions Unit Top row MS indicator DeviceNet oes Unit Note No change in display Bottom row NS indicator Note No change in display Gives the error code and detail code displayed on the 7 segment display Top row Error code Bottom row Detail code 509 Troubleshooting DeviceNet Unit Errors Network Con E figurator rror History Section 19 3 Description Gives the error and detailed information recorded in the error history table Information displayed in the Error History Monitor Dialog Box Top row Error code Not recorded in error history Not saved in error history table Bottom row Detailed code Not recorded in error history Not saved in error history table Indicates whether a record is saved in the error history No No record is saved in error history Yes A record is saved in the error history but it is deleted when the Unit power is turned OFF Temporary A record is saved in the error history and itis not deleted when the Unit power is turned OFF Displayed mes sage Gives the message displayed in the Safety Con nections Monitor Dialog Box Error name Names are used to identify errors Error names are not displayed in the Error History Monitor Dialog Box of the Network Configurato
252. ables the following functions without using the Network Configurator so that parameters and programming can be maintained in a black box for mat Also there is no need to disclose the device password Use these functions when constructing a new system Use these functions when changing the parameters or programming of an existing system Use these functions when replacing one or more faulty devices Changing the System Operating Mode Operation Rights File Use these functions to start and stop execution of the system program An Operation Rights File indicates whether the system status can be changed using the NE2A series Controller functions The file must be created with the Network Configurator and copied to a Memory Card before it can be used If the required information is stored in the Operation Rights File parameters can be downloaded by the Memory Card and the operating mode can be changed for any NE 2A series Controller 7 2 2 Downloading Parameters and Locking the Configuration Downloading Parameters Parameters for the following devices can be set using a Memory Card that contains an Operation Rights File e The NE2A Controller containing the Memory Card and all devices on the same DeviceNet networks excluding NE 2A series Controllers e The NE2A Controller containing the Memory Card Download Memory Card 161 Operation and Maintenance Using a Memory Card Section 7 2
253. access error An error occurred when reading writing to the non volatile memory in the Unit A record may not be saved in the error history in some cases Replace the DeviceNet Unit if the error recurs Writing to non volatile memory is ignored and opera tion continues Hb Local node address CPU Unitevent servicing time out A timeout occurred while reading parameters to the CPU Unit Replace the DeviceNet Unit and or the CPU Unit if the error recurs when the Controller is restarted Operation continues as if the error information is not set HC Local node address Logic error in configuration data There is an error with the CPU Unit configuration data setting EC 11 EC 12 Ed 15 or EE 11 may be dis played on the 7 segment display on the CPU Unit Download the configuration data again Replace the DeviceNet Unit or the CPU Unit if the error recurs Operation continues as if the error information is not set HE Local node address 0002 Monitoring time ms CPU Unit ser vice monitor ing error Service from the CPU Unitis disabled for a period Monitoring is normally for 11 s Review the CPU Unit operation environment Replace the DeviceNet Unit or CPU Unit if the error recurs Processes other than Safety I O and Standard I O are continued Safety I O and Standard O will be restarted when servicing from the CPU Unitis
254. ace bit comments Direction Sets the direction in which to find the variables Upward Search upward Downward Search downward 4 Ifyou find a variable and want to replace it click the Replace Button If you do not want to replace the variable name click the Find Next Button If you want to replace all matching variables click the Replace All Button All variables will be replaced without allowing you to check them 375 Creating Programs Section 15 6 15 6 Creating Programs Programs are created by arranging variables and function blocks Refer to the Safety Network Controller Command Reference Manual Cat No Z920 for details on function blocks 15 6 2 Arranging Function Blocks 15 6 1 Arranging Input Variables 15 6 3 Function Block Settings 15 6 4 Arranging Output Variables Bh Gu We obt Die fii vija 1 6h 0 8 4s G tx Pros GB nerasceun C EStop 10 1_DewceMet i me Uh scat S UStop 2_1_1_Dovicemtet_ 7 Sh Fondhack 21 Davicnhot Lee a ETAn Bacchi A Firat EDM NEA DU DNS21 0ST Ep ESk Rogan 15 6 5 Arranging Internal Variables 15 6 7 Arranging Text Boxes 15 6 6 Connecting Function Block Input Output Signals 15 6 1 Arranging Input Variables Variables can be inserted by dragging and dropping them or by using the I O tag Inserting Variables by Dragging and Dropping Procedure 1 2 3 1 Display the input variables in the Variable Window 2
255. actio Type Size n 01 DST1 MD16S k i Safety Input s 30ms 84 ms 1 Byte oh Safety Output A 21ms 66 ms 1 Byte 03 NEOQA SCPUD oh Input Assembly 1 10 ms 44 ms 1 Byte oh Output Assembl 10 ms 44 ms 1 Byte 00 NE24 SCPUD oh Input4ssembly3 10 ms 50 ms 1 Byte oh Outputdssembly2 10ms 50 ms 1 Byte 02 DST1 MD 165 an Safety Input As 21ms f 66 ms 1 Byte oh Safety Output A 21 ms 66 ms 1 Byte 03 DST1 MD165 S Safety Input As 21 ms 66 ms 1 Byte S Safety Output A 21ms 66 ms 1 Byte 04 DST1 MD165 Ja Safety Inout As 21 ms_ _66 ms 1 Byte Checking the Reaction Time Check that the calculated reaction times for all safety chains satisfy the required specifications as outlined in 8 2 2 Calculating the Reaction Time 327 Verifying the Safety Response Performance Reaction Time Section 13 4 Z N WARNING confirm that the reaction time calculated for each safety chain satisfies the Serious injury may possibly occur due to loss of required safety functions Always required specifications S Improving the Reaction Time If there is a Safety Connection with a reaction time that exceeds the required specifications re examine the network design taking into consideration the following points for the reaction time to meet the required specifications e Shortening the EPI will shorten the network response time Shortening the EPI however narrows the bandwidth that can be used for ot
256. aen Safety e Emergency stop e Safety door switch confirmation signal Structured Design By structuring and modularizing the system including the arrangement of local and remote I O Safety Devices the design can be streamlined and main tenance made easier With the Logic Editor for the NE2A series Controller sections and user defined function blocks can be used as program components For details refer to 4 4 Creating Programs NE2A 1 Ca Control panel Robot 1 Production line A Production line B Defined as user defined Defined as Programming placed in function block sections different folders 27 Designing Safety Control Logic Section 2 4 2 4 2 Programming with Variables Creating Variables Types of Variables 28 NE2A series Controller program reusability is improved by using variables in programming e Programming can be performed without having to consider whether a Safety Device is connected to an I O Unit or to a Slave on the network e Once a program has been created it does not have to be changed when the system configuration is changed For details refer to 4 3 Creating Variables Either of the following two methods can be used to create variables e Creating variables while the O is still undefined I O tags can be linked to variables after a program has been created This allows a program created with variables to be reused as a program ming component e Crea
257. afety Connection 4 icon are displayed The EPI of the Safety Connection is displayed The type of I O assembly used by the Safety Connection is dis played In Input assembly Slave to Master Out Output assembly Master to Slave The size of I O assembly data used by the Safety Connection is dis played e Here the Auto allocation Option is selected at the upper right of the tab page so the default connection I O assembly of the Safety Slave will be registered when the Safety Slave is registered If this option is not selected the connection will not be registered and the name of the I O assembly will not be displayed The number of connections over the number of connections that can be used is displayed in the upper left part of the tab page Note 1 A maximum of 160 connections can be registered A maximum of 128 connections can be set for one EtherNet IP Unit 2 When an NE 2A series Controller is registered as a Safety Slave the de fault I O assembly will not be set Adding Deleting Editing and Automatically Registering or Unregistering Connections The procedures for adding deleting editing and automatically registering or unregistering connections are the same as the procedures for DeviceNet Safety For details refer to 11 4 1 Registering Safety Slaves Note The program may be affected if the safety logic connection setting is changed After making the change open the Logic Editor
258. afety Slave A maximum of 4 Safety Slave connections can be set for one DeviceNet Unit 2 The maximum size for DeviceNet Safety I O assemblies is different from the maximum size for EtherNet IP Safety I O assemblies Take this into account when you make the connection settings e DeviceNet Safety Slave I O assembly 16 bytes max e EtherNet IP Safety Slave I O assembly 32 bytes max 259 Using the NE2A series Controller as a Safety Slave Section 11 5 Procedure 1 2 3 1 Selectthe NE2A SCPU to be used as a Safety Slave TO NE2A_Backplane_1 C DeviceNet_1 oO NEZA_Backplane_2 SS me A 5 00 l 0 Mea NE2A DNS21 s t eoo Select the NE2A SCPUO1 to be used as a Safety Slave 2 Select Parameter Edit from the Device Menu You can also right click the NE2A SCPU device to be used as the Safety Slave and select Parameter Edit from the menu Or you can double click the NE2A SCPU device to be used as the Safety Slave The Edit Device Parameters Dialog Box will be displayed Edit Device Parameters Slave 1 0 DeviceNet Target 1 0 EtherNet IP 140 Unit Communication Unit Mode Cycle Time Extend Mode Logic Safety Connections Safety Slave 1 0 Connections 0 160 E Auto allocation Register Device List Product Name EPI Reactio Type Size OK Cancel 3 Click the Safety Target I O Tab The Safety Target I O Tab Page will be displayed in the Edit Device Param eters
259. afety and then restart the Unit Setting the IP Address Using BOOTP Procedure 288 With the EtherNet IP Unit the IP address can be obtained by using BOOTP To set the IP address using BOOTP a BOOTP server must be installed on the network Obtaining a BOOTP Server to Operate on a Personal Computer The Rockwell Interactive BOOTP DHCP Utility is recommended by ODVA as the BOOTP server It is available from the following website http www ab com networks bootp html IMPORTANT You can access the MAC address of the EtherNet IP Unit by using the monitor 1 2 3 function of the EtherNet IP Unit Refer to 18 4 3 Ethernet Information Tab Page Start the BOOTP server using a personal computer connected to the Ether net Set the MAC address and the IP address of the EtherNet IP Unit to be set in the BOOTP server 1 Setthe IP address setting switches on the EtherNet IP Unit to 00 2 Setthe presentIP address of the EtherNet IP Unitin the Target IP Address Field in the TCP IP Settings Dialog Box of the Network Configurator R efer to the previous page 3 Select the Get the IP address via BOOTP server Option 4 Click the Set to the Device Button in the New Configuration Area and then download the settings to the EtherNet IP Unit 5 Click the Reset the Device Button to restart the EtherNet IP Unit The IP address obtained using BOOTP will be displayed on the 7 segment display of the EtherNet IP Unit 6 Change the Targe
260. afety data The measures necessary for safety data are not taken during data communications Serious injury may occasionally occur due to loss of required safety functions Do S 107 DeviceNet Standard Communications 5 5 2 Standard Connection Settings Set Standard Connections to perform Standard I O Communications between 108 the Standard Master and Standard Slaves Standard Slave 1 Input Area in I O Memory Output Area in I O Memory Assembly data A Assembly data B Assembly data C Standard Slave 2 Input Area in I O Memory Assembly data D tput Area in I O Memory Assembly data E A Standard Connection sends and receives input and output assembly data using one connection This input and output assembly data is displayed on the I O tag list as I O tags Standard Input or Standard Output for each Logic Editor Slave By using these I O tags you can create programs without being Set the connection Section 5 5 Standard Master Input Area in I O Memory Assembly data A Assembly data D Output Area in I O Memory Assembly data C Assembly data E aware of the memory addresses of the NE2A series Controllers DeviceNet Standard Communications Section 5 5 Setting the Connection Information for the Standard Master The parameters that are set are listed in th
261. age will be displayed Edit Device Parameters Communication Unit Mode Cicle Time Extend Mode Logic Safety Connections Safety Slave 1 0 Slave 1 0 DeviceNet Target 1 0 EtherNet IP 170 Unit Configuration Unit Type NE24 SOD04 1 NE24 SID04 1 Wizard OK Cancel 4 Inthe Slot column of the tab page select the slot of the Input Unit to set and then click the Edit Button The Local Input Test Output Dialog Box will be displayed 345 Setting the I O Configuration of Individual I O Bits Section 14 4 Local Input Test Output 10 100ms 0 255 defaut 10 General OnOff Delay Discrepancy Time Test Output No Name Mode Test Source O0 e EStop 1 Not Used Ofe EStop 2 Not Used 02 Reset 1 Not Used 03 Feedback Not Used Error Latch Time The setting of the error latch time is described in the following table Setvalue Contes Doat 0 to 255 You can set the time to latch the error state when an 1000 ms x 100 ms error occurs in a bit of the Safety Input Unit The error state will continue until the error latch time passes even if the cause of the error is removed Duration of error latch time 0 to 25500 ms Setting the Parameters of Individual Bits The details of the parameters displayed by clicking the tabs are described in the following table Contents 1 0 Comment Displays the comment for the bit Channel Mode Displays the operation of the bit Test Source Displays the test bit
262. aiting for the configuration to be downloaded Green This status is entered after initialization has been completed if the Red NE2A series Controller is not configured or if there is an error in the configuration data CONFIGURATIO No The configuration is being restored RESTORE Mode The configuration can be downloaded and locked using a Memory Card This mode will start once the power supply is turned ON after the function setting switch has been set Itis not possible to enter other operating modes from this mode To change the mode itis necessary to reset the function setting switch and restart the NE2A series Controller ABORT Mode A non fatal error I O Unit or Communications Unit configuration error has occurred The safety functions will go into the following safe states The user program will be stopped Local Safety Outputs will turn OFF Safety I O Communications will stop In addition Standard I O Communications will stop for Communi cations Units mounted to the CPU Unit and only message com munications will be possible CRITICAL FAULT Mode A fatal error hardware failure or assert error has occurred The safety functions will go into the following safe states The user logic program will be stopped Local Safety Outputs will turn OFF e Safety I O Communications will stop In addition Standard I O Communications and message commu nications will stop for Communications Units mounted to the CPU Unit and o
263. al 120 Comment Safety Relay Channel Mode Not Used Dual Channel OK Cancel 343 Setting the I O Configuration of Individual I O Bits Section 14 4 3 Setthe I O comment channel mode and dual channel channel mode The settings are described in the following table item Set value Description Default Set an I O comment for the Safety Out put bit The I O comment specified here is used as an 1 O tag in the Logic Editor Up to 48 characters can be specified The characters that can be input are the same as those that can be input for variables Refer to Variable Specifica tions on page 80 Select when no output device is con Not Used nected No test pulse is output when the output is ON Itis possible to detect contact with the positive output signal power supply line when the output is OFF and to detect ground faults Safety Pulse A test pulse is output when the output is Test ON Itis possible to detect contact with the positive output signal power supply line when the output is OFF or ON to detect ground faults and to detect short circuits between output signals Dual Chan Single chan Specifies using the bitas an indepen Single chan nel nel dent Safety Output bit nel Channel If you set the dual channel channel Mode mode to Single Channel even paired Safety Output bits set to a Dual Chan nel Mode will be set to Single Channel Mode Dualchan Specifi
264. al for the heart beat timer However the minimum is 20 ms and the timer accuracy is 10 ms e Heartbeat timer set value ms e Twice the communications cycle timer ms Communications Cycle Time The communications cycle time is the time required from processing I O data communications to the Slaves until processing I O data communications to the Slaves again The communications cycle time is also used to calculate the maximum I O response time The communications cycle time depends on many factors such as the num ber of Masters on the network and whether message communications are being performed 109 DeviceNet Standard Communications Device Information 110 Section 5 5 Example for Poll I O Connection One connection each is set between node 1 the Master and nodes 2 and 3 Slaves Node 1 performs communications with node 2 and then node 3 on a 10 ms communications cycle time Node 3 Node 2 Node 1 Slaves Master 10 ms 10 ms The communications cycle time is set in the Master The Master and the Slaves to which the connections are set perform data communications using the same communications cycle time A Standard Master can prevent malfunction by comparing the following parameters with the Slaves that are actually connected online Vendor Value unique to the manufacturer Device type Value unique to the product type Product code Value unique to the produ
265. and Checking Safety Signatures 00008 439 17 5 Operating the Safety Control System 0 0 0 eee eee eee 445 17 6 Protecting Device Parameters 0 0 eee ce nee eee nee 447 17 7 User Test and Automatic Operation 0 eee ee eee ee 451 17 8 Resetting Devices seorsa oprat ere nln bb s oh SNe bards bbb Be Shekels Gb eed ba ete Soda 454 17 9 Changing Device Parameters and Operating Modes Using a Memory Card 456 SECTION 18 Checking the System Operating Status 463 18 1 Monitoring Programs and Force setting resetting Variables 464 18 2 Monitoring Device Status in Maintenance Mode 00 0000 ee eee eee 470 18 3 Monitoring DeviceNet Units 0 0 eee eee 480 18 4 Monitoring EtherNet IP Units 0 2 ee eee eee 486 TABLE OF CONTENTS SECTION 19 Troubleshooting sicias 055 4a eee 60s eden eaeeetas 19 1 Checking the Location of an Error 0 0 eee eee ee 19 2 Troubleshooting CPU Unit Errors 1 2 0 0 eee eee 19 3 Troubleshooting DeviceNet Unit Errors 2 0 0 0 eee 19 4 Troubleshooting EtherNet IP Unit Errors 0 0 2 0 0 eee ee eee 19 5 Troubleshooting Network Configurator Errors 0 0 0 cee eee eee 19 6 Connection Status Tables 0 0 ec cee ene e ee nes SECTION 20 Inspections and Maintenance cceceeeeees 20 1 INSPECHODS sss teh Sue Starh a be phe Be SUNS ee ROE eas E FIR dani ol
266. and NE 2A Series Safety Output device An output device for which special measures for use in safety controls have been implemented Safety relays are an example of a Safety Output device Safety Output Unit The name of the NE2A SOD4 1 Standard Refers to devices functions or data for Standard applications Standard is used to distinguish Standard Devices functions or data from those for which special safety measures for use in safety controls have been implemented Standard CPU Unit A CPU Unit for used in Standard Controls Standard CPU Unit is used for the CPU Units in OMRON s CS CJ Series of PLCs It is used to distinguish CPU Units for use in Standard Controls from Safety CPU Units Standard Programmable Controller Standard PLC A Programmable Controller PLC that is used for Standard Controls Standard PLC is used to distinguish a PLC for Standard Controls from a PLC for Safety Controls 547 Glossary Acronyms Acronym Meaning Common Industrial Protocol Expected Packet Interval Probability of Failure on Demand Probability of Failure per Hour Packets Per Second Requested Packet Interval Target Unique Network Identifier 548 Index A ABORT 68 abort errors 496 ABORT Mode 68 access control 158 access password 158 access password for user defined function blocks 159 activation key 159 Activation Key Dialog Box 398
267. and Safety Relays and support communications using DeviceNet and Ethernet Note The NE2A series Controllers use EtherNet IP for Ethernet communications EtherNet IP supports the CIP Common Industrial Protocol on Ethernet NE2A series Controllers can be used to build Safety Control Systems that meet the following requirements e SIL 3 Safety Integrity Level 3 requirements in IEC 61508 IEC 62061 Functional safety of electrical electronic programmable electronic safety related systems ISO EN 13849 1 Category 4 PL e Appearance of the NE2A series Controller Power EtherNet IP DeviceNet CPU Unit 1 0 Unit t Supply Communications Communications Unit Unit Unit End Unit System Configuration Using NE 2A series Controllers As shown in the following system configuration diagram Safety Control Sys tems based on NE2A series Controllers can be used on the same network with device control systems based on Standard PLCs CS C PLC 2 EtherNet IP 1 NE2A 1 NE2A 2 NE2A 3 CS C PLC 1 DeviceNet 3 DeviceNet 1 DeviceNet 2 DeviceNet 4 DeviceNet 5 DeviceNet 6 Safety Slave Safety Slave Safety Slave Safety Controller Safety Slave Standard Slave Safety Slave Safety Slave Standard Slave a E a N E s g 4 g E ew cre Safety devices Control devices Overview Section 1 1 1 1 2 About the Network Configurator The Network Configurator is a software application for constructing setting up and
268. and a 4 digit detail code For details refer to SECTION 19 Troubleshoot Non fatal error ing 2 1 Seven segment Display When an Error Occurs ON1s OFF ON1s __ OFF ON1s OFF ON1s OFF i hi a Ols E I 01s f O 1s Ols W Ra H elt e Saaja E le HE c Error code Detail code Error code Detail code Z N WARNING Serious injury may possibly occur due to loss of required safety functions Do not S use the NE2A series Controller s indicators for Safety Operations 3 2 3 Switches Memory Card DIP Switch Set the function of the Memory Card by using the DIP switch on the front of the NE2A series Safety CPU Unit The processing that is set on the Memory Card DIP switch will be executed when you press the SERVICE switch which is described in the following sec tion Set all the pins to OFF if the Memory Card functions will not be used 37 Safety CPU Unit SERVICE Switch Note Section 3 2 Default Description MC The system will start in CONFIGURATION DOWNLOAD RESTORE Mode when the power supply is turned ON In this mode the configuration can be restored using the Memory Card MC LOCK The system will start in CONFIGURATION RESTORE Mode when the power supply is turned ON In this mode the configuration can be restored using the Memory Card R eserved Leave set to OFF for future expansion R eserved L
269. and check the program 12 4 2 Setting Safety Connection Parameters The procedure for setting Safety Connection parameters is the same as the procedure for setting DeviceNet Safety For details refer to 11 4 2 Setting Safety Connection Parameters 294 Communications between an NE2A series Controller and a Safety Slave Section 12 4 12 4 3 Convenient Functions for Editing Connections Editing All Connections You can display the connection information for all currently set devices in a table and change the parameters It is not possible to make new connections or to delete existing connections For details refer to 11 4 3 Convenient Func tions for Editing Connections 12 4 4 Stopping or Restarting Communications after an Error With the NE2A Series the user can specify whether to stop or continue 1 0 communications if a connection timeout occurs during Safety I O Communica tions with a Safety Slave If I O communications are stopped because of a tim eout error the communications can be restarted from the Support Software or the logic program For details refer to 11 4 4 Stopping or Restarting Commu nications after an Error 295 Using the NE2A series Controller as a Safety Slave Section 12 5 12 5 Using the NE 2A series Controller as a Safety Slave This section describes how to make settings to use an NE 2A series Controller as a Safety Slave in an EtherNet IP network Set an I O assembly for a Safety Slave to operate th
270. ar Description procedure Force setting a Device Force The output will be turned ON regard variable Mode Force ON less of the actual ON OFF status Force resetting Device Force The output will be turned OFF regard a variable Mode Force less of the actual ON OFF status OFF Cancel individ Device Force The force set status or force reset ual forced sta Mode Force status will be cleared and the variable tus Release will return to the actual ON OFF sta tus Canceling all Device Force The force set status or force reset forced status Mode Force status will be cleared for all variables Release All and the variables will return to the actual ON OFF status Displaying Device Force The force set variables or force reset forced status Mode Upload variables will be added to the Watch Forced List Window You can also right click the variable in the Watch Window and select the vari able to be force set or force reset from the list that is displayed int neyo C i CN Force set variables Force reset variable Watch S Force set variables Name Value Data Type 7 inl Bie Fw R Force reset variables in2 SOn BOOL out R Off BOOL The variables that were force set or force reset will return to the actual I O values when Force Mode of the NE2A series Controller is ended remote output N Forced status of remote output N Forc
271. arameters again e If the above remedy does not work delete then re register the connec tions registered to the Safety Master 01 080E 536 TUNID Mismatch The TUNID for the Safety Slave monitored by the Safety Master does not match the TUNID of the Safety Slave itself Reset the Safety Slave to default settings then download the correct device parameters e If the above remedy does not work delete then re register the connec tions registered to the Safety Master Connection Status Tables Section 19 6 Status Countermeasure Safety Configuration not possible 1 The Safety Slave is configuration locked and Configure the target device is selected for the Open Type setting for the Safety Master connection Release the configuration lock on the Safety Slave to configure the Safety Slave from the Safety Master eTo configure the Safety Slave from a configuration tool set the Safety Master connection to Check the safety signature under Open Type Then reset the Safety Slave to default settings and download the device parameters to the Safety Slave again 2 The execution mode of the DST1 XD Safety Slave was set to Auto Execution and then the open type setting in the safety connection set tings in the safety master was set to configure a safety slave Safety I O communications are not possible in Auto Execution Mode If the DST1 XD Safety Slave is to be used with safety I O communica tions set the execution m
272. ard ID MAC ID 0 Baudrate 125K Bit s 250K Bit s 500K Bit s OK Cancel This dialog box will differ with the Interface Board that is selected Here a 3G 8F 7 DRM21 DeviceNet PCI Board is used as an example If you are us ing any other Interface Board refer to the manual for that board The items specified in the Setup Interface Dialog Box are described in the following table Description Board ID This is a number that is used to identify the board when more than one DeviceNet Interface Board is inserted in the same computer You can set any number from 0 to 7 as long each Board is assigned a unique number The default setting is 0 MAC ID Select the node ID of the DeviceNet Interface Board Baud rate Select the baud rate of the DeviceNet network to connect to 4 Make the settings and then click the OK Button A message box will be displayed to confirm the baud rate Network Configurator Enters on line in 500K Bit s Baud rate When this Baud rate is not equal to other device s setup any Network Error may occur Cancel 5 Click the OK Button The Select Connect Network Port Dialog Box will be displayed Select Connect NetworlePort Select a network port that you would like to connect Browse Y DeviceNet 2 Device ntormation Vendor ID Product Name Device Type Revision Refresh OK Cancel 427 Connecting Online 6 7 Section 17 2 Select
273. ariables and local I O input data Number of Registrations The number of data items registered to the I O assembly is displayed here A maximum of 64 status information items can be registered for one input assembly and 64 for one output assembly Number of Registered Variables The total number of input and output variables that has been registered is dis played Up to 2 048 variables can be registered total for input and output vari ables 276 Using an NE2A series Controller as a Standard Slave Section 11 7 Use as Default I O Data Option Use this option to specify the default connection Connections of I O assem blies for which this option is selected will be automatically registered when automatic allocation is used and registration is performed with the Master If this option is selected for an I O assembly the selection will be cleared for the I O assembly for which it was previously selected 1 0 Type Use this property to select the type of connection for I O communications in DeviceNet Standard Communications Refer to 5 5 2 Standard Connection Settings for information on connection types The I O type cannot be set for output assemblies Registering Unregistering Creating and Editing Data Refer to 11 5 2 Setting Assembly Data for information on registering unregis tering creating and editing data 11 7 3 Registering from the Logic Editor You can register I O assembles from the Logic Editor Procedure 1 2 3
274. arly the One Page Button is enabled when two pages are being viewed Magnifies the view of the preview The view can be magnified up to two levels Returns the magnified view of the preview to normal The view that was magnified up to two levels can be reduced up to two levels and returned to the standard view Closes the Print Preview Window Page 403 Printing Section 15 10 15 10 3 Page Setup The paper size for printing paper source and print orientation can be speci fied Procedure 1 2 3 1 Select Page Setup from the File Menu The Page Setup Dialog Box will be displayed Paper Size Source Orientation Margins roillimeters G Portrait Landscape OK Cancel The printer properties are not described in this section because they are different for each printer 2 Specify the orientation and click the OK Button The items displayed in the Printer Settings Dialog Box are described in the following table tem Description Size Sets the size of the paper Source Sets the paper source Orientation Sets the orientation of the paper 15 10 4 Printer Settings The paper margins title setting header and footer can be specified Procedure 1 2 3 1 Select Printer Settings from the File Menu The Print Settings Dialog Box will be displayed 404 Printing Section 15 10 Print Settings Margins Title Setting Header Footer
275. asswords described here protect the following items e Device parameters e Programming Edit Device Parameters Slave 1 0 DeviceNet Target 1 0 EthetNetIP 1 0 Unit __ Safety Connections _ e Safety Slavel O Communication Unit Mode Cycle Time Extend Mode Logic Program Execution Delay Disable Execute the program without waiting for the Safety 1 0 Enable Execute the program after waiting for the Safety 1 0 Restore Operation Mode This device only All device on the network Run ldle Operation Mode This device only All device on the network User Program ID o go00 3999 Parameters Protection Change Password 237 Setting Device Parameters Section 10 2 238 SECTION 11 Setting DeviceNet Networks This section describes how to set up DeviceNet networks for a NE2A series Safety Network Controller 11 1 DeviceNet Network Setting Procedure 00 0 0 0000 240 11 2 Registering DeviceNet Units to the CPU Unit 0 00 241 11 2 1 Associating the CPU Unit and DeviceNet Units 241 11 3 DeviceNet Network Settings 0 0 0 0 cece eee eee eee 245 11 3 1 Setting Network Addresses 0 0000 0 e eee eee 245 11 3 2 Setting Node Addresses 00 0 0 cee eee eee eee 246 11 3 3 Adding Devices to a Network 0 0 0 0 00 0000005 246 11 4 Communications between an NE2A series Controller and a Safety Slave 249
276. ate it if it is different from the network con figuration Operation continues for the next device Target node address 501 Troubleshooting CPU Unit Errors CPU Unit Indi cator 7 segment display MS Error Detail C2 04 Target node address Error name Revision Mismatch Section 19 2 Cause Recovery method Status after error The operating mode cannot be changed or the configuration cannot be restored because the major revision of the device was lower i e older than the major revision of the device registered in the configuration restore file This error message will be displayed only ten times if the error occurs when changing the operating mode using the RUN STOP RESTART switch The display will be held if the error occurs when restoring the configuration Check the Target device Alternatively check the configura tion restore file and make sure the device revisions are the same Operation continues for the next device C2 05 Target node address TUNID Mismatch An operating mode change or configuration restoration can not be executed because the TUNID of the Target device does not match See note Check the Target device Alternatively check the operation rights file and recreate it if itis different from the network con figuration Operation continues for the next device C2 06 Target node addre
277. ated Download the device param eters to the Safety Slave No of Connections Error The setting for the number of safety I O connections exceeds the upper limit supported by the Safety Slave Adjust the Safety Connection setting for the relevant Safety Master Vendor ID or Program Code Error The device data vendor ID or product code for the device on the Configu rator and the device used in the actual system does not match Use Safety Slave Verification Device Parameter Verify to check that the device in the system and the device registered to the Safety Mas ter match lf they do match delete then re register the connections registered to the Safety Master Device Type Error The device data device type for the device on the Configurator and the device used in the actual system does not match Use Safety Slave Verification Device Parameter Verify to check that the device in the system and the device registered to the Safety Mas ter match eif they do match delete then re register the connections registered to the Safety Master Revision Error The device data revision for the device on the Configurator and the device used in the actual system does not match Use Safety Slave Verification Device Parameter Verify to check that the device in the system and the device registered to the Safety Mas ter match eif they do match delete then re register the connection
278. ated and stopped for troubleshooting e The cause of stopping operation can be immediately determined on the 7 segment display on the Controller and in the error log and operation his tory at the Configurator A Memory Card can be used to download parameters and the operating mode can be changed This makes it easy to replace or repair communi cations nodes without having to use the Network Configurator Parame ters can be downloaded not only to individual CPU Units but also to all of the nodes on the DeviceNet network to which a CPU Unit is connected Access Control by Passwords e The network configuration and programming information is protected by passwords set for the NE 2A series Controller e Access to network configuration files and program files created by the Network Configurator is also password controlled Functions 1 3 Functions Function Communications Control Functions Section 1 3 Reference DeviceNet Safety Commu nications The Controller provides the functions of a DeviceNet Safety Master anda DeviceNet Safety Slave It can communicate with devices that support DeviceNet Safety EtherNet IP Safety Commu nications The Controller provides the functions of an EtherNet IP Safety Master and an EtherNet IP Safety Slave It can communicate with devices that support EtherNet IP Safety The wide network bandwidth enables construction of large scale sys tems DeviceNet Standard Com
279. ated attempts will be made to establish the Standard I O Connection again Other operations will be continued d6 Target node address 0344 Verification errors Stan 05 Slave node dard 1 0 address The I O connection registered in the scan listis not supported by the device Check that the communications Target Slave is set correctly and that the connection registered in the scan listis also correct Correct the settings if neces Sary Repeated attempts will be made to establish the Standard I O Connection again Other operations will be continued d6 Target node address 0344 Verification errors Stan 06 Slave node dard 1 0 address The Slave I O data size does not match what is reg istered in the scan list Check that the communications Target Slave is set correctly and that the connection registered in the scan listis also correct Correct the settings if neces sary Repeated attempts will be made to establish the Standard I O Connection again Other operations will be continued d6 Target node address 516 0344 Verification errors Stan 07 Slave node dard 1 0 address A connection path registered in the scan list could not be set Check that the communications Target Slave is set correctly and that the Slave connection bus setting registered in the scan list is also correct Correct the settings if necessary Repeated attemp
280. ation Displays the operation that was saved Displays the result of the operation Accumulated Time Microseconds Detail Operation Result 478 Monitoring Device Status in Maintenance Mode Section 18 2 Updating the Operation Log Click the Update Button to monitor the most recent operation log Clearing the Operation Log Click the Clear Button to delete the operation log saved internally in the NE2A NE1A NEOA or DST1 Exporting the Operation Log The operation log information can be saved in the CSV format Click the Export Button to save the information Operations That Are Saved A log of the following operations is saved NE 2A series Controllers e Turning ON the power supply e Changing to RUN Mode e Changing to STOP Mode e Resetting e Restoring memory with a Memory Card e Locking with the Memory Card Network Configurator e Setting a TUNID e Downloading parameters e Locking e Unlocking e Changing to RUN Mode e Changing to STOP Mode e Starting Force Mode e Ending Force Mode e Force Mode timeout e Resetting e Changing the device password initialization e Clearing the error history Note The entire operation log will be deleted when you reset to the default settings with the Network Configurator or Logic Editor 18 2 8 Manufacturing Information Monitor The manufacturing information on the NE2A CPU Unit can be displayed 479 Monitoring DeviceNet Units Section 18 3 18
281. ation shown above separating the system into area 1 and area 2 makes it easier to understand Also separating light curtains and emergency stop buttons that are connected to both areas makes it easier to determine which light curtain or emergency stop button has an error if an error occurs 15 7 1 Creating Sections Adding Sections Procedure 1 2 3 Projects can consists of more than one section The sections can be used to separate the programming for individual functions and processes This feature of the NE2A Safety Network Controller is useful when constructing large scale systems because you can reduce maintenance by dividing the program into sections When a new project is created there is only one section The following proce dure can be use to add other sections 1 Select Create New Section from the Project Menu or selecta project or section from the Project Window press the shortcut key and select New Section from the menu A new section will be added to the project in the P roject Window 385 Creating Sections Note Note Section 15 7 Project vw Ax Project wax 5 NE2A SCPU01 5 NE2A SCPUOI S Section S Section J User Fucntion Blocks S Section2 By User N Added Up to 256 sections can be created 1 The NE2A series Controller executes the program in order from the first i e top section registered in the Project Window 2 A list of the sections and folders are displayed in the
282. ations Target 54 The response message will be discarded and Bit 7 ON operation continued Bits 0 to 6 Com mand origin node address Received data The receivable data size 552 bytes was size exceeded exceeded by an Explicit Message Request limit Check the size of the message at the source device and reduce the message size of the request Received data will be discarded and operation continued 520 Troubleshooting DeviceNet Unit Errors Communications Unit Network Configurator Indi cators 7 segment display Error history Displayed message MS NS Error Detail Error Saved Detail Internal full receiver buffer nal buffer could Section 19 3 Cause Recovery method Status after error The message request was received but the inter not be obtained DeviceNet Unit Reduce the message request load sent to the continued Received data will be discarded and operation 521 Troubleshooting EtherNet IP Unit Errors Section 19 4 19 4 Troubleshooting EtherNet IP Unit Errors 19 4 1 Checking the EtherNet IP Unit Error Status Status Indicator The status indicators show the status and error codes of an EtherNet IP Unit Refer to 3 7 2 Indications Seven Segment Display The 2 digit 7 segment display shows the status and error codes of an EtherNet IP Unit Refer to 3 7 2 Indications The error code and
283. ave or used in Tag Data Links Target Creating the EtherNet IP Network to Be Designed Refer to 12 2 1 y Setting the EtherNet IP Network Refer to 12 3 AA Registering Devices in the EtherNet IP Network Refer to 12 3 2 x Setting I O Assemblies Slaves blies with the Network Configurator Procedure for registering vari ables when creating I O assem Procedure for creating I O assemblies after creating vari ables with the Logic Editor Registering I O Assemblies for Slaves Refer to 12 5 1 and 12 7 1 Starting the Logic Editor from the Network Configurator Refer to 15 2 y AA Creating Variables for Slave I O Refer to 12 5 2and 12 7 2 Creating Variab Refer to 15 5 les for Slave I O y y Setting I O Assemblies for Slaves Refer to 12 5 2 and 12 7 2 Registering I O Assemblies for Slaves Refer to 12 5 1 and 12 7 1 Connection Settings Master Registering Slaves to a Master Refer to 12 4 1 vy Setting Connection Parameters Refer to 12 4 2 282 y Setting I O Assemblies for Slaves Refer to 12 5 2and 12 7 2 y Closing the Logic Editor Referto 15 2 Registering EtherNet IP Units to the CPU Unit Section 12 2 12 2 Registering EtherNet IP Units to the CPU Unit This section describes the procedure for
284. ay Mode 2 which displays the configuration based on the Slaves Expand All Device Displays the devices registered to the Master and Slaves ina detailed display Collapse All Device Closes the display of the devices registered to the Master and Slaves in the detailed display Hardware List Displays or hides the Hardware List Pane Network Structure Displays or hides the Network Configuration List Pane Network Menu Menu commands Description Toolbar Online icon Connect Connects the Network Configurator to the network Disconnect Disconnects the Network Configurator from the network Change Connect Network Changes the destination network port Wireless Move to Upper Displays the network one layer above the current network in Network Network the wireless networks Not normally used with the NE 2A series Controllers Move to Lower Displays the network one layer below the current network in Network the wireless networks Not normally used with the NE 2A series Controllers Upload Uploads all the device parameters in the network to the Net work Configurator Download Downloads all the device parameters in the Network Config urator to the devices in the network Verify Structure Verifies the current network configuration in the Network Configurator with the actual network configuration of the destination online connection I O connection Start Starts Safety I O Communicati
285. ay possibly occur due to loss of required safety functions Clear previous configuration data before connecting the devices to the network Serious injury may possibly occur due to loss of required safety functions Set suitable node addresses and a Suitable baud rate before connecting the devices to the network Serious injury may possibly occur due to loss of required safety functions Per form user testing and confirm that all of the device configuration data and oper ation is correct before starting system operation Serious injury may possibly occur due to loss of required safety functions When replacing a device configure the replacement device suitably and confirm that it operate correctly Outputs may operate possibly resulting in serious injury Take sufficient safety measures before force setting or force resetting variables in the program Serious injury may possibly occur due to loss of required safety functions Use equipment and parts that comply with applicable standards for the required safety levels and safety categories for all safety functions Serious injury may possibly occur due to loss of required safety functions Use appropriate components or devices according to the requirements given in the following table AAALAC xxii Precautions for Safe Use 4 Control device Requirements Emergency stop switch Use approved devices with a direct opening mechanism compliant with IEC
286. ayed 3 Click the General Error Status Tab The General Error Status Tab Page will be displayed 473 Monitoring Device Status in Maintenance Mode Section 18 2 Monitor Device Local 1 0 Status Operation Log List Production Information Status i Safety Connection Error History General v OK Local 1 0 Configuration Error Close Overall Unit Status For details on each item refer to Overall Unit Status on page 124 Error Status For details on each item refer to Error Status on page 125 18 2 4 Monitoring Safety Connections The status of Safety Connections for an NE2A series Controller can be moni tored from the Network Configurator This will enable you to identify devices with which safety communications could not be established properly or the Safety Connections for which an error has occurred The connection information of a DST1 series Controller cannot be monitored Monitoring from the Network Configurator 1 2 3 1 Select the device whose status is to be monitored 2 Select Monitor from the Device Menu You can also right click the device and select Monitor from the pop up menu Or you can click the Monitor Device Icon 2 in the toolbar The Monitor Device Dialog Box will be displayed 3 Click the Status Tab The Status Tab Page will be displayed 474 Monitoring Device Status in Maintenance Mode Section 18 2 Monitor Device Local 1 0 Status Status Enof His
287. ayed until the next NE2A peripheral servicing cycle 3 The send data to the EtherNet IP Unit does not arrive in time to send the Tag Data Links and processing is delayed until the next Tag Data Link The total network delay is added to this interval 4 The signal does not arrive in time to update the receive data memory of the Standard PLC CPU Unit and processing is delayed until the next PLC cycle time 5 The send data to the DeviceNet Unit does not arrive in time for the DeviceNet communications send cycle and processing is delayed until the next DeviceNet communications cycle CPU Unit memory updated PLC cycle EtherNet IP RPI NE2A peripheral servicing od syes Communications cycle time DeviceNet communications cycle Total network delay Slave 1 ON ON 1 The RPI requested packet interval is the interval of data communications in EtherNet IP tag data link communications 2 With Standard Communications data can be transferred by assigning DeviceNet Master input data for monitoring to EtherNet IP Tag Data Link data Maximum I O response time Input Slave ON OFF delay DeviceNet 1 communications cycle time x 2 NE2A peripheral servicing cycle time x 3 179 Calculating Response Performance of Standard Communications Section 8 3 EtherNet IP RPI Total network delay PLC cycle time x 2 DeviceNet 2 communications cycle time x 2 Output Slave ON OFF delay Note Refer to the
288. be performed without the Network Configurator Changing the Operating Mode with the RUN STOP RESTART Switch and Network Configurator There is no priority between using the RUN STOP RESTART switch to start or stop program execution and changing the operating mode from the Network Configurator Either way program execution can be started or stopped at the desired time Check the status of the NE2A series Controller program using the RUN indi cator to determine if program execution is started or stopped Check the MS indicator for the operating mode 165 Examples of Security According to Roles Section 7 3 7 3 Examples of Security According to Roles The following table lists the security functions and examples of the security Device operation by Memory Card t achieved according to the roles Operation Means of Open a project file Save the project file Open a program Use program online monitor Change a device parameter Change a program Download a parameter Change project file password Change device password a1 Force set reset variables in program ge device operation lock unlock operating mode Change the network configuration add delete Access log information and status information Open a device parameter compare create report Change a device node address or baud rate Change parameter password and access rights O Chan achieving security Operations requiring a device
289. been confirmed or a Memory Card is not inserted The error display will disappear when a Memory Card is inserted Confirm the configuration restore file after this occurs Use the following procedure to check the configura tion restore file The relevant function is not executed and other operations continue If the RUN STOP RESTART switch is pressed while the con figuration restore file is being checked i e while the file ID is displayed this error will be displayed for 10 s and then the file ID will be displayed again and the system will wait for user confirmation i e until the SERVICE switch is pressed If the system is in CONFIGURATION RESTORE Mode and the Memory Card is not inserted the system will wait for the Memory Card to be inserted Memory Card removed during oper ation The process cannot be continued because power supplied to the Memory Card was turned OFF or the Memory Card was removed when the operating mode was being changed or the configuration was being restored See note 1 Insert the Memory Card and reconfirm the configuration restore file Note The error display will disappear when the Memory Card is inserted Use the following procedure to check the configuration restore file If the operating mode is changed using the RUN STOP RESTART switch only processing the operating mode change will stop Other operations will continue In CONFIGURATION RESTORE Mode processing in
290. bly data 263 276 296 setting device parameters 235 setting I O assemblies 300 setting IP addresses 286 setting NE2A series operation at startup 75 setting network numbers 245 setting parameters for local I O 332 setting Safety Connection parameters 254 294 setting safety input bits 345 setting safety output bits 342 setting Slave input data in IDLE Mode 277 306 setting Standard Connections 271 setting TCP IP 98 setting the Channel Mode 343 346 setting the operating mode after a communications error 136 setting the parameters for safety I O bits 336 Setup TCP IP Configuration Dialog Box 291 seven segment display 37 494 Signature Tab Page 444 single cast connection 104 Single beam Safety Sensor 144 Slave Function Status Area 481 483 Slave I O DeviceNet Tab Page 273 specifications 33 Standard Connection 108 standard control 24 Standard I O Communications cycle time 313 Standard I O Communications cycle time settings 183 Standard Master 278 standards xx Xxvi starting 164 Index starting and stopping execution of all NE_A series Control lers 165 starting program execution 461 starting the Network Configurator 207 status bar 228 status related data 124 Status Tab 480 486 STOP 38 stopping 164 stopping or restarting communications after an error 258 stopping program execution 461 subnet mask 99 switches 37 48 54 switching hub 100 419 switchin
291. branch from the Safety Input terminal shown as INO and IN1 in the above diagram to connect to the NE2A SID4 1 Safety Input Unit 145 Safety Input Functions Section 6 2 Connecting a Safety Mat If the input channel mode is set to Test pulse from test output select Mat as the dual channel channel mode The Safety Mat output is input to the Safety Input terminal The following input signal line errors can be detected using the test output sig nal e Contact with the power supply line positive side e Ground faults Note Use Safety Input terminals Si0 and Sil to connect a Safety Mat A Safety Mat cannot be connected to Safety Input terminals Si2 and Si3 Connecting a Safety Mat Example S Matl 146 Safety Input Functions Section 6 2 Connecting a Safety Device with a Semiconductor Output Select Used as Safety Input as the input channel mode The output from a 24 VDC semiconductor such as the OSSD output from a Light Curtain is input Errors in the OSSD output signal line i e the input signal line to the Safety Input Unit are detected at the externally connected device Light Curtain OSSD1 PNP output OSSD2 PNP output Ino IN1 6 2 4 Setting a Dual Channel Mode Input safety terminals can be used as dual channels one pair for the NE2A SID4 1 Safety Input Unit Setting a Dual Channel Mode enables the following e Two inputs can be evaluated and the result reflected in a variab
292. by modifying the Inputand Output Size Setting of the function block The function block with the disconnected input or output can be checked using the build function Connecting 15 6 6 Input and Output Size Setting 15 6 3 Build 15 8 1 Message could not be sent The Network Configurator could not connect to the NE2A series Controller when data was downloaded through a USB connection Check that power is supplied to the device and send the message again The data used by the user program is not aligned with other data Data used by the logic pro gram does notalign with other data because the network configuration was changed Start the Logic Editor and check where the inputs and outputs were changed Download the data Starting the Logic Editor 15 3 1 Downloading 17 3 1 533 Connection Status Tables Section 19 6 19 6 Connection Status Tables 19 6 1 Outline If an error occurs when the NE2A series Controller tries to establish a safety connection with a DST1 NE0A series Safety I O Terminal or an NE1A NE 2A series Controller set as a Slave the 7 segment display will display the error code d6 or d5 If an error occurs during I O communications the 7 seg ment display will display the error code dA Foran EtherNet IP Unit IP forthe IP address or dn for a DeviceNet node address will be displayed next followed by the address of the Safety Slave in hexadecimal
293. cally change the value of the relevant connection EP I to the same value as local cycle time This allows you to prevent errors when downloading 3 The remote cycle time will not be checked if the device to communicate with is an NE2A NE1A series Controller Slave operation Check that the EPI that is set is equal to or greater than the cycle time of the remote NE2A NE 1A series Controller Click the Advanced Setup Button to display the Advanced Connection Set tings Dialog Box The communications parameters can be changed but nor mally there is no need to make changes For details refer to 5 4 2 Setting Safety Connections Advanced Connection Setting Reaction Time 64 ms Data Expected Packet nterval EPI E ms Value 10 ms Timeout Multiplier 1 Network Delay Multiplier 10 Value 100 ID Allocation _ Allocate the ID for produced connections Ask safety slave for produced IDs OK Cancel 11 4 3 Convenient Functions for Editing Connections Editing All Connections Procedure 1 2 3 256 You can display the connection information for all currently set devices in a table and change the parameters It is not possible to make new connections or to delete existing connections 1 Set the Network Configuration Pane to display a network that has a Safety Master For an NE2A series Controller display the NE2A Backplane to display a list of connections Select Edit All C
294. ce Please select communication interface And connect to the target device Select interface NE24 USB Port X 3 Selectthe interface to which the computer is connected from the Select In terface Field NExA USB Port for a USB port and click the Connect to Device Button When the device has been connected successfully the Browse Network Dialog Box will be displayed Browse Metwork Select a device that you would like ta connect Browse ee Y BackPlane oS i 9 0 NE2A DNS21 i 41 NE2A ENS21 Device Information Vendor ID 47 Product Name NE2A SCPUDI Device Type 768 Revision 1 07 re Datin If you fail to connect the device to the interface the following error message will be displayed CIP_CommLink Interface can not be opened re sy 449 Protecting Device Parameters Section 17 6 4 Selecta device in the dialog box and then click the OK Button The Get Device Information Dialog Box will be displayed Get Device Information Please inform the customer support center of the following information and get the Reset Key Device Information Vendor ID Dec Serial number 00000001 Hex Counter 0 Dec Export to text file Copy to Clipboard Esez Contact the Support Center with the values displayed here under the De vice Information Area for vendor ID serial number and counter to obtain the reset ke
295. ce Connections e Safety Mats D40A Non contact Door Switches and Single beam Safety Sensors can be directly connected to NE2A series Safety Input Units Being able to connect directly without connecting through special control lers makes it possible to reduce costs and to save space in the control panel Features Section 1 2 Design Environment for Easier Programming e A wide selection of safety related function blocks enables more efficient program development e Program files and user defined function blocks created using NE2A series Controllers can be reused as program components e Programs and user defined function blocks created using NE1A series Controllers can also be used enabling effective use of existing resources Complete System Startup Support e The Logic Editor can simultaneously display and monitor multiple pro grams With online monitoring errors that occur at devices on the network can be easily identified on the Network Configurator monitor screen e The variables used in the program can be force set or force reset regard less of the ON OFF status of local I O and remote I O This makes it pos sible to debug programs during system installation before all local I O and remote I O are connected In addition output wiring can be efficiently checked Improved Maintenance Efficiency e When an error occurs the Network Configurator can be connected and the communications node where the error occurred can be isol
296. ching wires e Wire clippings may become scattered when wiring is performed Perform wiring with the label attached to the top of the Unit to prevent foreign mat ter from entering the Unit After wiring is completed be sure to remove the label to enable heat dissipation 416 Wiring Section 16 2 16 2 2 Applicable Wire Sizes Crimp Terminals and Tightening Torque CPU Units and I O Units This section gives the applicable wire sizes for NE2A series CPU Units and I O Units Wire Sizes Refer to the following for wire sizes for wiring the CPU Unit and external I O devices Solid wire 0 2 to 2 5 mm AWG 24 to 12 Stranded wire 0 34 to 1 5 mm AWG 22 to 16 Using Ferrules with Plastic Insulated Covers Use a ferrule with an insulative cover compliant with DIN 46228 4 Even if the shape is the same the ferrule may not be applicable to the terminal block if the ferrule does not comply with this standard The wire dimensions are rough standards Confirm the dimensions beforehand Note e When wiring with ferrules be sure to insert the ferrules all the way into the terminal block e When using two wire ferrules always use wires of the same diameter e When using two wire ferrules insert the ferrule so that the metal portion of the ferrule is inserted straight into the terminal block i e so that the long sides of the insulative cover are vertical Reference Specifications Product Specifications for Phoenix Contact Model of fe
297. connected Are any cables disconnected or loose els there a lot of noise An error will be returned for any requests for communica tions to the Originator with the error The communications will be restarted by establishing the connection from the Originator again LA IP Target node address 2102 01 IP address Safety I O Connection Timeout A communications timeout occurred during Safety I O Com munications with the Master Consider the following items els the Safety Slave IP address correct eIs the Safety Slave configuration correct The recovery method depends on the setting for when an error occurs in Safety Communications Connection Stop Mode The Safety I O Connection where the error occurred will be stopped e Automatic Recovery Mode Repeated attempts will be made to establish the Safety I O Connection again All other operations will be continued 529 Troubleshooting Network Configurator Errors Section 19 5 Communications Unit Network Configurator Cause Indi 7 segment Error history Displayed Recovery method cators display message Status after error MS Error Error Saved Detail Detail Server Con An error occurred between the BOOTP Server and the nection EtherNet IP Unit Error 1 There is no response from the BOOTP server 2 The IP address set to the EtherNet IP Unit from the BOOTP server was invalid Check the status and settings of the B
298. connections per NE2A series CPU Unit Safety Slaves 8 connections Unit 4 connections Unit 32 bytes connection 16 bytes connection Maximum total of 32 CIP Safety Slave connections per NE2A series CPU Unit Standard Masters No Originator function 126 connections 63 Slaves Unit 2 connections S lave 16 input and 16 output bytes connection 4 protocols supported poll bit strobe COS cyclic Tag Data Links per Target function supported 2 connections Unit Standard Slave 2 connections Unit 200 input and 200 output bytes connection 1 024 bytes connection 1 An Ethernet Switching Hub is required for an EtherNet IP configuration For details on Ethernet Switching Hubs refer to 5 10 Selecting the Ether net Switching Hub Selecting Centralized or Distributed Control Select either centralized or distributed control for the system configuration Up to six Communications Units DeviceNet Units or EtherNet IP Units can be mounted to one NE2A series Controller Up to three EtherNet IP Units can be connected Centralized Control Multiple networks can be used with an NE 2A series Controller so distributing Slaves can reduce the bandwidth used per network and improve responsive ness in addition to expanding the Safety Control Area are E Distributed Control Safety I O Communications can be executed between NE 2A series Control lers by means of a high speed EtherNet IP Safety Network Ps TR Etherne
299. creating programs 376 creating sections 385 creating the configuration restore file 456 creating user defined function blocks 394 creating variables 79 366 critical errors 496 CRITICAL FAULT Mode 68 Cross Reference Window 391 current sourcing 60 cycle time 181 236 Cyclic 109 D D40A 145 D40A Non contact Switch 145 data after communications error 136 default gateway 99 delay time 187 delay time in Tag Data Links 187 deleting a device 248 290 deleting connections 252 550 Index deleting I O assemblies 262 detail codes 495 device information 110 device menu 225 device password 158 447 device properties 442 device status 470 DeviceNet communications 95 DeviceNet connector 49 DeviceNet I F 426 DeviceNet Interface Board 426 DeviceNet network setting procedure 240 DeviceNet network settings 245 DeviceNet Safety communications 102 DeviceNet Safety Unit 46 DeviceNet Standard Communications 107 DeviceNet Unit errors 509 devices with mechanical contact outputs 59 devices with PNP semiconductor outputs 60 dimensions 34 40 DIP switch 37 discrepancy error 149 150 Discrepancy Time 340 discrepancy time 148 distributed control 22 DNS server 99 domain name 99 downloading 432 downloading device parameters 432 downloading parameters 161 458 dual channel complementary 348 dual channel equivalent 149 348 Dual Channel Mode setting
300. creating programs using function blocks Project Window _ This window is for managing the entire project It displays a list of sections and user defined function blocks Function Blocks This window is for managing safety function blocks Window Library Window _ This window is for managing libraries Libraries of user defined function blocks and sections can be managed Variables Window This window is for editing variables used in the program and dis playing them in a list There are pages for input variables output variables and internal variables 1 0 Tag List Win This window displays a list of I O tags for local I O and remote dow I O The I O tags can be used by allocating them to variables Output Window _ This window displays the results when compiling or searching programs Watch Window This window is for monitoring the input output variables in online mode Programs can be tested by force setting and force reset ting variables Cross Reference This window displays the cross references of selected variables Window You can jump to the program by double clicking on a variable displayed in this window Toolbars Displays icons for the File Menu and the Edit Menu Displays icons for the View Menu Displays icons for the Project Menu Displays icons for the Variable Menu Displays icons for the Device Menu Status Bar a Function Shows the total number function blocks and user defined function Blocks blocks be
301. ct model EtherNet IP Safety Communications Section 5 6 5 6 EtherNet IP Safety Communications 5 6 1 Outline of EtherNet IP Safety Communications EtherNet IP Safety performs safety communications on the Ethernet which also functions as a generic network Data can be exchanged between the Safety Master and Safety Slaves without user programming using Safety I O Communications for EtherNet IP Safety One NE2A series Controller can simultaneously function as a Safety Master and Safety Slave and can be a Target for Standard Communications with EtherNet IP communications Gem DeviceNet Safety communications lt gt EtherNet IP Safety communications As a Safety Master Number of connections Up to 128 connections per EtherNet IP Unit There can be a maximum of 160 CIP Safety Master connections for one NE 2A series Controller I O size Up to 32 bytes per connection As a Safety Slave Number of connections Up to 8 connections per EtherNet IP Unit There can be a maximum of 32 CIP Safety Slave connections for one NE 2A series Controller I O size Up to 32 bytes per connection EtherNet IP Safety oe i WG ED Router DeviceN gt t Safety P DeviceNet Safety Devjce Net Safety DeviceNet Safety y 7 7 om K P j S y A p mee 4 4 E fa NE1A series DST1 series DST1 series NE1A series DST1 series DST1 series Controller Controller Controller Controller Controller Controller
302. ctional Safety of Electrical Electronic P rogrammable Electronic S afety related Systems e Complying with Laws and Regulations This Safety Device conforms to the relevant regulations and standards but make sure that it is used in compliance with local regulations and stan dards for the equipment or facilities in which itis applied e Typical related international standards IEC 60204 Safety of Machin ery Electrical Equipment of Machines e Observing Precautions for Use When putting the selected Safety Device to actual use heed the specifica tions and precautions in this Operation Manual and those in the Instruction Manual that comes with the product Using the product in a manner that deviates from these specifications and precautions will lead to unexpected failures in equipment or devices and to damages that result from such fail ures due to insufficient operating functions in safety related components e Moving or Transferring Devices or Equipment When moving or transferring devices or equipment be sure to include this Operation Manual to ensure that the person to whom the device or equip ment is being moved or transferred will be able to operate it properly e Typical related international standards ISO DIS 12100 ISO Safety of Machinery Basic Concepts and General Principles for Design IEC 61508 Safety Standard for Safety Instrumented Systems Functional Safety of Electrical Electronic Programmable Electronic S afety
303. ctone or more devices from which parameters are to be uploaded in the Network Configuration Pane of the Network Configurator 2 Select Parameters Upload from the Device Menu You can also right click the device and select Parameters Upload from the pop up menu Or you can click the Upload from Device Icon in the toolbar A message box will be displayed to confirm starting the upload 436 Downloading and Uploading Device Parameters Section 17 3 Network Configurator 1 Uploading parameters From selected devices will start OK 3 Click the Yes Button The upload will start When all parameters have been uploaded a message box will be dis played to indicate the completion of the upload 4 Click the OK Button The process of uploading parameters from the device will end Uploading Parameters from All Devices on the Networks Network Upload Procedure 1 2 3 1 Select Upload from the Network Menu You can also right click the mouse in an open area of the Network Config uration Pane and select Upload from the pop up menu Or you can click the Upload from Network Icon 3 in the toolbar A message box will be displayed to confirm starting the upload Network Configurator Uploading all devices parameters from network will start based on the current document OK If you select No it will start as new document 2 1 Click the Yes Button A message box will be displayed to re confirm starting the u
304. d I O Communications and message commu nications will be stopped for Communications Units mounted to the CPU Unit and only message communications from the USB port will be enabled 19 2 2 CPU Unit Error Status and Countermeasures Interpreting the Error Status and Countermeasures The following table describes the abbreviations that appear in the tables of error codes Description Indicator Describes the status of the indicator Note No change in display 7 496 Gives the error code and detail code displayed on segment the 7 segment display display Top row Error code Note No display Bottom row Detail code Note No display Troubleshooting CPU Unit Errors Section 19 2 Description Network Error Gives the error code and detail code displayed on Configurator History the 7 segment display Top row Error information No display Bottom row Detailed information No display Indicates whether a record is saved in the error his tory No No record is saved in error history Temporary A record is saved in the error history but itis deleted when the Unit power is turned OFF Yes A record is saved in the error history and itis not deleted when the Unit power is turned OFF Displayed mes Gives the message displayed in the Error History sage Monitor Dialog Box of the Network Configurator Errorname Names are used to identify errors Error names ar
305. d I O Connection again Other operations will be continued d5 Target node address 2101 2C Safety Slave node address Nonexistent Safety Slave Device No Safety Slaves exist in the network when the Safety Master connection is established Consider the following items ls the Safety Slave power supply OFF els the Safety Slave node address correct Are baud rates for the Standard Master and Stan dard Slaves on the network the same Are the cable lengths branch main lines suitable Are any cables disconnected or loose els there a terminator at each end of the main line els there a lot of noise Repeated attempts will be made to establish the Standard I O Connection again Other operations will be continued d6 Target node address 2101 01 to 68 Safety Slave node address I O Connec tion Establish ment Failure The Safety Slave device configuration is invalid or Safety I O Communications is disabled while a Safety Master connection is being established Consider the following items els the Safety Slave MAC ID correct ls the Safety Slave configuration correct els the Safety Slave operating mode correct Repeated attempts will be made to establish the Standard I O Connection again Other operations will be continued 515 Troubleshooting DeviceNet Unit Errors Communications Unit Network Configurator Indi 7 segment cators display
306. d Slave and click the Button The NE2A DNS21 will be registered to the device to be used as the Stan dard Master Step 3 can be eliminated by dragging and dropping the NE2A series NE2A DNS21 to use as a Standard Slave to the Standard Master in the Network Configuration Pane C 2 DeviceNet NEZA Backplane C NE2A4_ Be p 02 OSI We ORM NEDACI DNS21 NE24 DNS21 T Drag the NE2A DNS21 to use as the Standard Slave to the CS1W DRM21 to use as the Standard Master Refer to the manual of the relevant DeviceNet device for information on setting devices as Standard Masters 279 Communications between an NE2A series Controller and a Standard Master Section 11 8 280 SECTION 12 Setting EtherNet IP Networks This section describes how to set up EtherNet IP networks for a NE2A series Safety Network Controller 12 1 EtherNet IP Network Setting Procedure 00004 282 12 2 Registering EtherNet IP Units to the CPU Unit 0 283 12 2 1 Associating the CPU Unit and EtherNet IP Units 283 12 3 EtherNet IP Network Settings 0 0 0 e eee ee eee 286 12 3 1 Setting IP Addresses 0 0 00 eee eee eee 286 12 3 2 Adding Devices to a Network 0 00 00 0 00002 eee 289 12 3 3 TCP IP Setin S 3 b ccse EE Ohectin eesti oe cane we 291 12 4 Communications between an NE2A series Controller and a Safety Slave 292 12 4 1 Registering Safety Slaves
307. d again Perform the installation using the procedure in step 1 5 Note Ifan NE1A series NEOA series or NE2A series Controller is connected to a computer on which the driver has been installed only once the Found New Hardware Wizard Dialog Box will be displayed again If it is displayed select the Search for a suitable driver for my device recommended Option and then continue with the procedure Installing on Windows Vista Operating Procedure 1 2 3 1 When the computer detects the Safety Network Controller the Found New Hardware Dialog Box will be displayed S elect the Locate and install driver software recommended O ption yfoued New Prgere j Windows needs to install driver software for your NE1A USB Port Locate and install driver software recommended Windows will guide you through the process of installing driver software for your device gt Ask me again later Windows will ask again the next time you plug in your device crlog on Don t show this message again for this device Your device will not function until you install driver software Cancel 200 Installing the USB Driver Section 9 3 2 3 If the following dialog box is displayed select the Don t search online Op tion Allow Windows to search online for driver software for your NELA USB Port gt Yes always search online recommended Windows will automatically search for the la
308. d as local I O Safety Output Unit NE2A SOD4 1 The NE2A SOD4 1 is a building block Safety Output Unit that can be mounted to the NE2A series Controller and used as local I O End Unit NE2A END The NE2A END End Unit is mounted to the right of the NE2A series CPU Unit or a Safety I O Unit It is required even when Safety I O Units are not used The End Unit is included with the CPU Unit End Cover NE2A TERO1 The NE2A TERO1 End Cover is mounted to the left of the NE2A series CPU Unit or Communications Unit It is not required when the system includes a Power Supply Unit The End Cover is included with the CPU Unit Power Supply Unit NE2A PD025 The NE2A PD025 Power Supply Unit is required when one or more Com munications Units are mounted DeviceNet Safety Unit NE2A DNS21 The NE2A DNS21 DeviceNet Safety Unit is mounted to the NE2A series Controller It supports both DeviceNet Safety and DeviceNet Standard Communications EtherNet IP Safety Unit NE2A ENS21 The NE2A ENS21 EtherNet IP Safety Unit is mounted to the NE2A series Controller It supports both EtherNet IP Safety and EtherNet IP Standard Communications Network Configurator WS02 CFSC1 The Network Configurator is a software application for configuring Safety Control Systems It can be used to set parameters for OMRON Safety Devices including the NE2A and for building CIP networks including DeviceNet Safety and EtherNet IP Safety
309. d for the network The bandwidth is the network communications load A communications time out will occur in any communications for which connections are set that exceed the allowable usage ratio for communications If the allowable bandwidth for the network is exceeded change the network configuration For details refer to 8 2 Calculating Safety Response Performance 2 3 2 Verifying Safety Response Performance Reaction Times The safe distance is calculated based on the reaction time The reaction time is the maximum time required to stop an output in a safety chain taking into account the occurrence of interference and failure 1 Safety chains are logical connections for actualizing safety functions from input devices to control devices including remote I O devices to output devices Calculate all the reaction times and verify that they meet the specifications If they do not meet the specifications change the network configuration For details refer to 8 2 Calculating Safety Response Performance Z N WARNING confirm that the reaction time calculated for each safety chain satisfies the Serious injury may possibly occur due to loss of required safety functions Always required specifications S 2 3 3 Verifying Response Performance in Standard Communications Response Performance in DeviceNet Standard Communications Response performance in DeviceNet Standard Communications is deter mined by the communications
310. d in Message Error status Report Pane of Network Con Reference to sections where figurator procedures for resetting the errors can be found E Error occurred No errors 530 Troubleshooting Network Configurator Errors Error Table Network Configurator message Privilege violation Error description You cannot change or reset the configuration nor change the operating mode with the password you are using Section 19 5 Reset and Relevant sections Check whether the password you are using is correct Connecting through a USB 17 2 1 Downloading 17 3 1 Cannot be executed in the current device mode Data is being downloaded simultaneously from multiple Network Configurators Wait until the other downloads have been completed Cannot be executed in the current mode An abort fatal error has occurred The MS Indicator is flashing red Correct the switch setting or reset to default setting to clear the configuration data If an error occurs when the operating mode is changed download the device parameters again Switches 3 2 3 Resetting 17 8 1 Downloading 17 3 1 The configuration cannot be reset with the NE2A series Controller in the current sta tus Refer to 17 8 2 Reset Types and Device Sta tus to change the configuration lock status of the NE 2A series Controller Locking 17 7 2 The device is not configured Download the device parameters Downloadin
311. date Clear Save The displayed items are described in the following table Description Time of Error Displays the conduction time of the device when an error occurs However 0 is displayed at all times for a DST1 series Controller Error Information Displays the error code Detailed Information Displays detailed information on the error code Content Describes the error Updating the Error History Click the Update Button to monitor the most recent error history Clearing the Error History Click the Clear Button to delete the error history saved internally in the NE 2A NE1A NEOA or DST1 Saving the Error History The error history information can be saved in the CSV format Click the Save Button to save the error history 476 Monitoring Device Status in Maintenance Mode Section 18 2 18 2 6 Monitoring Local I O Status You can monitor the contact operation counter of the Safety Input Status Test Output Status and Safety Output Status Monitoring from the Network Configurator The local I O status can be monitored by using the following procedure Procedure 1 2 3 1 Select the device whose status is to be monitored 2 Select either Monitor or Maintenance Information from the Device Menu You can also right click the device and select Monitor or Maintenance In formation from the pop up menu Or you can click the Monitor Device Icon a or Maintenance Informa tion Icon 4
312. dden by default Message Report Pane Displays information such as communications errors 9 6 2 Network Configuration Pane The display for the Network Configuration Pane can be switched The follow ing table shows the display modes Display mode Description Normal Mode Displays normal mode information Maintenance Mode Displays normal mode information and maintenance information Detailed Display 1 Mode Displays information on devices registered to a Master based on Master Detailed Display 2 Mode Displays information on devices registered to Slaves based on Slaves 218 Main Window and Menus Section 9 6 Normal Mode The normal mode is the normal display mode It displays device icons node addresses and descriptions of devices Connected network identifier Device icon Device description DeviceMet_1 TO EtherNet IP_1 2 NE24 ENS21 Ya 2 00 Node address Routing network registration status The following table describes the items Connected network identifier Description These marks identify the networks that are connected online The gray icon indicates a network that is offline or not connected online The blue icon indicates a network to which the Network Configurator is directly connected online The green icon indicates a network that is indirectly con nected online via a router device The red
313. de Address Switches Note Baud Rate DIP Switch 48 Use this switch to set the unit number of the DeviceNet Safety Unit Set the unit number so that the same unit number is not used for another Communications Unit mounted to the same CPU Unit No VO 0 to F Operation will be performed with the set unit number The default setting is 0 Set the switch using a small flathead screw driver and be careful not to dam age the rotary switch Use these switches to set the DeviceNet node address as a decimal number Any node address can be setas long as itis not the same address as another node on the same network A node address duplication error will occur and communications will stop an address that is already used by another node is set O son x10 x10 Description Operation will be performed with the value set using the switches The default setting is 63 Do not set The Unit will not start Be sure the power supply is turned OFF before setting these switches The MS indicator will flash red and communications will be as follows e Safety I O Communications will stop e Standard I O Communications will continue Safety I O Communications will start again when the node address is returned to the original setting Set the switches using a small flat head screw driver and be careful not to damage the rotary switches Use this DIP switch to set the DeviceNet baud rate Set the same baud rate
314. detail code are i OFF Error Er 1 Error El 2 Detail code 1 U m 2 Error Code Error code 2 displayed on the 7 segment display generally indicates the fol lowing error categories Error code Error category OFF Errors related to the EtherNet IP Unit A Errors related to the Safety I O Communications Ck Errors with switch operation d Errors related to the Master E F Errors related to the network H Errors related to interaction with the CPU Unit L Errors related to the Tag Data Link Target function Errors related to message communications 522 Troubleshooting EtherNet IP Unit Errors Section 19 4 19 4 2 EtherNet IP Unit Error Status and Countermeasure Interpreting the Error Status and Countermeasures The following table describes the abbreviations that appear in the tables of error codes Description Communica Indicators Gives the status of the MS and NS indicators tions Unit Top row MS indicator TA No change in display Bottom row NS indicator No change in display Gives the error code and detail code displayed on the 7 segment display Error code 1 Er dis played on the 7 segment display is a code that indicates an error It is not given in this section Top row Error code 2 Gives the lower 2 digits of the error code Middle row Detail code 1 Gives the upper 2 digits of the error code IP IP address bP BOOTP server address dn
315. different node address Reset the Safety Slave to the default settings and then download the device parameters again Data Size Error The Safety Slave I O size set to the NE1A NE 2A series Safety Slave and the size set under the Safety Master safety connection setting does not match The Safety Slave I O setting may have been changed so delete then re register the connections registered to the Safety Master Unconfigured Device The Safety Slave has not been configurated Download the device param eters to the Safety Slave EPI Error The EPI set under the Safety Master safety connection setting is smaller than the Safety Slave cycle time The EPI must be longer than both the Safety Master and the Safety Slave cycle times Check the Safety Master safety connection setting No of Connections Error The setting exceeds the maximum number of safety I O connections sup ported by the Safety Slave Check the relevant Safety Master safety con nection settings Vendor ID or Product Code Error The device data vendor ID or product code for the device on the Configu rator and the device used in the actual system does not match Use Safety Slave Verification Device Parameter Verify to check that the device in the system and the device registered to the Safety Mas ter match e If they do match delete then re register the connections registered to the Safety Master Device Type Error The device
316. ding the I O Units in from the front as shown in the following figure Connect the desired number of I O Units in order An End Unit must always be connected to the last I O Unit Slide the Unit and push it against the DIN Track NE2A END DIN TACK until a clicking sound is heard and the Unit locks End Unit in place There is no need to release the DIN Track installation hooks before mounting the Unit Note When connecting Units make sure the guides on both Unit mate and then slide the Units together 411 Installation Procedure Section 16 1 1 0 Unit Structure An I O Unit consists of the following three blocks Each block can be removed for replacement or other purposes Terminal Block This block has the terminals of the I O Unit Itis possible to replace only the main block and leave the wiring as itis if the main block must be replaced because itis damaged or for any other reason Re Base block Main block 16 1 4 Mounting Communications Units Connect the first Communications Unit to the CPU Unit or connect two Com munications Units by connecting the connectors between them and locking the sliders Connect an NE2A TEROl1 End Cover to the last Communications Unit on the left if power is not connected to the last Communications Unit 1 2 3 1 Securely connect the connectors to connect the Units together Slider Hook hole 4 4 2 Slide the yellow sliders on the
317. e 329 Standard I O Communications Network Response Performance Section 13 5 330 SECTION 14 Setting Parameters for Local I O This section describes how to set parameters for local I O 14 1 Overall Procedure i fe 35 cde ee ed atlas ge oe east od See Se 332 14 2 Setting the I O Unit Configuration 00 00 22 ee eee 333 T4 2 1 S ttins VO Units gt y o seat ae ee Se OER aS he RS 333 14 2 2 Copying I O Units 0 0 ee eee 334 14 3 Setting the I O Configuration from the Wizard 004 336 14 3 1 Setting the Parameters for Safety I O Bits 0 336 14 4 Setting the I O Configuration of Individual I O Bits 342 14 4 1 Setting Safety Output Bits 0 0 ee eee 342 14 4 2 Setting Safety Input Bits 0 0 0 eee eee 345 331 Overall Procedure Section 14 1 14 1 Overall Procedure This section describes the configuration of Safety I O Units I O Units used to connect Safety Devices to NE2A series Controllers and how to set parame ters for local I O bit The overall procedure for setting parameters for local I O is as follows Setting Parameters for Local 1 0 gt Set the I O Unit configuration Refer to 14 2 Setting Parameters with the Wizard Set parameters and comments for output bits Refer to 14 3 1 Set parameters and comments for input bits Refer to 14 3 1 A
318. e 114 Set the Originator node s tag set IN Set the output produce tag set OUT Set the input consume tag set EtherNet IP Standard Communications Section 5 7 Parameter Description Connection type Set whether the data is sent using a multicast or unicast connec tion e Multicast Connection Seta multicast connection when the same data is shared by mul tiple nodes four nodes max This setting is usually used Point to Point Connection Seta point to point connection when the same data is not being shared by multiple nodes In a unicast transmission other nodes are not burdened with an unnecessary load Packet interval Set the packet interval RPI of each connection between the RPI Originator and Target The interval can be set between 1 and 10 000 ms in 1 ms units The default setting is 50 ms data refreshed once every 50 ms Timeout value Set the time until a connection timeout is detected The timeout value is setas a multiple of the packet interval RPI and can be set to 4 8 16 32 64 128 256 or 512 The default setting is 4 times the packet interval RP 1 Z WARNING Serious injury may possibly occur due to loss of required safety function Do not use Standard I O Communications data to configure a safety system Standard I O Communications data is non safety data The measures necessary for safety data are not taken during data communications Multicast and P
319. e Program Execution Delay Time e Disable Execute the program without waiting for Safety I O Communica tions to start e Enable Wait for Safety I O Communications to start before executing the program Restore Operation Mode This parameter sets the devices for the configuration restore operation e This device only The configuration is restored only for the selected NE2A series Controllers e All devices on the network The configuration is restored for all NE1A series and NEOA series Controllers on the DeviceNet networks of the selected NE 2A series Controller Run Idle Operation Mode This parameter sets the devices for which the operating mode is to be changed for the configuration restore operation e This device only The operating mode is changed only for the selected NE2A series Controllers All devices on the network The operating mode is changed for all NE1A series and NEOA series Controllers on the DeviceNet networks of the selected NE 2A series Controller User Program ID Set any 4 digit number for the user program The value that is set will be dis played on the 7 segment display on the CPU Unit except when an error is being display when checking an operation authorization file or when in Con figuration Restore Mode Parameter Protection A password for editing and a password for browsing can be used to prevent editing and browsing by unauthorized users 236 Setting Device Parameters Section 10 2 The p
320. e NE2A DNS21 TAE wa 121 00 451 User Test and Automatic Operation Note 2 Section 17 7 Select Parameters Lock from the Device Menu You can also right click the selected device and select Parameters Lock from the pop up menu A dialog box prompting the input of the device password will be displayed 00 NEZA SCPUD1 Please input the Device Password Password DK Cancel Input the password of the Target device and click the OK Button If more than one device is selected and the same device password is set for all devices select the Use this password for all device Check Box to avoid being prompted to input the password again When the configuration has been locked the safety mark displayed next to the device icon on the virtual network will change to the lock mark indicat ing that the configuration is locked Mark indicating that the f0 configuration is locked NE24 SCPUO1 e Lock the device configuration after performing user tests e Make sure to save the network configuration file after locking the configu ration of all devices e The mark indicating that the configuration is locked means that the device has been tested This information is not just saved in the network configu ration file but also in the device itself e If you lock the configuration you will not be able to download parameters to that device To change parameters you must unlock the configuration e If you
321. e e If a pair of bits is set to Dual Channel Mode and you change the channel mode of one bit to Single Channel Mode the other bit will also change to Single Channel Mode e If you set a Dual Channel Mode and then change the channel mode of one bit to Not Used the other bit will change to Single Channel Mode Local Input Test Output 102 100ms 0 255 default 10 General OnOff Delay Discrepancy Time Test Output No Name Mode Test Source EStop 1 Test pulse from t Test Output EStop 2 Test pulse from t Test Output Reset 1 Not Used Feedback Not Used When Dual channel is set as the Channel Mode ok Cancel 348 Setting the I O Configuration of Individual I O Bits Restrictions When Setting Parameters Section 14 4 There are restriction in the parameter setting for some settings of the channel mode and dual channel channel mode These restriction are described in the following table Channel mode Not Used Used as standard input Used as Safety Input Dual channel channel mode Single channel Dual channel equivalent Dual channel comple mentary See note Test source Cannot be set Test pulse Cannot be set e Test pulse from test out Note Single channel Test Output 0 Test Output 1 Mechanical contacts SIngle beam Safety Sensor Dual channel equivalent Test Output 0 Test Output 1 Mechanical contacts D40A Non contact witch Dual chann
322. e NE2A series Controller s Safety Input terminal 4 5 mA typical vi A 24VDC Tx NE2A series Controller OSSDx INx L 24 VDC GND G1 L Z N WARNING Serious injury may possibly occur due to loss of required safety functions Use Q appropriate components or devices according to the requirements given in the following table Controlling devices Requirements Emergency stop Use approved devices with a direct opening mechanism com switch pliant with IEC EN 60947 5 1 Safety door switch or Use approved devices with a direct opening mechanism com safety limit switch pliant with IEC EN 60947 5 1 and capable of switching micro loads of 4 mA at 24 VDC Safety sensor Use approved devices compliant with the relevant product standards regulations and rules in the country where they are used 60 Safety Input Units Section 3 8 Controlling devices Requirements Relay with forcibly Use approved devices with forcibly guided contacts compliant guided contacts with EN 50205 For feedback use devices with contacts capable of switching micro loads of 4 mA at 24 VDC Contactor Use contactors with a forcibly guided mechanism and monitor the auxiliary NC contact to detect contactor failures For feedback use devices with contacts capable of switching micro loads of 4 mA at 24 VDC Other devices Evaluate whether devices used are appropriate to satisfy the requirements of th
323. e not displayed in the Error History Monitor Dialog Box of the Network Configurator Cause Top row Cause Recovery method Gives the cause of the error Status after error Middle row Reset Gives the method of resetting the error Bottom row Status after error Gives the status of the NE2A series Controller s safety functions after the error has occurred Refer to 19 1 1 Checking NE2A series Unit Errors for details Abort Abort fatal error Critical Fault Critical fault fatal error The status when operation continues is recorded for non fatal errors Critical Errors CPU Unit Network Configurator Cause Indicator 7 segment Error history Displayed Recovery method display message Status after error MS Error Error Saved Detail Detail Lit red F 3 0601 Yes System A system error was detected Error Replace the CPU Unit if the error recurs when the xk xk Controller is restarted Operation stops for a critical fault 497 Troubleshooting CPU Unit Errors Section 19 2 CPU Unit Indicator 7 segment Network Configurator Error history Cause Recovery method Displayed display MS Error Detail CPU Unit Indicator 7 segment display MS Error Detail Abort Errors CPU Unit Error Detail System error Saved Error name Network Configurator message Indi cator 7 segment display Error histo
324. e BEGINS bb opts Bachan is 20 2 NE2A series Unit Replacement Precautions nuanua e eee eee eee ee Appendices eeeeecs5ose0ee30ee3e0neseee3wvwseee3nweene3ee3neee3ee3nee3eweeeeeeeee Glossary 645 54 24 45 6432 censere eee Ouse ee eee es WNGEN 3865 5s 8d Kos Be eed Pe SEER GO ee ewe bees ees Revision History sacs ectescicaein vernon wencewe dase 491 492 494 509 522 530 534 541 542 543 545 547 549 557 xi TABLE OF CONTENTS About this Manual This manual describes the installation and operation of the NE2A series Safety Network Controllers Please read this manual carefully and be sure you understand the information provided before attempting to install or operate the NE2A series Controller Be sure to read the precautions provided in the following section Related Manuals The following manuals provide information on the DeviceNet and DeviceNet Safety NE 2A Series Safety Network Controller Operation Manual Z919 This manual describes the specifications functions and usage of the NE2A series Safety Network Controllers This manual NE 2A Series Safety Network Controller Command Reference Manual Z920 This manual describes the specifications functions and usage of instructions for the NE2A series Safety Network Controllers DeviceNet Safety NEOA Series Safety Network Controller Operation Manual Z916 This manual describes the specifications functions and usage of the NEOA series Safety Network C
325. e CPU Unit 0 0 0 0 0 eee ee 283 12 3 EtherNet IP Network Settings vinnan ya en E A E E E 286 12 4 Communications between an NE2A series Controller and a Safety Slave 292 12 5 Using the NE2A series Controller as a Safety Slave 0 0 00 02 eee ee eee 296 12 6 Communications between the NE2A series Controller and Standard Slaves 297 12 7 Using an NE2A series Controller as a Standard Slave 0 000000005 298 SECTION 13 Verifying System Performance 22 307 13 1 System Performance Verification 0 0 00 eee eee eee eee 308 13 2 Checking the NE2A series Controller Cycle Time 00 00 0005 311 13 3 Checking the Communications Response Performance 0 2 0 0008 313 13 4 Verifying the Safety Response Performance Reaction Time 00 327 13 5 Standard I O Communications Network Response Performance 329 SECTION 14 Setting Parameters for Local I O 2 2 331 1421 Overall Procedure drani 04 iia hela S868 SESS RAS os ns So NIRS 8 Re Ole 332 14 2 Setting the I O Unit Configuration 0 0 cee cece ee 333 ix TABLE OF CONTENTS 14 3 Setting the I O Configuration from the Wizard 0 0 cee eee eee eee 336 14 4 Setting the I O Configuration of Individual I O Bits 00 00 0008 342 SECTION 15 Creating Programs ss 35 sacs ee awe sw
326. e Communications Network Configurator Communications Unit Indi cators 7 segment display Error history MS NS Error Detail Error Detail 0101 00 Request 80 Response Bit 7 ON Bits 0 to 6 Com mand origin node address Saved Tem porary Transmission failed because the local node Displayed message Cause Recovery method Status after error Messages could not be sent because the DeviceNet Unit is OFFLINE is not partici pating in the network Consider the following items Are baud rates for the Standard Master and Standard Slaves on the network the same Are the cable lengths branch main lines suit able Are any cables disconnected or loose els there a terminator at each end of the main line ls there a lot of noise The message will be discarded and operation con tinued 0106 00 Request 80 Response Bit 7 ON Bits 0 to 6 Com mand origin node address Tem porary Transmission failed because of a node address dupli cation error Messages could not be sent because a node address duplication error occurred Check the node addresses of the other devices Make sure that the same address is not set for two node and restart the DeviceNet Unit The message will be discarded and operation con tinued 0107 00 Request 80 Response Bit 7 ON Bits 0 to 6 Com mand origin node address Tem porary Tran
327. e I O tags Checking Programming Section 4 5 4 5 Checking Programming The programming is checked to make sure that the program that was created functions as intended Checking the programming before checking the actual devices downloading reduces download errors and communications errors during execution The programming is checked at the following times e When a command is executed from a menu performed manually e When a project is saved performed automatically Before downloading performed automatically The following checks are performed for programs in all sections The results of the checks are displayed in the Output Window To display the location of a display item double click the display item in the Output Window Description Level Unconnected function blocks A check is performed to find whether there Error are any missing connections for function blocks for the displayed inputs and outputs The program capacity has been exceeded Error An internal variable was used only for an input or only for an output Warning The same output variable is assigned more than once Warning Error The program cannot be downloaded to the NE 2A series Controller Warning The program can be downloaded to the NE2A series Controller Check to be sure that the program is correct 87 Function Blocks Section 4 6 4 6 Function Blocks Functions that are required for safety control are provided by the N
328. e Mode Force Force Force Force Mode started set reset set ended Note When the force set force reset status of a variable is cleared the variable will turn OFF and then be updated with the latest status in the next cycle Continuing in Force Mode When Exiting the Network Configurator It is possible to close the Logic Editor and exit the Network Configurator and continue in the Force Mode The NE 2A series Controller will retain the force setting resetting status until the set time has elapsed 468 Monitoring Programs and Force setting resetting Variables Section 18 1 Exiting the Network Configurator When the Logic Editor is closed and the Network Configurator is exited the force setting or force resetting status set until that point will be held Restarting Procedure Once the Logic Editor has been closed the rights to perform force setting and force resetting will be lost To perform force setting or force resetting again select Force Mode Start from the Device Menu and then enter the device password and continuation time Itis possible to obtain rights to perform force setting and force resetting while retaining the force setting and force resetting status for presently set vari ables Force setting and Force resetting from Multiple Logic Editors Force setting and force resetting can be performed for an NE2A series Con troller only from the Logic Editor that was last to perform the force start proce dure If force
329. e NE 2A series Controller as a Safety Slave The I O assembly can be selected with an NE2A series Controller as the Safety Master Variables and I O tags can be used in the Logic Editor Computer Network Configurator NE2A series Controller Safety Master EtherNev IP _ _ Using an NE2A series Controller as a Safety 7 Slave DeviceNet DST1 series Controller DST1 series Controller Safety Slave Safety Slave Note 1 This setting is not required if the NE 2A series Controller is not used as a Safety Slave 2 An NE1A series Controller cannot be used as a Safety Master for an NE2A series Controller 12 5 1 Registering I O Assemblies for Safety Slaves Register I O assemblies for a Safety Slave to enable an NE 2A series Control ler to function as a Safety Slave For details on the procedure refer to 11 5 1 Registering I O Assemblies for Safety Slaves 12 5 2 Setting Assembly Data This section describes how to define data for I O assemblies For details on the procedure refer to 11 5 2 Setting Assembly Data 12 5 3 Registering I O Assembles from the Logic Editor You can register I O assemblies from the Logic Editor For details on the pro cedure refer to 11 5 3 Registering I O Assemblies from the Logic Editor 296 Communications between the NE2A series Controller and Standard Slaves Section 12 6 12 6 Communications between the NE 2A series Controller and Standard Slaves The
330. e The error appears in the error history e The NE 2A series Controller continues to operate The following actions are performed if an error is detected in one of the two inputs e The variables corresponding to Safety Inputs for which an error has been detected are made inactive e The indicator of the Safety Input with the error lights red and the indicator of the other input flashes red e The error appears in the error history 150 Safety Input Functions Section 6 2 e The NE2A series Controller continues to operate Error Latch Time Setting The error latch time can be set between 0 and 25 500 ms in increments of 100 ms The default is 1 000 ms When monitoring errors from a monitoring system take the monitoring interval into account when setting the error latch time Error Latch Time The error latch time is the time to continue the error state when an error occurs The error state will continue until the error latch time passes even if the cause of the error is removed immediately Resetting Errors All the following conditions must be met to reset errors that occur in the Safety Inputs e The cause of the error must be removed e The latch error time must have lapsed An inactive signal must be input e g pressing the emergency stop but ton or opening a door 151 Safety Output Functions Section 6 3 6 3 Safety Output Functions 6 3 1 Outline The NE2A SOD4 1 Safety Output Unit provides four Saf
331. e Time Unregister Device List Product Name Out Size In Size 0 DST1D125L4 1Byte 4Byte 02 DST1 MD16SL4 1 Byte 5 Byte iil Register Device List Product Name Out Size In Size The following information is displayed in the list of unregistered devices Description The node address of the device is displayed Product Name A description of the device is displayed Out Size The total size of the output assembly is displayed In Size The total size of the input assembly is displayed The following information is displayed in the list of registered devices Description The node address of the device is displayed Product Name A description of the device is displayed Out Size The total size of the output assembly is displayed In Size The total size of the input assembly is displayed C Whether there are detailed connection settings is displayed Detailed settings 4 Select the Slave for which the connection will be set from the Unregister Device List Area 5 Click the _ Button The Slave will be registered and displayed in the Register Device ListArea 270 Communications between the NE2A series Controller and Standard Slaves Section 11 6 Edit Device Parameters General Communication Cycle Time Unregister Device List _ Product Name Dut Size In Size 0 pst1401251 1 1 Byte 4 Byte lt Product Name TutSie InSe C Pte DST1 MDI6SL 1 Byte SByte
332. e Times 0 0 0 ce eee eee 236 10 2 2 Extend Mode ssori sosina riaa pe oe ea ees ted on a 236 231 NE2A series Controller Setup Section 10 1 10 1 NE2A series Controller Setup This section describes how to register the NE2A series CPU Unit to a project and how to set the I O Unit configuration and parameters in the CPU Unit 10 1 1 Creating the NE2A Backplane With the Network Configurator create an NE2A Backplane as a virtual net work to register the NE 2A series Units The NE2A Backplane serves as a vir tual network for linking the CPU Unit to DeviceNet Units and EtherNet IP Units Creating or Adding an NE2A Backplane Create an NE2A Backplane virtual network Untitled Network Configurator js Edit View Network Device EDS File Tools Option Help CC o Open Save Save As External Data Procedure To create a new Backplane select New NE2A_Backplane from the File Menu To add a network select Add NE2A_Backplane from the Network Menu An NE2A_Backplane_1 Tab Page will be created in the Network Configuration Pane Untitled Network Configurator Ctrl 0 EtherNet IP Ctrl S NE24_Backplane C DeviceNet_1 File Edit View Network Device EDSFile Tools Option Help Cae 2 E Network Configurator ER DeviceNet Hardware EtheNet IP Hardware F NE2A_Backplane Hardware Ui Vendor G Omron Corporation sy DeviceType Sa Communications Adap
333. e bed hb dns tnd ep Rebs deg e hes teh dpe Saeed Sigh a Safety Output Units os ee a a hoe ee reba E EE EE O AEREAS SECTION 4 Status Transitions and Program Design 4 1 4 2 4 3 4 4 NE2A series Controller Status Transitions 0 00000 e eee nune Setting the Operation for Resetting and Starting 00 0 e eee eee Creating Variables Creating Programs XIX XX XX xxii xxiii xxvi xxvi Ooo p n m 17 18 21 26 i7 30 31 33 35 41 42 43 46 51 57 62 67 68 73 76 84 vii viii TABLE OF CONTENTS 4 5 Checking Programming 0 eee eee eee tenes 87 4 6 Function Blocks eisai rt igs SA Ge hae eh GANA betwee tA abe 88 SECTION 5 COMMUNICATIONS sa 6565 ek boo Sse weds Swe ewes sarees VIL 5 1 Designing the Network System Configuration 0 0 02 c eee eee eee eee 92 5 2 Communications Specifications for NE2A series Controllers 00 93 5 3 DeviceNet and EtherNet IP Routing 0 0 0 0 eee ee 101 5 4 DeviceNet Safety Communications 0 0 00 0c eee eee eee 102 5 5 DeviceNet Standard Communications 0 0 0 0 eee ee eee eee 107 5 6 EtherNet IP Safety Communications 0 0 0 0 eee eee 111 5 7 EtherNet IP Standard Communications 0 0 00 ccc eee eee eens 113 5 8 Remote I O Allocations neceseco ries ee eect eens 121 5 9 Operation after a Communications Error 0 0 0 eee
334. e default gateway s IP address This setting is not required when the default gateway is not being used Preferred DNS Server and Alternate DNS Server Domain Name Baud Rate At this time the EtherNet IP Unit is not equipped with any functions that require a DNS server so these settings are not used The EtherNet IP Unit does not use domain names in actual communications Set the communications baud rate Setting Meaning Auto See note The baud rate of the switching hub is detected automatically If possible the Unit operates in 100Base T full duplex 10MBps Half Duplex Operates in 10Base T half duplex 10MBps Full Duplex Operates in 10Base T full duplex 100MBps Half Duplex Operates in 100Base TX half duplex 100MBps Full Duplex Operates in 100Base TX full duplex Note This is the default setting 99 Communications Specifications for NE2A series Controllers Section 5 2 Note Set the EtherNet IP Unit s link settings to the same communications settings as the connected switching hub If the settings are not the same the link will become unstable and prevent normal communications The following table shows the allowed settings for each switching hub communications mode EtherNet IP Unit settings Auto 10 Mbps fixed 100 Mbps fixed Switching Hub settings negotiation Full duplex Half duplex Full duplex Half duplex Auto Negotiation 10 Mbps fixed Full duplex Half duplex 1
335. e following table Parameter Description Connection pass Specify data that you want to allocate to the Standard Master from the I O data set in 5 8 Remote I O Allocations I O type 1 Poll The Master device sends output data to each Slave device and these actas triggers for the Slave devices to send input data to the Master device This I O type is mainly used when the Slave device is an actuator and there is a large amount of data to be exchanged Bit strobe The Master device simultaneously broadcasts a trigger signal to all Slave devices and the Slave devices send input data to the Master device This I O type is suited for collecting small amounts of data when the Slaves are devices such as sensors Inputs to the Master can be up to 8 bytes Output data cannot be sent from the Master cos The Master or Slave sends output data or input data at one of the following times n Constant period Heartbeat timer 2 X When a software switch in the Master or Slave program changes state The load on the communications network can be reduced because data can be sent only when it is necessary COS is the preferred connection over a Poll or Bit Strobe connection The communications cycle may become longer if the COS transmission frequency is high or there is a large amount of data COS is used when data changes less frequently approx 100 ms min and there is only a small amount of data but the data has a high priority Slave devic
336. e lets you check the type of the Safety I O information I O assemblies of the device NE2ZA SCPUD1 Property Size InputAssembly0 1 Bytes Q OutputAssemblyO 1 Bytes 443 Verifying Parameters and Checking Safety Signatures Section 17 4 Signature Tab Page The Signature Tab Page lets you check the safety signature generated by the Network Configurator in the Local Area and the safety signature of the actual device in the Device Area NE2A SCPUD1 Property General Safety 1 0 Informatio Device Code E1314F0B Last Modified 2009 02 10 19 01 10 875 Ox34F3 04041 40858 Local Code OCBECSFS Last Modified 2009 02 10 19 38 45 296 Ox34F3 0404372EB0 444 Operating the Safety Control System Section 17 5 17 5 Operating the Safety Control System This section describes how to change the device mode to operate the safety control system With an NE2A series Controller you can switch between the IDLE Mode and RUN Mode 17 5 1 Changing the Device Mode The device mode can be changed only when the Network Configurator is con nected online With the Network Configurator you can select more than one device and change their mode at the same time Procedure 1 2 3 1 Selectone or more devices for which the operating mode is to be changed 2 Select Change Mode from the Device Menu and then select the mode to be changed You can also right click the selected device and select Change Mode from the pop up menu and
337. e node address setting switch was changed after the power supply was turned ON Error History Indicates that there is one or more records in the error history The items displayed in the Network Status Area are described in the following table Invalid Parameter Description Indicates that either an error was detected in the validity check of the parameters related to the Tag Data Link saved in the nonvolatile memory or an error was found in a checksum Ethernet Link Status Ethernet Link Status Ethernet Config Logical Error Indicates that the following parameters are invalid TCP IP settings IP address subnet mask link set ting IP Address Create Logical Error Indicates that the IP address table is invalid BOOTP Server Error 18 4 2 Error History Tab Page The following tab page will be displayed when you click the Error History Tab in the Monitor Device Dialog Box Indicates that one of the following errors occurred during usage of the BOOTP server The IP address received from the server is invalid A timeout occurred while communicating with the server 487 Monitoring EtherNet IP Units Section 18 4 Monitor Device Status Error History Ethernet Information Time of Error Error Info Detailed Content Update Clear Lal The items displayed on the tab page are described in the following table Description Time of Error Displays the
338. e safety category level Note e Properly apply the specified voltage to the NE1A series Controller s inputs Applying an inappropriate DC voltage or any AC voltage may cause reduced safety functions damage to the NE1A series Controller or a fire Be sure to separate I O cables from high voltage current lines e Use I O cables of 100 m or less e Do not apply the power supply to the test output terminals Doing so may result in product damage or burning 3 8 6 Dimensions Reference Values ltem Specifications Dimensions 15 x90 x 95 mm W xH x D Weight 90 g max p apal UO 1 Opolotolog d olojoloj of UC GOUCLYG Unit mm 61 Safety Output Units Section 3 9 3 9 Safety Output Units 3 9 1 Nomenclature and Terminal Layout NE2A SOD4 1 Indicators Test pin a Release button Terminal insert hole a l j Terminal Block Main Block Base Block Bi e0 Sei Bl G2 G2 B2 S02 S03 B3 G2 G2 B4 V2 G2 B5 V2 G2 B6 62 Safety Output Units Section 3 9 3 9 2 Indicators TS Indicator This indicator shows the status of the Safety Output Unit Indicator name Color Status Meaning TS gt Normal operation e Waiting for configuration Error Unit Hardware Error Use the monitor in the Network Configurator to check the cause of the error eCPU Unit Error Unit power is not being supplied Wire the VO and GO terminals on t
339. e variables for which No is displayed in the Busy Area of the window will be deleted 15 8 3 Searching Cross References The Cross Reference Window displays a list of where in which section a vari able is being used For each variable the program name section name and function block I O where it is connected will be displayed Double click the displayed variable to cause the variables in used in the P ro gram Window to begin flashing Cross Reference 4x Variable Function Block Section Program Input_Power_Supply Section2 NE24 SCPUO1 Searching for Variables in the Program You can search for the section in which a variable is used 1 2 3 1 Select the variable that you want to search for from the Variable Window The variable information will be displayed in the Cross Reference Window 391 Checking Programs Section 15 8 2 Double click the variable in the Cross Reference Window The section where the variable is used will be displayed and the variable in the Project Window will begin flashing X NEXA LogicEditor CPU File Edit View Project Device Editor Variable Library Window Help BBS DeX oo dA atna man BaF S aa 88 5 FS FP Project ax ou Bost seton X Variables AH NE2A SCPUOI B cru 3 DSTI 3 Section BB User Function Blocks fa EStopLamp B Sectiont Function Blocks amp Logic E ann 1 Comparator 1 Comparator2 1 EXNOR 1 EXOR 1 NAND
340. eNet 1 ih B al ole Variable with 1 0 Name Data Type Device I O Tag assignment added i amp int BOOL NE2A S 00 P e EStop 1 amp in2 BOOL NE2A S 01 P e EStop 2 amp ind BOOL NE2A SCP 03 N Feedback ind BOOL NE2A SCP O2 N Resetl y EStop 1_0_1 BOOL DeviceN 00 P e EStop 1 Drop itatthe insertion location ge NE2A SCPU01 Bike S 00 P e EStop 1 E OVTP e EStop 2 02 P Feedback O3 N S afety Input 3 04 N e Safety Input 4 Drag the I O tag to insert 377 Creating Programs Section 15 6 Note When a variable is deleted from the variable list in the Variable Window the arranged variable will also be deleted The variable will not be deleted even if the I O Unit settings of the I O tag assigned to the variable are changed 15 6 2 Arranging Function Blocks You can insert function blocks by dragging and dropping them using the mouse To arrange a function block insert an existing function block or user defined function block Inserting Function Blocks by Dragging and Dropping Procedures 1 2 3 1 Drag the function block that you want to insert from the Function Blocks Window 2 Drop the function block in the desired position in the Program Window Project ss ff Section1 vx Q NE2A SCPUO1 Section1 J User Function Blocks gj EStopLamp Function Blocks vax Off Delay Timer a a 0l 1 OnDelay Timer
341. eNet T Unknown OMRO TOOLBUS CJ2 CPUxx 115200 Bit s Off line E Starting as Administrator To perform the following procedures start the Network Configurator as the system administrator e Installing creating or deleting EDS files or creating EDS index files e Editing settings files installing plug in modules installing interface mod ules e Saving deleting or importing user defined function blocks e Registering or deleting folders in the libraries e Registering user defined function blocks or sections in libraries Windows 2000 or Windows XP 1 Log onto Windows as a user with administrator rights 2 Select All Programs OMRON Network Configurator for CIP Safety v3 Network Configurator from the Windows Start Menu Windows Vista or Windows 7 1 Right click All Programs OMRON Network Configurator for CIP Safe ty v3 Network Configurator in the Windows Start Menu 2 Select Run as administrator from the pop up menu that is displayed 207 Starting and Exiting the Network Configurator Section 9 4 E3 Windows Fax and Scan RB Windows Live Messenger Download A Windows Mail D Windows Media Player Open file location Windows Meeting Space Pin to Start Menu E Windows Movie Maker Add to Quick Launch t Windows Photo Gallery B Windows Update W Accessories Send To d Extras and Upgrades EA NELA Logic Simulator Help E Network Configurator Open Run as administrator Restore previou
342. ea in 1 0 Memory i B Assembly data E 4 Assembly data F Connection logical communications path Output Area in I O Memory __ 7 Assembly data G e A Assembly data H a E Two connections are used for the Safety Connection between the NE2A series Controller 1 Safety Master and Safety Slave 2 for the input assembly data and output assembly data Assembly data is a collection of input data or output data used for communications between a Master and Slave Refer to 5 8 Remote I O Allocations The I O assemblies setin this way are displayed in the I O tag lists as I O tags for the Slaves in the Logic Editor The I O tags can be used to program the NE2A series Controller without considering specific memory addresses 103 DeviceNet Safety Communications Section 5 4 Input tag display selection Output tag display selection ax I O Tag List ax lo A B PSIE ma NE2A SCPU0I 73 NE24 SCPU0I Network DeviceNet_1 Network DeviceNet_1 IMa H01 DST1 MD16SL 1 IMa 01 DST1 MD16SL 1 5 Safetylap m 5 02 5 03 5 04 P e EM0 NC P e EM0 NC N e Safety Input N e Safety Input 3 N e Safety Input 4 S Safety Qulp N Safety Outpt 0 N Safety Output N e Safety Input N Safety Input 8 N Safety Inpa H 7B 02 DSTT i 0j Ka 5 amp
343. eave set to OFF for future expansion 1 For details refer to 7 2 Operation and Maintenance Using a Memory Card If MC DOWNLOAD pin 1 and MC LOCK pin 2 are both ON a fatal error abort will occur in the CPU Unit Be sure to turn OFF the power supply to the NE2A series Controller before setting the Memory Card DIP switch The SERVICE switch is used in CONFIGURATION RESTORE Mode Do not press this switch if the configuration function is not being used For details refer to 7 2 Operation and Maintenance Using a Memory Card SERVICE RUN STOP RESTART Switch This switch is used to execute or stop a program or to restart the NE 2A series Controller To enable using this switch a Memory Card with an operation rights file on it must be inserted into the CPU Unit For details refer to 7 2 Operation and Maintenance Using a Memory Card RESTART STOP gt RUN Changing between RUN and STOP 38 Program execution can be started or stopped by pressing the RUN STOP RESTART switch Also the system settings can be used to start or stop program execution for all the NE2A NE 1A series Controllers on the network at the same time The operating mode of the device can be changed by changing the switch only if the operating mode of the NE2A series Controller and the switch posi tion agree Safety CPU Unit Section 3 2 Example If the switch is in the STOP position and the operating mode of the NE2
344. ect a network port that you would like to connect Browse JES Device Information Vendor ID Product Name Device Type Revision Refresh Option OK Cancel 4 Select the network to connect to and click the OK Button When the online connection has been established successfully the Con nected Network Identifier in the Network Configuration Pane will turn blue Refer to 9 6 2 Network Configuration Pane for details on the Connected Network Identifiers NEzA_Backplane_1 Devicenet_1 EtherNet 1P_1 Changes to blue The connection status will change to On line in the status bar dis played at the bottom of the window Refer to 9 6 5 Status Bar for details on the connection status 17 2 2 Connecting to a Network through an DeviceNet Interface Board Procedure 1 2 3 426 1 Select Select Interface DeviceNet I F from the Options Menu 2 Select Connect from the Network Menu You can also right click the mouse in an open area of the Network Config uration Pane and select Connect from the pop up menu Or you can click the Connect Icon amp in the toolbar The Select Interface Dialog Box will be displayed Select Interface Select Interface Card a Interface Board OMRON 3G8F7 DRM21 Ai Canca 3 Selectthe Interface Board and then click the OK Button The Setup Interface Dialog Box will be displayed Connecting Online Section 17 2 Setup Interface Bo
345. ection Settings Connection Information Automatic Connection Setting Specify the default connection set for the Standard Slave With the NE2A series Controller an assembly will be applied if the Use as default I O Option is selected when an assembly for a Standard Slave is created Manual Connection Setting Select the type of connection to use between the NE2A series Controller and the Standard Slave For details refer to 5 5 2 Standard Connection Settings 272 Using an NE2A series Controller as a Standard Slave Section 11 7 11 7 Using an NE 2A series Controller as a Standard Slave The NE 2A series Controller can be used as a Standard Slave To operate an NE2A series Controller as a Standard Slave set an I O assembly for a Stan dard Slave The I O assembly can be selected with an NE 2A series Controller or other Controller as the Standard Master NE 2A series Controller Standard Master DeviceNet The NE2A series Controller is used as a Standard Slave 4 DF i i 3 Ae TET o E pmm am ee ee ee ee i x Standard Slave DST1 series Controller D d J q k i Standard Slave NE2A series Controller a _ Standard Slave were Note This setting is not required if the NE2A series Controller will not be used as a Standard Slave 11 7 1 Registering I O Assemblies for Standard Slaves Register I O assemblies for a Standard Slave to enable an NE2A series Con troller to fu
346. ects and Reusing Programming 85 4 5 Checking Programming 0 0 0 eee cee eee 87 4 6 Function Blocks sci i dees a eee ne eee eens ote eee 88 67 NE2A series Controller Status Transitions Section 4 1 4 1 NE2A series Controller Status Transitions 4 1 1 Operating Modes and Confirmation Methods The NE2A series Controller supports the operating modes shown in the fol lowing table Synchronize these operating modes with those of other Safety Controllers and Standard PLCs When performing maintenance the operating mode can be checked on the MS indicator on the front panel of the NE2A series Controller or by monitor ing the NE2A series Controller from the Network Configurator Operating mode Description MS indicator status Color Status In this status both safety controls user program execution safety Green I O communications and local safety I O and non safety controls e g standard I O communications and message communica tions can be executed IDLE Mode Configuration has been completed normally initialization as been Green completed and all the safety functions are in the following status The user program is stopped Local safety outputs are OFF Safety I O communications are stopped The standard I O communications for the Communications Units mounted to the CPU Unit will also be stopped In this status only message communications are possible CONFIGURING Mode The Controller is w
347. ed Devices Procedure 1 2 3 432 1 Selectone or more device in the Network Configuration Pane of the Net work Configurator 2 Select Parameters Download from the Device Menu You can also click the Download to Device Icon in the toolbar Or you can right click the selected device and select Parameters Down load from the pop up menu A dialog box prompting the input of the device password will be displayed e When an NE2A CPU Unit is selected all devices means the NE2A CPU Unit and the Communications Units Network Configurator A In order to enable new configuration downloading parameters tovall devices will start e OK e Ifa DST1 series Controller is selected the following dialog box will be displayed for confirmation Network Configurator 3 Click the Yes Button in the dialog box A dialog box will be displayed for in putting a password Downloading and Uploading Device Parameters Section 17 3 00 NEZA SCPUD1 Please input the Device Password Password n 4 Inputthe device password and then click the OK Button Downloading will start and a dialog box for confirmation will be displayed when the down loading has been completed Downloading Parameters to All Devices on the Networks Network Download You can download parameters to all devices on the networks currently dis played in the Network Configuration Pane Parameters will be downloaded to all networks for which the Co
348. ed network 431 changing the device mode 445 changing the device name 234 248 290 changing the EPI 322 changing the EPI for each Safety Connection 315 changing the EPI settings 184 changing the mode 236 changing the network 431 changing the operating mode 164 461 changing the password 215 channel mode 141 152 channel mode for Safety Output terminals 152 chattering 150 checking and adjusting the system response performance 191 checking cycle times 181 checking network bandwidth usage 183 checking programs for syntax errors 389 checking the communications response performance 313 320 checking the NE2A series Controller cycle time 311 checking the network reaction time 189 checking the version 208 clearing the error history 476 549 communications cycle time 109 communications cycle time settings 183 Communications Cycle Time Tab 484 communications specifications 93 Communications Unit tab page 242 configuration lock 194 CONFIGURATION Mode 68 CONFIGURATION RESTORE Mode 68 connecting input devices 143 connecting input output signals 382 connecting to a network 425 connection 102 382 connection information 104 connection specifications 93 connection type 104 connectors modular plug 419 COS 109 CPU Unit 35 CPU Unit errors 496 Create from I O Tag List Dialog Box 369 creating new variables 265 creating program objects 397 creating program projects 364
349. edit the parameters of a device whose configuration has been veri fied the verification mark will be removed You will have to verify the parameters of that device again 17 7 3 Unlocking the Device Configuration To change the parameters of a device whose configuration is locked you must unlock the configuration The device configuration can be unlocked only when the Network Configurator is connected online Procedure 452 1 2 3 1 Select one or more devices in the Network Configuration Pane of the Net work Configurator Select Parameters Unlock from the Device Menu You can also right click the selected device and select Parameters Un lock from the pop up menu A dialog box prompting the input of the device password will be displayed User Test and Automatic Operation Section 17 7 3 Input the device password and then click the OK Button When the configuration has been unlocked the safety mark displayed next to the device icon on the virtual network will change back to the mark indi cating that the configuration is verified 17 7 4 Automatic Operation at Startup Note It is possible to have the system automatically enter RUN Mode to automati cally execute the program the next time that the power supply is turned ON when the power supply has been turned OFF with configuration locked devices in the RUN Mode The following conditions apply to starting in RUN Mode when the power sup ply is turned ON e
350. ee ee es Standard Slave DST1 series Controller D d g F pak 3 Standard Slave Sa NE2A series Controller ot The Standard Slave __ 7 Registering DeviceNet Units Standard Slaves Use the following procedure to register an NE2A series DeviceNet Unit NE2A DNS 21 that is set as a Standard Slave on a DeviceNet network to the device to be used as a Standard Master Procedure 1 2 3 1 Select the device to be used as a Standard Master iDeviceNets 1 NE2A_Backplane_1 NE2A_Backplane_2 Boa 0 p p NEZI BNS2 DSTI HD t6SL 1 DSTI MRDOBSL pa I u Nee DNS2I vw Select the device to be used as a Standard Master 2 Select Parameter Edit from the Device Menu You can also right click the selected device and select Parameter Edit from the menu Or you can double click the device The Edit Device Parameters Dialog Box will be displayed 278 Communications between an NE2A series Controller and a Standard Master Section 11 8 Edit Device Parameters Communication Cycle Time Message Timer Slave Function General 1 0 Allocation OUT 1 0 Allocation IN Unregister Device List Product Name Out Size In Size fdd 01 NE2A DNS21 0 Byte 0 Byte P H02 NE2A DNS21 OByte 0Byte 03 DST1 MD16SL 1 1 Byte 5 Byte P 04 DST1 MRDOSSL 1 1 Byte 3 Byte v Auto allocation as is registered Register Device List Prod Out Size Out Ch In Size In Ch Cc 3 Select the NE2A DNS21 to use as a Standar
351. eevaluate the system design so that the reaction time satisfies the necessary specifications 8 2 1 Reaction Time Concepts The reaction time is the time required to stop machine operation in a worst case scenario considering the occurrence of faults and failures in the safety chain The reaction time is used to calculate the safety distance 1 A safety chain is a logical connection to achieve safety functionality and consists of an input device control device which can be a remote I O device and an output device The reaction time is calculated for each safety chain Some typical safety chains are shown below 1 Local Input Local Output Safety sensor NE2A Controller Actuator switch M 2 Remote Input Local Output Safety sensor DST1 Terminal _ Network NE2A Controller __ Actuator switch 3 Local Input Remote Output Safety sensor _ NE2AController _ Network DST1Terminal Actuator switch 4 Remote Input Remote Output Safety sensor _ DST1Terminal _ Network NE2A Controller _ Network _ DST1Terminal Actuator switch 5 Remote Input Remote Output via Multiple Networks switch Terminal Controller Controller Terminal Safety sensor DST1 Network NE2A Network NE2A rome DST1 g Actuator Note The reaction time is not the I O reaction time when the syst
352. ef 217 Main Window and Menus Section 9 6 9 6 Main Window and Menus This section describes the configuration of and menus in the Main Window of the Network Configurator 9 6 1 Main Window As shown below the Main Window basically consists of the Hardware List Pane the Network Configuration Pane and the Message Report Pane Untitled Network Configurator File Edit View Network Device EDSFile Tools Option Help lt _ Toolbar DeviceNet_1 SB DeviceNet Hardware Us Vendor Omron Corporation SB Network Configurator li DeviceType 7 Decne Network Configuration Pane a AC Drives aa Communications pem eneral Purpose ete Ey cat Di ee vo D ge of Network Bandwidth of Safety Connections 5 afety Discrete evice 2 DST1 10125L 1 v K Bit s 250K Bit s 500K Bit s gt 0 gy 100 0 ox 100 Comment Product Name Voltage Maintenance Pane Message Code Description Message Report Pane Status Bar L DeviceNet T Unknown OMRO TOOLBUS CJ2 CPUxx 115200 Bitjs Off line Panes Pane Description Hardware List Pane Displays the devices that can be added to the net work Network Configuration Pane Displays the device configuration registered for the virtual network Network Configuration List Displays the virtual network configuration and path Pane information in a list This pane is hidden by default Maintenance Pane Displays device maintenance information This pane is hi
353. el comple mentary Test Output 0 Test Output 1 Mechanical contacts MAT dual channel channel mode Test Output 0 See note MAT The following restrictions exist on setting MAT i e when MAT is set for the e The channel mode is automatically set to Test pulse from test out e The Test Source must be Test Output 0 Test Output 0 is set in the Test Source of bit 00 and Test Output 7 is set in the Test Source of bit 01 A Test Source cannot be used for bit 02 or 03 Note When input terminals are used in pairs set the Dual Channel Mode to Dual Channel This will make it easier to isolate errors because the relevant I O indicators on the NE2A ID04 1 will light red or go out if an error is detected for the input terminals 349 Setting the I O Configuration of Individual I O Bits Section 14 4 350 SECTION 15 Creating Programs This section describes how to program a NE2A series Safety Network Controller 15 1 Overall Programming Procedure 0 0 0 cece eee eee 352 15 2 Starting and Exiting the Logic Editor 0 0 0 0 353 15 3 Logic Editor Functions o tonar sa rE ERE Rese PER AS aS 354 15 3 1 Layout of the Logic Editor Windows 00 354 15 3 2 Logic Editor Menus 00 0 0 cece eee eee 355 15 3 3 Using the Shortcut Keys in the Logic Editor 361 15 4 Creating Program Projects 0 0 0 eee eee eee 364
354. el era Auto Recovery v 01 No 0 NE24 DNS21 RIVE Stop Error Connection 258 Using the NE2A series Controller as a Safety Slave Section 11 5 11 5 Using the NE2A series Controller as a Safety Slave This section describes how to make settings to use an NE 2A series Controller as a Safety Slave in a DeviceNet network Set an I O assembly for a Safety Slave to operate the NE 2A series Controller as a Safety Slave The I O assembly can be selected with an NE2A series Controller as the Safety Master Variables and I O tags can be used in the Logic Editor NE2A series Controller Safety Master CS C PLC eee a ae Using an NE2A a aes series Controller as a Safety ogee Slave Standard Slave DST1 series Controller Safety Slave MN o NE2A series Controller 5 Safety Slave __ 7 Note 1 This setting is not required if the NE 2A series Controller is not used as a Safety Slave 2 An NE1A series Controller cannot be used as a Safety Master for an NE2A series Controller 11 5 1 Registering I O Assemblies for Safety Slaves Register I O assemblies for a Safety Slave to enable an NE 2A series Control ler to function as a Safety Slave The input assembly is data from the Safety Slave to the Safety Master The output assembly is data from the Safety Master to the Safety Slave Safety Slave Safety Master Note 1 Up to 8 input assemblies and 8 output assemblies can be registered for a S
355. em is operating normally The reaction time must ensure that the output shutoff time will be maintained even if there are faults or failures in devices or the network 8 2 2 Calculating the Reaction Time Elements of the Reaction Time The elements of the reaction time are given below for each safety chain 1 Local Input Local Output Safety sensor NE2A Controller Actuator switch Sensor switch US ae mat Het uo A Actuator reaction time pur Ocal Gui ouau 4 reaction time reaction time reaction times reaction time X A Y 171 Calculating Safety Response Performance Section 8 2 2 Remote Input Local Output Safety eet DST1 Terminal NE2A Controller Actuator switc Input Network Remote input 1 0 Unit Actuat Peal reaction time reaction time o output reaction ig E G reaction time reaction time B Y 3 Local Input Remote Output Safety sensor NE 2A Controller DST1 Terminal Actuator switch Sensor switch 1 0 Unit Losi ipuy Network Output Actuator reaction time input remote output reaction time reaction time reaction time reactionitime reaction time 6 F X C 4 Remote Input Remote Output Safety sensor DST1 Terminal NE2A Controller DST1 Terminal Actuator switch P Input Remote input Output Sensor switch idee Network Network ae Actuator reaction time aes time reaction time U ER reaction time eae time reaction time G G D 5 Remote Input Remote Output via Multiple Networks Safety
356. en the Memory Card is in NE2A 1 Applicable range when the Memory Card is in NE2A 2 If the Memory Card is in NE2A 1 downloading and locking can be per formed for the Safety Devices on the DeviceNet network of the DeviceNet Unit in NE2A 1 range indicated by dashed dotted line If the Memory Card is in NE2A 2 downloading and locking can be per formed for devices on the DeviceNet networks of each DeviceNet Unit mounted to NE2A 2 range indicated by solid line Restrictions In the following two cases parameter downloads and configuration locks by a Memory Card cannot be performed for a Target device To use these func tions the Target device must be reset to default conditions Refer to 4 2 1 Resetting for information on resetting the defaults 1 Downloading parameters that require the network number and node ad dress to be changed 2 Replacing with a Safety Device that was used in a different system Standard Devices are not subject to the restrictions mentioned above 163 Operation and Maintenance Using a Memory Card Section 7 2 7 2 3 Changing the Operating Mode The operating mode of the NE2A series Controller can be changed from the Network Configurator or by using the RUN STOP RESTART switch on the CPU Unit The RUN STOP RESTART switch is described in this section Program execution can be started stopped and restarted by using the RUN STOP RESTART switch on the NE2A series CPU Unit To u
357. en the configuration data is un locked ON can be output by force setting local safety I O in IDLE mode Variable Status during Program Execution The following table shows the values of the variables while the program is being executed and while it is stopped Variable type Program being executed Program stopped Input variables Most recent input value Most recent input value Output variables Program execution result OFF Internal variables Program execution result OFF 70 NE2A series Controller Status Transitions Section 4 1 4 1 4 Force setting and Force resetting Variables Variables to which local I O or remote I O have been assigned can be force set reset from the Safety Program Monitoring Window Force setting or force resetting variables enables the values used by the program to be turned ON and OFF regardless of the ON OFF status of the actual local I O and remote I O data Force setting and force resetting variables make it possible to efficiently check output wiring and debug when setting up the system Z WARNING changed directly or indirectly for any of the following Take sufficient safety pre cautions Force setting resetting variables Ending Force Mode when the duration time expires Ending Force Mode from the Network Configurator Outputs may operate possibly resulting in serious injury Real I O may be S Force Mode
358. en this switch turns ON This switch can be used for Safety Master connections only Bits that corre spond to Safety Slave connections will be ignored even if they are turned ON Be Connection iD Staus Description Network No Node address Reopens safety communications Assembly data name Turn OFF from the program Remote Standard I O Related Data 7 DeviceNet Unit DeviceNet Unit Status 1 Description Indicates that an error related to the operation of the DeviceNet Unit has occurred The bit turns ON if any of the Unit Status Bits from 1 to 15 is ON an OR of bits 1 to 15 Indicates that the above error has not occurred or the bit was turned OFF when the error was cleared 127 Remote I O Allocations Master error Section 5 8 Description eae that an error relating to the Master has occurred Refer to Master status 1 The following errors can occur with the Master e Verification error 1 O0 communications error Incorrect scan list data 1 O refresh error Indicates that none of the above errors have occurred or the bit was turned OFF when all the above errors were cleared Reserved Slave error Indicates that at least one error relating to the Slave has occurred Refer to Slave status 1 The following errors could occur with the Slave 1 0 communications error for OUT1 IN1 1 O0 communications error for OUT2 IN2 e Illegal
359. ent data that have resulted in an error Error Counter Area The items displayed in the Error Counter Area are described in the following table Description Alignment Errors Displays the number of received frames whose length cannot be expressed as an octet integer Excessive Collisions Displays the number of times send errors occurred due to collisions Carrier Sense Errors Displays the number of times the carrier sense con dition was lost or assertion was not performed dur ing an attempt to send a frame Frame Too Long Displays the number of times errors occurred in the data length FCS Errors Displays the number of times an FCS error occurred in a packet Safety I O Tag Data Link Area This area displays the status of the tag data links Clear Information Button Click this button to clear the information from the Recv Send Error Counter and Safety I O Tag Data Link Areas Collection s Start Time The time is always 1972 01 01 00 00 00 000 with an NE 2A series EtherNet IP Unit 490 SECTION 19 Troubleshooting This section describes troubleshooting problems that can occur with an NE2A series Safety Network Controller 19 1 Checking the Location of an Error 0 00 e eee eee eee 492 19 1 1 Checking NE2A series Unit Errors 000 492 19 1 2 NE2A series Troubleshooting Procedure 493 19 2 Troubleshooting CPU Unit Errors
360. ent or facilities the system must be designed with the full understanding of and conformance to international standards such as those listed below and or standards in related industries e Typical related international standards ISO DIS 12100 Safety of Ma chinery Basic Concepts and General Principles for Design IEC 61508 Safety Standard for Safety Instrumented Systems Functional Safety of Electrical Electronic P rogrammable Electronic S afety related Systems e Role of Safety Device This Safety Device is provided with safety functions and mechanisms as stipulated in relevant standards but suitable designs must be used to allow these functions and mechanisms to operate properly inside system con structions containing safety related components Build systems that en able these functions and mechanisms to perform properly based on a full understanding of their operation e Typical related international standards ISO 14119 Safety of Machin ery Interlocking Devices Associated with Guards Principles of De sign and Selection e Installation of Safety Device The construction and installation of systems with safety related compo nents for equipment or facilities must be performed by technicians who have received suitable training e Typical related international standards ISO DIS 12100 Safety of Ma chinery Basic Concepts and General Principles for Design IEC 61508 Safety Standard for Safety Instrumented Systems Fun
361. ently check all parameters related to safety functions 15 8 1 Checking Programs for Syntax Errors Check the programs you create for syntax errors Start the check by selecting Build from the Project Menu If there are no errors the following message will be displayed in the Output Window Output i Generate the object code was complete Program size 280 If an error is detected the following error message will be displayed in the Output Window Output 3 Section Section2 has the FunctionBlock EDM 001 J that has open connection on output side Searching for Unconnected Function Blocks It is not possible to download a program if there are function blocks with unconnected inputs or outputs in it Refer to the following figure All I O must be connected Project x Blceu ost A Section x G NE2A SCPU01 a CPU DSTI Section BJ User Function Blocks a EStopLamp v in3 Function Blocks vax 3 Logic a AND t Comparator Comparator2 awe SL A E EXNOR ExOR E NAND i Nor i NoT J or E RS FF Timer Counter EStopLamp EStop EStop 1 0_1_DeviceNet_1 h _ BEStop 1 EStop 2_1_1_DeviceNet_1 a EStop 2 Oubpet Ox Section DST1 has the FunctionBlock EDM 001 that has open connection on input side x Section CPU has the FunctionBlock Reset 003 that has open connection on output side Variable
362. eparations for Operation Section 1 4 1 4 Preparations for Operation 1 4 1 General Steps for Safety Control System Configuration When using the NE2A series Controller to construct a system of safety related components for the applicable equipment and devices design the sys tem in conformance with international standards and the related industrial standards such as ISO 12100 1 IEC 61508 and IEC 62061 For example as shown below ISO 12100 1 requires measures for reducing risk by determining the level of danger of the machinery and then following safety design procedures Step 1 Determine the operating range of the machine Step 2 Identify the hazards and assess the risks Step 3 Remove hazards and reduce risks as much as possible through a basic safety design Step 4 Design guards safety equipment and other safeguards against any residual risks Step 5 Inform and warn users about any residual risks Preparations for Operation Section 1 4 1 4 2 Steps in Building an NE 2A series System The general procedure is shown below The contents of each step are described in the subsequent sections Detailed descriptions are provided in the reference locations System Safety Requirement Specification 1 e Specifying all safety functions e Specifying the application software safety requirements System Design e Designing network system configuration e Designing safety device connections e Designing the safety standard control inte
363. er devices or the overall machine The actual products have been checked for conformity to EMC standards see the following note Whether the products conform to the standards in the system used by the customer however must be checked by the customer EMC related performance of the OMRON devices that comply with EC Direc tives will vary depending on the configuration wiring and other conditions of the equipment or control panel on which the OMRON devices are installed The customer must therefore perform the final check to confirm that devices and the overall machine conform to EMC standards xxvi Conformance to EC Directives 6 Note Applicable EMC Electromagnetic Compatibility standards are as follows EMS Electromagnetic Susceptibility EN61000 6 2 EMI Electromagnetic Interference EN61000 6 4 Radiated emission 10 m regulations 6 3 Conformance to EC Directives NE2A series products comply with EC Directives To ensure that the machine or device in which an NE 2A series product is used complies with EC Direc tives the NE2A series product must be installed as follows 1 2 3 1 The NE2A series product must be installed within a grounded control pan el made of metal 2 The length of the power cable must be no longer than 3 m The NE2A series product must be installed within a control panel 4 The DC power supplies for logic and I O must meet the following require ments e They must have reinforced insulat
364. eral Servicing Cycle Time Make the Communications Unit and connections and check the peripheral servicing cycle time using the Network Configurator Checking Cycle Times With an NE 2A series Controller you can check the instruction execution cycle time and peripheral servicing cycle time by using the Network Configurator 181 Calculating Cycle Times of NE2A series Controllers Section 8 4 Edit Device Parameters Slave 1 0 DeviceNet Target 1 0 EtherNet IP 140 Unit Safety Connections Safety Slave 1 0 Communication Unit Mode Cycle Time Extend Mode Logie Instraction Execution Gycel Time 30 40 4ms 30 500 Peripheral Sevicing Cycle Time 46 xf ims 45 1000 IMPORTANT The user has to define the maximum allowed values depending on his safety application which are entered in the input box 182 Calculating Communications Response Performance Section 8 5 8 5 Calculating Communications Response Performance The value required in the network reaction time is determined from the calcu lated reaction time safety response performance The values required in the Standard I O Communications cycle time and RPI are determined by the cal culated standard response performance This section describes how to calculate the network reaction time EPI Stan dard I O Communications cycle time and RPI The EPI communications cycle time and RPI affect the calculation of network reaction time 8 5 1 Adjusting the DeviceNet EPI and Sta
365. erent from the TUNID specified by the Network Con figurator Check that the node address is correct for the device The configuration will be reset with the device TUNID if there is no problem Node address 9 6 2 Troubleshooting Network Configurator Errors Network Configurator message An error was found during parameter check Error description Configuration parameters are not consistent Section 19 5 Reset and Relevant sections Check the following items and modify the parameters eTiming parameters such as discrepancy time set for the I O Unit are smaller than the cycle time in the NE2A series Controller The Safety Connection EP I is smaller than the cycle time The Safety I O configuration is set so that the connection ID of the Safety Master exceeds the maximum number 12 Set the Safety Connection to Confirm Produced IDs to Safety Slaves Cycle time 10 2 1 EPI setting 13 2 1 Safety Connections 11 4 2 The hardware may be faulty Switch the NE 2A series Controller power supply from OFF to ON and execute self diagnosis Replace the CPU Unit if the MS indicator is lit red Program incomplete Start Logic Editor and check pro gram There is an input or output that is not connected in the function block used in the pro gram Open the Logic Editor and do one of the fol lowing Connect the disconnected input or output e Delete the disconnected input or output
366. error has not occurred Once this error occurs it will not return to a normal status It will remain ON Communications controller Indicates that an error occurred in the Communications Controller error Indicates that the above error has not occurred Once this bit has turned ON it will not turn OFF unless the power supply is cycled IP Address duplication error When the power supply is turned ON and every two minutes after ward an ARP frame is sent to the ARP s local IP address If there is a response it is assumed that there is a duplicated address Once this bit turns ON it will not turn OFF unless the power supply is cycled or the Unit is restarted This bit is OFF when there is no response to the above frames Reserved Reserved LINK OFF error A link with the hub was not established A normal link was established with the hub 10 to 15 Reserved 131 Remote I O Allocations Online Section 5 8 EtherNet IP Unit Unit Status 2 Description Indicates that the Unitis online This bit turns ON when explicit messages can be sent to the Ethernet The Unit goes online after the IP duplication check is completed with out any errors Indicates that the Unit is offline e Error detected during hardware test after Unit is started IP address duplication error Ethernet Communications Controller error hardware error Reserved ing operation Changing the I
367. error recurs Operation continues with 0 as the number of ON times for the terminals where the error occurred Non volatile Memory Error An error occurred when saving or reading the configuration restore file confirmation information Restart the CPU Unit Replace the CPU Unit if the error recurs Operation continues with the configuration restore file being authenticated The configuration restore file cannot authenti cated in Configuration Restore Mode so downloading and locking the configuration are not possible Errors Related to I O Units CPU Unit Non volatile Memory Error Network Configurator A Safety Parameter error was detected despite the configu ration being completed Reset the NE 2A series Controller to the default parameters and then download the parameters again Replace the CPU Unit if the error recurs Operation continues waiting for configuration The error will Indi cator 7 segment display Error history MS Error Detail P1 02 I O Unit slot number Error Detail 2052 I O Unit slot number Saved Displayed message External Test Signal Failure at Safety Input be cleared when the configuration is completed Cause Recovery method Status after error A test pulse error was detected at the Safety Input terminal It was disconnected or there was an error in a connected device Alternatively
368. errors Note After replacing an NE2A series Unit reset all the settings required for restart ing the user program and confirm that the safety functions are operating nor mally before starting this operation Device replacement procedure Make the settings and wire the new Unit Refer to SECTION 3 and SECTION 16 Operation Using Operation Using Memory Card and Network CPU Setting Switch Configurator Read the network configuration file Copy the Configuration Restore File Refer to 9 5 one a Memory C ard Refer to 17 9 Connect the Network Configurator to the network Insert the Memory Card into the Refer to 17 2 NE2A CPU Unit Refer to 17 9 i Download Me device parameters Validate the Configuration Restore Refer to 17 3 File il Refer to 17 9 For device parameters check the device information Download the Configuration Restore Refer to 17 4 File i e the device parameters Refer to 17 9 Operate the safety control system Operate the safety control system Refer to 17 5 Refer to 17 9 Lock the configuration Lock the configuration Refer to 17 6 and 17 7 Refer to 17 9 ooo no C Start operation D gt 543 NE2A series Unit Replacement Precautions Section 20 2 Making Settings and Wiring the New Unit Setting Switches on the New Unit
369. es so the same vari able can be used as for the NE2A series Controller Devices in the System Configuration Section 2 1 Series name product name Description model number OMRON DeviceNet Slave The DeviceNet Slave is a Remote I O Slave that supports DeviceNet Stan dard Communications such as with the DRT2 It exchanges Standard I O Data with a DeviceNet Master w4s1 EtherNet IP compatible Layer This isan OMRON EtherNet IP compatible Ethernet switching hub with Series 2 Switching Hub QoS functionality The following three models are available Each has a different number of LAN ports 3 ports W4S1 03B 5 ports W4S1 05B C NE1A EDRO1 EtherNet IP DeviceNetR outer This is a router designed for factory automation It routes Safety Communi ED Router cations data and messages between EtherNet IP and DeviceNet networks The ED Router can be connected to an EtherNet IP Safety Unit to enable Safety Communications and message communications between the EtherNet IP Safety Unit and DeviceNet Safety Slaves or NELA SCPU series Safety Network Controllers that support safety slave functionality that are connected to the ED Router Power ae Communications Units 1 Safety 2 3 Safety une CPU Unit 1 0 Units 8 EtherNet IP DeviceNet 4 End Unit Safety Units os Units e The maximum number of I O Units is 20 including Safety Input Units and Safety Output Units The maximum number of Communications Uni
370. es send data ata constant interval regardless of send requests from the Master device If the Slave device is a temperature controller it is suitable for collecting data ata constant interval The Master or Slave sends output data or input data at a constant time interval Heartbeat Timer Cyclic is the preferred connection for a Poll or Bit Strobe connection The communications cycle may become longer if there is a large amount of data for a Cyclic Connection It is suitable when the data changes less frequently and the amount of data is small Communica The communications cycle time is the time taken to process the I O data communications for a Slave tions cycle Time after the I O data communications has been processed for the same Slave The communications cycle time is also used to calculate the maximum I O response time The communications cycle time depends on various factors such as whether there is only one Master or there are multiple Units in the network or whether a message communication was performed or not 1 1 0 Type Restrictions e Connections can be specified for each Slave e COS and Cyclic connections cannot be used simultaneously together e When Poll COS or Poll Cyclic connections are both selected for a single output Target the maximum output data size is 16 bytes per connection Up to 32 input bytes can be set for two connections 2 The larger of the following two values is used as the interv
371. es using Dual Channel outputs nel with paired Safety Output bits The out put will be ON if both bits of the paired Safety Output are normal 4 Click the OK Button Setting the Parameters for Paired Bits In a Dual Channel Mode bits 00 and 01 and bits 02 and 03 can be set as pairs e If you set one bit to a Dual Channel Mode the other bit will also be set to the Dual Channel Mode e Ifa pair of bits is set to a Dual Channel Mode and you change the channel mode of one bit to Single Channel Mode the other bit will also change to Single Channel Mode e If you set a Dual Channel Mode and then change the channel mode of one bit to Not Used the other bit will change to Single Channel Mode 344 Setting the I O Configuration of Individual I O Bits Section 14 4 Local Output Error Lateh Time OF ms x100ms 0 255 default 0 General Maintenance No Name Mode eT A Safety Pulse Test Not Used Not Used When Dual channel is set as the Channel Mode 14 4 2 Setting Safety Input Bits You can set a error latch time an Input Unit and you can set parameters for individual bits in the Local Input Test Output Dialog Box displayed from the I O Unit Tab Page Procedure 1 2 3 1 Inthe Network Configuration Pane select the NE2A SCPU01 CPU Unitto set 2 Select Parameters Edit from the Device Menu The Edit Device Parameters Dialog Box will be displayed 3 Click the I O Unit Tab The I O Unit Tab P
372. ess the SERVICE switch on the NE2A series Controller to execute the download 458 Changing Device Parameters and Operating Modes Using a Memory Card Section 17 9 Turn OFF the NE2A series CPU Unit Turn ON pin 1 on the Memory Card DIP switch to change to configuration restore mode download ON OFF m 2 0O 3 LE a m Turn ON the power supply to the NE2A series Controller configuration restore mode Has the configuration restore file been validated NO 4 Validate the configuration restore file Refer to 17 9 2 Checking the Configuration Restore File Confirm that dL flashes on the seven segment display of the CPU Unit a Press the SERVICE button for at least 1 s and then release it 4 gt gt gt may be displayed for a few seconds t The address of the download destination will flash on the display ea Cent H H f i H 1 1 it 3 fin tad When downloading has been completed dL will be displayed Return the Memory Card DIP switch pin to its original position Pin 1 OFF ON OFF enn FE f i Y u Turn ON the power supply End Locking the Configuration The following device configurati
373. et Target I O EtherNet IP VO Unit Configuration Slot Unit Type The settings for the Unit Type Field are described in the following table Unittype NE 2A ID04 1 Safety Input Unit NE2A 0D04 1 Safety Output Unit 333 Setting the I O Unit Configuration Section 14 2 Note a The slot number is allocated in numerical order from 01 starting from the Unit to the right side of the CPU Unit b To delete a Unit thatis already set select from the list of Unit types 5 Setthe Unittype for all slots of the I O Units in the NE2A series Controller 6 Click the OK Button The Edit Device Parameters Dialog Box will close When you exit the Edit Device Parameters Dialog Box the Units that were registered will be shown in the I O Tag List Making the Settings from the Logic Editor Procedure 1 2 3 1 Select Settings I O Unit Configuration from the Device Menu The I O Unit Tab Page will be displayed in the dialog box showing the Unit settings 2 Specify the slot and Unit in the same way as for the Network Configurator procedure 3 Setthe Unit type for all slots of the I O Units in the NE2A series Controller Click the OK Button The Edit Device Parameters Dialog Box will close When you exit the Edit Device Parameters Dialog Box the Units that were registered will be shown in the I O Tag List 14 2 2 Copying I O Units Procedure 334 1 2 3 An I O Unit for which the parameters for I O bi
374. et IP Standard Communications DeviceNet Safety Communica tions and DeviceNet Standard Communications e A total of up to six EtherNet IP Units and DeviceNet Units can be mounted in each NE2A series Controller making it possible to build large scale Safety Control Systems Up to three EtherNet IP Units and up to six DeviceNet Units can be mounted to each PLC A total of 160 connections per CPU Unit are supported for an EtherNet IP Safety Master or DeviceNet Safety Master System Configuration Example When a Safety Network is configured with DeviceNet as described be low a system can be constructed with 480 Safety Inputs and 480 Safe ty Outputs gt Mount 6 DeviceNet Safety Units in an NE2A series Controller gt Connect 10 DST1 MD16SL 1 Safety I O Terminals with 8 Safety Inputs and 8 Safety Outputs each in each DeviceNet network e Configuration information can be downloaded and uploaded and the devices can be monitored online across the networks Enhanced Expandability NE2A series Communications Units and local I O can be expanded in building block fashion e EtherNet IP and DeviceNet Communications Units can be freely used in combination in constructing a system e The number of local I O points can be expanded by adding I O Units 4 Safety Inputs or 4 Safety Outputs each to build a system with the opti mum number of I O points 20 Units max Outputs 7 ol Greater Integration of Safety Devi
375. et Standard Communications Section 5 5 5 5 DeviceNet Standard Communications 5 5 1 Outline of DeviceNet Standard Communications Monitoring systems using Standard PLCs can be constructed using DeviceNet Standard Communications A Standard Master is used to input output Standard signals used for safety control A Standard Slave is used for transmission of monitor data and interlock signals between Controllers with DeviceNet Master Units connected to them Data can be exchanged between the Standard Master and Standard Slave without user programming using Standard I O Communications lt Q DeviceNet Safety Communications DeviceNet Standard Communications As a Standard Master e Number of connections Up to 126 connections per DeviceNet Unit 2 connections per Slave e O size Up to 16 input bytes 16 output bytes per connection As a Standard Slave e Number of connections Up to 2 connections per DeviceNet Unit e I O size Up to 200 input bytes 200 output bytes per connection See note DeviceNet Unit in CS CJ series PLC DeviceNet Master DeviceNet Slave DeviceNet DeviceNet Safety i y DeviceNet DeviceNet Safety Standard DST1 series DST1 series Standard Standard Slave Controller Controller Slave Slave Note The O size of the connected Safety Master cannot be exceeded Z N WARNING not use Standard I O Communications data to configure a safety system Stan dard I O Communications data is non s
376. ety Master does not match the safety signature of the Safety Slave itself Reset the Safety Slave to default settings then download the device parameters again eif the above remedy does not work delete then re register the connec tions registered to the Safety Master 01 080E TUNID Mismatch The TUNID for the Safety Slave monitored by the Safety Master does not match the TUNID of the Safety Slave itself Reset the Safety Slave to default settings then download the correct device parameters eif the above remedy does not work delete then re register the connec tions registered to the Safety Master D0 0002 Safety slave that is com munications partner is in IDLE Mode The communications partner a NELA NE2A series Controller that is func tioning as a Safety slave is in IDLE Mode so a safety I O connection can not be established Change the operating mode of the communications partner to RUN Mode 10 0001 1 0 communications have stopped at Safety Slave that is the communications partner Safety I O connections cannot be established because I O communica tions have stopped at NE 2A series Controller that is functioning as the Safety Slave that is the communications partner Start I O communications at the NE2A series Controller that is functioning as the Safety Slave D0 0001 IDLE Mode The NE2A series CPU Unit that is functioning as the safety master is in IDLE mode so a Safety I O commun
377. ety Output Used to connect one output without welding check Door SW Lock Used to connect an electromagnetic door switch Other 2 Safety Outputs w o pulse 1 Used to connect two outputs that do not require a check pulse Other Safety Output w o pulse Used to connect an output that does not require a check pulse Other Standard Output Used for Standard Outputs Not Use The outputis not used 1 This device type can be selected only when the bit number is an even number e If you select a device type for which the welding check is specified in the bit settings the following dialog box will be displayed Select Input Bit Please select an Input bit for Feedback 01 00 Input Bits SSS SSSI OK Cancel In this dialog box set the input bit for which the welding check feedback input is to be performed and click the OK Button Note The number ofthe output bit for which a welding check is specified corresponds to the numeric value within parentheses in Feedback 01 00 thatis displayed in the Safety I O Wizard Input Bits Dialog Box 4 Make the settings for the other output bits 337 Setting the I O Configuration from the Wizard Section 14 3 5 Click the Edit Comment Button to edit the comments of output bits in the Edit O Comments Dialog Box Edit 1 0 Comments ea Mode Comment Satety_Relay 1 7 arj Safety_Relay 2 01 02 EStopLamp
378. ety Output terminals Sol to S03 Various applications can be supported by selecting settings and wiring that are appropriate for the types of output device that are connected and the safety level to be achieved Devices That Can Be Connected The following table lists the devices that can be connected pType EXample Safety Devices with PNP output Safety relays and contactors contacts 6 3 2 Setting the Channel Mode Description Not connected to an external output device Set the channel mode for Safety Output terminals according to the external device that are connected The following output signal line errors can be detected for the Safety Output terminals of the NE2A SOD4 1 Safety Output Unit Fault mode Contact with the power supply line positive side Ground faults Short circuits between output lines Output when ON Output when OFF Output when ON Output when OFF Short circuits between ON outputs Short circuits between OFF outputs Short circuits between ON and OFF outputs Does not output test pulse when output is ON Not detect able Detect able Detect able Not detect able Not detect able Detectable 152 Outputs test pulse when output is ON Note Detect able Detect able Detect able Detectable Not detect able Detectable If Safety Pulse Test is set an OFF pulse signal with a pulse
379. event shall the responsibility of OMRON for any act exceed the individual price of the product on which liability is asserted INNO EVENT SHALL OMRON BE RESPONSIBLE FOR WARRANTY REPAIR OR OTHER CLAIMS REGARDING THE PRODUCTS UNLESS OMRON S ANALYSIS CONFIRMS THAT THE PRODUCTS WERE PROPERLY HANDLED STORED INSTALLED AND MAINTAINED AND NOT SUBJECT TO CONTAMINATION ABUSE MISUSE OR INAPPROPRIATE MODIFICATION OR REPAIR XV Application Considerations SUITABILITY FOR USE OMRON shall not be responsible for conformity with any standards codes or regulations that apply to the combination of products in the customer s application or use of the products At the customer s request OMRON will provide applicable third party certification documents identifying ratings and limitations of use that apply to the products This information by itself is not sufficient for a complete determination of the suitability of the products in combination with the end product machine system or other application or use The following are some examples of applications for which particular attention must be given This is not intended to be an exhaustive list of all possible uses of the products nor is it intended to imply that the uses listed may be suitable for the products e Outdoor use uses involving potential chemical contamination or electrical interference or conditions or uses not described in this manual e Nuclear energy control syste
380. f all the connections in the Safety I O Communi cations and the optimum Master cycle time in the Standard I O Communi cations will be calculated and displayed for each baud rate 314 Checking the Communications Response Performance Section 13 3 Calculate EPI Safety Connections Network Bandwidth Best Average of EPI 125K Bit s 42 ms Use Rate 40 x s S 250K Bits 21 ms 500K Bit s 11 ms Update device configuration Standard Connections Network Bandwidth Best Average of Cycle Time 125K Bit s 45 ms Use Rate 30 x 250K Bits 23 ms 500K Bits 12 ms Update device configuration i Calculate Close Change the EPI settings for each Safety Connection and the Standard I O Communications cycle time for the Standard Master Changing the EPI for Each Safety Connection The Best Average EPI is the average value of all the Safety Connections in the target DeviceNet network First check whether the EP corresponding to the baud rate that is being used is longer than following times 1 The peripheral servicing cycle time of the NE2A series CPU Unit 2 The EPI for which operation is possible for Safety I O Communications for the NE2A series DeviceNet Unit 3 The cycle time of the Safety Slave DST1 Slave 6 ms NEOA Slave 7 ms min The maximum value of the above times is the minimum value that can be set for the EPI You can check the NE2A series CPU Unit s peripheral servicing cycle time by followin
381. f file are saved as separate files 2 The following apply if a section that uses I O tags is created as a library object e I O tags assigned to variables are removed from the variables I O tags are removed from variables generated from I O tags only the variable names are left If however an I O tag is assigned to a variable of the same name that is already defined when the library object is read from the library into the project that assignment will be used 15 9 3 Reusing Programming Copy the file created in the above section 15 9 2 Creating Program Objects to a computer to reuse it If you copy the file to a folder under C Program Files OMRON Network Configurator v3 NExA Programmer Library you need not perform the operation given below in Preparing to Reuse a File Preparing to Reuse a File When preparing to reuse an object register a folder to store the user defined function block or section in the Library Window 1 2 3 1 Select Map Folder from the Library Menu A dialog box will be displayed where you can browse the folders 2 Specify the folder in which the file is saved and click the OK Button The folder name specified in the Library Window will be displayed Adding Function Blocks and Sections to a Project 1 2 3 1 Inthe Library Window selectthe user defined function block or section you want to save 398 Creating and Reusing Program Objects Section 15 9 Library 44x Section Ee Library object
382. facturer specific ALARM exception detail 13 0x00 Q Manufacturer specific ALARM exception detail 14 0x00 Q Manufacturer specific ALARM exception detail 15 0x00 The Detail of Alarm Warning Dialog Box contains the General Safety Output Safety Input and Test Output Tab Pages The General Tab Page displays the errors that have occurred in the Unit The other tab pages display the errors that have occurred in the input terminals output terminals and test output ter minals Devices will not operate normally if an alarm occurs You must remove the cause of the alarm Devices will continue to operate when a warning occurs but it is recommended that the cause of the warning be removed because problems may occur later 18 2 3 Overall Status and Error Status Monitor The status details and error details for an NE2A series Controller can be mon itored from the Network Configurator This will enable you to identify which Unit has an error and check if an error has occurred in the Safety Connections or Standard Communications The connection information of a DST1 series Controller cannot be monitored Monitoring from the Network Configurator 1 2 3 1 Selectthe device whose status is to be monitored 2 Select Monitor from the Device Menu You can also right click the device and select Monitor from the pop up menu Or you can click the Monitor Device Icon 4 in the toolbar The Monitor Device Dialog Box will be displ
383. fer to 17 6 Protecting Device Parameters 167 Examples of Security According to Roles Section 7 3 168 SECTION 8 Calculating System Performance This section describes how to calculate the system performance including the reaction time 8 1 Calculating System Performance 0 0 0 0 eee eee eee ee 170 8 2 Calculating Safety Response Performance 0 004 171 8 2 1 Reaction Time Concepts 0 0 eee ee eee eee 171 8 2 2 Calculating the Reaction Time 000 171 8 3 Calculating Response Performance of Standard Communications 177 8 3 1 Response Performance of DeviceNet Standard I O Communications 177 8 3 2 Response Performance of EtherNet IP Tag Data Link Communications 178 8 4 Calculating Cycle Times of NE2A series Controllers 181 8 5 Calculating Communications Response Performance 183 8 5 1 Adjusting the DeviceNet EPI and Standard I O Communications Cycle Time183 8 5 2 Adjusting EtherNet IP EPI and RPI 0 185 8 5 3 Checking the Network Reaction Time 189 8 6 Checking and Adjusting the System Response Performance 191 169 Calculating System Performance Section 8 1 8 1 Calculating System Performance This section shows how to calculate system performance The items to be considered for each step are described on later pages Designing system response per
384. fety Signatures This section describes the procedure for checking if the device parameters match the parameters in the Network Configurator Z N WARNING Serious injury may possibly occur due to loss of required safety functions Be sure to suf ficiently check all parameters related to safety functions o 17 4 1 Verifying Device Parameters After downloading parameters to one or more devices verify the parameters Parameters can be verified only when the Network Configurator is connected online In the Network Configurator you can select multiple devices and verify them at the same time Procedure 1 2 3 1 Selectone or more devices in the Network Configuration Pane of the Net work Configurator Hold down the Shift Key when selecting more than one device 2 Select Parameters Verify from the Device menu You can also right click the device and select Parameters Verify Or you can click the Verify Parameters Icon x in the toolbar The following confirmation message box will be displayed 3 Click the Yes Button The device parameters will be uploaded Uploading Parameter Seeeeeeeeeeeeeeee Uploading Parameter Variable Name SILLI The Network Configurator will check if there are any differences between the parameters registered on the virtual network and the uploaded param eters If there are no differences the following dialog box will be displayed Network Configurator
385. fety Used when connecting a Safety Device with a semiconductor Input output such as a light curtain Test pulse from test Different Safety Devices can be connected by adding test out out puts The test output mode to be used in the test source is selected according to the Safety Device that is connected It is possible to detect contact with the positive input signal power supply line and to detect short circuits between other input signal lines Test Source Test Output 0 When the channel mode of the Safety Input bit is set to Test Test Outputd Test Output 1 pulse from test out the test output bit to be used can be selected in combination with a Safety Input bit Note When a Dual Channel Mode is set the test output must be set for each bit of the pair Test Pulse Mechanical contact Specifies that a mechanical contact device is connected The Mechanical test output signal pulse output of the Safety Input Unit is input contact via the mechanical contact device It is possible to detect contact with the positive input signal power supply line to detect ground faults and to detect short circuits between other input signal lines Single beam Safety Used when connecting a Single beam Safety Sensor A test sig Sensor nal is output for Single beam Safety Sensor diagnosis Non contact switch Specifies thatthe OMRON D40A Non contact Door Switch is D40A connected A test signal is output for the D40A MAT Specifies that a safety ma
386. fications BOOTP client IP parameters such as the IP address and subnet mask are automatically set for the EtherNet IP Unit from the BOOTP server on the network IGMP client When an Ethernet switch that supports IGMP snooping is used only the necessary IP multicast packets are received This function prevents traffic increases due to unnecessary IP multicast packets and load increases during the signal reception processing Setting IP Addresses Node Addresses and TCP IP Multiple EtherNet IP networks can be constructed in a NE2A series System IP addresses are used to uniquely identify and mutually confirm devices in a configuration that contains more than one EtherNet IP Ethernet network When multiple EtherNet IP Units are connected as shown in the following dia gram IP addresses are used to distinguish the EtherNet IP Units NE2A ENS21 NE2A ENS21 NE2A ENS21 NE2A SCPU01 IP address 3 IP address 2 IP address 1 EtherNet EtherNet EtherNet TCP IP settings such as the IP address and subnet mask are made for an EtherNet IP Unit The EtherNet IP Unit s TCP IP configuration settings include the following set tings IP address Subnet mask Default gateway Preferred DNS server Alternate DNS server Domain name Baud rate If the NE2A ENS21 EtherNet IP Unit is connected to an NE2A series CPU Unit and the TCP IP configuration is not set from the Network Configurator the EtherNet IP Unit w
387. for Standard I O Com munications increase the bandwidth proportion for safety communica tions e Conversely to decrease the communications cycle time or Tag Data Link RPI for Standard I O Communications and increase the EPI for Safety I O Communications increase the proportion for Standard 1 0 Communica tions or Tag Data Link Communications Reevaluate the network configuration considering the points in the following sections if any of following conditions occurs even when the calculation that is described above is performed e Itis not possible to calculate the best average EP I for the desired connec tion and the best communications cycle time or RP I for the Standard Mas ter e The peripheral servicing cycle time of the NE2A series Controller is longer than the best average EPI Dividing Networks Divide the DeviceNet network into a Safety Network and Standard Net work if Safety I O Communications and Standard I O Communications are both used Divide the network into two DeviceNet Safety Networks if only Safety I O Communications are used e Divide the EtherNet IP network into a Safety Network and Standard Network if both Safety I O Communications and Tag Data Link Communications are used Adding Controllers to Perform Distributed Control Change the Slave from a DST 1 series Controller to a NEOA series Controller to enable distributed control if high speed reaction time is required for some 1 0 191 Checking and Adj
388. for the TUNID NS indica tor is flashing green red Set the network number and download the data again Network number 11 3 1 12 3 1 Downloading 17 3 1 The device has a different TUNID A device was reset and is waiting for the TUNID to be set MS indicator flashing green red Alternatively the TUNID of the device is differ ent from the TUNID specified by the Network Configurator Check the setting with the following proce dure 1 Downloading 1 Start downloading again after resetting the device to default setting However the network number may not match with other devices After changing the NE2A SCPU01 to RUN mode if bit 6 is displayed on the 7 segment display Safety I O Connection Establishment Failure displayed in error his tory do the following step 2 Execute uploading from the network and reset all devices to the default settings Download the data to all the devices again after resetting the configuration 2 Changing the Operating Mode Check whether the device node address matches If it does the network number of the device and Network Configurator do not match Upload from the network using the Network Configurator so that the network number matches Resetting 17 8 1 Downloading 17 3 1 Uploading 17 3 2 Network number 11 3 1 12 3 1 The device has a different TUNID The device TUNID will be used to reset Is that OK 532 The TUNID of the device is diff
389. formance AA Calculate the required safety response performance from the safety distance AA Calculate the required standard response performance from the system specifications fe Calculate the instruction execution cycle time Adjust the instruction execution cycle time by adding Controllers to Check the time with a sample program and parameters perform distributed processing _ i Calculate the peripheral servicing cycle time Divide the network to adjust the n peripheral servicing cycle time Check the time using the Communications Unit and and communications cycle connection settings time oo Calculate the communications response performance e DeviceNet Setthe EPI Standard I O Communications cycle Adjust the EPI Standard 1 0 time and network bandwidth use rate Communications cycle time e EtherNet IP RPI and each bandwidth use Setthe EPI RPI and allowed communications rate bandwidth use rate k e Safety Is the required safety re sponse performance satisfied e Standard Is the required 1 0 commu nications response per formance satisfied 170 Calculating Safety Response Performance Section 8 2 8 2 Calculating Safety Response Performance Check that the reaction times satisfy the necessary specifications for all safety chains If a reaction time exceeds the necessary specifications r
390. function block that was created for the NE1A and Block then exported fbd file Print Selects the program variable list function block settings and other items to be printed Sets the printer Print Preview Displays the print contents on the screen Setup Page Size Sets the page size and printing direction Print Settings Edits the contents to be printed for the title header and footer Exit Exits the Logic Editor Edit Menu Command Description Toolbar icon Cancels the operation that was just executed Up to 100 operations can be canceled Redoes an operation that has been undone Cuts the selected area In the Program Window all function blocks variables and connections connected to the selected objects within the selected area will be cut In the Variable Window the selected variables will be cut Copies the selected area The items that are copied are the same as those that are cut for the Cut command Inserts copied or cut data to a selected location Deletes the selected area The items that are deleted are the same as those that are cut for the Cut command Sections selected in the Project Window can also be deleted Rename Changes the project name section name folder name or user defined function block name Select All Selects all items in the active window In the Program Window all objects will be selected In the Variable Window all var
391. g 17 3 1 Connection failed Connection could not be established when attempting to configure a device on the DeviceNet network through the USB on the NE 2A series Controller Check that power is supplied to the device and download the data again In situations other than that described in the error description communications may be unstable because of noise Check the follow ing items Are baud rates of all nodes the same Are the cable lengths branch main lines suitable Are any cables disconnected or loose els there a terminator at each end of the main line els there a lot of noise Downloading 17 3 1 Could not open connection The Network Configurator could not connect to the NE2A series Controller while downloading through the DeviceNet or the Ethernet Check that power is supplied to the device and try again A connection to the Network Configurator cannot be estab lished because the device is using all available connections to conduct Safety I O Connec tions with the Safety Master Change the operating mode of the Safety Master registered with a Safety Connection to IDLE Mode Operating mode change 17 5 1 In situations other than that described above communica tions may be unstable because of noise Check the following items Are the baud rates of all nodes the same Are the cable lengths branch main lines suitable Are any cables disconnected or loose
392. g Slave Input Data in IDLE Mode You can set to hold or clear the previous data in any of the following cases for input assembles transferred from an NE 2A series Standard Slave to a Stan dard Master e The NE2A series Controller is changed from RUN Mode to IDLE Mode e A communications error or other error is detected in a safety chain that sets data to I O tags of input assemblies 306 SECTION 13 Verifying System Performance This section describes how to verify the performance of a NE2A series Safety Network Controller system 13 1 System Performance Verification 0 00 0 0c eee eee eee eee 308 13 1 1 DeviceNet Performance Verification 004 309 13 1 2 EtherNet IP Performance Verification Procedure 310 13 2 Checking the NE2A series Controller Cycle Time 311 13 2 1 Checking the Instruction Execution Cycle Time and Peripheral Servicing Cycle Time 004 311 13 3 Checking the Communications Response Performance 313 13 3 1 Checking the Communications Response Performance ina DeviceNet hc0 sie eset nei eee ee ehh eee eter doe 313 13 3 2 Checking the Communications Response Performance inan EtherNet IP 3 sic doit en eet ed aed ee 320 13 4 Verifying the Safety Response Performance Reaction Time 327 13 5 Standard I O Communications Network Response Performance 329 307 System Performance Verification
393. g hub functionality 137 switching hub types 137 system configuration 9 system performance verification 308 system requirements 194 T table of security functions 166 Tag Data Link communications 113 Tag Data Link connections 114 Tag Data Links and specifications 97 Target Slave I O Settings Dialog Box 267 TCP IP Settings Dialog Box 287 terminal layout 57 62 test inputs 58 Test Output M ode 142 Test pulse from test output 141 test pulse 344 Test Source 340 time out multiplier 105 tool menu 227 troubleshooting 491 TUNID 95 twisted pair cable 419 types of variables 76 U uninstalling the Network Configurator 196 unit number rotary switch 48 54 unit replacement 543 Unit Status Area 487 Unit Status Tab 482 Unlock 452 unlocking the device configuration 452 unregistering data 265 302 U pdate Device Configuration Dialog Box 315 updating the error history 476 uploading 436 uploading device parameters 436 Usage of Device Bandwidth 320 Usage of Network Bandwidth 313 USB port 39 425 Used as Safety Input 141 user program ID 236 user defined function block file 398 user defined function blocks 380 using the NE2A series Controller as a Safety Slave 259 296 using the shortcut keys in the Logic Editor 361 V validating the configuration restore file 458 variable data files 83 Variable Reference Report Window 390 variable specifications 80 verificati
394. g the procedure outlined in 13 2 1 Checking the Instruction Execution Cycle Time and Peripheral Servicing Cycle Time The calculated result will be set as the EPI for all Safety Connection parame ters in the DeviceNet The values can be changed later as required for individ ual connections Procedure 1 2 3 1 Click the Update Device Configuration Button The Update Device Configuration Dialog Box will be displayed Update Device Configuration E3 Please select a baud rate that you would like to use Baud rate D 125K Bits 250K Bits C 500K Bits User setup Custom EPI 10 me Range 1 500ms 0K Cancel 2 Selectthe Baud Rate to use and click the OK Button 315 Checking the Communications Response Performance Section 13 3 316 With this procedure it is possible to set the EPI for all Safety Connections on the target DeviceNet network Note Select the Custom EPI Option in the User setup Area when setting an EPI value that is not automatically calculated Next adjust the EPI for each Safety Connection Click the Close Button in the Calculate EP Dialog Box Select the target NE 2A DeviceNet Unit in the Network Configuration Pane and then select Device Display Routing Network The NE2A_ Backplane for the NE2A CPU Unit with a mounted DeviceNet Unit will be displayed Select the NE2A series CPU Unit and select Device Parameters Edit The following Edit Device Parameters Dialog Box will
395. ging and drop 219 Main Window and Menus Section 9 6 NE2A Backplane 1 O DeviceNet EtherNet IP1 Maintenance Mode In addition to providing the information displayed in the normal mode the maintenance mode enables checking the devices that require maintenance Device status is also displayed Connected network identifier Device icon F l 5 I ONE28_Backplane_t C Devicget_1 EtherNet IP_1 Device description Routing network registration status The following table describes the items Description Connected network Same as for normal mode identifier Device icon Same as for normal mode Device description Same as for normal mode Status This mark indicates the status of the device It is displayed only for devices that are compliant with DeviceNet Safety The following marks are displayed The gray icon indicates offline status The gray icon with the light blue border indicates default Status Note This includes non configured status The green icon indicates IDLE mode The blue icon indicates RUN mode normal The yellow icon indicates warning status The red icon indicates alarm status Node address Same as for normal mode Routing network reg Same as for normal mode istration status Detailed Display Mode 1 Based on Master The Master device comments device descriptions and Master device node address are displayed along with
396. gy DeviceType oa Communications Adapter G eal SSetytlouua a a 3 NE24 SCPU01 roller 2 Selectthe NE2A ENS21 added in step 1 283 Registering EtherNet IP Units to the CPU Unit Note Section 12 2 3 Select Register to Routing Network from the Device Menu You can also right click the NE2A ENS21 and select Register to Routing Network from the menu A dialog box will be displayed to confirm whether to add to the network Network Configuraton 4 Click the OK button An EtherNet IP Tab will be added to the Network Configuration Pane O NE2A_Backplane_ C Eterne 1 a a f 00 0 NE24 SCPUOT NE24 ENS21 T E Network Configurator E DeviceNet Hardware EtherNet IP Hardware NE2A_Backplane Hardware sy Vendor H L Omron Corporation f DeviceType Communications Adapter 8 NE24 DNS21 E NE24ENS21 oh Safety Network Controller 3 NE24 SCPUDI The slot numbers of the device parameters will be assigned in the order that the Communications Unit is added to the NE2A Backplane Change the slot number to match the actual configuration by using the tab page for the Com munications Unit in the Edit Device Parameters Dialog Box This dialog box is displayed by selecting Parameter Edit from the Device Menu Refer to 11 2 1 Associating the CPU Unit and DeviceNet Units Associating an NE 2A series Backplane with Other Networks Procedure 1 2 3 284 Associations can be made to the NE2
397. hat a PLC and all PLC Units be used for the speci fied purpose and under the specified conditions especially in applications that can directly or indirectly affect human life You must consult with yourOMRON representative before applying a PLC System to the above mentioned appli cations This is the Operation Manual for the NE 2A series Safety Network Controllers Heed the following items during system construction to ensure that safety related components are configured in a manner that allows the system func tions to sufficiently operate eRisk Assessment The proper use of the Safety Device described in this Operation Manual as it relates to installation conditions and mechanical performance and func tions is a prerequisite for its use When selecting or using this Safety De vice risk assessment must be conducted with the aim of identifying potential danger factors in equipment or facilities in which the Safety De vice is to be applied during the development stage of the equipment or fa cilities Suitable Safety Devices must be selected under the guidance of a sufficient risk assessment system An insufficient risk assessment system may lead to the selection of unsuitable Safety Devices e Typical related international standards ISO 14121 Safety of Machin ery Principles of Risk Assessment General Precautions 2 e Safety Measures When using this Safety Device to build systems containing safety related components for equipm
398. he CPU Unit for internal control circuits to supply power Sooc ON a Flashing m OFF 2 Output Indicators These indicators show the status of the output terminals Indicators 0 to 3 cor respond to So0 to So3 Indicator name Meaning Output signal ON e Error detected in output circuit Dual channel violation at Safety Output detected when dual channels are set Error detected in other channel when setting dual channels No error in this channel Output signal OFF e Power for external output circuits of the Safety Output Unit is not being supplied Wire the power supply to V2 and G2 Sooc ON a Flashing m OFF 3 9 3 1 0 Specifications Safety Outputs Specifications Number of outputs 4 Output type Sourcing outputs PNP compatible Power supply voltage V2 20 4 to 26 4 VDC 24 VDC 15 10 Rated output current 0 5 A max point 1 2 A Unit max ON residual voltage 1 2 VDC max between output terminals and V2 OFF residual voltage 2 VDC max between output terminals and G2 Leakage current 0 1 mA max Z WARNING Outputs may fail possibly resulting in serious injury Never use Safety Outputs for loads that exceed the ratings Ground faults are detected for Safety Outputs from the NE2A but overcurrents are not detected Make sure that the output current is within the
399. he DeviceNet Master Connection types Poll Bit strobe COS Cyclic EtherNet IP Tag Data Link communica tions connec tions EtherNet IP Unit E As EtherNet IP Tag Data Link Target Maximum number of connections per Unit 1 O size per connection Connection types Connection I O types 23 1 024 bytes Point to Point Multicast Input Only Output Only and Input amp Output 1 With a multicast connection input data can be sent to up to 15 Safety Mas ters However this is limited to Safety Masters that have the same I O data type and EPI value specified for the I O connection 2 Only connections as a Tag Data Link Target are supported The EtherNet IP Unit cannot be an Originator Originator The devices that actively establishes a connection Target The device to which an connection is established 93 Communications Specifications for NE2A series Controllers Section 5 2 3 With a multicast connection input data can be sent to up to four Origina tors However this is limited to Originators that have the same input data packet interval RPI and timeout value specified for the I O connection Note The NE2A series Controllers support message communications through the DeviceNet Units and EtherNet IP Units The following configuration will be used to describe the types and numbers of connections that can be set for an NE2A series Controller CS C PLC 1 EtherNet IP 1 NE2A
400. he NE2A series Logic Editor The cause of the error can be determined by checking the error message dis played in the Output Window of the Logic Editor 19 2 Troubleshooting CPU Unit Errors 19 2 1 Checking the CPU Unit Error Status Status Indicators The status indicators show the status and error codes of a NE2A series Con troller Refer to 3 2 2 Indicators Seven Segment Display The 4 digit 7 segment display shows the status and error codes of a NE2A series Controller Refer 3 2 2 Indicators The error code and detail code are displayed alternately ON 1s ON 1s OFF ip f al A EE I L mae L Ns I J LI lL Error code Detail code 494 Troubleshooting CPU Unit Errors Error Codes Section 19 2 The upper 2 digits of the error code displayed on the 7 segment display gen erally indicate the following error categories Upper 2 digits of the error code Error category Errors occurring when changing the operating mode with the RUN STOP RESTART switch Errors occurring the configuration restore function Errors occurring in using the Memory Card Errors occurring in manipulating the switches Errors related to the configuration Fatal errors occurring in the NE2A series Controller Fatal errors occurring in the NE2A series Controller Errors related to the I O Units Errors related to the Communications Units Detail Code
401. he name of the registered Safety Slave 4 icon and the name of the I O assembly used in the set Safety Connection 3 icon are displayed The EPI of the Safety Connection is displayed Refer to 11 4 2 Setting Safety Connection Parameters for information on the EPI Reaction Time The network response time of the Safety Connection is dis played 250 Communications between an NE2A series Controller and a Safety Slave Section 11 4 Description The type of I O assembly used by the Safety Connection is displayed In Input assembly Slave to Master Out Output assembly Master to Slave The size of I O assembly data used by the Safety Connection is displayed e Here the Auto allocation Option is selected at the upper right of the tab page so the default connection I O assembly of the Safety Slave will be registered when the Safety Slave is registered If this option is not selected the connection will not be registered and the name of the I O assembly will not be displayed e The number of connections over the number of connections that can be used is displayed in the upper left part of the tab page Note 1 A maximum of 160 connections can be registered A maximum of 64 connections that can be set for one DeviceNet Unit 2 If an NE2A series Controller is set as a Safety Slave the default I O as sembly will not be set Adding Connections Procedure 1 2 3 1 Selectthe name of the Safety
402. he network cable wiring and branching a Assembly 2 cy Section 5 C a a Mounting and Wiring e Mount each NE2A series Unit and network Slave according to the specified procedures e Use the specified wire sizes crimp terminals and tightening torque when wiring D Section 16 Hardware Settings e Set the switches for each Unit to match the system design D Sections 3 and 16 Startup and Adjustments gt 13 Preparations for Operation Section 1 4 Redesign the safety standard control interface a Change the programming CStartu and Adjustments Redesign the response performance Downloading the Project and Checking Wirin e Download the project and check the wiring of the safety device Download the project D Section 17 n Verification and Validation of the Application Software Safety Requirements e Check whether operations are being executed according to the safety control specifications e Check the response performance e Perform a user test D Sections 13 and 17 Are the specifications and performance standards met Restricting Access to the Safety Control System e After the system operation has been confirmed run the system and lock it to prevent unintended operations CD Sections 7 and 17 l System Operation and Maintenance
403. he tab page will be cleared when you click the Clear Send and Recv Info Button The error counter data that is displayed in the dialog box will be cleared when you click the Clear Error Counter Button General Area The items displayed in the General Area are described in the following table D e Speed Displays the Ethernet baud rate MAC Address Displays the Ethernet address of the device Recv Area The items displayed in the Recv Area are described in the following table Description Octets Displays the number of bytes of received data Unicast Packets Displays the number of packets of data received from a specific device Non Unicast Packets Displays the number of packets of data received from other than a specific device Discards Displays the number of packets of received data that has been discarded Errors Displays the number of packets of received data that have resulted in an error Send Area The items displayed in the Send Area are described in the following table D e is eripion id Octets Displays the number of bytes of sent data Unicast Packets Displays the number of packets of data sent to a specific device 489 Monitoring EtherNet IP Units Section 18 4 Description Non Unicast Packets Displays the number of packets of data sent to other than a specific device Discards Displays the number of packets of sent data to be discarded Errors Displays the number of packets of s
404. he user defined function block or section will be added to the program 399 Creating and Reusing Program Objects Section 15 9 15 9 4 Importing NE1A series Programs NE1A Logic File The NE2A series Controller can import programs from an NE1A series Con troller This enables efficient use of existing NE1A series Controller program ming assets Programs created using the NE1A series Controller can be imported to the Logic Editor of an NE2A series Controller The programs to import from the NE1A series Controller are exported from the Logic Editor of the NE1A series Controller created in a led file Refer to the DeviceNet Safety System Con figuration Operation Manual Cat No Z905 Procedure to Import to the NE 2A series Controller 1 2 3 Note 1 Select Import NE1A Logic File from the File Menu 2 Selectthe NE1A series Controller program file led to be imported in the NE1A Import Dialog Box The NE1A Import Dialog Box will be displayed NEVA Import Import option ID Impatt sections and variable to new project Import Cancel 3 Select the Import Option Option and then click the Import Button The file will be added to the Project Window The following dialog box will be displayed to confirm name change if there is already a section or variable with the same name E Section name duplicated 1 71 Original name Page_1 New name IMPORT_1_Page_1 i C Naming automatically below 0K
405. her con nections e When a DeviceNet network is being used the baud rate can be acceler ated Take note of the maximum length of the network and the type of cable 328 Standard I O Communications Network Response Performance Section 13 5 13 5 Standard I O Communications Network Response Performance The Network Configurator checks the following values and calculates the Standard I O Communications response performance NE2A series Controller Instruction Execution Cycle Time e NE2A series Controller Peripheral Servicing Cycle Time e DeviceNet Standard I O Communications cycle time e EtherNet IP Tag Data Link RPI Checking the Network Response Performance Check the network response performance of the DeviceNet Standard O Communications and EtherNet IP Tag Data Link based on the formulas and calculation examples in 8 2 2 Calculating the Reaction Time Improving the Network Response Performance If the network response performance exceeds the required specifications re examine the network design taking into consideration the following points so that it satisfies the required specifications e Shortening the communications cycle time will shorten the network response time Shortening the communications cycle time however nar rows the bandwidth that can be used for other connections e When a DeviceNet network is being used the baud rate can be acceler ated Take note of the maximum length of the network and the type of cabl
406. herNet IP EtherNet IP EtherNet IP DeviceNet DeviceNet DeviceNet 12 3 1 Setting IP Addresses IP addresses that consist of a network ID and host ID are used on an Ethernet network to uniquely identify devices and perform mutual confirmation For details refer to 5 2 3 EtherNet IP Communications Any of the following methods can be used to set the IP address for an EtherNet IP Unit e Set the IP address with the IP address setting switches e Set the IP address from the Network Configurator e Set the IP address using BOOTP If an IP address is changed an error for incorrect operation of the rotary switches after startup will occur in the EtherNet IP Unit and C8 will be dis played on the 7 segment display You must perform the procedure to change the IP address in the configuration data given in Changing Device Addresses on page 289 and download settings so that the IP address setting on the EtherNet IP Unit and the IP address in the configuration data are the same Setting the IP Address with the IP Address Setting Switches If the IP address setting switches are set to 01 to FE the EtherNet IP Unit cre ates the IP address using the network ID set from the Network Configurator and the IP address setting switches If the network ID has not been set from the Network Configurator operation will be performed with the default ID 192 168 250 The following IP address will thus be used be used IP address 192 1
407. hes Procedure 1 2 3 1 Select the device in the Network Configurator and select Change Node Address from the Device Menu You can also right click the device in the Network Configurator and select Change Node Address The Change Node Address Dialog Box will be displayed Change Node Address New Node Address E gt Setup Range 0 15 OK Cancel 2 Change the node address and click the OK button Note A node address duplication error will occur if the node address is the same as one used for another node If this error occurs communications will not start 11 3 3 Adding Devices to a Network There are three ways to add devices to a virtual network e Adding a device from the Hardware List Pane Refer to Adding Devices from the Hardware List below e Obtaining the network configuration from the actual network Refer to 17 3 2 Uploading Device Parameters 246 DeviceNet Network Settings Section 11 3 e Selecting Add to Network from the EDS File Menu Adding Devices from the Hardware List Use the following procedure to add a device from the Hardware List Pane to the virtual network Procedure Double click the device in the Hardware List Pane and drag it to the Network Configuration Pane The following display will appear when the device is registered Untitled Network Configurator File Edit View Network Device EDSFile Tools Option Help Da a K aa A E Network Configurator S
408. hing micro loads of 4 mA at 24 VDC Other control device Evaluate whether the device is appropriate for the required safety category Note Do not use a cable that is longer than 3 m for the power supply Be sure to separate I O cables from high voltage and power lines e Use I O cables of 100 m or less e Do not apply power to the output terminals Doing so may result in prod uct damage or burning 153 Safety Output Functions Section 6 3 6 3 4 Dual Channel Channel Mode Setting The NE2A SOD4 1 Safety Output Unit can use Safety Outputs in a Dual Channel Mode The following actions can be performed if a Dual Channel Mode is set An error will occur if the two outputs from the user program are not equiv alent e If an error is detected in either of the two output terminals the outputs to the external devices are both turned OFF Channel mode Single Channel The Safety Output terminals are used as independent Safety Out puts Dual Channel The Safety Output terminals are used as a Dual Channel Safety Output pair The output will turn ON if the paired Safety Output is normal Outputting the Status of the Output Variables to the Safety Output Terminals The status of the output variable is output to the Safety Output terminals according to the channel mode as shown in the following tables Dual channel Output variable Signal from Meaning of status channel mode output safety
409. ho Beoister_ New Variable Name Diset Type Size Click the Register Button The data will be displayed in the list of regis tered data Edit Target 1 0 EtherNet IP Name InputAssemblyO Data Sa Variable 3 Gu Status H S General Status H Error Status H Safety Connection Normal Status H Safety Connection Error Status Fault Present a ae Remote Standard 1 0 Register New Variable Name Offset Type Size CA General Status 0000 WORD 2 Byte The total size and the number of registrations will be updated Select the data to unregister from the list of registered data Using an NE2A series Controller as a Standard Slave Section 12 7 Edit Target 1 0 EtherNet IP Name InputAssembly0 Data B Hy Variable S Status 4 General Status H 4 Error Status H 4 Safety Connection Normal Status H Safety Connection Error Status E Fault Present E da Remote Standard 1 0 ar pm Register Unregister New Variable Name Offset Type Size EF General Status 0000 WORD 2 Byte Select the data fee ee A E Safety Connection 0004 BYTE 24 24 Byte to unregister 2 Click the Unregister Button The data will be unregistered and deleted from the list of registered data Edit Target 1 0 EtherMet IP Name InputAssembly0 Data E3 EA Variable Sh Status H E General Status 4 Error Status H 43 Safety Connection Normal Status B E Safety Connection Error Status Fault
410. ht click the NE2A SCPU01 device and select Parameters Edit from the menu Or you can double click the NE2A SCPUO1 device The Edit Device Parameters Dialog Box will be displayed 249 Communications between an NE2A series Controller and a Safety Slave Section 11 4 Stews LD Mevcetet Tagel 1 0 ENHA vO un Communion Ur Mode Cpcie Te Extend Mode Loge Salety Cormectcny Seley Swen A Coneis VD lt has abocausn Regue Daves l Product Nare zal Re Tyee Sat Browse Network Button 3 Click the Browse Network Button S The Browse Network Dialog Box will be displayed Sem 4 devoe thal pu ruki he W careu E TU ME JA DNS T J Darcia T A no DSTLMMRSLA C mm DST MDIESE 1 3 NEZA DHS S F voia Safety Slaves PSTL 6 an osti umiest 1 4 Selectthe Safety Slave and click the OK Button The Safety Slave will be displayed in the Register Device List Area on the Safety Connections Tab Page in the Edit Device Parameter Dialog Box Edit Device Parametets ea Slave l 0 DeviceNet Target 1 0 EtherNet IP 1 0 Unit Communication Unit Mode Cycle Time Extend Mode Logic Safety Connections Safety Slave 1 0 IAO DSTHD 1281 Safety Slave name 3 1 Sw Safety InputAs 10ms 35ms In 2 Byte jos sae Sep ee ee io assembly name a connection The registered Safety Slaves are displayed The following information is displayed in the list of registered devices Description Product Name T
411. iables themselves This greatly improves reusability of programming When actually programming variables can be automatically defined by using the same procedure as with the NE1A series Controllers allowing direct manipulation of I O terminals NE1A series I O tags NE 2A series variables Name in the Program Editor I O tags Input variables output variables and internal variables J ump addresses Internal variables Using remote 1 0 An I O tag cannot be used unless Programming can be performed with the connection settings are made the input variables or output vari first ables defined first Remote I O can be assigned afterward Effect when a connection assigned O tags in the program are deleted The input variable or output variable to remote I O in operation is deleted will be assigned and not defined but there is no direct effect on the pro gram Effect when the name I O comment The I O tag name in the program will The variable name is not automati of a local I O terminal or remote I O be automatically changed cally changed It must be changed terminal in operation is changed by the user Relation between I O Tags and the Program in the NE 1A series Controller NE1A Local 1 0 Program Local input terminal Local output terminal Function Block DST1 Status Status Assembly 1 Local input terminal Status Local output terminal
412. iables will be selected In the Watch Window all registered variables will be selected Move Upward Moves the selected section up in the Project Window Moves the selected variable up in the Variable Window Move Down Moves the selected section down in the Project Window ward Moves the selected variable down in the Variable Window 356 Logic Editor Functions Section 15 3 Description Toolbar Offline Online icon Displays a search dialog box will be displayed The following items can be searched for in the Program Window Function block names Variable names 1 O names terminal names Comments The following items can be searched for in the Variable Window Variable names 1 O names terminal names Find Next Moves to the next item that matches the search conditions Find Prev Moves the previous item that matches the search conditions Replace Replaces the item that matches the search conditions The following items can be replaced in the Program Window Variable names Function blocks The following items can be replaced in the Variable Window Variable names View Menu Description Toolbar Offline Online icon Project Displays or hides the Project Window Output Displays or hides the Output Window Function Displays or hides the Function Blocks Window Blocks Variables Displays or hides the Variables Window 4 ad a 1 0 Tag List Displays
413. ications have not been started Change the NE2A series CPU Unit s operating mode to RUN mode 539 Connection Status Tables Section 19 6 540 SECTION 20 Inspections and Maintenance This section describes the inspections and maintenance that are required to ensure proper operation of a NE2A series Safety Network Controller system 20 1 Inspections teer cued beet gh ached ede teed ede eda eee 542 20 2 NE2A series Unit Replacement Precautions 0004 543 541 Inspections 20 1 Inspections Periodic Inspection Points Source power supply Section 20 1 Daily or periodic inspections are required in order to maintain the NE2A series Controller functions in peak operating condition e Confirm that the NE2A series Controller is being used within the specifi cations e Confirm that the NE2A series Controller is mounted and wired correctly e Check the safety functions in order to maintain their operating reliability at a constant level e Use the error log to check for non fatal errors Inspection Check for voltage fluctu ations at the power sup ply terminals Criteria The voltage must be within the allowable voltage fluctuation range Refer to SECTION 3 Action Use a voltage tester to check the power supply at the terminals Take necessary steps to bring voltage fluctuations within limits I O power sup ply Check for voltage fluctu ations atthe I O termi na
414. ice Parameters Slave 1 0 DeviceNet Target 1 0 EtherNet IP 170 Unit Communication Unit Mode Cycle Time Extend Mode Logic Safety Connections Safety Slave 1 0 Connections 2 160 zl v Auto allocation Pegin Device Lis Select the name of Product Name EPI factic the 1 0 assembly 01 DST11D12SL 1 DeviceNet_1 Ft Safety Input Assembly 1 10ms 35ms In Ga Safety Input Assembly 2 10ms 365ms In Click the Delete Button A dialog box will be displayed to confirm the deletion Communications between an NE2A series Controller and a Safety Slave Section 11 4 Network Configuraton 1 Connection Safety Input Assembly will be deleted OK Yes No Editing Connections Procedure 1 2 3 3 Click the Yes Button The selected connection will be deleted Edit Device Parameters Slave 1 0 DeviceNet Target 1 0 EtherNet IP 40 Unit Communication Unit Mode Cycle Time Extend Mode Logic Safety Connections Safety Slave 40 C 180 c a faty In wat Safety Input Assembly 1 is deleted Register Device List Product Name EPI ai Tye 01 DST11D125L41 DeviceNet 1 1 Selectthe name of the I O assembly to be edited from the Register Device List Area on the Safety Connections Tab Page in the Edit Device Parame ters Dialog Box Edit Device Parameters Slave 1 0 DeviceNet Target 1 0 EtherNet IP 40 Unit Communication Unit 1 Mode Cycle Time ExtendMode L
415. ice connected to the network though DeviceNet Unit with unit number 15 all hyphens will be displayed to indicate the CPU Unit 4 hyphens will be displayed if no detail code is used 495 Troubleshooting CPU Unit Errors Error Categories Section 19 2 When an error occurs in the NE2A series Controller operation may be stopped or continued NE2A series Controller errors can be categorized into the following three categories Error category Description Non fatal Errors The part where an error has occurred is stopped at each local I O bit or Safety I O connection and placed in the safe state The NE2A series Controller continues in RUN Mode Abort Errors A non fatal error such as a CPU Unit configuration mismatch has occurred The safety functions will go into the following safe States The user logic program will be stopped Local Safety Outputs will be turned OFF CIP Safety I O Communications will be stopped In addition Standard I O Communications will stop for Communi cations Units mounted to the CPU Unit and only message com munications will be enabled Critical Errors A fatal error such as hardware failure or assert error has occurred The safety functions will go into the following safe States The user logic program will be stopped Local Safety Outputs will be turned OFF CIP Safety I O Communications will be stopped In addition Standar
416. ies Controller is started or stopped Check the operating status using the MS indicator 462 SECTION 18 Checking the System Operating Status This section describes how to check the current operating status of a NE2A series Safety Network Controller system 18 1 Monitoring Programs and Force setting resetting Variables 464 18 1 1 Monitoring Programs 00 0 0 eee eee eee 464 18 1 2 Watching Variables 0 0 0 0 e eee eee eee 464 18 1 3 Force setting resetting Variables 0000 466 18 2 Monitoring Device Status in Maintenance Mode 470 18 2 1 Displaying Safety Device Status 0 0000 470 18 2 2 Monitoring Device Status 0 00 0 00 00 00 e eee 471 18 2 3 Overall Status and Error Status Monitor 473 18 2 4 Monitoring Safety Connections 000 474 18 2 5 Monitoring the Error History 00000 475 18 2 6 Monitoring Local I O Status 00 0200 0000 477 18 2 7 Monitoring the Operation Log 0 00 0 0000 478 18 2 8 Manufacturing Information Monitor 479 18 3 Monitoring DeviceNet Units 00 0 0 e eee eee eee 480 18 3 1 Monitoring DeviceNet Units 0 0000 480 18 3 2 Unit Status Tab Page cee eee eee 482 18 3 3 Communications Cycle Time Tab Page 484 18 3 4 Error Histor
417. if it is different from the network configuration Operation continues for the next device C1 02 Error Occurred on Communications A mode change or configuration restoration cannot be exe path cuted because an error occurred in the Communications Unit mounted or in a device that forms the communications path See note Check the status of the Communications Unit If an error has occurred resetit and execute the operation again Operation continues for the next device C2 01 Vendor ID Error A mode change or configuration restoration cannot be exe cuted because the vendor ID of the Target device does not match See note Target node address Check the Target device Alternatively check the operation rights file and recreate itif itis different from the network con figuration Operation continues for the next device C2 02 Device Type Error A mode change or configuration restoration cannot be exe cuted because the Target device type does not match See Target node ner address Check the Target device Alternatively check the operation rights file and recreate it if itis different from the network con figuration Operation continues for the next device C2 03 Product Code Error A mode change or configuration restoration cannot be exe cuted because the device product code does not match See te Target node ners 7 address Check the Target device Alternatively check the operation rights file and recre
418. ified when Force Mode is started or restarted The upper limit of the time is 24 hours The NE 2A series Controller will end Force Mode and enter IDLE Mode in Nor mal Mode when the specified duration time elapses Take sufficient safety measures because variables that have been force set or force reset will change to reflect the actual I O status when the specified time elapses You can end Force Mode in the following three ways Ending Force Mode with the Network Configurator e The NE2A series Controller moves to IDLE Mode in Normal Mode when Force Mode is ended Elapse of Force Mode Duration Time The NE2A series Controller will enter IDLE Mode in Normal Mode when the specified duration time elapses if the Force Mode time is monitored Changing the NE 2A series Controller to a Mode Other Than IDLE or RUN Mode 466 When you perform a download or reset operation turn OFF the power supply or change the node address switches the NE 2A series Controller will move to the CONFIGURING Mode and the Force Mode will be cancelled The Force Mode will continue however if a change is made between IDLE Mode and RUN Mode Monitoring Programs and Force setting resetting Variables Section 18 1 Force Mode at Startup If the power supply is turned OFF while the NE2A series Controller is in Force Mode the Controller will start the next time in Normal Mode Start the Force Mode again if required Procedure and Windows m Starting Fo
419. ill operate with the following default values IP address 192 168 250 Node_address Subnet mask 255 255 255 0 class C mask Default gateway None IP routing disabled Preferred DNS server None Alternate DNS server None Hostname None Domain name None Baud rate Auto detect 98 Communications Specifications for NE2A series Controllers Section 5 2 IP Address Subnet Mask Default Gateway Set the EtherNet IP Unit s local IP address The default IP address is deter mined by the following formula Default IP address 192 168 250 IP address setting switch value The IP address setting switch value is set with the EtherNet IP Unit front rotary switches Refer to 3 7 3 Switches for how to set the IP address using the rotary switch When the NE2A ENS21 EtherNet IP Unit is mounted to an NE2A series CPU Unit and the IP address is not set from the Network Configurator the EtherNet IP Unit will operate with the default IP address All bits corresponding to the bits in the IP address used as either the network number or the subnet number are set to 1 and the bits corresponding to the host number are turned OFF If no subnet mask is set or if an illegal value is set the following values will be used depending on the IP address class Class Subnet mask 255 0 0 0 255 255 0 0 255 255 255 0 With the default setting 0 0 0 0 a subnet mask corresponding to the IP address class is used Sets th
420. imit switch It is possible to set function tests that com ply with safety category 2 NE1A compatible Two Hand Controller Two Hand Con troller Monitors Two hand Switch status according to EN 574 NE1A compatible User Mode Switch User Mode Switch Monitor ing Monitors the operating mode switch for the user system or device NE1A compatible Redundant Input General pur pose 2 input Switch Monitor ing General purpose monitoring of 2 input signals equivalent to monitoring a light curtain NEW Single Beam Safety Sen sor Single Beam Safety Sensor Monitoring Monitors the input signal of a Single beam Safety Sensor Non Contact Door Switch Non Contact Door Switch Monitoring Monitors an OMRON Non contact Door Switch D40A Fun Safety Mat Safety Mat Mon itoring Monitors a safety mat ction Blocks for Reset and Restart Function Block Abbreviation Reset Name Reset Description Output is not made active as long as the function block is not reset even if the relevant output conditions are satisfied Compatibility NE1A compatible Restart ction Blocks for Connectors Restart Function Block Abbreviation Multi Connec tor Name Multiconnector The specifications are the same as for reset function block The icon is different Description Outputs input signals 8 max to output signals NE1A compatible
421. in Protection Mode Network Configurator r Since the password was wrong the specified file was opened as protection mode Some Network Configurator operations are restricted in Protection Mode For details on the Protection Mode refer to 9 5 4 Protection Mode If the password is not correct when making an addition to the current network configuration an error will occur and the addition will not be allowed i Message Code Date Description E ERR 0100 2008 08 08 10 02 17 Since the password was wrong the specified file was not added into the current document Ready LiDeviceNet T Unknown OMRO TOOLBUS J2 CPUxx 115200 Bit s Off line Changing the Password A password that has been set for a network configuration file can be changed by selecting Change Password from the File Menu to display the Change Password Dialog Box 215 Saving and Reading Network Configuration Files Section 9 5 Change Password for Eng_O80808_01 EJ Curent Password New Password Confirm of the New Password After the password has been changed the file must be saved in order to save the new password 9 5 4 Protection Mode 216 If the password is not correct when opening a network configuration file the Network Configurator will open the file in Protection Mode If the password is incorrect the following message will be displayed in a mes sage box and in the Message Report Pane Message Box Network Configurator r Si
422. increased by adding I O Units This makes it possible to build a system with the optimum number of I O points An individual Unit can be replaced without removing the base block from the DIN Track or changing the wiring SECTION 6 16 1 Safety Input device diagno sis The following errors can be detected by diagnosis of input circuits and of externally connected devices using test pulses from output terminals Input circuit errors externally connected device errors input terminal test pulse errors test output terminal overcurrent detection and test output terminal output ON errors Safety Output device diag nosis The Controller has Safety Output functions The following errors are detected by the overcurrent detection function and the short circuit detec tion function based on test pulse outputs when outputs turn ON Overcurrent detection short circuit detection output errors short circuit ing with 24 V or between output terminals Dual channel evaluation If an error occurs on one side between two related local inputs or two local outputs the two inputs or two outputs will go into the safe state with out depending on the user program Input ON delay and OFF delay Influence from chattering and external noise can be reduced by setting the input time constant for inputs to 0 1 2 4 8 16 32 64 128 256 512 or 1 024 ms Functions Function Safety Logic Programming Section 1 3
423. ing and force resetting 71 force setting resetting 466 Index forgotten passwords 159 function block settings 379 function blocks 84 88 G general precautions xx general status 124 Get from the actual network Button 233 246 glossary 547 GMRP 137 H Hardware List Pane 218 help menu 228 Hide busy variables Check Box 391 host ID 287 T O assembly 255 T O assembly name 263 T O connections 255 T O specifications 58 63 T O Tag List Window 369 VO tags 77 377 T O terminals 59 I O Unit Tab Page 333 342 ID allocation 105 IDLE 68 Idle 236 IDLE Mode 68 IGMP client 98 IGMP snooping 137 Import 217 400 Import Network Configuration Dialog Box 217 importing 83 importing NE1A series programs 400 importing NE1A series user defined function blocks 400 importing user defined function blocks 396 importing variables 372 indicators 35 INITIALIZING 68 INITIALIZING Mode 68 551 Input Bits Dialog Box 339 input channel mode 141 inspections 542 installation direction 409 installation in control panel 408 installation position 408 installing 195 instruction execution cycle time 181 311 internal variables 381 IP address 98 IP address display 53 IP address switch 54 L laws and regulations xxi library folder 397 list of data that can be registered 263 list of registered devices 250 local I O 78 lock mark 452 locking 162 locking
424. ing the change open the Logic Editor and check the program 11 4 2 Setting Safety Connection Parameters This section describes how set Safety Connection parameters Make the settings in the dialog box to register the connection to the device 254 Communications between an NE2A series Controller and a Safety Slave Section 11 4 01 DSTI 101251 1 DeviceNet_1 Edit Connection 1 0 Connection Name GEVENUnRM ecru am v 140 Type In 40 Size 2 Byte Open Type Configure the safety slave Check the Safety Signature Open only 5 Multi cast connection O Single cast connection Packel Interval EPI Advanced Value 10 ms Reaction Time 64 ms OK J Cancel 1 0 Connections Select the I O assembly to use from among the I O assemblies for the Safety Slave to communicate with The I O assemblies that can be selected depend on the type of Safety Slave Used to select the I O assembly to be used The 1 0 type input or output of the I O assembly is displayed The I O size of the I O assembly is displayed Note Set the I O assembly on the Safety Target I O Tab Page to use the Safety Slave in the NE2A series Controller Refer to 11 5 Using the NE2A series Controller as a Safety Slave Open Type Select the open type to use when the NE2A series Controller establishes a connection with a Safety Slave For details refer to 5 4 2 Setting Safety Connections Note 1 Do not select the Configu
425. ing used The number of function blocks in use is dis played before the slash which is followed by the maximum number of usable function blocks 1 600 1 0 Variables Shows the number of I O variables that have been created The number of I O variables that has been created is displayed before the slash followed by the maximum number of usable variables 2 048 Internal Vari Shows the number of internal variables that have been created ables The number of internal variables that have been created is dis played before the slash followed by the maximum number of usable variables 1 024 Program Size Displays the program size in bytes The current program size is dis played before the slash which is followed by the maximum program size 512 000 bytes 15 3 2 Logic Editor Menus This section gives the names and purposes of the menu commands of the Logic Editor 355 Logic Editor Functions Section 15 3 File Menu Description Toolbar Offline Online icon User Func Save Saves a user defined function block that is being edited to a tion Block file Read Reads a user defined function block from the system folder into the project Import Imports a user defined function block file ufb into the project Export Exports a user defined user block as a file ufb NE1A Logic File Imports a program that was created for the NE1A and then exported led file NE1A Function Imports a
426. intain a NE2A series Safety Network Controller 7 1 Access Control with Passwords 00 e eee eee 158 7 1 1 Project File Password 0 0 0 cee ee eee 158 7 1 2 Parameter Passwords 00 0 0 E EA E ee eee 158 7 1 3 Device Password 1 00 0 eects 158 7 1 4 User defined Function Block Passwords 159 7 1 5 Forgotten Passwords 0 0 0 cee eee eee eee 159 7 2 Operation and Maintenance Using a Memory Card 161 T2241 Applications ropie yy tk pes das eh ie hehe Ha Pen Bt 161 7 2 2 Downloading Parameters and Locking the Configuration 161 7 2 3 Changing the Operating Mode 0000 164 7 3 Examples of Security According to Roles 00000 166 157 Access Control with Passwords Section 7 1 7 1 Access Control with Passwords The NE2A System provides security to protect the user system and user assets from unintentional changes and access Access to the following items can be controlled by setting passwords e Project files e Parameters includes programming Devices e User defined function blocks By using security and a Memory Card see 7 2 Operation and Maintenance Using a Memory Card detailed security settings can be made that are suit able to the role of the NE2A series Controller 7 1 1 Project File Password A password can be set for a project file to prevent unintentional changes Operations That Require a P
427. ion Available Hard Disk Space The Network Configurator can be installed on the hard disk only At least 200 MB of hard disk space is required Make sure that there is enough space available E Windows Environment and Installation Folder Note Installation Precautions Installation Procedure 1 2 3 Note The Network Configurator is a software application for a Windows operating environment The software is installed on top of Windows Make sure that Windows is installed and functioning correctly on the computer Also make sure that you are logged onto the computer as a user with administrator rights With version 3 3L or higher if Network Configurator version 3 has already been installed from a different package such as the CX One then the previ ous installation is updated e If Network Configurator version 3 has already been installed from a differ ent package such as the CX One then the previous installation is updated Files will be installed in the same folder as the one used by the previous package to upgrade functionality e If you install the software again from the CX One after installing the Net work Configurator installation of Network Configurator for EtherNet IP will overwrite some of the files As a result some problems will occur e g some devices will not be displayed in the Hardware List Pane These problems can be solved by applying a patch Execute the Utility CX One_Update
428. ion CLS Line03 S Line02 BJ User Fuention Blocks 7 ApplicationO1 Mooda function block 2 Select Add to Library from the Library Menu or drag and drop the user defined function block or section to the Library Window The Register Library Item Dialog Box will be displayed i Parts Intarmatior Name SafetyDevice2 Description Author Company Version Registerto Library oK Cancel 397 Creating and Reusing Program Objects Section 15 9 3 Setthe parameters and click the OK Button The parameter settings are described in the following table Name Sets the user defined function block Description Sets a description Author Sets the author s name Company Sets the company name of the author Version Sets the version of the user defined function block Register to Sets where to register the user defined function block 4 The Activation Key Dialog Box will be displayed if a user defined function block is used Enter the activation key and then click the OK Button Activation Key i Activation Key EREEA E 4 It necessary to import The user defined function block or section will be added to the library ob jects in the Library Window The user defined function block or section will also be created in the specified folder Distribute this file as the program object Note 1 The project file nvf file and user defined function block file ud
429. ion Block Name User function block Lib_UFB Section Section Input Output cour Input z Output OK Cancel l 2 Setthe user function block name section name the number of inputs and the number of outputs The displayed numbers of inputs and outputs will change according to the inputs and outputs that are added to or deleted from the user defined function block 3 Click the OK Button The Set Password Dialog Box will be displayed 4 Setthe password for editing and the password for browsing and then click the OK Button The user defined function block will be added to the User Function Blocks Folder in the Project Window Note 1 Each password can be set using up to 16 alphanumeric characters The following characters cannot be used in names of user defined function blocks lt gt amp 2 If the OK Button is clicked without setting a password no password will be set i e no password will be required for editing or browsing 5 Create the program Select the section for the user defined function block and create the pro gram using the same procedure as in 15 6 Creating Programs If required add variables and create sections and folders The Program WIndow of the user defined function block will turn gray 6 Save the user defined function block Select User Function Block Save from the File Menu If a user defined function block used in the program is edited the user de fined function block
430. ion Time The network reaction time for Safety I O Communications is not the same as the time required for normal communications The network reaction time takes into consideration communications delays that can occur on the network The network reaction time is calculated as follows The network reaction time between NE2A series Controllers for a remote input to a remote output via multiple networks refer to Elements of the Reaction Time above is as follows EPI x 5 The reaction time for other configurations is as follows EPI x 2 Periph eral servicing cycle time x 3 Note If an output from a function block is fed back to the input side of the same function block the instruction cycle time of the NE2A series Controller must be added to the reaction time for the safety chain Z N WARNING confirm that the reaction time calculated for each safety chain satisfies the Serious injury may possibly occur due to loss of required safety functions Always required specifications S 173 Calculating Safety Response Performance Section 8 2 Reaction Time Calculation Examples Example 1 Remote Input NE 2A series Controller Output 174 Instruction execution cycle time 7 ms Peripheral servicing cycle time 14 ms aa Actuator monnngonnnnnnp 2 m N gt DeviceNet LLELLLCLLLELLELITIT DST1 seties Safety 1 0 Terminals i Safety Connection EPI 15 ms s Network reaction time 72 ms Switch
431. ion or double insulation e The output retention time must be 20 ms or longer e They must be SELV power supplies in compliance with IEC EN 60950 1 and EN 50178 5 NE2A series products complying with EC Directives also conform to the Common Emission Standard EN61000 6 4 Radiated emission charac teristics 10 m regulations may vary depending on the configuration of the control panel used other devices connected to the control panel wiring and other conditions You must therefore confirm that the overall machine or equipment complies with EC Directives xxvii Conformance to EC Directives xxviii SECTION 1 About NE2A series Safety Network Controllers This section introduces the NE2A series Safety Network Controllers Tal COVERVICW eei igh Meola ses eA ale Ba AS nena a5 etek led ee es 2 1 1 1 About NE2A series Safety Network Controllers 2 1 1 2 About the Network Configurator 000 3 T22 Features 33 fine ha ea initia AOE Bh ee CR ERS Oe Oe BLES 4 I3 FUNCUONSs onere st ee ed bbe ee bbe ee ee eee eta 6 1 4 Preparations for Operation 0 0 eee eee 9 1 4 1 General Steps for Safety Control System Configuration 9 1 4 2 Steps in Building an NE2A series System 10 Overview Section 1 1 1 1 Overview 1 1 1 About NE 2A series Safety Network Controllers The NE2A series Safety Network Controllers control Safety Devices such as emergency stop switches
432. ions between an NE2A series Controller and a Safety Slave Section 11 4 11 4 Communications between an NE2A series Controller and a Safety Slave This section described how to make settings to perform communications with a Safety Slave using an NE2A series Controller as a Safety Master in a DeviceNet network To operate the NE 2A series Controller as a Safety Master register the device that is to operate as a Safety Slave and set the connection 11 4 1 Registering Safety Slaves Register the Safety Slave to communicate with and set the connection Refer to 11 3 DeviceNet Network Settings for information on how to build a DeviceNet network This section describes how to seta Safety Connection with a DeviceNet net work that has already been built Refer to 5 4 2 Setting Safety Connections for information on Safety Connections NE2A series Controller Safety Master CS CJ PLC Register the Safety DeviceNet Slave to the NE2A series Controller to be OSE E used as the Safety m i Sss Master Standard Slave gt DSTl series Controller ffa i s Safety Slave Z Pg NE2A series Controller _ 7 Procedure 1 2 3 1 Select the NE2A SCPUO1 to set in the NE2A Backplane Tab Page of the Network Configuration Pane O NE2A_Backplane_1 Q DeviceNet_1 Devicenet_2 a 1 0 NE 2A Ser NE24 DNS21 NE24 DNS21 S T Ea Select the NE2A SCP U01 2 Select Parameters Edit from the Device Menu You can also rig
433. isabled 11 Memory Card confirma tion status A validated Memory Card is inserted A Memory Card is not inserted or the Memory Card has not been validated 12 to 15 Reserved I O Unit input power sup ply voltage error flag 2 Error Status This is the error status of the NE2A series Controllers Description A voltage error occurred or power is OFF There is no error or an I O Unit is not mounted I O Unit output power supply voltage error flag A voltage error occurred or power is OFF There is no error or an I O Unit is not mounted I O Unit terminal error flag An error occurred There is no error or an I O Unit is not mounted Reserved I O Unit error flag An error occurred There is no error or an I O Unit is not mounted Safety I O Communica tions error flag An error occurred A communications error was detected on at least one Safety Master or Safety Slave connection No error occurred or I O communications are not being executed This bitis turned OFF when a connection is not established Standard I O Communi cations error flag An error occurred A communications error was detected on at least one DeviceNet Master DeviceNet Slave or EtherNet IP Tag Data Link connection No error occurred or I O communications are not being executed This bitis turned OFF when a connection is not established Communications Unit
434. isplay Type IP Address for EtherNet IP with BOOTP Setting bE 53 EtherNet IP Safety Units 3 7 3 Switches Section 3 7 Display Example for IP Address 192 168 250 1 300 ms 50 ms 300 ms 50 ms 300 ms 50 ms 300 ms 50 ms dd de d Unit Number Rotary Switch Note IP Address Switches 54 Use this switch to set the unit number of the EtherNet IP Unit Set the unit numbers so that the same unit number is not used for another Communica tions Unit mounted to the same CPU Unit o PE 0 to F Operation will be performed with the set unit number The default setting is 0 Set the switch using a small flat head screwdriver and be careful not to dam age the rotary switch Use these switches to set the node address of EtherNet IP as a hexadecimal number Each EtherNet IP Units is identified by its IP address when there is more than one EtherNet IP Unit connected to an Ethernet network Set a hexadecimal number on the IP address switches so that the same IP address is not used for other Ethernet devices that are connected to the same Ethernet network The IP address can be set from 01 to FE 1 to 254 decimal as long as itis not used by another Ethernet device on the same network Fe POLO x16 x16 EtherNet IP Safety Units Section 3 7 Value Description The IP address set using the Network Configurator will be used Ifa BOOTP startup is set f
435. isplays a list of the 1 0 tags of the selected device able only tags with the specified data type Select the I O tag to assign to the variable The maximum number of variables that can be created are given in the fol lowing table and output variables variables Total points 2 048 Total points 1 024 All BOOL data 2 048 All BOOL data 1 024 All BYTE data 256 1 All BYTE data 128 2 All WORD data 128 1 All WORD data 64 2 All DWORD data 64 1 All DWORD data 32 2 1 2 048 points number of bits 2 1 024 points number of bits The following data types and attributes can be specified for each type of variable Input variable Output variable Internal variable Actual I O alloca Not supported tion Bit comments Supported 367 Creating Variables Target I O and Slave I O Editing Bit Comments 1 2 3 368 Section 15 5 1 Not supported for user defined function blocks When using a variable as a Target I O or a Slave I O select the Use this vari able as a Target I O or slave I O Option A Name EM 0_001 Usage Input Data Type BOOL v 2 E Use this variable as a target 1 0 or slave 1 0 OK Cancel Select the check box The variables that have been created will be displayed in the data list that can be allocated to assembly data in the Edit Safety Target I O Edit Slave I O DeviceNet and Edit Target I O EtherNet IP Dialog Boxes
436. it Connector GR terminal Shield X EIP Unit Power Supply Unit STP Connector GR terminal Shield e When connecting to a switching hub or EtherNet IP Unit securely insert the connectors until they lock Do not lay the cable together with high voltage lines Do not lay the cable near devices that generate noise Do not lay the cable in an environment that is subject to high tempera tures or high humidity Do not use the cable in locations subject to excessive dust or oil mist Connecting the Ethernet Cable Note e Turn OFF the power supply to the NE2A series Controller before connect ing or disconnecting the twisted pair cable e Allow enough space for the bending radius of the twisted pair cable as shown in the following figure 35 mm lt lt _ _ _ gt Haw m m en ee 1 2 3 1 Lay the twisted pair cable 2 Connectthe cable to the switching hub 420 Wiring Section 16 2 3 Connect the twisted pair cable to the connector on the EtherNet IP Unit Be sure to press the connectors at both the switching hub and Ethernet until they lock into place 421 Hardware Settings Section 16 3 16 3 Hardware Settings Refer to SECTION 3 Configuration Unit Specifications and Nomenclature to make the settings with the rotary swi
437. l Size 0 32 Byte Register 0 64 Variables 2 2048 Specify the connection a 2 Make the settings for the input assembly and click the OK Button Refer to 11 5 2 Setting Assembly Data for information on I O assembly da ta Note Up to 8 input assemblies and 8 output assemblies can be registered for a Safety Slave Adding an Output Assembly Procedure 1 2 3 1 Click the New Output Button on the Safety Target I O Tab Page The Edit Safety Target I O Dialog Box will be displayed The subsequent steps are the same as those given above in Adding an In put Assembly Changing I O Assemblies Procedure 1 2 3 1 Selectthe I O assembly to change 2 Click the Edit Button on the Safety Target I O Tab Page The Edit Safety Target I O Dialog box will be displayed 3 Change the I O assembly data and click the OK Button Refer to 11 5 2 Setting Assembly Data for information on changing I O as sembly data Deleting I O Assemblies Procedure 1 2 3 1 Selectthe I O assembly to delete 2 Click the Delete Button on the Safety Target I O Tab Page A dialog box to confirm the deletion will be displayed 262 Using the NE2A series Controller as a Safety Slave Section 11 5 MEXA LogicEditor Input Assembly 1 will be deleted S oK 3 Click the OK Button The I O assembly will be deleted 11 5 2 Setting Assembly Data This section describes how to define data for I O assemblies Edit Safety Target I
438. l Tab Keys E Variables TO Tag List Ea Output ea Watch E Cross Reference sp DSTI ERs CPU ji Select with the Ctrl Tab Keys CPU Example Use the following procedure if you want to switch from a section to perform an operation in the Variable Window 1 2 3 1 Press the Ctrl Tab Keys 2 Press the Ctrl Keys The cursor will move to the icon of the Project Window in the Active Tool Windows Area 3 Press the Ctrl Tab Keys three times 4 Once the cursor is on the Variable Window release the Ctrl Tab Keys You will now be able to operate the shortcut keys in the Variable Window Switching Menus You can switch between the menus and the toolbars by first pressing the F10 Key to set menu group operation and then pressing the Ctrl Tab Keys If you press the Ctrl Tab Keys when the menus are selected the first icon in the toolbar will be selected If the icons are displayed in the above pattern you can move from 1 to 2 to 3 to 4 to 5 and back to 1 by pressing the Ctrl Tab Keys Use the following procedure to select items when a menu is selected e You use the lt or Key to move to different items in the menu e When the J Key is pressed the list of items of the menu is displayed with the cursor on the first item e You can again use the T or J Keys to move the cursor to another item e If menu items are present in a lower level as well you can display the list of items in the
439. l be restarted if the switch setting is reset to its original setting E8 IP Local node address Logic error in configu ration data A recoverable parameter error occurred in the Network Configurator Check the device parameter Normal operation will resume when the Network Configura tor has completed writing the parameters Operates with default settings E9 IP Local node address 0602 No display Memory access error An error occurred when reading writing to the non volatile memory in the Unit A record may not be saved in the error history in some cases If the error recurs after restarting replace the EtherNet IP Unit Non volatile memory writing is ignored and operation con tinues F2 IP Local node address 03D0 No display Ethernet Basic Set tings Error A checksum error or a logic error occurred in the basic Eth erNet settings Download the TCP IP settings from the Network Configura tor Operation will be continued by setting the basic Ethernet settings where the error occurred to default values How ever Safety I O Communications and Standard I O Com munications will be stopped 526 H9 IP Local node address I O bus error An error occurred when data was exchanged with the CPU Unit Review the operating environment of the CPU Unit Safety I O Communications will be stopped The output data of
440. lders can be created Changing the Folder Name The procedure to change the name of a folder is the same as the procedure to change the name of a section Select the folder and then perform the proce dure Project ax NE2A SCPU01 j 3 Section The folder name can be changed S Section2 E Folderi BJ User Fucntion Blocks Note Up to 48 characters 48 bytes max can be used for the folder name The characters that can be input are the same as those that can be input for variables Refer to Variable Specifications on page 80 Copying Pasting Cutting and Deleting You can copy or delete a section or folder Project vw Ax Project vax 2B NBQA GGPUOP 1215 2S NE2A SCPUOI S Initial01 Initial Hee OK Linell z S Linell H F Linot lined A section cannot Sbi wa eeeeneee H S Line03 be p asted to a 5 6 Common S COmmon uaan n ann a Aet 4 OK dread lower level of a Areall2 Areal B User Fuention Blocks 3 BJ User Fuention Blocks use r d efi ned fo Application01 fo Application01 J B Moduall lt No Moduall lt No function block Modual02 S Moduall2 fo Application02 fo Application02 Modual i 4 No S Modualdl lt No amp Modual02 S Modual02 5 Modual03 S Modual03 lt gt lt gt A section can be pasted only within the same project 387 Creating Sections Section 15 7 If the same section name already exists when pasting the section will be reg
441. le The time difference between changes in status of the two Safety Input ter minals called the discrepancy time can be evaluated This is not appli cable to the MAT Dual Channel Mode Channel mode Description Single Channel The Safety Input terminals are used as independent Safety Input terminals Dual Channel Equivalent The Safety Input terminals are used as a dual chan nel equivalent pair Dual Channel Complemen The Safety Input terminals are used as a dual chan tary nel complementary pair MAT The Safety Input terminals are used as Safety Mat Safety Input pair This channel mode can be used for Safety Input terminals Si0 and Sil only Saving Input Status in an Input Variable The status input to the Safety Input terminals is saved in an input variable according to the dual channel mode as shown in the following tables Dual channel Input signal from Input variable Meaning of status channel mode input safety terminal Si x IN x Single Channel Inactive OFF Active ON X 0to3 147 Safety Input Functions Section 6 2 Dual channel Input signals from Input variables Meaning of status channel mode input safety terminals Si n 1 IN n IN n 1 Inactive OFF Discrepant status Discrepant status Active ON Discrepant status Inactive OFF Active ON Discrepant status Dual Channel Equivalent Dual Channel Complementary e olej
442. le Refer to 17 9 2 Checking the Configuration Restore File Confirm that Lo flashes on the seven segment display of the CPU Unit 4 q i l p 4 gt 7i1 Press the SERVICE button for at least 1 s and then release it The address of the lock destination will flash on the display Wa sh bat q When the lock has been completed Lo will be displayed epost le gt i i ee 3 Return the Memory Card DIP switch pin to its original position Pin2 OFF ON_ OFF Turn ON the power again 460 Changing Device Parameters and Operating Modes Using a Memory Card Section 17 9 17 9 4 Changing the Operating Mode Programs can be executed and stopped and operation can be restarted by using the RUN STOP RESTART switch on the NE2A series CPU Unit To use this switch a Memory Card containing the configuration restore file must be inserted into the NE2A series CPU Unit and the configuration restore file must be validated The applicable range when starting and stopping program execution can be set to one of the following ranges in the system setup e Only the NE 2A series Controller with the Memory Card Note The oper ating mode of devices with set connections will not be changed e The NE2A series Controller with the Memory Card and NE1A NEOA series Controllers o
443. lect the devices on which the operations will be performed in the Re store Operation Mode Field and Run Idle Operation Mode Field and then click the OK Button This device only All devices on the network Restore Operation Target the relevant NE 2A Target the safety devices on Setting series Controller and devices the DeviceNet network of the with connections to be set NE2A series Controller with the relevant NE 2A series R efer to 7 2 Operation and Controller Maintenance Using a Memory Note Connections in which Card the NE2A series Controller is the Master RUN IDLE Opera Target the relevant NE2A Target the safety devices on tion Setting series Controller the DeviceNet network of the NE 2A series Controller Next create the configuration restore file for the devices in the targeted range 4 Select Create Configuration Restore File from the Device Menu 5 Specify the file name must be NE2ASystem dat and folder in which to save the configuration restore file in the Create Configuration Restore File Dialog Box and then click the Save Button A dialog box for entering the device password will be displayed Create Configuration Restore File Savein Removable Disk G File name NE2ASystem1 dat Saye SaV as type Configuration Restare File dat Cancel 6 Setthe device password and then click the OK Button A device password must be entered depending on the settings in the Restore O
444. led by the u The errors that occurred while parameters were being downloaded are dis played in the Error Device List Dialog Box for each device Note 1 Refer to SECTION 19 Troubleshooting for details and countermeasures of errors other than those discussed above 2 The time required to download parameters may be longer if the NE 2A se ries Safety Master is in RUN Mode The time required to download pa rameters can be reduced by changing to IDLE Mode 17 3 2 Uploading Device Parameters You can upload parameters in two ways uploading from the selected device and uploading from the entire network Parameters can be uploaded only when the Network Configurator is connected online You can perform this operation only for devices present in a network for which the Connected Network Identifier is either blue or green when the Network Configurator is connected to the network This does not include when an NEOA series Controller NELA SCPUO1 CPU Unit Pre Ver 1 0 NE1A SCPU01 V1 CPU Unit or NE1A SCPU02 CPU Unit is connected to a USB port Note If there is a CS CJ series DeviceNet Unit on a network upload parameters after stopping the Master in the CS CJ series DeviceNet Unit or stopping 1 0 communications from the Monitor Window of the DeviceNet Unit If the I O communications are being performed you may not be able to upload parame ters properly Uploading Parameters from Selected Devices Procedure 1 2 3 1 Sele
445. lled Copying Pasting and Cutting Selected variables can be copied or cut If the same variable name already exists when pasting the variable will be registered as COPY serial number _name If a variable with the same I O tag already exists when pasting the variable will be registered as a non allocated variable 15 5 2 Exporting and Importing Variables Exporting Variables Procedure 1 2 3 The variable data that you have created can be exported and the exported file can be imported into another project You can also export a list of I O tags using Export Tags This is convenient to edit the exported variable file to change I O assignments 1 Select Export Export Variables from the Variables Menu The Export Variables Dialog Box will be displayed 371 Creating Variables Section 15 5 Export Variables Savein LI NE24_DATA ertor_info 2 TEST_HEN E TEST_HENOZ TEST_HENOS i Z TEST HENO4 My Recent Documents Desktop My Documents aI My Computer My Network File name Save as type CSV Format csv Button Specify the name and folder for the file to be exported and click the Save Exporting Tags Procedure 1 2 3 1 Export Tags Select Export Export Tags from the Variables Menu The Export Tags Dialog Box will be displayed Savein lt 9 NE24_DATA TEST_HENO2 csv 3 E TEST_HEND3 csv My Recent TEST_HENO4 csv Documents TE
446. lower level by pressing either the Key or Enter Key e If there are no lower levels and you press the Enter Key on an item the operation for that item will be executed Use the following procedure to select icons if the cursor is on a toolbar e You can move the cursor by pressing the lt or gt Key e If you press the Enter Key the operation for the icon on which the cursor is present will be executed 362 Logic Editor Functions Section 15 3 Enlarging and Shrinking the Program Window The Program Window can be enlarged shrunk or adjusted to the window width to make it easier to view programs that have been created or that are being created Press the Alt lt Keys to reduce the size of the section displayed in the P ro gram Window Press the Alt Keys to increase the size Undoing or Redo an Operation You can undo an operation or redo an operation These are convenient e g when something is deleted accidentally You can press the Ctrl z Keys to undo and the Ctrl y Keys to redo up to 100 operations 363 Creating Program Projects Section 15 4 15 4 Creating Program Projects This section describes how to create and save program projects and set man agement data to program projects 15 4 1 Creating Program Projects When the Logic Editor is started from the Network Configurator it retains the information that was set in the Network Configurator Therefore the Controller model and other information will a
447. lowing dialog box will be displayed Click the Close Button f _ e Kes Update Driver Software OMRON NELA Series Windows has successfully updated your driver software Windows has finished installing the driver software for this device OMRON NELA Series 205 Installing the USB Driver Section 9 3 7 If you are using and NE1A series or NEOA series Controller repeat step 1 2 USB Serial Port will be displayed under Other Devices Perform the in stallation using the procedure in step 2 6 206 Starting and Exiting the Network Configurator Section 9 4 9 4 Starting and Exiting the Network Configurator This section describes how to start and exit the Network Configurator and how to check the version 9 4 1 Starting and Exiting the Network Configurator Starting the Network Configurator Select All Programs OMRON Network Configurator for CIP Safety v3 from the Windows Start Menu The Network Configurator will be started and the Main Window will be displayed Untitled Network Configurator File Edit View Network Device EDSFile Tools Option Help Oa a Be DeviceNet_1 E Network Configurator a S Vendor amp Sj Omron Corporation G DeviceType EtherNet IP Hardware a 2 NE2A_Backplane Hardware Usage of Network Bandwidth of Safety Connections 125K Bits 250K Bits 500K Bit s 0 oz 100 0 oz 100 0 oz 100 x Message Code Date Description LiDevic
448. lp of the Logic Editor Monitoring from the Network Configurator Procedure 1 2 3 1 Select the device whose Status is to be monitored 2 Select Monitor from the Device Menu You can also right click the device and select Monitor from the pop up menu Or you can click the Monitor Device Icon in the toolbar The Monitor Device Dialog Box will be displayed 3 Click the Operation Log List Tab The Operation Log List Tab Page will be displayed Monitor Device Status General Error Status Local 1 0 Status Safety Connection Operation Log List Error History Production Information Detail No detail code No detail code Accumulated Time Result Q 31 days 10 hours 20 31 days 10 hours 17 31 days 10 hours 16 31 days 10 hours 15 Q 31 days 10 hours 13 31 days 10 hours 12 Q 31 days 10 hours 12 31 days 10 hours 12 Operation Success Download parameters Change to RUN Tool Download parameters Reset or Power On Download parameters Set TUNID Reset or Power On Reset or Power On Success Success Success No detail code No detail code Success Success No detail code No detail code Success Success No detail code No detail code 8 Items Update Clear Save Close The displayed items are described in the following table Description Displays the cumulative time when the operation was executed Displays detailed information on the oper
449. lready be set in the Logic Editor project Changing the Project Name The project name can be changed Procedure 1 2 3 1 Select the project in the Project Window 2 Select Rename from the Edit Menu or press the shortcut key and select Rename from the menu You will be able to change the project name in the Project Window Project vw Ax Q NE2A SCPU01 S Section E User Fucntion Blocks Selecta project and change the project name 3 Change the project name and press the Enter Key Note Up to 48 alphanumeric characters 48 bytes can be entered for the project name The characters that can be input are the same as those that can be input for variables Refer to Variable Specifications on page 80 The project name is transferred to the Controller when the configuration is downloaded Saving Projects To save projects that have been created or that are in the creation stage close the Logic Editor and return to the Network Configurator Refer to 9 5 Saving and Reading Network Configuration Files for details sav ing Network Configurator projects 15 4 2 Setting Information in Projects You can set information in the projects that you have created The project information can be printed out Procedure 1 2 3 1 Select Property from the Project Menu You can also selectthe project from the P roject Window press the shortcut key and then select Property from the menus The Property Dialog Box will be displayed 36
450. ls Voltages must be within specifications for each Unit Refer to 3 8 and 3 9 Use a voltage tester to check the power supply at the terminals Take necessary steps to bring voltage fluctuations within limits Ambient envi ronment Check the ambient tem perature Inside the control panel if the Con troller is in a control panel 0 to 55 C Refer to 3 1 Use a thermometer to check the temper ature and ensure that the ambient tem perature remains within the allowed range of 0 to 55 C Check the ambient humidity Inside the control panel if the Con troller is in a control panel Humidity must be 10 to 90 with no condensation Refer to 3 7 Use a hygrometer to check the humidity and ensure that the ambient humidity remains between 10 and 90 Make sure that condensation does not occur due to rapid changes in temperature Check that the Control ler is not in direct sun light Not in direct sunlight Protect the Controller if necessary Check for accumulation of dirt dust salt metal filings etc No accumulation Clean and protect the Controller if neces sary Check for water oil or chemical sprays hitting the Controller No spray on the Con troller Clean and protect the Controller if neces sary Check for corrosive or flammable gases in the area of the Controller No corrosive or flam mable gases Check by smell or use a sensor
451. ls Connections are set for these two communications protocols and they are collectively called CIP Safety Communications CIP Safety Communications is a highly reliable safety communications system with a safety protocol added to the Common Industrial Protocol CIP in the network Specifications Maximum number of connections as a Master 160 Maximum number of connections as a Slave Connection types 32 Single Cast Multicast DeviceN et Safety Unit E As DeviceNet Safety Master Maximum number of connections per Unit 1 0 size per connection E As DeviceNet Safety Slave Maximum number of connections per Unit 1 O size per connection 64 16 bytes 4 1 16 bytes EtherNet IP Safety Unit E As EtherNet IP Safety Master Maximum number of connections per Unit 1 0 size per connection E As EtherNet IP Safety Slave Maximum number of connections per Unit 1 0 size per connection 128 32 bytes 8 32 bytes DeviceNetl O communica tions connec tions DeviceNet Unit E As DeviceNet Master Maximum number of connections per Unit Maximum number of Slaves per Unit 1 0 size per connection Connection types E As DeviceNet Slave Maximum number of connections per Unit 1 0 size per connection 126 63 2 connections per Slave 16 input bytes 16 output bytes Poll Bit strobe COS Cyclic 2 200 input bytes 200 output bytes The setting cannot exceed the maximum I O size of t
452. lticast filter is not used Usage of IP multi Number of times the device s multicast address is used cast address Total usage of IP Number of times the whole network s multicast address is multicast addresses used Network Total of The maximum number of bits processed in 1 second by the Max Mbit s Ethernet port in the network Set Packet Interval Sets all of the Safety Connection EP Is and all of the Tag Data RPI Button Link Connection RPIs Close Button Closes the dialog box Note Performing message communications or other network operations from the Network Configurator such as monitoring or other opera tions that place a load on the network or from the user application when the Tag Data Link bandwidth usage of capacity is between 80 and 100 can create an excessive load on the network and result in timeouts If timeouts occur increase the EPI and RPI set tings or reduce the usage of capacity 3 Click the Set Packet Interval RPI Button in the Usage of Device Band width Dialog Box Set Packet Interval RPI Total usage of IP multicast addresses 0 Network Total of Max Mbit s 0 281 Mbit s The Set Packet Interval RP Dialog Box will be displayed 321 Checking the Communications Response Performance Section 13 3 Set Packet Interval RPI Packet Interval RPI 50 0 ins 0 5 100000 ms Target Device 192 168 250 1 NE24 ENS21 192 168 250 17 N
453. lues sent from the remote communicating devices are updated in the input variables If program execution is started during this inter val the initial input variable values OFF will be input in the program and a logic error e g an EDM feedback error or a NO NC discrepancy error will occur in the function block For that reason the NE2A series Controller sup ports delaying a program execution Program Execution Delay Description Disable The program will be executed without waiting for com Execute the program with munications to start The Slave input signals will not be out waiting for the Safety I updated in the program until communications start O Communications to Input values will be OFF Program operation results start will not be output to the Slaves Enable Waits for all Safety I O Communications to start and Wait for the Safety I O then executes the program The start of program execu Communications to start tion is delayed in comparison to when Disable is before executing the pro selected gram NE 2A series Controller Operation When Program Execution Is Delayed Program execution will be delayed and the NE2A series Controller will be in RUN Mode Therefore the program will not be executed but local I O and Standard Remote I O will be refreshed e Input data will be updated in the internal memory of the NE2A series Con troller e Calculations will not be performed so the output data will
454. ly the cycle time for processing Communica cycle time tions Units DeviceNet Units and EtherNet IP Units and USB communications The peripheral servicing cycle time for the NE2A series Controller is automatically calculated according to the number of Communications Units and the number of connections It is possible for the user to also set the instruction execution cycle time and peripheral servicing cycle time if the values are greater than the values calcu lated automatically by the Network Configurator By setting an extra margin in the values for the instruction execution cycle time and peripheral servicing cycle time that are calculated by the Network Configurator it is possible to maintain a constant response performance i e safety distance to maintain constant cycle times even if the programming parameters or Communications Unit configuration change The following cycle times can be set e Instruction execution cycle time Value calculated by the Network Configurator to 50 ms 0 1 ms incre ments e Peripheral servicing cycle time Value calculated by the Network Configurator to 100 ms 0 1 ms incre ments Calculating the Instruction Execution Cycle Time Complete the program and check the instruction execution cycle time by using the Network Configurator If the program has not been completed create a model program and calculate the instruction execution cycle time from that program Calculating the Periph
455. m a Configuration Lock operation on all of the Safety devices N WARNING Safety functions may be impaired and serious injury may occasionally occur Before operating the system perform user testing to confirm that the configu ration data of all the devices is correct and that they are operating correctly IMPORTANT e After configuring all the devices user testing must be performed to check if the configuration data and device operation of each device are correct User testing is performed to verify the safety signature for each device e The configuration must be locked after the user testing has completed 17 7 2 Locking Configurations When developing a safety control system user tests are performed after veri fying device parameters If the operation of a device is confirmed by user tests it means that the device parameters have been verified by the user To protect the verified parameters of a device from unintentional changes you can lock the configuration Locking the Device Configuration The device configuration can be locked only when the Network Configurator is connected online You can lock the configuration only for a device that has been verified Refer to 17 4 1 Verifying Device Parameters for information of verifying devices Procedure 1 2 3 1 Selectone or more devices in the Network Configuration Pane of the Net work Configurator NE24_Backplane_1 iC DeviceNet_1 a CB 00 0 ee
456. m the Device Menu You can also right click the NE2A SCPU01 device and select Parameters Edit from the menu Or you can double click the NE2A SCPUO1 device The Edit Device Parameters Dialog Box will be displayed Slave 0 Doncahst TAL LAT Ehan UD Una on Unt Browse Network Button 3 Click the Browse Network Button Ste The Browse Network Dialog Box will be displayed Browse Network Select a device that you would like to connect Browse F a 0NE2AENS2 Y EtheNet IP_1 192 168 250 3 NE2A ENS21 2 NE2A_Backplane_2 00 NE2A SCPUO1 Kw Safety Slaves NE2A series Controllers 293 Communications between an NE2A series Controller and a Safety Slave Section 12 4 4 Select the Safety Slave and click the OK Button The Safety Slave will be displayed in the list of registered devices on the Safety Connections Tab Page in the Edit Device Parameter Dialog Box Edit Deyice Panameters Slave 1 0 DeviceNet Target 1 0 EtherNet IP 120 Unit Communication Unit Mode Cycle Time Extend Mode Logic Safety Connections Safety Slave 1 0 4 Ea Kiz TAtto allocation gt ProductName L L a m EPL _ Beactio _ Type Size Safety Slave name i 00 NE24 SCPLIO i Sa Input ssembly1 jOms 50ms o 5 a I O assembly name connection The registered Safety Slaves are displayed The following information is displayed in the list of registered devices the I O assembly used in the set S
457. managing DeviceNet and EtherNet IP networks In addition it enables NE2A series Safety Logic to be easily created using function blocks Setting the System Configuration DeviceNet 1 Safety Slave This example shows the setup for the DeviceNet 1 network for the NE2A 1 Controller The system configuration can be easily designed by selecting devices and Units from lists Network Configurator Safety Slave Safety Controller vty gg e Logic Design The design of logic programming for NE2A series Controllers is created using function blocks Logic can be easily designed by selecting function blocks from lists File Edit View Project Device Editor Variable Library Window Help eh 6 amp x oc 4 oe Sleoaeazoweax aQ BOJ oS ats AB ee7viige DK P Project TER Section1 x A NE2A SCPUOI B Section E User Fucntion Blocks Function Blocks vax 2 Timer Counter amp 1 Counter Off Delay Timer L On Delay Timer 1 Pulse Generator LL UpDown Counter 2 HL Safety Device J E STOP tL EDM AE Enable Switch Eyl 4 Light Curtain Monitoring ES 1 Muting h 1 Non Contact Door Switc Fr u 1 Safety Gate Monitoring 1 Two Hand Controller Type2 Sensor 1 User Mode Switch 2 UL Reset Restart 1 Reset lt gt Features Section 1 2 1 2 Features Applicable to Large scale Systems NE2A series Controllers support EtherNet IP Safety Communications EtherN
458. manual of the relevant Slave for information on the input Slave ON OFF delay and output Slave ON OFF delay Note The I O response time may increase due to noise or other factors Minimum I O Response Time 77 CPU Unit memory updated Eee Gyele Transfer time EtherNet IP RPI Ne NE2A peripheral servicing cycle DeviceNet aS Communications cycle Slave f ON Communications cycle time ON Minimum I O response time Input Slave ON OFF delay DeviceNet 1 communications cycle time NE2A peripheral servicing cycle time x 2 Network delay 3 PLC cycle time DeviceNet 2 communications cycle time Output Slave ON OFF delay 3 If no network delay occurs only the data transmission time is totaled Transmission time No of transmission data bytes 74 x 8 x 0 00001 ms baud rate 100 M s 180 Calculating Cycle Times of NE2A series Controllers Section 8 4 8 4 Calculating Cycle Times of NE2A series Controllers The following three cycle times are used with an NE 2A series Controller Type Description Instruction execution This time is mainly the cycle time for executing programming cycle time The instruction execution cycle time for an NE2A series Con troller is automatically calculated according to the set parame ters and programming Values that are higher than the instruction execution cycle time are used for the ON delay and OFF delay settings Peripheral servicing This time is main
459. mory Card containing the configuration restore file is inserted into the NE2A series CPU Unit and the configuration restore file has been validated Note Only the NE2A series Controllers that are connected to the CPU Unit in which the switch is manipulated can be restarted The Target all devices on the net work option does not apply when restarting Procedure 1 2 3 1 Validate the configuration restore file Refer to 17 9 2 Checking Validity of the Configuration Restore File 2 Usethe RUN STOP RESTART switch on the NE2A series CPU Unitto ex ecute the run stop or restart operation Note Changing the Memory Card DIP switch is not required to change the operat ing mode 461 Changing Device Parameters and Operating Modes Using a Memory Card Has the configuration restore file been validated Validate the configuration restore file Refer to 17 9 2 Checking the Validity of the Configuration Restore File Section 17 9 Manipulate the RUN STOP RESTART switch The Controller enters the specified Operating status End Changing Operating Modes Using the RUN STOP START Switch or the Network Configurator There is no particular order of priority for starting and stopping program exe cution by using the RUN STOP RESTART switch or changing the operating mode by using the Network Configurator Therefore use the RUN indicator to check whether execution of the program in the NE2A ser
460. ms combustion systems railroad systems aviation systems medical equipment amusement machines vehicles safety equipment and installations subject to separate industry or government regulations e Systems machines and equipment that could presenta risk to life or property Please know and observe all prohibitions of use applicable to the products NEVER USE THE PRODUCTS FOR AN APPLICATION INVOLVING SERIOUS RISK TO LIFE OR PROPERTY WITHOUT ENSURING THAT THE SYSTEM AS A WHOLE HAS BEEN DESIGNED TO ADDRESS THE RISKS AND THAT THE OMRON PRODUCTS ARE PROPERLY RATED AND INSTALLED FOR THE INTENDED USE WITHIN THE OVERALL EQUIPMENT OR SYSTEM PROGRAMMABLE PRODUCTS OMRON shall not be responsible for the user s programming of a programmable product or any consequence thereof Xvi Disclaimers CHANGE IN SPECIFICATIONS Product specifications and accessories may be changed at any time based on improvements and other reasons It is our practice to change model numbers when published ratings or features are changed or when significant construction changes are made However some specifications of the products may be changed without any notice When in doubt special model numbers may be assigned to fix or establish key specifications for your application on your request Please consult with your OMRON representative at any time to confirm actual specifications of purchased products DIMENSIONS AND WEIGHTS
461. n nel Violation at Safety Output A logic error was detected between the Safety Output termi nals of a dual channel Check the Safety Output terminal wiring and remove the cause of the error Output OFF from the output terminal after the error latch time has elapsed CPU Unit operation continues At the applicable I O Unit the I O indicators light red for the pair of dual channel terminals where the error occurred P4 01 I O Unit slot number 2070 I O Unit slot number Input PS Voltage Low Power is not supplied to the Input Unit Check the power supply and the wiring CPU Unit operation continues At the applicable I O Unit none of the I O indicators are lit 506 P5 01 I O Unit slot number 2071 I O Unit slot number Output PS Voltage Low Power is not supplied to the Output Unit Check the power supply and the wiring CPU Unit operation continues At the applicable I O Unit none of the I O indicators are lit Troubleshooting CPU Unit Errors Section 19 2 CPU Unit Network Configurator Cause Indi 7 segment Error history Displayed Recovery method cator display message Status after error MS Error Error Saved Detail Detail P6 01 2072 1 0 Power An error was detected during the output shutdown test of the Supply Shut Output U nit I O Unit slot 1 0 Unit slot down Error Check the wiring number number Replace the I O Unit if
462. n communications distance data quantity and response performance Determine the Network Configuration and Address e Determine the configuration based on the communications distance and number of nodes e Determine the network numbers and node addresses based on the network configuration and groups for multicast communications Determine the Baud Rate e Determine the baud rate based on the communications distance and response performance Determine the Connections and Remote O e Determine the remote I O that are required for Safety signals and data that needs to be monitored e Determine the remote devices that are required for remote I O communications e Determine the communications intervals and priorities Determine the Operation after Communications Errors e Determine whether to stop or automatically restart communications after a communications error Communications Specifications for NE2A series Controllers Section 5 2 5 2 Communications Specifications for NE2A series Controllers 5 2 1 Connection Specifications This section describes the connection specifications for NE 2A series Control lers when using DeviceNet communications and EtherNet IP communica CIP Safety Communica tions connec tions NE 2A series Controller totals tions The NE2A series Controllers perform safety communications using the DeviceNet Safety and EtherNet IP Safety protoco
463. n in which no password is set However you must have the current password to reset the device configuration Take ade quate measures so that you do not lose the device passwords Note 1 From the viewpoint of security it is recommended that passwords be set for all devices 2 If you want to set the same password for more than one device you can specify the setting for using the password for all devices Select the Use this password for all device Check Box in the dialog box prompting to in put the device password to use the same password for all devices O NE2A SCPLIOY Select this checkbox Lge this password for all device v4 OK Cancel 17 6 2 Lost Device Passwords If you lose the device password contact your OMRON representative for a recovery key You must provide the following information to obtain the recov ery key You can also use the Password Recovery Tool to acquire the lost password from the device Vendor ID e Serial number e Counter information You can use the recovery key with the Password Recovery Tool to return the device to the default settings in which no password is set Procedure 1 2 3 1 End the Safety Network Support Software from the computer 448 Protecting Device Parameters Section 17 6 2 Select All programs OMRON Network Configurator for CIP Safety Password Recovery Tool from the Windows Start Menu The Connect Device Dialog Box will be displayed Connect Devi
464. n input ON delay and OFF delay can be set between 0 and 1 024 ms for each input terminal This helps prevent the effect of chattering from external devices connected to the Safety Input terminals The effect of chattering from external devices can be reduced more by increasing the delay value but this will slow the response to input signals The response will be faster if the delay value is made smaller but this will increase the effect of chattering Limit switch or other input i l 1 1 1 1 i I O tag i i l l ON delay OFF delay Note Delays will affect the safety response time and safety distance calculations Be sure to add both the input ON delay and OFF delay to the I O response performance 6 2 6 Error Handling Operation on Error Detection Operation in Single Channel Mode The following actions are performed if an error is detected during self diagno sis e The variable corresponding to Safety Input for which an error has been detected is made inactive e The indicator of the Safety Input with the error lights red e The error appears in the error history The NE 2A series Controller continues to operate Operation in a Dual Channel Mode The following actions are performed if a discrepancy error is detected e The variables corresponding to Safety Inputs for which an error has been detected are made inactive e The indicators of both the Safety Input terminals with the error light red or go out
465. n restarts The EtherNet IP Unit saves the following settings in nonvolatile memory inside the Unit Once these settings have been made they are not cleared when the power Supply is cycled To clear these settings and return them to the default values select the Return to the out of box configuration and then emulate cycling power Option when resetting Refer to 17 8 Resetting Devices for the procedure Default Set when Description setting Device parameter Notcon Parameters are These parameters are set by the figured downloaded user TCP IP settings Default When the set IP address and subnet mask values tings are made in the Unit using the Setup TCP IP Configura tion Menu Com mand 1 Refer to 5 2 3 EtherNet IP Communications 1 When using the Return to the out of box configuration and then emulate cycling power O ption to reset the CPU Unit use the same option to reset the Communications Unit 2 Do not use the Return to the out of box configuration and then emulate cycling power Option to reset only the Communications Unit A fatal error abort will occur in the CPU Unit Setting the Operation for Resetting and Starting Section 4 2 4 2 2 Setting NE2A series Operation at Startup Setting the Program Execution Delay When the NE2A series Controller is started or when the mode is changed it takes time from when the valid input values via Safety I O Communications i e the input va
466. n the power is turned OFF and error that are saved in the RAM and are deleted when the power is turned OFF For details on errors of the NE2A series Controller refer to SECTION 19 Trou bleshooting For details on the error history monitor for NE2A series DeviceNet Units and EtherNet Units refer to 18 3 Monitoring DeviceNet Units and 18 4 Monitoring EtherNet IP Units For details on NE1A NEOA and DST series Controllers refer to the user s manual of the Controller 475 Monitoring Device Status in Maintenance Mode Section 18 2 Monitoring from the Network Configurator Procedure 1 2 3 1 Select the device whose status is to be monitored 2 Select Monitor from the Device Menu You can also right click the device and select Monitor from the pop up menu Or you can click the Monitor Device Icon 3 in the toolbar The Monitor Device Dialog Box will be displayed 3 Click the Error History Tab The Error History Tab Page will be displayed Monitor Device Local 1 0 Status Operation Log List Production Information Status General Error Status Safety Connection Error History Time of Error Error Information Detailed Information Content Q 31 days 10 2004 0000 Communicatic Q 31 days 10 2004 0001 Communicatic Q 31 days 10 2004 0000 Communicatic Q 31 days 10 2004 0001 Communicatic Q 31 days 10 2004 0000 Communicatic Q 31 days 10 2004 0001 Communicatic Q 31 days 10 2012 0000 Duplicate Uni lt Up
467. n the same DeviceNet network reat and Stopping Program Execution and Restarting Operation for only One NE 2A series Controller If the following conditions are satisfied the RUN STOP RESTART switch can be used to start and stop program execution and restart operation for an NE2A series Controller e The target for starting and stopping program execution using the RUN STOP RESTART switch is set to the only the NE2A series Controller Tar get only this device in the NE 2A series Controller system setup e The configuration restore file contains the configuration data for the NE2A series Controller targeted for operation e The configuration file is inserted into the relevant NE2A series CPU Unit and the configuration restore file has been validated Starting and Stopping Program Execution for the NE1A NEOA series Controllers on a DeviceNet Network The RUN STOP RESTART switch can be used to start and stop program exe cution for the other NE1A NE0A series Controllers on the DeviceNet network in addition to the NE2A series Controller on which the RUN STOP RES TART switch is manipulated e The target for starting and stopping program execution or restarting oper ation using the RUN STOP RESTART switch is set to the devices con nected to the network Target all devices on the network in the NE2A series Controller system setup e The configuration restore file contains the configuration data for the NE1A NE0A series Controller e The Me
468. n time ms Switch reaction time DST1 series Safety I O Terminal input reaction time Network reaction time 1 NE2A SCPUO1 remote input local output reaction time Network reaction time 2 DST1 series Safety I O Terminal output reaction time Actuator reaction time 2 Switch reaction time ON OFF delay time DST1 16 2 Input reaction time of DST1 ID12SL 1 72 7x2 14 72 6 2 Output reaction time of DST1 MD16SL 1 Actuator reaction time 194 4 ON OFF delay time Switch reaction time Actuator reaction time 175 Calculating Safety Response Performance Section 8 2 Example 3 Remote Input Remote Output via Multiple Networks 176 Safety Connection EPI 15 ms Network reaction time 75 ms l Instruction execution cycle time 7 5 ms Instruction execution cycle time 7 0 ms _ gyn een ies Peripheral servicing cycle time 14 0 ms EtherNet IP Penphelarsenvicing eyele time Sites DeviceNet LY eT all te ae Safety Safety Connection EPI 16 ms Terminal Network reaction time 77 ms Actuator Safety Connection EPI 15 ms Network reaction time 75 ms Reaction time ms Switch reaction time DST1 series Safety I O Terminal input reaction time Network reaction time NE2A series Controller remote input remote output reaction time Network reaction time NE2A series Controller remote input remote output reaction time Network reaction time DST1 series Safety
469. nables editing the selected section Build Checks for syntax errors in the program Authentication Authenticates the password for a user defined function block with a password setting to enable accessing and edit ing the function block Change Password Changes the password required to access and edit a user defined function block Display Activation Key Enables checking the activation key required to reuse user defined function blocks from a library Property Displays the properties of the project or a user defined func tion block Device Menu Description Toolbar Offline Online icon 1 0 Unit Setting Displays the I O Unit settings screen System Parameter Displays the system settings dialog box Slave I O Displays the screen for setting assembly data for Safety Slave I O and Standard Slave 1 0 Change Mode Switches between IDLE Mode and RUN Mode 358 Logic Editor Functions Section 15 3 Description Toolbar Offline Online icon Force Mode Start Changes to Force Mode Stop Changes from Force Mode to Normal Mode Force On Turns ON the selected variable Force Off Turns OFF the selected variable Force Releases force setting and force resetting for the selected Release variables Force Releases all force set and force reset variables Release All Upload Force Displays all variables that are force set or force reset in the List Watch Windo
470. nal of the CPU Unit Power is supplied from the CPU Unit to the Safety Input Units Itis not necessary to supply power if Safety Input Units are not used V2 This is the power supply for the external output circuits of the Safety Out put Units The V2 and G2 terminals are independent on each Safety Out put Unit so supply power to the V2 and G2 terminals of each Safety Output Unit The following terminals are isolated form each other VO to GO V1 to G1 and V2 to G2 Note Power Supply Differentiation V0 to GO For internal logic circuits V1 to G1 For external input devices and test outputs V2 to G2 For external output devices Power must be input to V2 and G2 on each Unit 33 General Specifications of NE2A series Controllers Section 3 1 3 1 2 Dimensions and Weights Without an External Power Supply Unit No Communications Unit Connected Connection Configuration e Safety Input Units A Units Safety Output Units B Units A B lt 20 E Overall width mm 154 5 15 x A B Height 90 mm Depth 113 mm including connectors E Weight g 500 x 90x A 95xB Side 90 mm Lo CPU Unit 0 Units a 120 mm 15 mm x No of Units 113 mm End Cover End Unit tamm 19 5 mm With an External Power Supply Unit Communications Unit Connected Connection Configuration e Safety Input Units A Units Safety Output Units B Units A B lt 20 DeviceNet Units C Units EtherNet IP Units D Units C lt 6 D lt 3 C D lt
471. nce the password was wrong the specified file was opened as protection mode a Message Report Pane Message Code Date Description 1 wWAR 0100 2008 08 06 14 58 18 Since the password was wrong the specified file was opened as protection mode Ready L NE2A_Backplane T Unknown OMRO TOOLBUS CJ2 CPUxx 115200 Bit s Off line The following operations are disabled in P rotection Mode Menu Menu command Save Save As Change Password Network Download Device Parameter Download Reset Change Password Setup Node Address Baud Rate Saving and Reading Network Configuration Files Section 9 5 9 5 5 Reading Network Configuration Files Created with Network Configurator Version 2 _ or Lower Network configuration files created with Network Configurator version 2 0 or lower can be read with Network Configurator version 3 Procedure 1 2 3 1 Select External Data Import from the File Menu The Import Network Configuration Dialog Box will be displayed 2 Select the type of file to read in the Files of type Box 3 Select the file to read and click the OK Button The Confirm Password Dialog Box will be displayed 4 Input the password that was set when the network configuration file was saved The network configuration file will be read Import Network Configuration Look in EJ Sample NE1ASarmple ncf Filename Files of type Network Configurator v1 2v2 File n
472. nction Blocks NAND Aa man lt gt System designed by device or function using user defined function blocks 4 4 2 Programming Using Function Blocks NE2A series Controller programs are created using function blocks Function blocks are programming elements that determine outputs for inputs Programming using function blocks makes safety logic easy to understand because Controllers and Safety Devices are designed using virtual compo nents NE2A series Controller programs are created by selecting from function blocks displayed in the Network Configurator function block list 84 Creating Programs Section 4 4 File Edit View Project Device Editor Variable Library Window Help BSR x oc 4a ce Baboarnm aaa 208 amp a4 8 sr ome Project vax Section1 zx fj NE2A SCPU01 B Section1 E User Fucntion Blocks Function Blocks vax 2 X Timer Counter a I Counter Off Delay Timer On Delay Timer 1 Pulse Generator UpDown Counter H Safety Device E STOP i EDM rial 4 Enable Switch Kal Light Curtain Monitoring ES 1 Muting Non Contact Door Switc 1 Safety Gate Monitoring 1 Two Hand Controller i Type2 Sensor 1 User Mode Switch 2 GL Reset Restart F Reset v Sd lt gt lt gt Program Size The maximum size of an NE2A series user program is as follows Number of function blocks that can be used 1 600 max 125 Ksteps 512
473. nction Blocks It is necessary to import a user defined function block to use it in a program e Select User Function Block Import from the File Menu 396 Creating and Reusing Program Objects Section 15 9 15 9 2 Creating Program Objects This section describes the procedure for managing user defined function blocks and sections Note Sufficiently confirm safety before providing user defined function blocks and sections as objects to other people for use in programming Specifying the Library Folder Where the Object File Is Stored Specify the folder in which to store the object file as a library object Select Window Library from the Display Menu to display the Library WIndow Library will be displayed as the default folder in the Library Window Note The default Library Folder is C Program Files OMRON Network Configurator V3 NExA Programmer Library C Program Files OMRON Network Configura tor v3 is a folder installed by the Network Configurator Use this procedure to create a new folder 1 2 3 1 Select Map Folder from the Library Menu The Browse Folder Dialog Box will be displayed 2 Specify the folder for storing the files and click the OK Button The specified folder name will be displayed in the Library Window Adding Objects to the Library 1 2 3 1 In the Project Window select the user defined function block or section that you want to save Project Ix f NE2A SCPU01 Selection of a sect
474. nction as a Standard Slave The input assembly is data from the Standard Slave to the Standard Master The output assembly is data from the Standard Master to the Standard Slave Standard Slave Standard Master Note Up to 8 input assemblies and 8 output assemblies can be registered for a Standard Slave Procedure 1 2 3 1 Select the NE2A SCPUO1 to be used as a Standard Slave 2 Select Parameter Edit from the Device Menu You can also right click the NE2A SCPU01 device and select Parameter Edit from the menu Or you can double click the NE2A SCPUO1 The Edit Device Parameters Dialog Box will be displayed 3 Click the Slave I O DeviceNet Tab The Slave I O DeviceNet Tab Page on the Edit Device Parameters Dialog Box will be displayed 273 Using an NE2A series Controller as a Standard Slave Section 11 7 Edit Device Parameters Communication Unit Mode Cycle Time Extend Mode Logic Safety Connections Safety Slave 1 0 Slave 1 0 DeviceNet Target 1 0 EtherNet P 120 Unit Name Type Size New Input New Output Register 0 8 Register 0 8 Lok cance The following information is displayed on the Slave I O DeviceNet Tab Page Information displayed The name of the registered I O assembly and the name of the I O tag defined in the assembly 5 are displayed The type of I O assembly i e input or output and the data type of the I O tag are displayed The size of the I O assembly and
475. nd on many factors such as the Tag Data Link connection settings number of connections and data sizes number of nodes the switching hub being used and cable lengths Each delay is described in detail below Send Processing Delay The send processing delay is the delay that occurs within the EtherNet IP Unit when data packets are sent once each packet interval This delay varies with the RPI error shown in the following graph so the send processing time is the maximum value for each RPI Packet interval RPI RPI error update accuracy cycle 1 to 500 ms RPI 15 501 ms to 1s RPI 10 1 001 s to 10 s RPI 5 Cable Delay The cable delay is the time required for the data signal to pass through the cable and reach the destination When category 5 or 5e STP shielded twisted pair cable is being used the maximum cable delay is 545 ns 100 m The cable delay represents a very small percentage of the total Tag Data Link delay Switching Hub Delay The switching hub delay is the delay time between the arrival of the packet at the switching hub and the output of the packet from the hub s transmission port This delay depends on the total number of connections used for recep tion and data sizes used in the Tag Data Links In addition this delay depends on the switching hub manufacturer and model For OMRON W4S1 series Switching Hubs the delay can be approximated with the following table For information on the delays for hubs
476. ndard I O Communications Cycle Time Note The DeviceNet EPI expected packet interval and Standard I O Communica tions cycle time affect the network bandwidth usage 1 used in Safety I O Communications and Standard I O Communications The performance of the EPI and Standard I O Communications cycle time can be adjusted by adjust ing the network bandwidth usage used in Safety I O and Standard I O Com munications 1 Network Bandwidth Usage Shortening the EPI and Standard I O Communications cycle time increases the network bandwidth usage Conversely lengthening the EPI and Standard 1 0 Communications cycle time decreases the network bandwidth usage With DeviceNet itis possible to use approximately 90 of the network band width for either Safety I O Communications or Standard I O Communications Communications will time out however if a connection is set that exceeds the network bandwidth usage for Safety I O Communications or Standard 1 0 Communications Therefore it is necessary to set the EPI and Standard I O Communications cycle time so that the network bandwidth usage is not exceeded 1 For details on EPI refer to 5 4 2 Setting Safety Connections 2 For details on the Standard I O Communications cycle time refer to 5 5 2 Standard Connection Settings Checking the EPI and Standard I O Communications Cycle Time Settings and Network Bandwidth Usage The best EPI and best Standard I O Communications cycle times for
477. network Next a dialog box prompting the input of the device password will be dis played 00 NEZA SCPUO1 Please input the Device Password Password 3 Input the device password and then click the OK Button The download will start When the network configuration of one network has been downloaded completely the following dialog box will be displayed if there are any more networks Network Configurator i Network download was completed This network has some connections ta other metworks The downloading For other networks will start OKA If you click the OK Button a confirmation dialog box for downloading to an other network Network Configurator 1 In order to enable new configuration downloading parameters tovall devices in the nebwork DeviceNet_1 will start OK If you click the OK Button a dialog box to input the device password will be displayed 434 Downloading and Uploading Device Parameters Section 17 3 13 DST1 MD16SL 1 Please input the Device Password Password Use this password far all device Cancel If there are multiple devices and the same password is set for all devices select the Use this password for all device Check Box No further password input will be required Click the OK Button Downloading to the target network will start You can repeat this procedure to download the network configuration to all related networks Note After the device parame
478. ng pressure plates are used for the terminal screws on the power supply wiring section 418 Wiring Section 16 2 Note e Tighten the terminal block screws to a torque of 1 2 N m e Use the following types of crimp terminal for M4 screws Crimp Terminals for DC Power Supply T 7 mm max p ang 7mm max 2A 16 2 3 DeviceNet Wiring Refer to the DeviceNet Operation Manual Cat No W267 for information on laying DeviceNet networks 16 2 4 Ethernet Wiring Recommended Network Configuration Device These products are recommended for use with the EtherNet IP Unit Model number Inquires Cisco Systems Inc Consult the manufacturer Cisco Systems Inc Main Corpo rate HQ Contec USA Inc Consult the manufacturer CONTEC USA Inc Phoenix Contact Consult the manufacturer Phoenix Contact USA Customer Service Twisted pair 100BASE TX cable F ujikura F LINK E 0 5mm x 4P Fujikura America Inc EtherNet IP compliant cable Connectors STP Plug Modular Panduit Corporation MPS588 Panduit Corporation US Headquar plug ters Boots Tsuko Company MK boot IV LB Tsuko Company J apan Headquar ters Basic Precautions for Laying a Network e Itis necessary to take sufficient safety measures and follow the specifica tions when performing work to lay an Ethernet network Refer to JIS X5252 for standards related to laying an Ethernet network and to Stan dards for Electrical Eq
479. nged will be continued Safety I O Communications will be restarted if the Value before switch setting is reset to its original setting switch was changed value when power was applied Flash E6 021A Yes Logic errorin There is an error with the unit name saved in the ing configuration non volatile memory red Local node 000E data Reset the unit name with the Configurator Replace address the DeviceNet Unit if the error recurs Operation continues with the unit name as null Other functions are also continued 512 Troubleshooting DeviceNet Unit Errors Communications Unit Network Configurator Indi cators 7 segment display Error history MS NS Error Detail E8 Local node address Error Detail Saved Displayed message Logic error in configuration data Section 19 3 Cause Recovery method Status after error There is an error with the Master scan list saved in the non volatile memory Register the scan list again after clearing it Alternatively reset the Master scan list with the Net work Configurator 1 Master remote I O communications will be stopped 2 Data exchange with the CPU Unit operation as a Slave and message communications will be con tinued After this the system will return to normal operation if the data can be correctly written Remote I O com munications will be performed for the Master E9 Local node address Memory
480. nly message communications from the USB port will be possible INITIALIZING Mode The self diagnosis required to ensure safety functions is being Green performed Red Toor Lit lt Flashing mm Not lit 68 NE2A series Controller Status Transitions Section 4 1 1 For details on the CONFIGURATION RESTORE Mode refer to 7 2 Opera tion and Maintenance Using a Memory Card 4 1 2 Moving between Operating Modes The following diagram shows the mode changes after initialization is com pleted at startup Power ON No valid RUN Mode configuration f P ower interruption when fi aoip lid RUN and configuration is vali unlocked and configuration is locked RUN and locked CONFIGURING Configuration is valid and configuration is unlocked Power interruption when configuration is valid and configuration is locked and mode is IDLE IDLE Mode IDLE and IDLE and unlocked locked Note Locked Configuration locked Unlocked Configuration unlocked The following diagram shows the mode changes between the RUN IDLE and CONFIGURING Modes Download IDLE Mode RUN Mode completed normally DLE and y Wore change RUN RUN and unlocked Mode change IDLE unlocked CONFIGURING Mode Download Starts Lock unlock IDLE and locked Mode change RUN RUN and Qc Mode change I
481. nnected Net work Identifier is displayed either in blue or green when the Network Configu rator is connected to the network You can download parameters to all these networks at one time Networks to which parameters are downloaded Procedure 1 2 3 1 Select Download from the Network Menu You can also right click the mouse and select Download from the pop up menu when no device has been selected in the Network Configuration Pane Or you can click the Download to Network Icon in the toolbar A message box will be displayed to confirm downloading to the network Network Configurator D In order to enable new configuration downloading parameters tovall devices will start e OK 2 Click the Yes Button The Network Configurator will check if its configuration matches the con figuration of the actual network Uploading Device Information 00 li Note If the network structure does not match the following dialog box will be dis played 433 Downloading and Uploading Device Parameters Section 17 3 Comparison Result of Network Structure network is not match z Would you like to continue the download to the network 1 The network may be another network because the structure of D escription i Local MER Q Wrong network number 34F304114996 000100000001 e Click the No Button to abort the processing e Click the Yes Button to start downloading parameters to the
482. nput Specifies connecting a Safety Device with a semiconductor output such as a light curtain Test pulse from test out Specifies connecting a Safety Device with a contact output in combination with a test output Select a test output mode to use for the test source according to the Safety Device that is connected 141 Safety Input Functions Section 6 2 Setting the Test Output Mode When the channel mode is set to Test pulse from test out select the test out put terminal used by the Safety Input as the test source Channel mode Description Mechanical contact Pulses for diagnosing the Safety Devices will be output from the test output terminals Pulses are output from each test output terminal at different timings The Safety Input Unit s test output signal pulse output is input through the mechanical contact device The following can be detected Contact of the input signal line with the positive side of the power supply line ground faults and short circuits to the other input signal lines Single beam Safety A Single beam Safety Sensor is connected A test signal for Sensor Single beam Safety Sensor diagnosis is output D40A Non contact An OMRON D40A Non contact Door Switch is connected Test Switch pulses for the D40A will be output Mat A Safety Matis connected Test signals for diagnosing the Safety Mat will be output The following errors can be detected by using input
483. ns Unit number switch IP address switches EtherMet tr 100Base TX lt 10Base T connector 51 EtherNet IP Safety Units Section 3 7 3 7 2 Indications MS NS COMM 100M and 10M Indicators Indicator name Operating status Module Status Power is not being supplied e Normal operation Non fatal error e Unit number setting error or error due to switches being changed during operation Fatal error If the error occurs again the Unit must be replaced Green Red e Waiting for configuration Lit green 0 5 s Lit red 0 5 s Network Status The Unit power is not being supplied e Waiting for NE 2A initialization to start Offline e Not configured eThe EtherNet IP Safety Communications EtherNet IP Stan dard Communications or message communications is online and at least one connection is established a Safety I O Communications error ON 0 55 Standard I O Communications error OFF 0 5s ex Unable to communicate duplicated IP addresses 100Mbps Yellow 100Base TX link not established 7 100Base TX link established 10Mbps Yellow 10Base T link not established 10Base T link established Communication Yellow No data being sent or received Data being sent or received Soon ON a Flashing m OFF 1 This error occurs when the
484. ns is online and at least one connection is established Safety I O Communications error ON 0 55 Standard I O Communications error OFF 0 55 Died Unable to communicate Bus Off error or duplicated MAC ID error ON a Flashing m OFF 2 2 1 This error occurs when the switch is changed The system will recover from the error when the switch is returned to the original setting It is not necessary to turn OFF the power supply and reset the CPU Unit Seven segment Display Display Description Node address Node address decimal of local node Switches between error Switches between the error code hexadecimal code and node address and node address decimal of error node of error node The codes for all current errors are repeatedly displayed in order The characters will flash while the configuration data is being saved to show that the data is being saved No connections set Lit i Lit Connec Connection Flashing i Flashing tions set not estab lished Connection Lit i Lit established 47 DeviceNet Safety Units 3 6 3 Switches Section 3 6 The display will flash if both a flashing condition e g Safety Master connec tion not established and a lit condition e g Standard Slave connection not established occur at the same time Unit Number Rotary Switch Note No
485. ns registered to the Safety Master 01 031E No of Connections Error The setting for the number of safety I O connections exceeds the upper limit supported by the Safety Slave Adjust the Safety Connection setting for the relevant Safety Master In particular check that no more than 15 Safety Masters are set for each Multicast connection with a maximum total of 60 When setting connections from an EtherNet IP Unit through an NE1A EDRO1 ED Router make sure that no more than 32 connections have been set for one ED Router Each multicast connection is counted as two connections 01 031F Connection ID Resource Error The maximum number of connection IDs for one Safety Master 12 has been exceeded Check the Safety Connection settings of the relevant Safety Master 01 07F F Non existent Safety Slave The Safety Slave may not have been added to the network correctly Check that the corresponding Safety Slave is online i e the NS indicator is flashing green or lit green If the Safety Slave is not online check the following items els the node address for the Safety Slave correct Do all nodes have the same baud rate els the cable length correct trunk lines and branch lines ls the cable disconnected or slack eis the terminating resistance only on both ends of the main line els there a lot of noise 01 080C Safety Signature Mismatch The safety signature for the Safety Slave monitored by the Saf
486. ns the execution rights and sys tem project data used when the system status is changed with a Memory Card of the NE2A series Controller Create the configuration restore file by using the Network Configurator to read a project file that was previously cre ated For the project file it is recommended that user testing be completed that safety has been confirmed and that all devices have been locked Creating the Configuration Restore File Download the parameters lock the configuration select the items for which the operating mode will be changed and create the configuration restore file Procedure Creating the Configuration Restore File 1 2 3 1 Select the NE2A series Controller to execute the process operations and then select Parameter Edit from the Device Menu 2 Click the Extend Mode Tab in the Edit Device Parameters Dialog Box Edit Device Parameters Slave 1 0 DeviceNet Target 1 0 EtherNet IP 140 Unit Safety Connections Safety Slave 1 0 Communication Unit Mode Cycle Time Extend Mode Logic Enable Execute the program after waiting for the Safety 1 0 Restore Operation Mode This device only All device on the network Run dle Operation Mode This device only All device on the network User Program ID O 0000 9999 Parameters Protection Change Password OK Cancel 456 Changing Device Parameters and Operating Modes Using a Memory Card Section 17 9 3 Se
487. ntroller Devices connected to the NE 2A series Controller may operate unexpectedly e Do not disassemble repair or modify the NE2A series Controller Doing so may lead to loss of safety functions Disposal e Be cautions not to injure yourself when dismantling the NE2A series Con troller XXV Regulations and Standards 5 5 Regulations and Standards The following certifications have been obtained for the NE2A series Safety Network Controller Certifying organization Standards TUV Rheinland EN ISO 13849 1 2008 EN ISO 13849 2 2008 IEC 61508 parts 1 7 1998 2000 IEC 62061 2005 EN 954 1 1996 ISO 13849 1 1999 IEC 61131 2 2007 EN 60204 1 2006 EN 61000 6 2 2005 EN 61000 6 4 2007 EN ISO 13850 2006 EN418 1992 NFPA 79 2007 ANSI RIA 15 06 1999 ANSI B11 19 2003 UL 508 UL 1604 Class Div 2 Group A B C D UL 1998 NFPA 79 2002 IEC 61508 CSA 22 2 No 142 CSA 22 2 No 213 Other organizations CE Marking C Tick Mark The NE2A series Safety Network Controllers can be used to construct safety control network systems that satisfy the following standards e SIL 3 Safety Integrity Level 3 requirements in IEC 61508 IEC 62061 ISO EN 13849 1 Category 4 PL e 6 Conformance to EC Directives 6 1 Applicable Directives EMC Directives 6 2 Concepts EMC Directives OMRON devices that comply with EC Directives also conform to the related EMC standards so that they can be more easily built into oth
488. ny of the follow ing functions can be allocated to each DeviceNet Unit Safety Master Safety Slave Standard Master or Standard Slave The Slave procedure is not required if the NE2A series Controller will not be used as a Safety Slave or Standard Slave Creating the DeviceNet Network to Be Designed Refer to 11 2 1 y Setting the DeviceNet Network Refer to 11 3 AA Registering Devices in the DeviceNet Network Refer to 11 3 3 pe Setting I O Assemblies Slaves Procedure for registering vari ables when creating I O assem blies with the Network Configurator Procedure for creating I O assemblies after creating vari ables with the Logic Editor Registering I O Assemblies for Slaves Refer to 11 5 1 and 11 7 1 Starting the Logic Editor from the Network Configurator Refer to 15 2 A AA Creating Variables for Slave I O Refer to 11 5 2and 11 7 2 Creating Variables for Slave I O Refer to 15 5 y y Setting I O Assemblies for Slaves Refer to 11 5 2and 11 7 2 Registering I O Assemblies for Slaves Refer to 11 5 1 and 11 7 1 Connection Settings Master Registering Slaves to a Master Refer to 11 4 1 and 11 6 1 y Setting Connection Parameters Refer to 11 4 2and 11 6 2 240 y Setting I O Assemblies for Slaves Refer to 11 5 2and 11 7 2
489. o 0 3 N m e Separate the DeviceNet cable from high voltage lines and power lines Used DeviceNet compliant Thick Cables or Thin Cables for the communi cations cables Do not use flat cables 49 Section 3 6 DeviceNet Safety Units 3 6 5 General Specifications Specifications Operating voltage Supplied from Power Supply Unit Current consumption 290 mA max DeviceNet communica 24 VDC 18 mA max supplied from DeviceNet connector tions power supply Specifications that are not listed above conform to 3 1 1 General Specifica tions of NE2A series Controllers Up to six DeviceNet Units can be connected to one NE 2A series Controller Do not exceed the maximum of six Communications Units if DeviceNet Units and EtherNet IP Units are both connected Note The maximum current consumption of the DeviceNet Safety Unit NE2A DNS21 is 290 mA Connect a Power Supply Unit NE2A P D025 if one or more Communications Units are mounted to the NE2A series CPU Unit 3 6 6 Dimensions Reference Values tem Specifications O O O O Dimensions 31 x90 x65 mm W xH x D not including the DeviceNet connector Weight 118 g including the enclosed connector Unit mm 50 EtherNet IP Safety Units Section 3 7 3 7 EtherNet IP Safety Units The NE2A series EtherNet IP Unit NE2A ENS21 is for NE2A series Control lers only It cannot be mounted to CJ series PLCs 3 7 1 Nomenclature NE2A ENS21 Indicatio
490. o Si3 circuits Test output circuits Description Safety Input terminals A2 B5 A6 B6 TOtoT1 Test output terminals Use for connection to Safety Input terminals SiO to Si3 1 Test output terminals TO and T1 each outputs a different test pulse pattern The two TO terminals are connected internally The two T1 terminals are also connected internally A2 B2 A4 B4 Power supply terminals for input circuits The four G1 terminals are connected internally 1 The test outputs of the Safety Input Units are independent of each other Use the test outputs on the Safety Input Units for the Safety Inputs of those Units An error may occur if itis used for the Safety Input of another Unit 3 8 5 Wiring I O Devices Refer to the following information for input device selection and wiring Devices with Mechanical C ontact Outputs Examples Emergency stop buttons and safety limit switches These devices use both a Safety Input terminal and test output terminal A Safety Input terminal inputs the test output signal pulse output of the NE2A series Controller via a contact output device 59 Safety Input Units Section 3 8 4 5 mA typ V1 ery Tx J q NE2A series Controller E INX Minimum applicable load 4 mA 24 VDC s G1 D Devices with PNP Semiconductor Outputs Current Sourcing Example Light curtains A PNP semiconductor output signal from this type of device is input to th
491. o check the general properties Safety I O information and signa ture of an NE2A SCPU01 CPU Unit and you can check the general proper ties and I O information of an NE2A DNS21 DeviceNet Unit and NE2A ENS21 Ethernet Unit in the Device Property Dialog Box 1 Selectthe NE2A SCPU01 NE2A DNS21 or NE2A ENS21 whose proper ties are to be displayed 2 Select Property from the Device Menu You can also right click the NE2A SCPUO1 NE2A DNS21 or NE2A ENS21 and select Property from the pop up menu Or you can click the Device Property Icon 4 in the toolbar Each tab page displayed in the Device Property Dialog Box is described below Verifying Parameters and Checking Safety Signatures Section 17 4 General Tab Page The General Tab Page lets you check the device information and change the device icons displayed in the Network Configuration Pane NEZA SCPU01 Property General Safety 1 0 Information Signature i NE2A SCPU01 lt D evice name Change Icon Default Icon Description Network Number 000100000001 Node Address 00 Device icon Vendor Omron Corporation Safety Network Controller 1413 1 01 111BFF31 Device Type Product Code Revision Serial No If you click the Sync Button the device information will be obtained from the device and displayed Safety I O Information Tab Page The Safety I O Information Tab Pag
492. ocedure 1 2 3 1 Selectthe I O assembly to be deleted 2 Click the Delete Button on the Slave I O DeviceNet Tab Page A dialog box will be displayed to confirm the deletion NEXA LogicEditor Input Assembly 0 will be deleted OK sd 275 Using an NE2A series Controller as a Standard Slave Section 11 7 3 Click the Yes Button The Standard Slave I O will be deleted 11 7 2 Setting Assembly Data This section describes how to define data for I O assemblies Edit Slave I O DeviceNet Dialog Box Name InputAssemblyO Data I O assembly name a my Variable Bee 3 General Stat a AEEA List of data that can be registered 6 Local 0 status 4 Safety 1 0 communications status 4 Standard 0 communications status E CPU Unit Status New Variable Registered data Offset Type E Size Total size Number of registrations Use as default 170 data Number of registered variables I O type Specify the connection Use as default I O data Option Refer to 11 5 2 Setting Assembly Data for information on the following items lt I O assembly names lt List of data that can be registered lt List of registered data Total Size This area displays the total size of the I O assembly A maximum of 200 bytes can be registered for one input assembly and 200 bytes for one output assem bly Note The data size will be set as one byte if the data size is less than one byte e g for BOOL v
493. ock Input Output Signals You can connect the input output signals between variables and function blocks as well as between different function blocks by dragging and dropping Dragging and Dropping 1 2 3 1 382 Click a connector gj and drag the line to another connector Creating Programs Section 15 6 Section1 n Reset_Areal 00 H Reset_Areal 01 a E Drag from the variable Drop it at the input connector ha 2 ae oe gt a EMO_Areal 01 If the connection is invalid an error message will be displayed NEXA LogicEditor R r this connection is invalid e e 15 6 7 Arranging Text Boxes Text boxes can be arranged in a program You can paste comments or pre cautions related to the circuit in these text boxes Inserting Text Boxes Procedure 1 2 3 1 You can select the desired location in the Program Window press the shortcut key and then select Insert Text Box from the menu The Edit Text Box Dialog Box will be displayed EJ AA het tine x Font Fill No Fill Font Color Background color Line No Line Input text 383 Creating Programs Section 15 6 2 Input the characters to be displayed in the text box and set the font and font color and the background color The items displayed in the Edit Text Box Dialog Box are described in the following table a Font Sets the following items for the characters Font name style size characte
494. ode to After Establishing Safety I O Connection Communications Partner in IDLE Mode The NEOA series Controller that is being communicated with is in IDLE Mode making it impossible to establish a Safety I O Connection Change the operating mode of the NEOA series Controller that is functioning as the Safety Slave to RUN Mode IDLE Mode Safety I O communications have not been started because the NE2A series CPU Unit that is the safety master is in IDLE Mode Change the NE2A series CPU Unit to RUN mode 537 Section 19 6 Connection Status Tables 19 6 3 Connection Status for the NE1A series Controller Safety Slave Function Normal communications The Safety I O connection status is normal A number between 1 and F hexadecimal will be displayed for The num ber of Safety Masters that are communicating on the same multicast con nection will be shown Safety I O Connection Timeout The Safety I O connection has timed out Check the following items Do all nodes have the same baud rate els the cable length correct trunk lines and branch lines els the cable disconnected or slack els the terminating resistance only on both ends of the main line els there a lot of noise els the network bandwidth allocation suitable Output Connection Owner Error The Safety Slave has previously established an output safety I O connec tion with a Safety Master at a
495. of the registered data is displayed Total Size This area displays the total size of the I O assembly A maximum of 1 024 bytes can be registered for one input assembly and 1 024 bytes for one output assembly Note The data size will be set as one byte if the data size is less than one byte e g for BOOL variables and local I O input data 301 Using an NE2A series Controller as a Standard Slave Number of Registrations Section 12 7 The number of data items registered to the I O assembly is displayed here A maximum of 64 status information items can be registered for one input assembly and 64 for one output assembly Use as Default I O Data Option Registering Data Procedure 1 2 3 Unregistering Data Procedure 1 2 3 302 Use this option to specify the default connection Connections of I O assem blies for which this option is selected will be automatically registered when automatic allocation is used and registration is performed with the Originator If this option is selected for an I O assembly the selection will be cleared for the I O assembly for which it was previously selected 1 2 1 Select the data to register from the list of data that can be registered Edit Target 1 0 EtherNet IP Name Inputssembi0 Data E um Variable F S d Status g smmm Select the data to register jety Connection Normal Status Fault Present a S Remote Standard 1 0 ade e
496. ogic Safety Connections Safety Slave 40 Connections 1 160 J Se E Auto allocation Register Device List Select the name of Product Name We the I O assembly 01 DST1 1D125L4 DeviceNet_1 Fy Safety Input Assembly 2 Time 35me in 2 Click the Edit Button A dialog box to register the connection to the device will be displayed 02 DSTI 1D12S1 1 DeviceNet 1 Edit Connection 1 0 Connection Name x 120 Type In 1 0 Sie 2Byte _ Detail Open Type Configure the safety slave Check the Safety Signature Open only Connection Type Multicast connection Single cast connection Data Expected Packet Interval EPI Advanced B ms Value 10 ms 100 ms Reaction Time 35 ms j 0K Cancel 3 Change the parameters and click the OK Button For details refer to 11 4 2 Setting Safety Connection Parameters 253 Communications between an NE2A series Controller and a Safety Slave Section 11 4 Automatically Registering and Unregistering Connections Procedure 1 2 3 1 Selectthe name of the Safety Slave of the connection to be automatically registered or to be deleted from the Register Device List Area on the Safety Connections Tab Page in the Edit Device Parameters Dialog Box Edit Device Parameters Slave I O DeviceNet Target 0 EtherNet IP 120 Unit Communication Unit _Mode Cycle Time Extend Mode Logic Safety Connections Safety Slave 1 0 Connections 1 760 49 Tae X Z An
497. oint to point Connections The connection type for Tag Data Link connections can be set to a multicast connection or a point to point connection With a multicast connection one tag set can be sent to multiple Consumers using one packet There is a maximum of four Originators With a point to point connection a tag set must be sent separately to each Consumer so the same number of packets is required as the number of Con sumers Thus using a multicast connection will reduce the communications traffic when sending the same tag set to more than one Consumer To use multicast connections however a switching hub with a multicast filter is required except when sending the tag to all nodes If a switching hub without a multicast filter is used the multicast packet is broadcast to the entire network so unneces sary packets are sent to some nodes which can increase communications traffic To use a multicast connection to send a tag set to multiple Consumers with one packet the tag set connection type RPI timeout value and connection type i e multicast must be the same for all nodes Setting and Checking the Multicast Group Configuration If you use the Network Configurator set the following values for all nodes to configure a multicast group Settings e Connection type Multicast connection e Target device NE2A ENS21 input data Set the same input tag set e Packet interval RP I Set the same value e Timeout value Set the same
498. oller 3 Ifthe file ID is the one intended press the SERVICE switch for at least 1 s and then release it This will make the MC VALID indicator on the NE2A series Controller light yellow to confirm that the configuration restore file is valid Once validated the configuration restore file will remain valid until the Mem ory Card is removed It will remain valid even if the power supply of the NE 2A series Controller is turned OFF 17 9 3 Downloading Parameters and Locking the Configuration Downloading Parameters The following device parameters can be set by using a Memory Card that con tains the configuration restore file e Parameters for the NE2A series Controller with the Memory Card inserted and devices with connections set with the relevant NE 2A series Controller only connections in which the relevant NE 2A series Controller is the Master e Parameters for the NE2A series Controller with the Memory Card inserted and the safety devices on the same DeviceNet network Procedure 1 2 3 1 Turn OFF the power supply to the NE2A series Controller 2 Insert a Memory Card that contains the configuration restore file into the memory card slot 3 Turn ON pin 1 MC DOWNLOAD on the Memory Card DIP switch Turn ON the power supply to the NE2A series CPU Unit 5 Confirm that the initial settings of the NE2A series Controller have been completed 6 Validate the configuration restore file on the seven segment display 7 Pr
499. on 439 verifying device parameters 439 verifying parameters 439 view menu 224 W warning 472 watching 464 watching variables 464 welding check 337 wiring 416 wiring output devices 153 Index 556 Revision History A manual revision code appears as a suffix to the catalog number on lower left corners of the front and back covers of the manual Cat No Z919 E 1 04 Revision code The following table outlines the changes made to the manual during each revision Page numbers refer to the previous version Revision code Revised content March 2009 Original production December 2009 Corrected mistakes J anuary 2010 Corrected mistakes May 2011 Made changes for new version of the Network Configurator made changes and additions for applicable OS specifications and added descriptions of new functions 557 Authorized Distributor
500. on the same domain Checking the Network Number Use the following procedure to check the network number set for the actual network 1 2 3 1 Select Properties from the Network Menu The Network Properties Dialog Box will be displayed 2 Click the Get from the actual network Button The network number set for the targeted actual network will be read and displayed in the Network Number Column 233 NE2A series Controller Setup Section 10 1 10 1 2 Registering the CPU Unit Registering the CPU Unit Double click NE2A SCPU07 under NE2A_Backplane Hardware Device Type Safety Network Controller in the Hardware List Pane Untitled Network Configurator Eile Edit View Network Device EDSFile Tools Option Help Dae 25 amp C NE2A Backplane_ L E Network Configurator a DeviceNet Hardware EtherNet IP Hardware NE2A_Backplane Hardware S eh 4a Vendor 5 LS Omron Corporation NE2A SEPUDT ay DeviceType L 3 Communications Adapter 3 NE24 DNS21 NE24 ENS21 afety Network Controller EAP NE2S SCRUO Message Code Description Ree LINEZA Backplane T Unknown USB LOCATION41 TOOLEUS NEXA SCPUxx Bit s Gorin The NE2A series CPU Unit will be registered to the Backplane Changing the Device Name Device names can be changed When a device is added from the Device List the displayed name is the name that is used in the Device List Procedure 1 2 3 1 Selectthe
501. only for a Safety Input Slave When a multi tion cast connection is selected a Safety Input Slave can transmit input data to a maxi mum of 15 Safety Masters by using a multicast connection These Safety Masters are classified as the same multicast group if the I O data and EPI values specified in I O connection are the same This connection type can be selected even for one Safety Master Single Castcon The Safety Master and Safety Slave establish a 1 1 connection and perform Safety nection 1 0 Communications The EPI sets the interval at which the Safety Master and Safety Slave communicate safety data Devices that send data to the network send data at the set time interval and monitor whether the devices set to receive the data can receive the correct data at the specified interval If it cannot the con nection is disengaged and the safe state is entered The EPI value affects the safety response performance Refer to 8 2 Calculating Safety Response Per formance Open only Expected Packet Interval EPI 104 DeviceNet Safety Communications Section 5 4 Parameter Description Advanced con Time out multiplier This parameter is used to set the number of timeouts used to determine if an error nection settings has occurred in communications If the parameter value is high there will be less communication errors but it will take longer to reach an error and affect the response performance The default is two
502. onnected device maintenance status Non safety Indicates whether the number of Safety I O contact operations has exceeded the monitored threshold Safety I O Unit error status Non safety Safety I O Unit error status Safety Safety remote input data Safety Data received from Safety Slaves as a Safety Mas Remote O Slaves to NE2A series Controller ter Safety Connection normal status Non safety Safety Connection Master or Slave communica Safety Connection error status Standard DeviceNet Master input data Non safety Data received from Slaves as a DeviceNet Master Remote O Slaves to NE2A series Controller tions status DeviceNet Unit status 1 2 Non safety DeviceNet Unit status DeviceNet Master status Non safety DeviceNet Slave status Non safety DeviceNet registered Slave table Non safety DeviceNet normal Slave table Non safety EtherNet IP Unit status 1 2 Non safety EtherNet IP Unit status EtherNet IP communications status 1 2 Non safety Unit status General status Non safety Includes the various types of NE2A series Control ler status Error Status Non safety Includes the various types of NE2A series Control ler error information Fault present Non safety Indicates function block execution status and the presence of errors Data That Can Be Linked as Output Variables Safety Meaning Non safety Local I O Local output data Safety Values output to Safety
503. onnections from the Network Menu The Edit All Connections Dialog Box will be displayed Communications between an NE2A series Controller and a Safety Slave Section 11 4 Edit All Connections Product Name Open Type Con Type EPI Reacti I O Type Size 00 NE24 SCPUOI P 02 DST1 MD16SL 1 De Fm Safety Input Assembly 1 Check the Safety Sign Multicast Con 10ms B4ms in ESE Gh Safety Output Assembly 1 Check the Safety Sign Single cast Co 10 ms 64 ms Out 1 Byte 01 DST11D125L 1 Devi Gh Safety Input Assembly 1 Check the Safety Sign Multi cast Con 10 ms 64 ms In 2 Byte The following table describes the information that is displayed in the Edit All Connections Dialog Box Description Product Name Displays the name of the registered Safety Slave 4 icon and the name of the I O assembly used in the set Safety Connection 4 icon Open Type Displays the open type of the I O assembly For details on open types refer to 5 4 2 Setting Safety Connections Con Type Displays the connection type of the I O assembly For details refer to 5 4 2 Setting Safety Connections EPI Displays the EPI Expected Packet Interval of the I O assembly Refer to 5 4 2 Setting Safety Connections for information on EPI Reaction Time Displays the network response time of the Safety Connection I O Type Displays the type of I O assembly used by the Safety Connection Size Displays the size of the I O assembly data used by
504. ons Section 6 2 6 2 Safety Input Functions 6 2 1 Outline The NE2A SID4 1 Safety Input Unit provides four Safety Input terminals Si0 to Si3 and two test output terminals TO T1 Various applications can be supported by selecting settings and wiring that are appropriate for the types of input device that are connected and the safety level to be achieved Devices That Can Be Connected The following table lists the devices that can be connected Devices Examples Safety Devices with Examples of Safety Devices with Mechanical Contact mechanical contact out Outputs puts Emergency Stop Switches Safety Limit S witches Safety Door Switches Enable Switches and Two hand Switches Safety Devices with semi Examples of Semiconductor Output Safety Devices conductor outputs Safety Light Curtains Laser Scanners OMRON Safety Mats UM Note Supports Safety Category 3 OMRON D40A Non con D40A tact Door Switches Supports Safety Category 3 OMRON Single beam E3FS E3ZS Safety Sensors Note Supports Safety Category 2 6 2 2 Setting the Channel Mode Set the channel mode for Safety Input terminals and the test output mode for test output terminals according to the external devices that are connected Setting the Channel Mode Set the channel mode for the Safety Input terminals according to the external devices that are connected Channel mode Description Not Used Specifies to not use an external device Used as Safety I
505. ons can be locked by using a Memory Card that contains the configuration restore file e Configurations for the NE2A series Controller with the Memory Card inserted and devices with connections set with the relevant NE 2A series Controller only connections in which the relevant NE 2A series Controller is the Master e Configurations for the NE2A series Controller with the Memory Card inserted and safety devices on the same DeviceNet network 459 Changing Device Parameters and Operating Modes Using a Memory Card Section 17 9 Procedure 1 2 3 1 Turn OFF the power supply to the NE2A series Controller Insert a Memory File that contains the configuration restore file into the memory card slot 3 Turn ON pin 2 MC LOCK on the Memory Card DIP switch Turn ON the power supply to the NE2A series CPU Unit 5 Confirm that the initial settings of the NE2A series Controller have been completed 6 Validate the configuration restore file on the seven segment display 7 Press the SERVICE switch on the NE2A series Controller to lock the con figuration Turn OFF the power supply 4 Turn ON pin 2 on the Memory Card DIP switch to change to configuration lock mode ON_OFF Lo i 1 2 3 4 Turn ON the power supply configuration restore mode Has the configuration NO restore file been validated A A Validate the configuration restore fi
506. ons for all Communications Units or individual Communications Units Stop Stops Safety I O Communications for all Communications Units or individual Communications Units Update Maintenance Information Updates the maintenance information of each device to the latest information 224 Main Window and Menus Menu commands Update Device Status Description Updates the status information of each device to the latest information Toolbar icon Section 9 6 Connection Structure Export Exports the EtherNet IP Tag Data Link connection settings to a file Import Imports the EtherNet IP Tag Data Link connection settings from a file Auto Connection Automatically sets the EtherNet IP Tag Data Link connec tion settings View Device s Connection Struc ture Tree Displays the connection configuration of the entire system Check Connection Checks the consistency of all the connections Edit All Connections Add DeviceNet Adds a DeviceNet network in the Network Configuration Pane EtherNet IP Adds an EtherNet IP network in the Network Configuration Pane NE2A_ Backplane Adds an NE2A Backplane in the Network Configuration Pane Copy Copies the selected network configuration Delete Deletes the selected network configuration Change View Switches the displayed network Property Device Menu Menu commands
507. onse Invalid Mes could not be returned due to invalid format sage Operation continues Busy Mes The message was discarded because the CPU Unit was sage dis busy Response could not be returned due to invalid format carded Reduce the load on the CPU Unit Operation continues 508 Troubleshooting DeviceNet Unit Errors Section 19 3 19 3 Troubleshooting DeviceNet Unit Errors 19 3 1 Checking the DeviceNet Unit Error Status Status Indicator The status indicators show the status and error codes of a DeviceNet Unit Refer to 3 6 2 Indications Seven Segment Display The 2 digit 7 segment display shows the status and error codes of a DeviceNet Unit Refer to 3 6 2 Indications The error code and detail code are displayed alternately ON1s ON1s Error code Detail code Error Code The 2 digits of the 7 segment display generally indicate the following error cat egories Error code Error category System errors related to the DeviceNet Unit Errors related to the Safety I O Communications Errors related to switch operation Errors related to the Master Errors related to the network Errors related to interaction with the CPU Unit Errors related to the Slave Errors related to message communications 19 3 2 DeviceNet Unit Error Status and Countermeasures Interpreting the Error Status and Countermeasures The following table describes the
508. ontrollers DeviceNet Safety NE1A Series Safety Network Controller Operation Manual Z906 This manual describes the specifications functions and usage of the NE1A series Safety Network Controllers DeviceNet Safety System Configuration Manual Z905 E 1 07 or higher This manual explains how to configure the DeviceNet Safety system using the Network Configurator DeviceNet Safety Safety I O Terminal Operation Manual Z904 This manual describes the DST1 series Slave models specifications functions and application meth ods in detail EtherNet IP DeviceNet Router Operation Manual Z912 This manual describes the specifications functions and application methods of the EtherNet IP DeviceNet R outer in detail DeviceNet Operation Manual W267 This manual describes the construction and connection of a DeviceNet network It provides detailed information on the installation and specifications of cables connectors and other peripheral equip ment used in the network and on the supply of communications power Obtain this manual and gain a firm understanding of its contents before using a DeviceNet system CS C series DeviceNet Units Operation Manual W380 This manual describes the basic settings Standard Communications and other aspects of the CS C series DeviceNet Units EtherNet IP Units Operation Manual W465 This manual describes the basic settings Standard Communications and other aspects of the CS C series
509. or errors that occur in a Communications Unit or I O Unit connected to the CPU Unit Communica Connection or network errors tions Units NE2A DNS21 NE2A ENS21 1 0 Units Safety I O or test output errors NE2A SID4 1 NE2A SOD4 1 Network Configurator errors Errors that occur when downloading or resetting from a Network Configurator 19 1 1 Checking NE2A series Unit Errors Checking from Indicators on the NE 2A series Controller The NE2A series Controllers are designed to indicate errors using individual Unit status indicators or a 7 segment display Appropriate measures can be taken quickly simply by following the instructions in this manual without using Support S oftware such as the Network Configurator Error history are recorded in the CPU Unit and Communications Units and can be viewed from the Network Configurator For details refer to 19 2 Troubleshooting CPU Unit Errors 19 3 Troubleshoot ing DeviceNet Unit Errors and 19 4 Troubleshooting EtherNet IP Unit Errors Checking from the Network Configurator 492 The device status can be seen from the Network Configurator by changing the Network Configuration Pane to Maintenance Mode If alarms or warnings have occurred in the device the status icon will change to red or yellow Refer to 9 6 2 Network Configuration Pane for details Checking the Location of an Error Section 19 1 19 1 2 NE2A series Troubleshooting Procedure Troubleshoo
510. ord Dialog Box will be displayed 3 Enter a password and click the OK Button The Select Target Network Dialog Box will be displayed Select Target Network T arget Network NE24 Backplane 1 E DeviceNet_1 F EtherNet IP_1 OK Cancel 4 Select the network you want to save in the Select Target Network Dialog Box Clear the selections for the networks that you do not want to save 5 Click the OK Button The data of the selected network will be saved to a file Saving Network Configuration Files by Device Network configurations can be reused by device Procedure 1 2 3 1 Select the device and select Parameter Save from the Device Menu You can also press the shortcut key and select Parameter Save from the menus The Save Device Parameters Dialog Box will be displayed 211 Saving and Reading Network Configuration Files Section 9 5 Save Deyice Parameters Savein L NE24_ DATA a NE2A SCPLIOI File name NEZA SCRUM Save Save as type Configurator Device Parameters File dvf w Cancel 2 Selectthe location for saving the file enter a name and click the Save But ton The device configuration data will be saved 9 5 2 Reading Network Configuration Files Itis possible open the saved network configuration file for individual networks and to make additions to existing network configurations for individual net works Normal Reading Procedure 1 2 3 1 Select Open from the
511. ord internally 17 6 1 Setting Device Passwords You will be prompted to input the device password from the Network Configu rator when performing the following operations for a device on a network You will not be able to execute any of these operations if the password is not cor rect Downloading to the network e Downloading parameters e Locking the configuration e Unlocking the configuration e Resetting e Changing the status e Changing the password You can set a password for each device by using the following procedure Passwords can be set only when the Network Configurator is connected online Procedure 1 2 3 1 Selectone or more devices for which a password is to be set 2 Select Change Password from the Device Menu You can also right click a device and select Change Password from the pop up menu The Change Password Dialog Box will be displayed Change Password for 00 NEZA SCPU Current Password New Password Contirm of the New Password ok Cancel 3 Input the current password and the new password and then click the OK Button You can specify a password between 6 to 16 alphanumeric characters Device passwords are not saved in the network configuration file 447 Protecting Device Parameters Section 17 6 No password is specified for devices in the default settings If you specify Return to the default configuration when resetting a device you can return to the default configuratio
512. ot be the same Are the cable lengths branch main lines suitable Are any cables disconnected or loose els there a terminator at each end of the main line els there a lot of noise Remote I O communications will be stopped while transmission is timed out An error will be returned for message transmission requests Communications will be restarted when the DeviceNet Unit recovers from the transmission time out Litred FO Local node address 0211 00 Duplicated node address Duplicate MAC ID The same node address is set for another node Occurs when going online Check the node addresses of the other devices Make sure that there is no duplication and restart the DeviceNet Unit The Unit will be offline and communications will be disabled An error will be returned for all communi cations requests Data exchange with the CPU Unit will be continued Lit red 514 Fl Local node address A Bus Off error was detected Consider the following items Are the baud rates for the Master and Slaves the same Are the cable lengths branch main lines suitable Are any cables disconnected or loose Is there a terminator at each end of the main line els there a lot of noise The Unit will be offline and communications will be disabled An error will be returned for all communi cations requests e Data exchange with the CPU Unit will be continued
513. oubleshooting DeviceNet Unit Errors Section 19 3 CPU Unit Errors for DeviceNet Units Communications Unit Network Configurator Cause Indi cators 7 segment display Error history MS NS Error Detail Error Detail 000F 0000 Saved Displayed message CPU Unit faulty Recovery method Status after error An error occurred in the CPU Unit Replace the DeviceNet Unit or CPU Unit if the error recurs when the Controller is restarted Operation stops 0006 Bit 6 ON Duplicated unit number Bit 3 ON No applicable device number in registered I O tables 00 Setting Errors for DeviceNet Units I O table not registered The unit number is not registered in the CPU Unit I O tables Create the I O tables Operation stops Communications Unit Network Configurator Cause Indi 7 segment Error history Displayed Recovery method cators display message Status after error MS Error Error Saved NS Detail Detail Flash C8 0349 Yes Switch The hardware switch setting was changed during ing changed dur operation red Local node 02 Node ing operation R eset the settings to what it was before the change address address rotary was made Alternatively restart the DeviceNet Unit i switch changed after the change is made 03 Baud rate Safety I O Communications will be stopped DIP switch Standard I O Communications and other operations cha
514. ow Fie Eu Yew Project Deke Edtor Viriatle Library Window Heb SN AREX Aa tas aaow 14a 218 Dd at wh z TAX Secimi vx Vaides 5 a Sete zo ae q li Mme aayy Dese Real gt i ws Tasia i Gy Reset Areal BYTE 3S ESTOP Areal _OYTE i HYESIOE Aral PYE meaa OT Jj Dao Aral BYTE s w g Feedback As BOOL Ei mg on amp extop 000 79 5 5 py 4 extop _ L Sy estop2 poft Either add from the 1 mz Menu or use the alas H b z 0 TEAL H w Drag amp Drop function i T fh Ww 9 ee dLa Co Tan tist x s Lis De _ T NEAscruo Dea eat pen ASER Puak Funetion Blocks 8 1600 Varisbles 35 3072 Program See 010 512000 In the Watch Window select the variable you want to delete Select Delete from the Edit Menu You can also right click the variable you want to delete and select Delete from the pop up menu In the Watch Window select the variable you want to move Select Move Downward from the Edit Menu You can also right click the variable you want to move and select Move Downward from the pop up menu To move a variable up select Move Upward Variables can be sorted by clicking on the column headings Name Value or Data type in the Watch Window Sorting will alternate between descending order and ascending order each time a column heading is clicked Force setting resetting from the
515. ow and Menus Section 9 6 The following table shows the information that is displayed for the communica tions interface Interface Description CJ 2 USB Serial Port Communications port Network connection name Network device name Baud rate NE1S Serial Port Communications port Network connection name Network device name Baud rate CS CJ 1 Serial Port to DRM Unit Interface Communications port Network connection name Network device unit number Baud rate Ethernet to CS CJ 1 ETN DRM Unit Interface Network device name Node ID IP address of local computer Baud rate Network device unit number Network device IP address DeviceNet Interface Network device name Board ID Baud rate EtherNet Interface Ethernet interface IP address of local computer RS Linx Interface RS Linx interface Set interface name NExA USB Port Communications port Network connection name Network device name Baud rate 229 Main Window and Menus Section 9 6 230 SECTION 10 Designing the System Configuration This section describes the settings for the NE2A series Safety Network Controller and other device parameters 10 1 NE2A series Controller Setup 0 0 232 10 1 1 Creating the NE2A Backplane 0 0000 232 10 1 2 Registering the CPU Unit 0 00 0 00000 234 10 2 Setting Device Parameters 0 0 0 eee eee eee 235 10 2 1 Mode Cycl
516. password Operations requiring a param eter access password Operations requiring a param eter modification password Operations requiring a project password Operations enabled for operator that operates the machine Operations enabled for maintenance person A Purpose Device replace ment only Operation of NetworkConfigurator not required Allow Mem ory Card for restoration only Operations enabled for maintenance person B Purpose Device replace ment only Maintenance using Network Configura tor User classification Allow device password only Operations enabled for maintenance person C Purpose Error investiga tion and device replace ment Allow param eter access password Allow device password Designer manager 166 OK Operation password is enabled for correct password and disabled Allow all passwords for incorrect No Operation is not possible Operation is not subject to protection 1 For Memory Card device operation refer to 7 2 Operation and Mainte nance Using a Memory Card Examples of Security According to Roles Section 7 3 2 The settings can be changed on the Network Configurator but they cannot be downloaded to the device 3 If the password is incorrect the settings can be changed on the Network Configurator but they cannot be downloaded to the device 4 Re
517. pe Device YO Tag ae in BOOL NE2A SCPUO1 00 P e EStop 1 in2 BOOL NE2A SCPUO1 01 P e EStop 2 ind BOOL NE2A SCPUO1 03 P Feedback ns Lt y in3 BOOL NE2A SCPUOI 02 P Reset1 E EStop 1_0_1_DeviceNet_1 BOOL DeviceNet_1_ 01 DST1 MD16SL 1 00 P e EStop 1 EStop 2_1_1_DeviceNet BOOL DeviceNet_1_ 01 DST1 MD16SL 1 01 P e EStop 2 inl PE n Feedback_2_1_DeviceNef 1 BOOL DeviceNet_1_ 01 DST1 MD16SL 1 02 P Feedback eH mi K and lt gt e YO Tag List ax EStopLamp B a0 ES Dvi EStop 1 Bis Estee OT Davie E slot 1 NE24 SPD04 41 a Suen m Remote Standard PO E aa Rem Ee DaN asop gt 0 staus Drag and drop j be tam aay Network DeviceNet_1 abl A 01 DST1 MD16SL 1 Thess t S _ Safety naeeee lt 5 5 00I P e EStop 1 lt 4 S OTF e EStop 2 5 02 P Feedback 5 031N Safety Input 3 lt gt 5 D4 N e Safety Input 4 a Note When creating variables if there are duplicated names or I O tags an error will occur Also when the number of registered variables exceeds the limit adding more variables will cause an error The I O settings are indicated with symbols on the I O tag The following list gives the meanings of the symbols I O Tag List ax 3a z E i Local 1 0 3 slot 2 NE2A SID04 1 S Safety Input I O setting information 5 00qP cjsadkonT 01 iP e EStop 2 02 N Reset1 03 N Feedback _ Standard Input aAa slot 1 N
518. peration Set ting Field and Run Idle Operation Setting Field The configuration restore file will be created in the specified folder 7 Record the eight digit ID displayed on the Network Configurator Record the file identification ID to identify the configuration restore files in the NE 2A series Controller Network Configurator 1 Creating Configuration Restore File was completed The file identification ID is 164E609E 457 Changing Device Parameters and Operating Modes Using a Memory Card Section 17 9 Note As soon as you create the configuration restore file save the network configu rator project to enable verifying the parameters in the configuration restore file Storing the Configuration Restore File on a Memory Card Copy the configuration restore file to the root path of the Memory Card to use it with the NE 2A series Controller 17 9 2 Validating the Configuration Restore File With the NE 2A series Controller it is necessary to validate the configuration restore file to change the status of the system by using a Memory Card Unless this operation is performed it will not be possible to use the RUN STOP RESTART switch or the configuration restore function Procedure 1 2 3 1 Insertthe Memory Card that contains the copied configuration restore file into the NE2A series CPU Unit 2 Confirm that the file ID to be targeted for operation is displayed on the sev en segment display of the NE 2A series Contr
519. played immediately upon connecting online select Update Device Status automatically when it was connected on Network from the Options Menu Option Help Select InterFace gt Edit Configuration File gt Setup Monitor Refresh Timer Install Plugin Module v Update Parameter automatically when Configuration was changed v Update Device Status automatically when it was connected on Network 18 2 2 Monitoring Device Status The status of the NE2A NE1A NEOA and DST1 can be monitored from the Network Configurator Detailed information on any errors occurring in the device can also be monitored Refer to the manual for each Controller for information on monitoring status for the NE1A NEOA or DSTI Monitoring Status from the Network Configurator Procedure 1 2 3 1 Select the device whose status is to be monitored 2 Select Monitor from the Device Menu You can also right click the device and select Monitor from the pop up menu Or you can click the Monitor Device Icon 2 in the toolbar The Monitor Device Dialog Box will be displayed 3 Click the Status Tab The Status Tab Page will be displayed 471 Monitoring Device Status in Maintenance Mode Section 18 2 Monitor Device Local 1 0 Status Operation Log List Production Information Status General Error Status Safety Connection Error History Device Status Alaim wiarnina E Alarm Device Status Area Detail The
520. pload Network Configurator Uploading all devices parameters from nebwork will star based on the current device structure OK If You select No it will start after deleting the current device structure e Click the OK Button Uploading will start with the displayed Network Configurator device configuration e Click the No Button The displayed Network Configurator device configuration will be delet ed and uploading will start If the uploading is completed successfully the parameters can be up loaded with the actual network device configuration 2 2 Click the No Button The following dialog box will be displayed for confirmation if the project has not been saved after being changed If the project has been saved uploading will start 437 Downloading and Uploading Device Parameters Section 17 3 3 When uploading for one network has been completed the following dialog box will be displayed for confirmation if there are related networks i j Network upload was completed This network has some connections to other networks The uploading For other networks will start OR 4 Click the Yes Button or the No Button When uploading has been completed a message box will be displayed to indicate the completion of uploading 5 Click the OK Button Uploading from the network will be completed 438 Verifying Parameters and Checking Safety Signatures Section 17 4 17 4 Verifying Parameters and Checking Sa
521. ply V2 20 4 to 26 4 VDC 24 VDC 15 to 10 Current con sumption Unit power supply VO 1 2 A max with 20 I O Units connected CPU Unit 300 mA I O Units 45 mA Unit Input circuit power supply V1 60 mA Unit max Output circuit power supply V2 0 5 A point max and 1 2 A Unit max Insulation class Class Ill SELV Overvoltage category Noise immunity Compliant with IEC 61131 2 Vibration resistance 0 35 mm at 5 to 8 4 Hz 9 8 m s2 at 8 5 to 150 Hz Shock resistance 150 m s for 11 ms Mounting DIN Track TH35 7 5 TH35 15 according to IEC 60715 Ambient operating temperature 0 to 55 C Ambient operating humidity 10 to 95 with no condensation Ambient storage temperature 40 to 70 C Ambient operating environment No corrosive gases Degree of protection IP 20 Serial interface USB version 1 1 Number of connectable I O Units 20 max excluding End Units Number of connectable Communications Units 6 max A Power Supply Unit is required when a Communications Unit is connected VO This is the power supply for the internal control circuits of the Units The power is supplied from the CPU Unit to the Safety Slice I O Units and Communications Units Vi This is the power supply for the external input circuits and test output cir cuits of the Safety Input Units Supply power to the V1 termi
522. ppear e If you edit the parameters of a device whose configuration has been veri fied the verification mark will be removed You will have to verify the parameters of that device again When Parameters Do Not Match If the Network Configurator detects parameters that do not match during veri fication of parameters the mismatching parameters will be displayed along with the safety signature in a window like the one shown below Check the val ues of the parameters and download these parameters again 441 Verifying Parameters and Checking Safety Signatures Section 17 4 Verify Result 700 NEZA SCPLIDI Save Prin Cose Verify Result 00 NE2A SCPU01 Generated by Network Configurator Safety Signature Description Local Device Wrong Safety Signature iFF3iA30 EIJ1HF0B 2009 02 9 36 14 03i 120090210 12 01 10 875 Ox34F3 OxH434DFCE Ox 4F 3 0x0414C85B Scanner Configuration Parameters Description Local Device Wrong Safety Connection Open Type 0i DeviceNet_ Safety Input Assembly 1 Oper only Check the Safety Signature Wrong Safety Connection Open Type 0i DeviceNet_i Safery Output Assembly 1 Open only Check the Safety Signature Local O Description Local Device Wrong number of Slot 1 17 4 2 Device Properties Procedure 442 1 2 3 You can check the device information Safety I O Standard I O and safety signature in the Device P roperty Dialog Box You can als
523. progress will be stopped and the system will wait for the Memory Card to be inserted again When the Memory Card is inserted configuration restore operation will continue again from the start Configuration restore file not found on Memory Card The configuration restore file cannot be confirmed because it cannot be found in the Memory Card Insert a Memory Card with the configuration restore file Note The error display will disappear when the Memory Card is inserted The relevant function is not executed and other operations continue Configuration restore file read error The configuration restore file cannot be confirmed because it cannot be read properly from the Memory Card Check the Memory Card and confirmation restore file Insert a Memory Card with the correct confirmation restore file Note The error display will disappear when the Memory Card is removed The relevant function is not executed and other operations continue 503 Troubleshooting CPU Unit Errors Section 19 2 CPU Unit Error name Cause Indi 7 segment Recovery method cator display Status after error MS Error Detail Invalid configuration restore file The configuration restore file cannot be confirmed because data the check code of the configuration restore file read from the Memory Card is incorrect Check the Memory Card and configuration restore file Insert a Memory Card with the correct config
524. put termi nals of a dual channel Review the discrepancy time and download new settings CPU Unit operation continues At the applicable I O Unit the I O indicators light red for the pair of dual channel terminals where the error occurred P 3 03 k3 I O Unit slot number 2063 I O Unit slot number Short Cir cuit Detected at Safety Out put A short circuit was detected at the Safety Output terminal Check the Safety Output terminal wiring and remove the cause of the error Output OFF from the output terminal after the error latch time has passed CPU Unit operation continues At the applicable I O Unit the I O indicator lights red for the terminal where the error occurred When dual channels are set the I O indicator for the other terminal flashes red P3 04 1 0 Unit slot number 2064 I O Unit slot number S tuck at high Stuck at high Detected at Safety Out put The Safety Output terminal is stuck at high Check the Safety Output terminal wiring and remove the cause of the error Output OFF from the output terminal after the error latch time has elapsed CPU Unit operation continues At the applicable I O Unit the I O indicator lights red for the terminal where the error occurred When dual channels are set the I O indicator for the other terminal flashes red P3 08 I O Unit slot number 2068 I O Unit slot number Dual Chan nel Violation Dual Cha
525. r Cause Recovery method Status after error System Errors Related to the DeviceNet Unit Communications Unit Network Configurator Indi 7 segment cators display MS Error NS Detail Lit red Error history Error Saved Detail OFF Communications Unit Error name Indi 7 segment cators display MS Error NS Detail Lit red Special Unit Error OFF 510 Displayed message Special Unit Error Top row Cause Gives the cause of the error Middle row Reset Gives the method of resetting the error Bottom row Status after error Gives the status of the DeviceNet Unit after the error has occurred Cause Recovery method Status after error A DeviceNet Unit hardware error has occurred Replace the DeviceNet Unit if the error recurs when the Controller is restarted is restarted Operation stops Cause Recovery method Status after error A DeviceNet Unit hardware error occurred Replace the DeviceNet Unit if the error recurs after the Controller is restarted Operation stops Section 19 3 Troubleshooting DeviceNet Unit Errors Communications Unit Indi cators 7 segment display MS NS Lit red OFF Hardware Setting Error Detail Error name Special Unit Error Errors for DeviceNet Units Communications Unit Indi cators 7 segment display MS NS Error Detail Error name Cau
526. r The network reaction time and the best Standard I O Communications cycle time will be calculated for each DeviceNet network In this example it is assumed that all registered Slaves and connections in the Target DeviceNet network have already been set 1 Click the Target DeviceNet Tab in the Network Configuration Pane The following dialog box will be displayed NE2A_Backplane_Y _ DeviceNet_1 DeviceNet_2 EtherNet IP_1 O NEZA_Backplane_2 Q DeviceNet_4 e 0 P P P Pp 00 NE24 DNS21 Ya i 63 eee amp DST1 Aois DST14 Noss DST14 Noss DST1 MDI6SLA1 DST14 MDI6SL DST1 MDT6SL 1 DST1 MDI6SLA DST14 MDIESL 1 a ta a a a cow BAN2I Usage of Network Bandwidth 125K Bits 250K Bit s 500K Bits M Calculate EPI ci 0 477 100 0 ggx 100 0 45 100 The Network Configurator displays the actual network bandwidth usage rate for Safety I O Communications and Standard I O Communications at the bottom of the Network Configuration Pane under Usage of Network Bandwidth for Safety Connections The higher the baud rate the less bandwidth is used 2 Click the Calculate EPI Button at the bottom of the Network Configuration Pane The Calculate EPI Dialog Box will be displayed 313 Checking the Communications Response Performance Calculate EPI actions Network Bandwidth Best Average of EPI 125K Bits 250K Bits Use Rate 500K Bits
527. r limit supported by the Safety Slave Adjust the Safety Connection setting for the relevant Safety Master In particular check that no more than 15 Safety Masters are set for each Multicast connection with a maximum total of 30 When setting connections from an EtherNet IP Unit through an NE1A EDRO1 ED Router make sure that no more than 32 connections have been set for one ED Router Each multicast connection is counted as two connections 01 031F Connection ID Resource Error The maximum number of connection IDs for one Safety Master 12 has been exceeded Check the Safety Connection settings of the relevant Safety Master 01 07FF Non existent Safety Slave The Safety Slave may not have been added to the network correctly Check that the corresponding Safety Slave is online i e the NS indicator is flashing green or lit green If the Safety Slave is not online check the following items els the node address for the Safety Slave correct Do all nodes have the same baud rate els the cable length correct trunk lines and branch lines els the cable disconnected or slack els the terminating resistance only on both ends of the main line els there a lot of noise 01 080C Safety Signature Mismatch The safety signature for the Safety Slave monitored by the Safety Master does not match the safety signature of the Safety Slave itself Reset the Safety Slave to default settings then download the device p
528. r AT DeviceNet Safety NE1A series DST1 series DST1 series NE1A series DST1 series Controller Controller Controller Controller Controller Note DeviceNet Safety Communications are not possible with an NE1A series Safety Master and NE 2A series Safety Slaves 5 4 2 Setting Safety Connections Set the Safety Connections to perform Safety I O Communications between the Safety Master and Safety Slaves A connection is a logical communication path between a Master and a Slave 102 DeviceNet Safety Communications Section 5 4 DeviceNet Safety lt gt Communications NE2A 1 M DeviceNet Safety Master f f a DeviceN t A ne a a fi Safety Slave 1 Safety Slave 2 a v Setthe connection between NE2A series Controller 1 and Slave 1 to allocate the Slave 1 emergency stop switch to the NE2A series Controller 1 input Once the connection is set the ON OFF status of the emergency stop switch will be periodically sent to NE2A series Controller 1 Safety Slave 1 NE2A series Controller 1 Safety Master A Input Area in I O Memory Input Area in I O Memory i weawenene ae eT w Assembly data A Assembly data A Assembly data B Assembly data E Output Area in 1 0 Memory Assembly data C Output Area in I O Memory Assembly data D Assembly data G Safety Slave 2 Input Ar
529. r Network Configuration Files Report Creates a report on a specified device Print Prints the device parameters or I O comment list Use the report function to printinformation for a Safety Device Setup Printer Sets up the printer Exit Exits the Network Configurator Edit Menu Menu commands Description Toolbar icon Cut Deletes selected devices and copies them to the clipboard Copy Copies selected devices to the clipboard Paste Pastes a device on the clipboard to the cursor position Delete Deletes selected devices Select All Selects all devices Clear Message Report Clears messages in the Message Report Pane 223 Main Window and Menus Section 9 6 View Menu Menu commands Description Toolbar Offline Online icon Generic Displays or hides the standard toolbar Device Displays or hides the device toolbar EDS Displays or hides the EDS toolbar Status Bar Displays or hides the status bar Message Report Displays or hides the Message Report Pane Maintenance Displays or hides the Maintenance Pane Large Icons Switches the display to Normal Mode Large Icons Switches the display to Maintenance Mode Maintenance Mode Display Mode 1 Switches the display to Detailed Display Mode 1 which displays the configuration based on the Master Display Mode 2 Switches the display to Detailed Displ
530. r format and character set Fontcolor Sets the font color Background color Sets the background color Fill No Fill Sets whether the background of the text box is filled Line No Line Sets whether the border of the text box is displayed Input text Sets the characters to be displayed in the text box 3 The text box will be inserted when you click the OK Button Heu Gost GB Section 7x z D gt o ne r Uy as g N we Ri D gt op gt an uj I out i anonn La EStopLamp 3 gt ESS TOT DevceNeLT mE Stop 1 estpet L g EStop2 11 DeviceNet 1 Im EStop 2 Lampit a iEStopLamp_3_1_Devicell Font name MS P Gothic Eau iu a Style Bold Reset 384 Creating Sections Section 15 7 15 7 Creating Sections With a NE2A series Controller it is possible to connect many local I O and remote I O With large scale programs the program structure may become complex and difficult to read and arranging function blocks and variables may be restricted If the same program structure is used in many locations it is possible to create and copy program sections as sections NE2A 1 I 1 2 atl D I f rn aa 1 iit gt OD ee ee EA Cy ali E Ue i ot li i Ri Qa i r iy Pore lit DY Stop Ny a wy 1 1 y I jy Emergency Emergency 1 Light curtain SP button Light curtain poorswiten Hang stop button 4 For the system configur
531. r screws correctly 0 25 to 0 3 N m e Incorrect wiring may lead to loss of safety functions Wire conductors cor rectly and verify the operation of the NE2A series Controller before using the system in which the NE 2A series Controller is incorporated e Lock the connectors on Communications Units or I O Units before using the Units After wiring is completed be sure to remove label for wire clipping preven tion on the NE2A series Controller to enable heat to escape or proper cooling Xxiv Precautions for Safe Use 4 Do not ground the 24 V side of the power supply to an NE2A series con troller If you do so the unwanted current flow shown in the following dia gram may occur when you connect a computer or other peripheral device NE2A Peripheral device P ower Supply circuit USB cable m Power Supply Selection Use a DC power supply satisfying the following requirements e The secondary circuits of the DC power supply must be isolated from the primary circuit by double insulation or reinforced insulation e The DC power supply must satisfy the requirements for class 2 circuits or limited voltage current circuits given in UL 508 e The output hold time must be 20 ms or longer e The DC power supply must be an SELV power supply that satisfies the requirements of IEC EN 60950 1 and EN 50178 mPeriodic Inspections and Maintenance e Disconnect the NE2A series Controller from the power supply before replacing the Co
532. rNet IP Communications EtherNet IP Network Configuration The EtherNet IP network is configured as shown in the following diagram adad HE Ethernet Switching Hub Ethernet Specifications Specifications Type 100BASE TX 10BASE T Connection method Star configuration Baud rate 100 Mbit s 1 10 Mbit s 1 Communications medium STP 4 pair shielded twisted STP 4 pair shielded twisted pair pair cable cable Supports categories 5 and 5e Supports categories 3 4 5 and 5e Impedance characteristics 100 Q Impedance characteristics 100 Q Commu Maximum cable length 100 m nications Maximum distance between nodes distance E eae ear Number of cascade connections _ There is no limit to the number of cascade connections if switching is per formed 1 Auto Negotiation automatic setting Tag Data Links and Specifications Specifications Total bandwidth 6 000 pps Refresh cycle 1 to 10 000 ms 1 ms increments default 50 ms Renew cycle precision RPI 1 to 500 ms RPI 15 RP1501 ms to 1s RPI 10 RPI 1 001 to 10 s RPI 5 2 pps means packet per second and indicates the number of packets that can be processed in one second The total bandwidth is the total number of packets for both Safety I O Communications and Tag Data Links 97 Communications Specifications for NE2A series Controllers Section 5 2 Other Services Speci
533. rat ing system The Add or Remove Program Dialog Box is shown below as an example B Add md Remoye P EE l a5 i Currently installed programs El Show updates Sort by Name Change or Remove Network Configurator for CIP Safety s3 Size S2 44MB Programs lik here forsuoport information Used ocgasianallv A Last Used on 2 10 2008 oe Add New To change this program ot remove it from your computer click Ehange Remave Change Remove Fraas iE OMRON NF1A LSR Port Driver Select Network Configurator for CIP Safety v3 and click the Change Re move Button For Windows Vista or Windows 7 click the Uninstall But ton A dialog box will be displayed to confirm the deletion Network Configurator for CIP Sat tyy3 InstallShield Wizard Do you want to completely remove the selected application and all of its Features Click the Yes Button If you click the No Button the uninstallation will not be completed and the InstallShield Wizard Complete Dialog Box will be displayed A dialog box that shows the setup status will be displayed and the unin Stallation will start If the uninstallation is completed successfully the InstallShield Wizard Complete Dialog Box will be displayed Installing the Network Configurator Section 9 2 Network Configurator for CIP Safety 3 InstallShield Wizard Maintenance Complete ed performing mainten jetwork Configurstar for livefall 5 Click the Finish Button 197
534. rce Mode Use the following procedure in the monitoring window of the Logic Editor to start the Force Mode and enable force set or force reset operations 1 2 3 1 Select Force Mode Enable from the Device Menu You can also click the Force Mode Icon on in the toolbar ORT The Force Mode Setting Dialog Box will be displayed E Force mode setting Setting Input the duration time for 10 Force Mode The upper limit is 24 hours Limited hold minutes OK Cancel 2 Setthe time for executing Force Mode and then click the OK Button When the dialog box for entering the device password is displayed enter the de vice password and then click the OK Button The system will enter Force Mode e Force Mode will be displayed on toolbar e The status of the Force Mode icon on toolbar will change Function Blocks 6 1600 variables 15 3072 Program Size 2012 512000 amp Force mode 10 minutes i The time remaining for Force Mode is displayed m Ending Force Mode Use the following procedure in the monitor window of the Logic Editor to end Force Mode Select Force Mode Disable from the Device Menu You can also click the Force Mode Icon in the toolbar 467 Monitoring Programs and Force setting resetting Variables Section 18 1 m Force setting and Force resetting Variables In the monitor Window select the variable to be force set or force reset Operation Command Toolb
535. re the parameters for I O bits set according to the specifications No Yes Make detailed settings for parameters for out put bits Refer to 14 4 7 l Make detailed settings for parameters for input bits Refer to 14 4 2 END gt 332 Setting the I O Unit Configuration Section 14 2 14 2 Setting the I O Unit Configuration You can design the configuration of I O Units of an NE2A series Controller to which I O devices are connected The required I O Unit configuration is deter mined from the types of the I O devices and the specifications required by the safety category of the equipment 14 2 1 Setting I O Units You can set the configuration of I O Units connected to an NE2A series CPU Unit Making the Settings from the Network Configurator Procedure 1 2 3 In the Network Configuration Pane select the NE2A SCPU01 CPU Unitto set Select Parameters Edit from the Device Menu The Edit Device Parameters Dialog Box will be displayed Click the I O Unit Tab The I O Unit Tab Page will be displayed Edit Device Parameters Communication Unit Mode Cycle Time Extend Mode Logic Safety Connections Memory Info Safety Slave 1 0 Slave 1 0 DeviceNet Target 1 0 EtherNet IP 170 Unit Configuration Unit Type Edit Deyice Parameters Communication Unit Mode Cycle Time Extend Mode Logic Safety Connections Memory Info Safety Slave 120 Slave 1 0 DeviceN
536. re the safety slave Option in the Open Type Ar ea 2 If the Open only Option is selected as the open type for the connection be sure thatthe Safety Master and Safety Slave are configured correctly Connection Type Select the connection type to use between the NE2A series Controller and the Safety Slave For details refer to 5 4 2 Setting Safety Connections EPI is the interval at which the Safety Controller and Safety Slaves perform communications of safety data For details refer to 5 4 2 Setting Safety Connections Note 1 Setthe EPI for each Safety Connection thatis longer than the cycle time of the Safety Network Controller If the EP I is shorter an error will occur and downloading will fail when an attempt is made to download the pa rameters for the Safety Connections 2 The Network Configurator can automatically adjust the EPI The value can be changed automatically if the set EP I is shorter than the local cycle 255 Communications between an NE2A series Controller and a Safety Slave Section 11 4 Advanced Settings time when the set EPI and local cycle time are compared The following warning will be displayed if the value set for the EP I is smaller than the local cycle time Network Contigurptor The connections to which EPT outside the support range of this device is configured exist Y The EPI thatithese connections have will be updated OK Click the Yes Button in the dialog box to automati
537. rent 128 Reserved DeviceNet Unit DeviceNet Unit Status 2 Description Indicates that the Unit is online The Unit will normally go online automatically but stays offline in the following situations Operation was stopped during the hardware or software check at Unit startup e An error was found during the MAC ID duplication check Indicates that the Unitis offline The Unit will go offline when a Bus Off error occurs turning OFF the bit Remote I O Allocations Section 5 8 Description Indicates that the Master is scanning The Unit will normally start scanning automatically but in the following situations it will not start No Slaves are registered in the scan list The scan list data is incorrect Indicates that scanning has stopped This bit will turn ON in the following situations to stop scanning An I O communications error or a transmission error occurs while the stop scan ning switch is ON The stop scan switch is set ON Operation switch change flag Indicates that a hardware switch setting was changed during operation Baud rate switch setting changed Node address switch setting changed The flag will not change for changes in the unit number setting No change in hardware switch settings Or the switch settings of the Communica tions Unit are changed during operation and then the switch is returned to its pre vious settings Reserved Reserved
538. ress 192 168 250 1 New Configuration TCP IP Configuration Get the IP address via BOOTP server Notuse DNS Use the following IP address O Use DNS IPAddress 192 168 250 1 SubnetMask 255 255 255 0 Default Gateway 0 0 0 0 Set to the Device Speed amp Duplex Speed amp Duplex Auto __ Set ta the Device Reset the Device B Get fromthe Device Refer to 5 2 3 EtherNet IP Communications EtherNet IP Communications for information on settings for TCP IP Operation will be performed with the following default values if the NE2A ENS21 is mounted to the NE2A CPU Unit and the TCP IP settings have not been made from the Network Configurator IP address 192 168 250 node_address Subnet mask 255 255 255 0 IP routing not supported Default gateway None Preferred DNS server None Alternate DNS server None Hostname None Domain name None Speed amp Duplex Automatically detected 291 Communications between an NE2A series Controller and a Safety Slave Section 12 4 12 4 Communications between an NE2A series Controller and a Safety Slave This section described how to make settings to perform communications with a Safety Slave using an NE2A series Controller as a Safety Master in an EtherNet IP network To operate the NE 2A series Controller as a Safety Master register the device that is to operate as a Safety Slave and set the connection 12 4 1 Registering Safety Slave
539. rfaces e Designing response performance a Electrical Design Operation Management Design Program Design e Designing safety device replacement e Setting the 1 0 e Designing circuits to interface safety e Designing software procedures devices as specifications e Designing project management e Designing wiring e Creating the program procedures e Debugging the program Assembly e Mounting wiring hardware settings Startup and Adjustments e Downloading project checking wiring e Turning ON power checking device connections e Verification and validation of the application software safety requirements and the safety functions e Setting locks System Operation and Maintenance e Inspection e Replacing devices 1 This step determines the safety requirements of the overall system This information is beyond the scope of this manual and has therefore been omitted 10 Preparations for Operation Section 1 4 lt System Design D l Designing the Network System Configuration e Select DeviceNet or EtherNet IP e Select centralized or distributed control e Determine the baud rate network numbers and node addresses D 2 2 1 Sections 5 and 10 ii Designing Safety Device Connections e Determine the NE2A series I O Unit configuration e Determine the network Slave configuration D 2 2 2 Sections 6 11 and 12
540. ribed below With the Logic Editor you can perform these online operations only for the Safety Controller that is connected online Resetting the Safety Devices is not necessary when performing basic opera tions However if you want to change information such as a TUNID of a pre viously configured device you must reset the Safety Device Download the parameters and then operate the safety control system Connect the Network Configurator to the network Refer to 17 2 Connecting Online Download the device parameters Refer to 17 3 Downloading and Uploading Device Parameters Reset the devices on the network Refer to 17 8 Resetting Devices Change TUNID or other value Yes Verify the device parameters and check the device information Refer to 17 4 Verifying Parameters and Checking Safety Signatures o y Operate the safety control system Refer to 17 5 Operating the Safety Control System Perform a user test Refer to 17 7 User Test and Automatic Operation Lock the configuration Refer to 17 6 Protecting Device Parameters and 17 7 User Test and Automatic Operation Set automatic operation at startup Refer to 17 7 User Test and Automatic Operation 424 Connecting Online Section 17 2 17 2 Connecting Online This section describes how to connect the Network Configurator to a network 1
541. roject File Password e Saving project files Save S ave as e Downloading configurations after adding deleting virtual networks e Downloading configurations after adding devices to or deleting devices from virtual networks e Changing the project file password e Monitoring or force setting and force resetting bits on the Logic Editor 7 1 2 Parameter Passwords Passwords for different operations can be set for NE2A series Controller parameters including programming An access password can be set to authorize the use of the browse function and a modification password can be set to authorize changes to the parameters Operations That Require an Access Password e Opening parameters comparing parameters and creating reports including programming e Online monitoring of programs e Force setting resetting variables Operations That Require a Modification Password e Changing parameters including programming e Changing the parameter password or access rights All of the operations that require an access password can be performed with the modification password 7 1 3 Device Password A device password can be set to prevent unintentional changes to the system in operation Operations That Require a Device Password e Downloading parameters including programming e Locking Unlocking devices changing between RUN and IDLE Mode and restart operation 158 Access Control with Passwords Section 7 1 7 1 4 User defined Function Block Pass
542. roller as a Safety Slave Section 11 5 Unregistering Data Procedure 1 2 3 1 2 Creating New Variables Edit Safety Slave 1 0 Name InputAssembly1 Data E a Variable E_STOP E_STOP2 E my Dummy Data Register New Variable Edit Variable Name o o e Type Sizes SE_STOP 0000 0 BOOL 1 Bit The total size and the number of registrations will be updated Select the data for which the registration is to be deleted from the list of register data Edit Safety Slave 1 0 Name InputAssembly1 Data E 4S Variable 4 E_STOP E_STOP2 Sie Dummy Data Register Unregister New Variable Edit Variable Name fsck ST Size SE_STOP1 0000 0 pol 1 al ra Rar RT Select the data to be Si Ti a lt _ _ l unregistered Click the Unregister Button The data will be unregistered and deleted from the list of registered data Edit Safety Slave 1 0 Name InputAssembly1 Data Variable 4 E_STOP1 w E_STOPZ Dummy Data Register Unregister New Variable Edit Variable Name Offset Type Size T ETOL The total size and the number of registrations will be updated Itis possible to create variables to allocate to I O assemblies in the Edit Safety Target I O Dialog Box Variables to allocate to I O assembles can also be created in the Logic Editor Refer to 15 5 Creating Variables for information on the procedure for creating these variables in the Logic Editor 265
543. rom the Network Configurator BOOTP is used The default setting is 00 BOOTP is used at startup The value of these switches is used as the host ID of the IP address The value set with the Network Configurator is used for the network ID Be sure the power supply is turned OFF before setting these switches If the IP address is changed during operation the MS indicator will flash red and communications will be as follows e Safety I O Communications will stop e Standard I O Communications will continue Safety I O Communications will start again when the IP address is returned to the original setting Note Set these switches using a small flathead screwdriver and be careful not to damage the rotary switches 3 7 4 Interface Ethernet Connector Use this connector to connect the Ethernet twisted pair cable e Electrical specifications Conform to IEEE 802 3 standards e Connector structure RJ 45 8 pin Modular Connector conforms to ISO 8877 Signal name Abbr Signal direction Transmission data Output Transmission data Output Reception datat Input Not used Not used Reception data Input Not used 8 Not used Connector Frame ground hood 3 7 5 General Specifications Operating voltage Supplied from the Power Supply Unit Current consumption 410 mA max Specifications that are not listed above conform to 3 1 1 General Specifica tions of NE2A
544. rom the use of the information contained in this publication PRECAUTIONS erreen sees d ies ernie eae 1 nn A U N Intended Audience TABLE OF CONTENTS General Precautions gt ierece a ae i ith A aah te baie with EERS Safety Precautions Precautions forSate Uses soins BAe sds Sle ete ei ee ee ee Regulations and Standards 0 0 2 ce cence eee Conformance to EC Directives 00 0 ee eee cece eens SECTION 1 About NE2A series Safety Network Controllers 1 1 1 2 1 3 1 4 Overview Features Functions Preparations for Operation 2 0 00 0 eee e eee eae SECTION 2 Configuring a System with NE2A series Controllers 2 1 2 2 2 3 2 4 2 5 Devices in the System Configuration 0 0 0 cece eee eee eee Safety Control System Configuration 0 00 eee eee eee eee Designing Response Performance 0 cece eee n eens Designing Safety Control Logic 0 0 cee eee Manasing Operation 3 200 pc2ibe Hobe tae ddd bee heat ae ees SECTION 3 Configuration Unit Specifications and Nomenclature 3 1 3 2 3 3 3 4 3 5 3 6 3 7 3 8 3 9 General Specifications of NE2A series Controllers 0 0 0 0 0000 e eee eee Safety CPU Unit End Cover End Unit Power Supply Unit DeviceNet Safety Units seo u sea aged gs eid ae iodo oe aa ood iv ad Belgas EtherNet IP Safety Safety Input Units UDS op
545. rranging Input Variables Drop it where you want to display the output variable cpu os E Section X TTA Stites ai 0 ast io ecunmmnsnssseeeenenens Ngoenesett ine Data Type Deve aay gt S G outl BOOL NE2A SCPU h Drop it in the desired oh O BOOL ee ESRO position out3 CELE iT ttt ttt tty Bapt NE24 SCPUO BOOL NE2A SCPUI fo 13 Drag the va riable eviceNet_1 BOOL DeviceNet_1 m m that you want to pevicene1 Bool DeviceNet_1 n pe insert DeviceNet BOOL DeviceNet_1 gt gori 4 RESET vn gt s IO Tag List w Ax 23 Ma NE2A SCPUO1 Network DeviceNet_1 15 6 5 Arranging Internal Variables Like input variables you can insert internal variables by dragging and drop ping them or inserting them using the menu The following dialog box will be displayed if an internal variable is inserted Set whether to use the internal variable as function block input data or output data 381 Creating Programs Create JumpAddress Input Output DST1 Bs Section1 oer Faedback 2 1 DeviceNet EStopLamp 5 EStop i 8EStop 1 i Stop 2 Lamp gt Section 15 6 OutOk ta Sananinan EStopLamp_3_1_DeviceN Internal variables must be used both as inputs and outputs An error will occur in building the program if an internal variable is used only as an input or only as an output 15 6 6 Connecting Function Bl
546. rrule Wire dimensions Ferrule specifications Cross AWG Stripped Overall Length of Inner Inner sectional length of length L1 metal diameter diameter area of insula mm partL2 ofcon of insula conduc tion mm ductor D1 tive cover tor mm mm D2 mm2 mm AI 0 34 8TQ Al 0 5 10WH Al 0 75 10GY Al 1 10RD Al 1 5 10BK AI TWIN 2 x 0 75 10GY AI TWIN 2 x 1 10R D 417 Wiring Section 16 2 1 One wire Ferrule 2 Two wire Ferrule D2 dia D2 dia Insulated cover Insulated cover A x a LI L2 L1 L2 y D1 dia Di aia e Terminal Crimping Tool Note e Properly apply the specified voltage to the input terminals Connecting a DC power supply that exceeds the specifications or any AC voltage will disable the specified functionality decrease safety functions damage the product or result in fire e Lay the I O signal cables separated from high voltage lines and power lines e I O signal cables must be no longer than 100 m e Do not apply a power supply to the output terminals Doing so may dam age the product or result in fire e Do not apply a power supply to the test output terminals Doing so may damage the product or result in fire Power Supply Unit M4 screw with self raising pressure plate fom 9 D Se 2 OMA CO DC Power Supply Terminal Screws M4 screws with self raisi
547. ry Displayed message MS Error Detail Error Detail Saved Switch Set ting Mis match Status after error The anticipated level of noise was exceeded eA critical hardware fault occurred Check the following items Replace the CPU Unit if the error recurs when the Controller is restarted eCheck the power supply voltage to see if it has dropped or is unstable eCheck whether there is influence from noise and take whatever corrective actions are required e Turn the power OFF and back ON and check oper ation Operation stops for a critical fault Cause Recovery method Status after error A system error was detected Replace the CPU Unit if the error recurs when the Controller is restarted Operation stops for a critical fault Cause Recovery method Status after error The MC DOWNLOAD and MC LOCK pins on the Memory Card DIP switch were simultaneously ON when the CPU Unit was Started Turn OFF one of the pins and restart the CPU Unit Operation is aborted I O Unit number mis match The number of I O Units in the configuration downloaded to the CPU Unitis different from the actual number of Units installed Set the correct configuration and restart the CPU Unit Alter natively change and download the NE 2A series Controller parameters Operation is aborted 498 EC 02 I O Unit Slot Number I O Unit Slot 2002 Number
548. s 00 00 0000 e eee ee 143 6 2 4 Setting a Dual Channel Mode 00 000 147 6 2 5 Preventing the Effect of Chattering from External Devices 150 6 2 6 Error Handling 0 eee eee 150 6 3 Safety Output Functions 0 0 00 ee ee 152 6 3 1 Outlite 3 54 20 ohne ee elab he nia hein ein he 152 6 3 2 Setting the Channel Mode 00 0 0 00 0000 152 6 3 3 Wiring Output Devices 00 0 e eee eee eee 153 6 3 4 Dual Channel Channel Mode Setting 0 154 6 3 5 Error Handling ss sce i ee pe ee eee eee 154 139 NE2A series Controller Local I O Specifications Section 6 1 6 1 NE2A series Controller Local I O Specifications A modular structure is used for local I O for NE2A series Controllers A sys tem with the optimal number of I O points can be constructed because the number of local I O points can be extended one I O Unit at a time Number of Mounted Units and Maximum Number of Control Points Up to 20 I O Units excluding the End Unit can be mounted to an NE2A series Controller The maximum numbers of local I O control points for an NE2A series Control lers are as follows e Safety Inputs 80 points e Test outputs 40 points e Safety Outputs 80 points Types of I O Unit Name Model Number of Units that can be connected Safety Input Unit NE2A SID4 1 32 Safety Output Unit NE2A SOD4 1 140 Safety Input Functi
549. s 13 DeviceNet Master Input Data for Monitoring Slave to NE2A This is input data that was 1 received from a Slave that is set in the connec tion as the DeviceNet Standard Master and then 2 sent to the Standard Mas ter Each connection is allocated an area of 16 bytes Remote I O Allocations Section 5 8 Standard bat Standard Slave x NN Master Standard Master Master output data I2 P Master input data Standard Slave Note In Standard Communications data can be transferred by assigning EtherNet IP tag link data in the DeviceNet Master I O data Therefore itis not necessary to write programming to copy data 14 EtherNet IP Unit Unit Status 1 This is the status data for the EtherNet IP Unit Description Unit error Indicates that an error related to the operation for the EtherNet IP Unit has occurred The bit turns ON if any of the Unit Status Bits from 1 to 15 is ON an OR of bits 1 to 15 Indicates that the above error has not occurred or that the bit was turned OFF when the error was cleared Network error Indicates that at least one error related to the network has occurred Refer to the communications status Indicates that the above error has not occurred or that the bit was turned OFF when the error was cleared Reserved Reserved Unit memory error Indicates that a Unit internal memory access READ WRITE error has occurred Indicates that the above
550. s Register the Safety Slave to communicate with and set the connection This section describes how to set a Safety Connection with a DeviceNet or EtherNet IP network that has already been built Refer to 5 4 2 Setting Safety Connections for information on Safety Connections NE2A series Controller Safety Master CS CJ PLC EtherNet IP ED Router Register the Safety Slave to the NE 2A series Controller to be used as the Safety Master DeviceNet DST1 series Controller DST1 series Controller DST 1 series Controller Standard Slave Standard Slave Standard Slave Note 1 With NE 2A series Controllers routing for DeviceNet networks and EtherNet IP cannot be performed An NE1A EDRO1 ED Router is re quired to route between a DeviceNet network and an EtherNet IP net work 2 When using the NE 2A series Controller as a Safety Slave an I O assem bly fora Safety Slave must be registered to set a Safety Connection with the Safety Master Refer to 12 5 1 Registering I O Assemblies for Safety Slaves 292 Communications between an NE2A series Controller and a Safety Slave Section 12 4 Procedure 1 2 3 1 Select the NE2A SCPUO1 to set in the NE2A Backplane Tab Page of the Network Configuration Pane Z O NE2A_Backplane_1 C EtherNet IP_1 O NE2A_Backplane_2 r ie ls y 00 i 0 ye24 SCPuoI NE24 ENS21 AN ka wee Select the NE2A SCPUO1 2 Select Parameters Edit fro
551. s and Comparator 2 Function Block Compares multiple signals with the comparison value set in NEW the configuration and outputs the result of the comparison Counters Description Compatibility Abbreviation Counter Name Counter Counts the number of input signals and turns ON Output Enable when the count reaches the number set in the configu ration data NE1A compatible Off Delay Timer Off delay Timer Operates an OFF delay timer setin 10 ms units NE1A compatible On Delay Timer On delay Timer Operates an ON delay timer set in 10 ms units NE1A compatible Pulse Gener ator Pulse Generato r Cyclically outputs ON OFF pulses while the inputis ON NE1A compatible Up Down Counter Up Down Counter Increments the count when the incrementing counter input NEW turns ON and decrements the count when the decrementing counter input turns ON Serial Paral lel Converter ction Blocks for Safety Devices Serial Parallel Converter Function Block Outputs the number of input signals as parallel signals Description Compatibility Abbreviation Name External Device Monitoring Combines the EDM monitors the OSSD and an NC normally closed external device contactor signal with a reset restart and OSSD output control NE1A compatible 88 Enable Switch Enable Switch Monitoring Monitors the status of enable switch
552. s for safety communications Master and Slave There is 1 bit per connection BE Connection 1D Network No Node address ON I O communications error Assembly data name I O communications is not being executed or under normal operation 5 Fault Present A Fault Present Bit indicates whether there is a function block error Each bit corresponds to a function block number If the function bock does not have a logic function or if there is no fault present the corresponding bit will be OFF The maximum number of registered function blocks is 1 600 Remote I O Allocations Section 5 8 a Fault Present ON Indicates a function block error OFF Indicates a normal function block Function block number Fault Present is active Note The function block number may change if the program is changed When using a Fault Present signal as a fixed output from a program use a variable name that is linked to the Fault Present Bit 6 Safety Connection Communications Reopen Switch This is a software switch for reopening the Safety Connection that was stopped by a communications error There is 1 bit per connection The con nection will be re established by turning ON the applicable bit from the user program Once a switch is turned ON the user program must be used to turn it OFF The NE2A series Controller reopens the Safety Network connection wh
553. s in tem perature e Locations subject to corrosive or flammable gases e Locations subject to dust especially iron dust or salts e Locations subject to water oil or chemicals e Locations subject to shock or vibration Take appropriate and sufficient measures when installing systems in the fol lowing locations Inappropriate and insufficient measures may result in mal function e Locations subject to static electricity or other forms of noise e Locations subject to strong electromagnetic fields e Locations subject to possible exposure to radioactivity e Locations close to power supplies This is a class A product designed for use in industrial environments In resi dential areas it may cause radio interference in which case the user may be required to take adequate measures to reduce interference minstallation and Mounting e Use the NE2A series Controller within an enclosure with IP54 protection or higher according to IEC EN 60529 xxiii Precautions for Safe Use 4 e Use DIN Track TH35 7 5 TH35 15 according to IEC 60715 to install the NE2A series Controller into the control panel Mount the NE2A series Controller to the DIN Track using PFP M End Plates not included with the NE2A series Controller to prevent it falling off the DIN Track because of vibration Correctly mount all Units to DIN Track eSpace must be provided around the NE2A series Controller at least 20 mm from its side and at least 50 mm from its top and
554. s registered to the Safety Master 535 Connection Status Tables Status Countermeasure 01 0117 Connection Path Error Section 19 6 1 Two or more output safety I O connections have been set for the Safety Slave Change the Safety Connection setting for the Safety Master so there is only one connection Then reset the Safety Slave to default settings and download the device parameters to the Safety Slave again 2 The same output assembly number for a Safety Slave has been used for both a Safety Master and a Standard Master Input assembly numbers can be duplicated but output assembly numbers cannot Check the Safety Connection setting for both the Safety Master and the Standard Master then return the Safety Slave to default settings and download the device parameters to the Safety Slave again eif the error remains even after the above countermeasure has been performed delete and re register the connections registered to the Safety Master 01 0119 Safety I O Communica tions Failure The execution mode of the DST1 XD Safety Slave was set to Auto Execution Safety I O communications are not possible in Auto Execution Mode If the DST1 XDLIU Safety Slave is to be used with safety I O com munications set the execution mode to After Establishing Safety I O Con nection 01 031E No of Connections Error The setting for the number of safety I O connections exceeds the uppe
555. s versions Cut Copy Delete Rename Properties Network Configurator Help Lj Default Programs Help and Support Exiting the Network Configurator Select Exit from the File Menu The Network Configurator will be closed 9 4 2 Checking the Version Procedure 208 1 2 3 Use the following procedure to check the Network Configurator version Select Control Panel from the Windows Start Menu For Windows Vista select Programs from the Control Panel For Windows XP select Add or Remove Programs from the Control Pan el For Windows 2000 select Add Remove Programs from the Control Pan el The Add or Remove Programs Dialog Box will be displayed Select Network Configurator for DeviceNet Safety v3 from the list of cur rently installed programs B Add or Remove Programs 1 Ail Currently installed programs El Show updates Sort by Name d Change or Remove Network Configurator for CIP Salety s3 Sie 39 44dMB Programs z Slik here forsuoport information Used oceasionallv Lask Used On 2 10 2009 lu Be To change this program ot remove lt from your computer click Ehange Remove Change Remove et lea iB OMRON NFIA LSR Port Driver 4 Click the Click here for support information Link For Windows Vista click the View Button The Support Info Dialog Box will be displayed Starting and Exiting the Network Configurator Section 9 4 Y Support Info Network Configurator for C
556. same values in the originator settings Use the following procedure to check the configuration of the multicast group Right click on the EtherNet IP Network Window and select View Device s Connection Structure Tree In the Device s Connection Structure Tree Dialog Box select the Based on Slave Device Target Option in the Display Type Area The communications settings for the target devices will be displayed If the settings that are required to configure a multicast group are all the same a multicast group will be displayed as shown below EtherNet IP Standard Communications Section 5 7 Device s Gonnection Structure Tree Display Type Based on Master Device Originator Based on Slave Device Tareet Display Option Structure amp E EtherNet IP_1 Display the detail of Connection 192 168 250 1 NE2A ENS21 E hput ssembly1 M 1 0ms 192 168 250 2 CJ1W EIP21 192 168 250 4 CJ1W EIP21 Multicast group 192 168 250 5 CJ1W EIP21 CJ2 SS InputAssembly1 M OutputAssembly1 S 1 0ms Multicast group member with only amp 192 168 250 3 CJ2M EIP21 the input data set to the same value Note as the above nodes In this example the multicast connection is 1 4 If the input data in the originator settings are the same as the rest of the multi cast group but the output data is different for a node the node will be dis played as a different group in the dialog
557. se Recovery method Status after error A DeviceNet Unit hardware error occurred Replace the DeviceNet Unit if the error recurs after the Controller is restarted Operation stops Cause Recovery method Status after error Flash HO CPU Unit connection error with unsup The DeviceNet Unit is connected to a CPU Unit that ing ported device does not support it red Check the CPU Unit Mount the DeviceNet Unit properly OFF Operation stops Flash H1 Unit Number Setting E rror The DeviceNet Unit number setting is the same as ing the number setting of another Unit red Set the number so that it does not the same as the number of another Unit OFF EC 13 may be displayed on the 7 segment display on the CPU Unit Operation stops Monitoring with the Network Configurator is not pos sible Flash H2 CPU Unit faulty An error occurred in the CPU Unit Ing Replace the CPU Unit if the error recurs when the red Controller is restarted Operation stops OFF Flash H4 Node address setting error There is an error in the node address switch setting ing There is a value that exceeds 63 red Set the node address to within a valid range 63 or lower and restart the power supply OFF Operation stops Flash H5 Baud Rate Setting Error There is an error with the baud rate setting ma Correct the baud rate setting and restart the power ii supply Operation stops OFF 511 Tr
558. se this function a Memory Card that contains the Operation Rights File must be inserted in the NE2A series CPU Unit When starting and stopping program execution the applicable range can be changed using the NE 2A series System settings e Single NE 2A series Controller containing the Memory Card default e The NE2A series Controller containing the Memory Card and NE1A NEQA series Controllers on the same networks The operating mode of the device can be changed by changing the switch only when the operating mode of the NE2A series Controller and the switch position agree Example If the switch is in the STOP position and the operating mode of the NE2A series Controller is RUN the operating mode of the device will not change even if the switch is changed from STOP to RUN The operating mode of the device will change when the switch is changed from STOP to RUN if the switch is in the STOP position and the operating mode of the NE2A series Controller is STOP RUN STOP RESTART Memory i Card TOP RESTART NE1A NEOA DST1 Starting Stopping Restarting NE 2A series Controller Program Execution If the following conditions are satisfied execution of the NE2A series Control ler program can be started stopped or restarted by using the RUN STOP RESTART switch e Only the NE 2A series Controller is set as the Target for starting stopping or restarting by the RUN STOP RESTART switch in the NE2A series sys tem settings i e
559. sensor DST1 Terminal NE2A Controller DST1 Terminal Actuator switch Sensor switch net Network __ eet _ Network __ Hees Network Output Actuator ion ti reaction time ion ti cas eo fas ag uato reaction time ie bah time ection ime ee pane rnearibin i a reactan time reaction time Reaction Time Calculations D D Calculation A Local input local output reaction Instruction execution cycle x 2 8 9 ms time ms B Remote input local output reac Instruction execution cycle x 2 Peripheral servicing cycle 3 9 ms tion time ms C Local input remote output reac Instruction execution cycle x 2 Peripheral servicing cycle 5 1 ms tion time ms D Remote input remote output Instruction execution cycle x 2 Peripheral servicing cycle reaction time ms E Input reaction time ms of ON OFF delay 16 2 DST1 series Safety I O Terminal F Output reaction time ms of 6 2 Relay reaction time DST1 MRDO8SL 1 only DST1 series Safety I O Terminal G Network reaction time ms Use the value calculated by the Network Configurator X _ Input reaction time ms of ON OFF delay 2 3 Safety Input Unit Y Output reaction time ms of 0 3 Safety Output Unit Refer to 8 4 Calculating Cycle Times of NE2A series Controllers for informa tion on the instruction execution cycle and peripheral servicing cycle 172 Calculating Safety Response Performance Section 8 2 1 Network React
560. series Controllers Up to three EtherNet IP Safety Units can be connected to one NE 2A series Controller Be sure to not exceed the maximum of six Communications Units if DeviceNet Units and EtherNet IP Units are both connected 55 EtherNet IP Safety Units Section 3 7 Note The maximum current consumption of the EtherNet IP Safety Unit NE2A ENS21 is 410 mA Mount a Power Supply Unit NE 2A P D025 if one or more Communications Units are connected to the NE2A series CPU Unit 3 7 6 Dimensions Reference Values fem Specifications Dimensions 31x90 x65 mm W xH xD Weight 100 g max Unit mm 56 Safety Input Units Section 3 8 3 8 Safety Input Units 3 8 1 Nomenclature and Terminal Layout NE2A SID4 1 Indicators Test pin mel Release button Terminal insert hole ETSY SOUL a E Terminal Block Main Block Base Block SiD4 1 No Ai bi Al i Bl TO T1 A5 B5 TO TI A6 B6 57 Safety Input Units Section 3 8 3 8 2 Indicators TS Indicator This indicator shows the status of the Safety Input Unit Indicator name Color Status Meaning TS p e Normal operation e Waiting for configuration Error Unit Hardware Error Use the monitor in the Network Configurator to check the cause of the error CPU Unit Error Unit power is not being supplied Wire the VO and GO terminals on the CPU Unit for internal control circuits to supply power ON
561. series Controllers nected in the same NEOA series Controllers DeviceNet network as the DeviceNet Unit OMRON Safety Slaves that Support safety communications OMRON Safety Slaves that do not support safety communica tions Devices that are connected to a DeviceNet network that is con nected through an ED Router 162 Operation and Maintenance Using a Memory Card CS C series PLCs Device CPU Unit Section 7 2 Download from Memory Card Lock by Memory Card DeviceNet Units EtherNet IP Units Other Units OMRON Standard Slaves Yes Subject to corresponding function No Not subject to the corresponding function Locking not required Applicable Range Example The following diagram shows the range of devices applicable to downloading and locking by the Memory Card The range depends on the NE2A series Controller that contains the Memory Card CS C series PLC ED Router i F DeviceNet DeviceNet Safety DST 1 series Controller EtherNet IP EtherNet IP Safety NE2A 1 CS CJ series PLC i DeviceNet DeviceNet Safety DeviceNet DeviceNet Safety i i DSTl series DST1 series Standard NE1A series i Controller Controller Slave Controller i DeviceNet DeviceNet Safety DeviceNet DeviceNet Safety DST 1 series Controller Standard Slave DST1 series Controller Controller i Applicable range wh
562. setting or force resetting is being executed on one Logic Editor 1st and the force start operation is performed from another Logic Editor 2nd it will be possible to perform force setting and force resetting operations only from the 2nd Logic Editor It will no longer be possible to perform force setting and force resetting operations from the 1st Logic Editor Extending the Force Mode Continuation Time To extend the Force Mode continuation time close the Logic Editor and then start it again The continuation time can be set again with the Force Mode starting procedure 469 Monitoring Device Status in Maintenance Mode Section 18 2 18 2 Monitoring Device Status in Maintenance Mode The status information or history information on an NE2A series Controller can be monitored online using the Network Configurator 18 2 1 Displaying Safety Device Status Displaying Device Status Status information on the Safety Devices for an NE2A series Controller can be displayed on the Maintenance Mode display An example is shown below Untitled Network Configurator File Edit view Network Device EDSFile Tools Option Help De Ay ee g amp NE2A_Backplane_1 Devicenet_1 eEtherNets1P_1 Network Configurator i S DeviceNet Hardware 8 EtherNet IP Hardware A A NE2A_Backplane Hardware A Vendor fo Omron Corporation A DeviceType E ah Communications Adapter 2 Safety Network Controller 1
563. sh communications again from the Network Configu Communi rator cations error The Safety I O Connection where the error occurred will remain stopped without establishing the connection again Any other operations will be continued d5 Nonexist No Standard Slave devices exist in the network when the IP entSafety Standard Master connection is being established Target node Slave Consider the following items Device address ls the Safety Slave power supply OFF els the Safety Slave IP address correct ls the cable connected Are any cables disconnected or loose els there a lot of noise The recovery method depends on the setting for when an error occurs in Safety Communications Connection Stop Mode The Safety I O Connection where the error occurred will be stopped e Automatic Recovery Mode Repeated attempts will be made to establish the Safety I O Connection again All other operations will be continued d6 2101 Nonexist The Safety Slave device configuration information is invalid IP entSafety or Safety I O Communications is disabled when the Safety Slave Master connection is being established Target node Ist byte Device address No display j Consider the following items 2nd byte els the Safety Slave IP address correct IP address ls the Safety Slave configuration correct els the Safety Slave operating mode correct The recovery method depends on the setting for when an error occurs in Safety Communications
564. sideration before installing the NE2A series Controller to increase the reliability of the system and to ensure that the func tionality of the system is not impaired Installation Do not drop the NE2A series Controller or subject it to excessive vibration or shock The NE2A series Controller may be damaged and may not function properly if itis mishandled Installation and Storage Environment 16 1 2 Do not use or store the NE2A series Controller in any of the following loca tions e Locations subject to direct sunlight e Locations subject to temperatures or humidity outside the range specified in the specifications e Locations subject to condensation as the result of severe changes in tem perature e Locations subject to corrosive or flammable gases e Locations subject to dust especially iron dust or salts e Locations subject to water oil or chemicals e Locations subject to shock or vibration that exceeds the specifications Take appropriate and sufficient measures when installing systems in the fol lowing locations e Locations subject to static electricity or other forms of noise e Locations subject to strong electromagnetic fields e Locations subject to possible exposure to radioactivity e Locations close to power lines Installation in Control Panel e The NE2A series Controller must be installed in a metal cabinet that is connected to ground e Use the NE2A series Controller within an enclosure with IP54 pro
565. smission failed because the other node is not partici pating in the network Connection to the destination device was cutoff and a response to the message could not be sent Consider the following items eis the power supply to the destination device OFF Are the baud rates for devices on the network may the same Are the cable lengths branch main lines suit able e Are any cables disconnected or loose ls there a terminator at each end of the main line els there a lot of noise The message will be discarded and operation con tinued When a response is sent an error response will be returned 0109 00 Request 80 Response Bit 7 ON Bits 0 to 6 Com mand origin node address Tem porary Transmission failed because the other node is busy When a message was sent the destination device returned a notification that there is no buffer Reduce the load on the communications Target The message will be discarded and operation con tinued 519 Troubleshooting DeviceNet Unit Errors Section 19 3 Communications Unit Network Configurator Cause Indi 7 segment Error history Displayed Recovery method cators display message Status after error MS Error Error Saved Detail Detail 010B Tem Transmission The message could not be sent because there porary failed because was an error with the NE2A series CPU Unit 00 Request ee Unit Consider the following i
566. ss Device Password Error The operating mode cannot be changed or the configuration cannot be restored because the password of the Target device does not match See note Check the Target device Alternatively check the operation rights file and recreate it if itis different from the network con figuration Operation continues for the next device 502 C2 07 Target node address Status Error The operating mode cannot be changed or the configuration cannot be restored because the Target device is in an error state or at least notin a state that allows changing the mode See note Check the Target device Alternatively check the operation rights file and recreate it if itis different from the network con figuration Operation continues for the next device Note The mode will be displayed for 30 seconds only when changing the operating mode using the RUN STOP RESTART switch The display remains for the entire duration while configuration is being restored Troubleshooting CPU Unit Errors Section 19 2 Errors Related to Operations with a Memory Card CPU Unit Indi cator 7 segment display MS Error Detail Error name The configuration restore files is not validated Cause Recovery method Status after error The operating mode cannot be changed or the configuration cannot be restored because the authenticity of the configura tion restore file has not
567. ssword prevents unauthorized changes to a network configuration file The network configuration file pass word is requested when any of the following operations is attempted with the Network Configurator e Saving a network configuration file e Reading a network configuration file e Changing the network configuration file password Password When Saving a File The Assign Password Dialog Box will always be displayed to prompt the set ting of a password if Save is selected from the File Menu for a file without a password setting or if Save As is selected from the File Menu Assign Password Please inout a new password for Test080519 New Password Confirm of the New Password OK Cancel 214 Saving and Reading Network Configuration Files Section 9 5 Note e The password can contain from 6 to 16 alphanumeric characters To save the file without setting a password enter nothing and click the OK Button e For security itis recommended that passwords be set for network config uration files When a file for which a password has been set is saved the Confirm Pass word Dialog Box is displayed Confirm Password Please inout the password for TestMANA1 9 Password te If the password that is entered does not match the one that was set an error message will be displayed and the file cannot be saved Password When Opening a File If the password is not correct when opening a file the file will be opened
568. t IP Address Area in the TCP IP Settings Dialog Box to the IP address obtained from the BOOTP server and then select the Use the following IP address Option Set the obtained IP address subnet mask and default gateway EtherNet IP Network Settings Section 12 3 7 Click the Set to the Device Button in the New Configuration Area to down load the settings to the EtherNet IP Unit From the next startup obtaining the IP address using BOOTP will be dis abled IMPORTANT It is possible to obtain the IP address using a BOOTP server even if the IP address setting switches are set to FF If the setting is FF BOOTP will be per formed at every startup Therefore set the IP address setting switches to 00 after the IP address has been obtained and then perform steps 6 and 7 described above 12 3 2 Adding Devices to a Network There are three ways to add devices to a virtual network e Adding a device from the Hardware List Pane Refer to Adding Devices from the Hardware List below e Obtaining the network configuration from the actual network Refer to 17 3 2 Uploading Device Parameters e Selecting Add to Network from the EDS File Menu Adding Devices from the Hardware List Use the following procedure to add a device from the Hardware List Pane to the virtual network Procedure 1 2 3 1 Double click the device in the Hardware List Pane and drag it to the Net work Configuration Pane The following display will appear when the de
569. t Interval RP 1I value and click the OK Button Method 2 Changing a Particular Connection s RPI Setting The Usage of Capacity of the allowed communications bandwidth can be adjusted by individually changing the packet intervals RPI setting for a par ticular connection In this case the Usage of Capacity will also change for the device that is the Target device of the connection which was adjusted Procedure 1 2 3 1 Click the Close Button in the Usage of Device Bandwidth Dialog Box to close the dialog box 2 Select the device that is set as the Originator of the desired connection and select Device Parameter Edit The Edit Device Parameter Dialog Box will be displayed Edit Device Parameters Connections Tag Sets Unregister Device List Product Name Connections 4 256 0 4 T 0 E t Register Device Lis Product Name 192 168 250 3 CJTW EIP21 CJ2 Va Target Variable P 192 168 250 1 001 N A eon input a l n A SSO O cont Output 0020 Output Assembly 0 192 168 250 2 002 N Secon Input Input Assembly 0 con2 Output Output Assembly 0 Eat Delete Editan Cancel 3 In the Register Device List select the connection for which you want to change the packet interval RPI and click the Edit Button The device s Edit Connections Dialog Box will be displayed 325 Checking the Communications Response Performance Section 13 3 192 168 250 1 NEZA ENS21 Edit Connection
570. t Master Each bit corresponds to one DeviceNet node address This table is updated when the Unit is started or when a connection is regis tered Pee Name Stus Registered Slave Indicates that the connection is registered Indicates that the connection is not regis tered 0 1 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 5 54 53 52 51 0 49 48 8 63 62 61 60 59 8 57 6 11 DeviceNet Unit Normal Slave Table This table indicates Slaves communicating with the DeviceNet Master Each bit corresponds to one DeviceNet node address All bits are turned OFF when there is a communications power supply error a transmission times out or scanning stops including scanning stopped by an error All bits will also turn ON if there is a communications error while using I O communications and the Stop Scanning Setting Switch is ON However the 1 0 Communications Error Bit in the Slave Status will be turned ON for Slaves that caused scanning to stop Normal Slave Indicates that a normal connection was established Indicates all of the set connections could not be established 12 DeviceNet Master Output Data NE 2A to Slave This is output data that was 1 sent to a Slave that is set in the connection as the DeviceNet Standard Master and then 2 received from the Standard Mas ter Each connection is allocated an area of 16 byte
571. t Switching Hub 22 Safety Control System Configuration Section 2 2 Comparison of the Above System Configurations Configuration Advantages Disadvantages Centralized Low cost Limited distance compared to control Simple system management distributed control Distributed e Long distance e High cost control Partial startup and adjustment Complex system management are possible e Improved responsiveness within each area Setting the Baud Rate The baud rate is determined by the responsiveness required in the safety specifications and by the communications distance The baud rate can be set to 500 250 or 125 kbps for DeviceNet or to 100 or 10 Mbps for Ethernet Set the same baud rate for all the nodes on the same network Masters and Slaves For details refer to 3 6 DeviceNet Safety Units and 3 7 EtherNet IP Safety Units Network Number and Node Address An NE2A System can include multiple DeviceNet networks Set network num bers and node addresses so that devices in the DeviceNet networks can be uniquely identified An NE2A System can also include multiple EtherNet IP networks Set IP addresses so that devices in the EtherNet IP Ethernet networks can be uniquely identified For details refer to 3 6 DeviceNet Safety Units 3 7 EtherNet IP Safety Units and 5 2 Communications Specifications for NE2A series Controllers 2 2 2 Connecting Safety Devices Design the terminal parameters for the NE2A series
572. t are not listed above conform to 3 1 1 General Specifica tions of NE2A series Controllers Note A Power Supply Unit must be mounted if one or more Communications Units are connected 44 Power Supply Unit Section 3 5 3 5 5 Dimensions Reference Values Dimensions 80 x 90 x 81 6 mm W xH x D Weight 380 g max Unit mm 45 DeviceNet Safety Units Section 3 6 3 6 DeviceNet Safety Units The NE2A DNS21 DeviceNet Safety Unit is for NE2A series Controllers only It cannot be mounted to a CJ series PLC 3 6 1 Nomenclature NE2A DNS21 Indications Unit number switch Node address switches Baud rate DIP switch i DeviceNet connector 46 DeviceNet Safety Units Section 3 6 3 6 2 Indications MS NS Indicators Indicator name Operating status Module Status Power is not being supplied e Normal operation Non fatal error 1 e Unit number setting error or error due to switches being changed during operation Fatal error If the error occurs again the Unit must be replaced Green Red ta e Waiting for configuration Lit green 05s Lit red 0 55 Network Status m eThe Unit power is not being supplied e Network power is not being supplied Offline D Online connection to DeviceNet has not been established ON 0 55 OFF 0 55 sor The DeviceNet Safety Communications DeviceNet Standard Communications or message communicatio
573. t for specified variables and then restart 73 Restore Operation Mode 236 restore operation setting 457 reusing programming 398 Router Devices 222 routing 101 RPI 119 320 RPIs of Tag Data Link Connection 324 RUN 38 68 RUN Mode 68 453 Run Idle Operation Mode 236 RUN IDLE operation setting 457 RUN STOP RESTART switch 38 164 461 S Safety 152 safety chain 171 safety connection communications reopen switch 127 safety connection error status 126 safety connection normal status 126 Safety Connections 102 111 Safety Connections Tab Page 250 safety control 24 Safety CPU Unit 35 safety data 107 115 safety device with a contact output 143 safety device with a semiconductor output 147 safety I O bits 336 Safety I O Information Tab Page 443 Safety Input 141 Safety Input Unit 57 safety inputs 58 safety mark 440 452 Safety Mat 146 Safety Network Controller 2 Safety Output Unit 62 safety outputs 63 safety precautions xxii Safety Pulse Test 152 safety signature 104 Safety Slave I O Tab Page 261 saving network configuration files 210 saving the error history 476 searching for function blocks 389 searching for unconnected function blocks 389 Searching for Variables in the Program 391 Select Network Dialog Box 243 selecting networks 21 SERVICE switch 38 Set Packet Interval RPI Dialog Box 185 321 325 setting a Dual Channel Mode 147 setting assem
574. t is connected A test signal is output to diagnose the safety mat ON Delay 0 1024 ms Specifies the ON delay time selected 347 Setting the I O Configuration of Individual I O Bits Section 14 4 iem O Set value Contents Default OFF Delay 0 1024 ms Specifies the OFF delay time 0 ms selected Dual Channel Single channel Specifies using the bit as an independent Safety Input bit Single Dual channel equiv Specifies using the bit as a dual channel equivalent input with channel alent paired Safety Input bits Dual channel com Used as a dual channel complementary input with paired Safety plementary Input bits Chan Mode nel MAT The paired Safety Input bits can be used for a safety mat This item can be set only in bits 00 and 01 Discrep 0 127 x500 ms Fortwo inputs setin a Dual Channel Mode the time is monitored ancy from a change in the value of one input to a change in the value Time of the other input This is called the discrepancy time When the value of the other input does not change within the set discrep ancy time an error will occur Monitoring is disabled if 0 is set as the value 4 Click the OK Button Setting the Parameters for Paired Bits In a Dual Channel Mode bits 00 and 01 and bits 02 and 03 can be set as pairs e If you set one bit to a Dual Channel Mode the other bit will also be set to the Dual Channel Mod
575. t with the mouse to the desired location 15 6 3 Function Block Settings Procedure 1 2 3 The number of input and output terminals can be changed from the default value for some function blocks Change the input and output terminals accord ing to the function block logic Refer to the Safety Network Controller Command Reference Manual Cat No Z920 for details on the function block settings This section shows how to change the settings for a R eset function block 1 Selectthe Reset function block 2 Select Settings from the Editor Menu or press the shortcut key and select Settings from the menu The Function Block Settings Dialog Box will be displayed The Function Block Settings Dialog Box varies with the select ed function block Parameter In Out Setting Out point Comment Parameter Name Value Reset Reset Reset Reset Signal Low High Low OK Cancel 3 Setthe parameters and click the OK Button For details on parameters refer to the NE2A Series Safety Network Controller Command Reference Manual Cat No Z920 379 Creating Programs Section 15 6 For example the Reset function block settings will be changed as shown in the following diagram The changes are listed in the following table Tab page Parameter Default value Modified value In Out Setting Inputs 2 3 Out point Static Release No check No check Reset Required Indication No check Check Comment Text Blank
576. target is given e DeviceNet Standard Master In normal operation or connection not set e DeviceNet Standard Slave In normal operation or communications not executed EtherNet IP tag data link target In normal operation or communications not executed ON if no Communications Unit is mounted An AND of the communications status of the DeviceNet Standard Master DeviceNet Standard Slave and EtherNet IP tag data link target is given DeviceNet Standard Master An error occurred or communications not executed e DeviceNet Standard Slave An error occurred EtherNet IP tag data link target An error occurred CPU Unit status Normal operation of CPU Unit This bit will be ON if bits 7 8 9 and 10 in 2 Error Status are all OFF CPU Unit error detected Program execution status Normal execution of the program RUN Program execution is stopped or an error has occurred in program execu tion Reserved Reserved 124 Remote I O Allocations RUN Mode status Section 5 8 Description RUN Mode Not RUN Mode Configuration lock status Locked This bit turns ON when the Controller has a valid configuration and is already locked Lock disabled or the Controller is not yet configured Forced status Force Mode is enabled This bit turns ON when the Controller changes to Force Mode for a request from the Network Configurator Force Mode is d
577. tches or DIP switches on each Unit 422 SECTION 17 Downloading Device Parameters and Operating the Safety Control System This section describes how to download parameters to the NE2A series Safety Network Controller system and operate the system 17 1 Overall Procedure for Downloading Parameters and Operating the Safety Control System ieee eda des cert tree ete HER Ee wih elgg AA E ale 424 1722 gt gt Conmiecting Online s tc eek ys de eRe Sad Sie PALES Ot SORE behets 425 17 2 1 Connecting to a Network through the USB Port 425 17 2 2 Connecting to a Network through an DeviceNet Interface Board 426 17 2 3 Connecting to a Network through an Ethernet Port 428 17 2 4 Connected Networks 0 0 00 eee eee ee eee 430 17 2 5 Changing the Connected Network 0 00 431 17 3 Downloading and Uploading Device Parameters 432 17 3 1 Downloading Device Parameters 00000 432 17 3 2 Uploading Device Parameters 0000005 436 17 4 Verifying Parameters and Checking Safety Signatures 439 17 4 1 Verifying Device Parameters 0 00 00 00 0000 439 17 4 2 Device Properties es rorat errn eee eens 442 17 5 Operating the Safety Control System 0000000008 445 17 5 1 Changing the Device Mode 00000 445 17 6 Protecting Device Parameters 00 0 0 eee eee ee eee 447 17
578. tection or higher IEC EN 60529 e Use a DIN Track TH35 7 5 TH35 15 according to IEC 60715 to install the NE2A series Controller on the control panel Mount the NE2A series Controller to the DIN Track using PFP M End Plates not included with the NE2A series Controller to prevent it from falling off the DIN Track because of vibration e Do not use a cable that is longer than 3 m for the power supply Unit Installation Position 408 Allow sufficient space as shown in the following figure between the top bottom and front of the NE2A series Controller and the control panel or parts in the control panel to facilitate ventilation wiring and easy Unit replacement Installation Procedure Section 16 1 Wiring duct 50 mm min 20 mm min rears calea pales EEEE 35 mm DIN Track Sei y ERE 5 A e ee PFP M End Plate 50 mm min Down Wiring duct Note NE2A series Controllers can be mounted only with a DIN Track Mounting directly with screws is not possible Unit Installation Direction To ensure heat dissipation of the NE2A series Controller use only the instal lation direction shown in the following figure Do not mount the Controller as shown in the following figures 409 Installation Procedure Section 16 1 410 Installation Procedure Section 16 1 16 1 3 Mounting I O Units Connect CPU Units and I O Units together by sli
579. ted Geld 55 3 7 5 General Specifications 0 0 0 0 eee eee ee 55 3 7 6 Dimensions Reference Values 0000 e cece ee eens 56 31 32 3 8 3 9 Safety Input Units 20 0403 Si ae toe PR Rune aah AR wh te ee 3 8 1 Nomenclature and Terminal Layout 3 8 2 Indicators s 33 5 nee he eh ec Seed ee ee pee 3 8 3 I O Specifications 2 0 ec eee 3 8 4 TO Terminals and Internal Connection Diagram 3 825 Warns VO Devices a srann ete ease eo LN aS ea 3 8 6 Dimensions Reference Values 00 0c cece eee ee Safety Output Units necete kien E a ee ee E ee aw ee pees 3 9 1 Nomenclature and Terminal Layout 00 329 2 MnidiCators saphena bende eel tener eka Bone pies 3 9 3 I O Specifications 2 0 ee eee 3 9 4 Output Terminals and Internal Connection Diagram 3 9 5 Power Supply Terminal Wiring and Wiring I O Terminals 3 9 6 Dimensions Reference Values 0 000 cece eens 57 57 58 58 59 59 61 62 62 63 63 64 64 66 General Specifications of NE2A series Controllers Section 3 1 3 1 General Specifications of NE2A series Controllers 3 1 1 General Specifications of NE2A series Controllers Power sup Unit power supply VO Specifications 20 4 to 26 4 VDC 24 VDC 15 to 10 ply voltage Input circuit power supply V1 20 4 to 26 4 VDC 24 VDC 15 to 10 Output circuit power sup
580. ted PFD and PFH Values Calculated PFD and PFH values for the NE 2A series Controller are given in the following tables You must cal culate the PFD and PFH values for all devices in the system to ensure that the SIL required by the application is achieved Calculated PFD Values Proof test interval years NE2A SCPUO01 1 14E 06 2 27E 06 4 53E 06 9 06E 06 NE2A SID4 1 1 86E 07 3 71E 07 7 40E 07 1 48E 06 NE2A SOD4 1 2 15E 07 4 27E 07 8 52E 07 1 70E 06 NE2A SCPUO01 1 03E 09 NE2A SID4 1 1 69E 10 NE2A SOD4 1 1 94E 10 Note Verify that all safety functions are operating normally in proof testing 545 546 Appendix A Glossary The following terms are used with the specified definitions in this manual to describe NE2A series Network Safety Controllers Term Definition Communications Unit The collective name of the NE2A DNS21 and NE2A ENS21 These are the DeviceNet Unit and EtherNet IP Unit that support safety communications CPU Unit The name of the NE2A SCPUO1 DeviceNet Unit In this manual refers to the NE2A DNS21 DeviceNet Unit for the NE2A The NE2A DNS21 DeviceNet Unit supports DeviceNet Safety The DeviceNet Unit for the OMRON CJ Series is referred to as the CJ DeviceNet Unit or the CJ 1W DR M21 End Cover The name of the NE2A TERO1 End Unit The name of the NE2A END EtherNet IP Unit In this manual refers to the NE2A EN
581. tem 80 Response els there a lot of noise The message will be discarded and operation con Bit 7 ON unwed Bits 0 to 6 Com mand origin node address 0111 Tem Transmission The command exceeded the maximum data size porary failed because 522 bytes as the message response the command fR iati educe the read size of the communications Tar 00 Request exceeded the get request 80 Response max com mand length The message will be discarded and operation con tinued Bit7 ON Bits 0 to 6 Com mand origin node address 0112 Tem Transmission A connection timeout was detected and the con porary failed because nection was cutoff when trying to send a message of a header response error Reconsider the following items els the communications Target power supply 00 Request 80 Response is OFF Bit7 ON Are the cable lengths branch main lines suit Bits 0 to 6 Com able mand origin node Are any cables disconnected or loose address els there a terminator at each end of the main line els there a lot of noise The response message will be discarded and operation continued 0348 Tem Message dis A new request was received while a message porary carded response was being sent Transmission of the because a new response was canceled 00 Request request was EAA 80 R que Check the transmission interval for requests from SRESPONSE received the communic
582. tended Memory Card is inserted MC PWR Green Lit when power is being supplied to the Memory Card Do not remove the Memory Card while power is being sup plied MC BUSY Yellow Lit when data is being read from or written to the Memory Card Do not remove the Memory Card or turn OFF the Unit power supply while this indicator is lit 35 Safety CPU Unit Section 3 2 Indicator Status and Meaning Indicator name Meaning RUN mode IDLE mode Critical fault status a fatal error has occurred ora Communications Unit is con nected without a Power Supply Unit See note Abort status A non fatal error has occurred See note Green red Waiting for configuration Alternatively CONFIGURATION RESTORE Mode V0 G0 Power is not being supplied to the internal control circuits Program running Program stopped Yellow Force setting resetting enabled Force setting resetting disabled The program has detected an error Check the location of the error using the pro gram monitor The program has not detected an error or program execution is stopped Yellow The configuration is valid and locked The configuration is valid but not locked When the system is operating lock the configuration using the Network Configurator or a Memory Card There is no valid configuration Download the configuration
583. ter P Sa Safety Network Controller x Message Code 232 A tag page will be added for the NE2A Backplane Description LINE2A Backplane T Uinknown OMRO TOOLBUS Cl2 CPUxx 115200 Bitis Offline NE2A series Controller Setup Section 10 1 Setting the Network Number Network numbers are used to uniquely identify devices and perform mutual confirmation when multiple networks are set The system uses TUNIDs Tar get Unique Network Identifiers which are IDs that combine the network num ber and the device node address to uniquely identify the device For details refer to 5 2 2 DeviceNet Communications Network Number Settings 1 2 3 1 Select Properties from the Network Menu The Network Property Dialog Box will be displayed Network Property Generic Type NE24_Backplane Comment NE24_Backplane_1 Network Number Auto 34FB01D9D65E Manual OK Cancel 2 Select Manual User Specified for the network number and enter a value 3 Click the OK Button to set the network number An error message will be displayed if the specified network number is the same as one for another network Network Configurator The specified network number is already exist Note A connection with an unintended device may be established if the network number is not set correctly Set a different network number value for each net work domain and always set the same network number for all devices
584. ter a Safety I O Communications error has occurred If the cause of the communications error is eliminated Safety I O Communications will restart automatically Stop only the connection Specify this mode to keep Safety I O Communications where the error stopped after a Safety I O Communications error occurs occurred on a connection Communications on normal connections remain unaf fected Use one of the following methods to restart the stopped Safety I O Communications 1 Use the Network Configurator to send a command to re start communications 2 Turn ON the Safety I O Communications Restart Flag from the user program Communications can be restart ed with the specified trigger bit The following two types of variables can be used Safety I O Communications Status Safety I O Communications Restart Flag 136 Selecting the Ethernet Switching Hub Section 5 10 5 10 Selecting the Ethernet Switching Hub Note e Always use a Switching hub when using Safety Communications and Tag Data Links in the network e If a repeater hub is used for cyclic communications i e Safety Communi cations and Tag Data Links the network s communications load will increase data collisions will occur frequently and stable communications will not be possible 5 10 1 Switching Hub Types Layer 2 L2 Switching Hub These switching hubs use the Ethernet addresses to switch ports Ordinary switching hubs have this function Layer 3 L
585. ters have been downloaded verify them and check that the parameters saved in the devices and the safety signatures are cor rect Errors during Downloading If an error occurs while downloading the configuration to multiple devices one after the other the following dialog box will be displayed Connection failure 13 OK to continue The process will be continuing after 15 seconds C Continue Abort Even if you do not click any button and wait in this condition the processing for the next device will start after 15 seconds If you click the Continue Button the parameters of the next device will be downloaded If you click the Abort Button the download process will stop there and parameters will not be downloaded to any more devices Along with the display of the error in the Message Report Pane the devices in which an error occurred will be listed in the Error Device List Dialog Box x Message Code Date Description 1 WaAR 0305 2009 02 10 19 05 03 The network structure is not match ERR 0205 2009 02 10 19 04 45 00 NE2A SCPU01 It was canceled by the user 1 wWAR 0305 2009 02 10 19 04 37 The network structure is not match A wWAR 0305 2009 02 10 19 04 13 The network structure is not match 435 Downloading and Uploading Device Parameters Section 17 3 Error device list The following devices skipped the process because of enor occurred Error Device Description O00NE24 SCPUOT lt was cance
586. test drivers and applications for your hardware and download them to your computer gt Yes search online this time only Windows will search for the latest drivers and applications for this device and download them to your computer gt Don t search online Your device may not function properly until you get the latest software Insert the disc that came with your NE1A USB Port If you have the disc that came with your device insert it now Windows will automatically search the disc for driver software gt Idon t have the disc Show me other options 201 Installing the USB Driver Section 9 3 202 4 Select the Browse my computer for driver software advanced Option Windows couldn t find driver software for your device gt Check for a solution Windows will check to see if there are steps you can take to get your device working gt Browse my computer for driver software advanced Locate and install driver software manually 5 Under Search for driver software in this location click the Browse Button select the SafetyDrivers USB folder in the folder in which the Network Configurator was installed or the drivers USB folder in the Network Con figurator Master Disk CD ROM and the click the Next Button Browse for driver software on your computer Search for driver software in this location SafetyDrivers USE RA F Include subfolders 6 The Windows Security Dialog Box will
587. the EtherNet IP Unit if the error recurs when the Controller is restarted The Unit goes offline and communications will be dis abled An error will be returned for all communications requests Data exchange refresh process with the CPU Unit will be continued H6 IP Local node address 000F 0000 CPU Unit faulty A communications error occurred between the EtherNet IP Unitand CPU Unit Replace the CPU Unit if the error recurs when the Control ler is restarted Operation stops 524 Hb IP Local node address 0011 No display CPU Unit event ser vicing time out A timeout occurred while reading parameters to the CPU Unit Replace the EtherNet IP Unit and or the CPU Unit if the error recurs when the Controller is restarted Operation stops Troubleshooting EtherNet IP Unit Errors Communications Unit Network Configurator Indi 7 segment cators display MS Error NS Detail F4 Communi IP cations Controller Error Error history Displayed message Error Saved Detail Local node address Communications Unit Error name Indi 7 segment cators display MS Error NS Detail Section 19 4 Cause Recovery method Status after error An EtherNet IP Unit hardware error has occurred Replace the EtherNet IP Unitif the error recurs when the Controller is restarted The Unit goes offline and communica
588. the Tag Data Link s Target connection will continue sending refreshed data If the CPU Unit status is set the CPU Unit error will be ON Troubleshooting EtherNet IP Unit Errors Section 19 4 Communications Unit Network Configurator Cause Indi 7 segment Error history Displayed Recovery method cators display message Status after error MS Error Error Saved NS Detail Detail HC Routing There is an error with the CPU Unit configuration data IP table logic An EC 12 error may occur in the CPU Unit error Local node If the error recurs after restarting replace the EtherNet IP address Unit or the CPU Unit Operation stops HE 0002 CPU Unit Service from the CPU Unitis disabled for a period IP Service Monitoring is normally for 11 s Local node No display address monitoring error Review the CPU Unit operation environment Replace the CPU Unit if the error recurs Safety I O Communications will be stopped The output data of the Tag Data Link s Target connection will continue sending refreshed data If the CPU Unit status is set the CPU Uniterror will be ON The message will be discarded if the received message needs to be passed to the CPU Unit Returns to normal operation when the error is reset HF CPU Unit An error occurred in the CPU Unit IP ieee Review the CPU Unit s operation environment Local node Replace the CPU Unit if the error recurs address Safety I O communications will s
589. the configuration 162 459 locking the device configuration 451 Logic Editor 353 Logic Editor menus 355 lost device passwords 448 M Maintenance Mode 220 470 managing operation 30 manual connection setting 272 Master Function Status Area 481 483 MAT 146 maximum I O response time 177 179 Memory Card DIP switch 37 Memory Card functions 37 Memory Card models 39 menu commands 222 Message Report Pane 218 minimum I O response time 178 180 mismatching parameters 441 mode change 69 modification password 158 552 Index modification password for user defined function blocks 159 monitoring 464 monitoring device status 471 monitoring DeviceNet Units 480 monitoring EtherNet IP Units 486 monitoring local I O status 477 monitoring programs 464 monitoring Safety Connections 474 monitoring the error history 475 monitoring the operation log 478 mounting Communications Unit 412 mounting End Plates 413 mounting I O Units 411 mounting the DIN Track 413 moving between operating modes 69 moving function blocks 378 multicast 104 multicast connection 93 104 115 multicast filtering 137 NE2A Backplane 232 NE2A USB Port 425 NE2A_Backplane 232 NE2A series Backplane 284 network bandwidth 183 network bandwidth usage 183 Network Configuration List 221 Network Configuration Pane 218 Network Configurator errors 530 network delay 105 network download 433 network ID 2
590. the left footer Center Sets the items to be printed in the center footer Right Sets the items to be printed in the right footer 405 Printing Section 15 10 406 SECTION 16 Mounting Wiring and Hardware Settings This section provides information necessary to install a NE2A series Safety Network Controller including hardware settings 16 1 Installation Procedure 0 0 eee cee nee 408 16 1 1 Installation and Wiring Precautions 00 408 16 1 2 Installation in Control Panel 0 0 00 00000 408 16 1 3 Mounting I O UNIS recisi pn Ena e aR ENA eee eee 411 16 1 4 Mounting Communications Units 000 412 16 1 5 Mounting the DIN Track 0 0 00 0 00 0000 413 16 1 6 Removing an I O Unit 0 0 00 413 16 1 7 Removing a Communications Unit 000 415 16 2 Witt 8 ssc ick Gee Gistencbi leis een Het Wee eG whee yal ele E 416 16 2 1 General Precautions and Reference for Performing Wiring 416 16 2 2 Applicable Wire Sizes Crimp Terminals and Tightening Torque 417 16 2 3 DeviceNet WINS ei soss 0 0 eee eee ee 419 16 2 4 Ethernet Witing co feces oe ed eae os anal ges ts 419 16 3 Hardware Settings orere pres 658 8 Golaw he ea is eee eae eS 422 407 Installation Procedure Section 16 1 16 1 Installation Procedure 16 1 1 Installation and Wiring Precautions Take the following points into con
591. the network to connect to and then click the OK Button The Select Connected Network Dialog Box will be displayed Select Network Target Network O Create new network Use the existing network DeyiceNet_1 OK Cancel Select the Target network in the Target Network Area and then click the OK Button When the online connection has been established successfully the Con nected Network Identifier in the Network Configuration Pane will turn blue Refer to 9 6 2 Network Configuration Pane for details on the Connected Network Identifier NE2A_Backplane_V DeviceNet_1 etherNet IP_1 Changes to blue The connection status will change to On line in the status bar dis played at the bottom of the window Refer to 9 6 5 Status Bar for details on the connection status LiDeviceNet T DeviceNet NE2A amp TOOLBUS NEZA SCPUOL 115200 Bit s On line i ee 17 2 3 Connecting to a Network through an Ethernet Port Procedure 1 2 3 1 Select Select Interface Ethernet I F from the Options Menu Select Connect from the Network Menu You can also right click the mouse in an open area of the Network Config uration Pane and select Connect from the pop up menu Or you can click the Connect Icon amp in the toolbar Note The Select Interface Dialog Box will be displayed if multiple computer Ether net ports are enabled 3 428 Select Interface Select Interface Card E
592. the node addresses header names device types product names and revisions of the devices registered in the Master The information on the devices registered in the Master is the information stored in the Master 220 Main Window and Menus Section 9 6 The following table describes the items NE24_Backplane_1 DeviceNet_1 EtherNet IP_1 Comment HH Vendor Device Type Re A NE24 DNS21 00 Omron Corporation Communications Adapter 1 0 s DST1 ID12SL 1 01 00 Omron Corporation Safety Discrete 1 0 Device 1 07 DST1 MDI6SL 1 02 00 Omron Corporation Safety Discrete 1 0 Device 1 07 Comment Description The comment describes the device You can change the comment by selecting Change Device Comment in the Device Menu The DeviceNet node address or EtherNet IP IP address of the device If the device is a Slave the DeviceNet node address or EtherNet IP IP address of the Master at registration destination Name of device vendor Vendor Device Type Type of device Rev Device version Product Name Product name of device Detailed Display 2 Based on Slaves The Master device comments device descriptions and Master device node address are displayed along with the node addresses header names device types product names and revisions of the devices registered in the Master The information on the devices registered in the Master is the information 9 6 3 stored in the
593. the output variables are not equivalent e The outputs to the external devices are made inactive regardless of the status of the user program e The indicators of both of the Safety Output terminals with the error light red e The error appears in the error history e The NE 2A series Controller continues to operate Error Latch Time Setting The error latch time can be set between 0 and 25 500 ms in increments of 100 ms The default is 1 000 ms When monitoring errors from a monitoring system take the monitoring interval into account when setting the error latch time Resetting Errors All the following conditions must be met to reset errors that occur in the Safety Outputs e The cause of the error must be removed e The latch error time must have elapsed e The output signal from the user application for the corresponding Safety Output terminal to the output variable must be inactive Note Ifa Dual Channel Mode is set for two outputs to implement redundant circuits and an error is detected for one of the outputs the other output can be made to go inactive without relying on the user program If redundant circuits are implemented using two outputs in Single Channel Mode the user program must be used to detect the error using the External Device Monitoring function block 155 Safety Output Functions Section 6 3 156 SECTION 7 Functions for Operation and Maintenance This section describes the functions used to operate and ma
594. the settings so that there are no duplications and restart the EtherNet IP Unit The Unit will be offline and communications disabled An error will be returned for all communications requests Data exchange with the CPU Unit refresh will be contin ued 525 Troubleshooting EtherNet IP Unit Errors Communications Unit Network Configurator Indi cators 7 segment display Error history MS NS Error Detail C8 IP Local node address Error Detail 03D9 Refer to Cause col umn Saved Displayed message Switch changed during oper ation Section 19 4 Cause Recovery method Status after error 1 The IP address setting switches were changed during operation Error detail 02 Value before switch was changed 2 After the configuration was completed the IP address was changed by the IP address rotary switches ora soft ware setting and operation was restarted Error detail 03 Rightmost byte of IP address when config uration is completed Reset the setting to what it was before the change was made Alternatively restart the EtherNet IP Unit after the change is made Download the IP address configuration data that matches the IP address set by the BOOTP TCP IP setting or node address setting switch Safety I O Communications will be stopped Tag Data Links Standard I O Communications and other operations will be continued Safety I O Communications wil
595. the size of each I O tag are displayed Adding an Input Assemble Procedure 1 2 3 1 Click the New Input Button on the Slave I O DeviceNet Tab Page The Edit Slave I O DeviceNet Dialog Box will be displayed 274 Using an NE2A series Controller as a Standard Slave Section 11 7 Edit Slave 1 0 DeviceNet Name InputAssembly0 Data E oy Variable BES General Status 4 Overall Unit status 5 Local 0 status 4 Safety 1 0 communications status 1 Standard 1 0 communications status 5 CPU Unit Status Offset Type Size Total Size 0 200 Byte Register 0 64 Variables 10 2048 Use as default 1 0 data Specify the connection OK Cancel 2 Setthe data for the input assembly and click the OK Button Refer to 11 7 2 Setting Assembly Data to set the I O assembly data Adding an Output Assembly Procedure 1 2 3 1 Click the New Output Button on the Slave I O DeviceNet Tab Page The Edit Slave I O DeviceNet Dialog Box will be displayed The subsequent steps are the same as those given above in Adding an In put Assembly Changing I O Assemblies Procedure 1 2 3 1 Selectthe I O assembly to be changed 2 Click the Edit Button on the Slave I O DeviceNet Tab Page The Edit Slave I O DeviceNet Dialog Box will be displayed 3 Change the I O assembly data and click the OK Button Refer to 11 7 2 Setting Assembly Data to set the I O assembly data Deleting I O Assemblies Pr
596. then select the desired mode A dialog box will be displayed to confirm changing the mode Network Configuraton t The mode of selected devices will be changed e OK Yes No 3 Click the Yes Button A dialog box prompting the input of the device password will be displayed 00 NEZA SCPUOT Please input the Device Password Password OK Cancel 4 Input the password of the Target device and click the OK Button If you select more than one device in step 1 the Use this password for all device Check Box will be enabled If you select the Use this password for all device Check Box you can use the same password to check all devices The process for changing the device operating mode will start and the fol lowing dialog box will be displayed Changing Device Mode 00 445 Operating the Safety Control System Section 17 5 IMPORTANT The Status Icon in the Maintenance Mode of the Network Configuration Pane can be used to check the operating mode It will be green in IDLE Mode and blue in RUN Mode 00 00 NE2 SCPU01 NE24 SGPUO1 IDLE Mode RUN Mode 446 Protecting Device Parameters Section 17 6 17 6 Protecting Device Parameters You can protect the parameters and status of Safety Devices from uninten tional changes by setting device passwords This section describes how to set device passwords as a measure for protecting device parameters A Safety Device will save the passw
597. thernet Adapter 192 168 250 254 Cancel Select the Ethernet port to connect to and then click the OK Button The Select Connect Network Port Dialog Box will be displayed Connecting Online Section 17 2 Select Connect Network Port Select a network port that you would like to connect Browse Jr Device Information Vendor ID Product Name Device Type Revision Refresh 4 Select the network to connect to and then click the OK Button The Select Connected Network Dialog Box will be displayed Select Connected Network Please select a network where the connected network was supported Target Network Create new network EtherNet IP_1 oe _ C 5 Select the Target network to connect to and click the OK Button When the online connection has been established successfully the Con nected Network Identifier in the Network Configuration Pane will turn blue Refer to 9 6 2 Network Configuration Pane for details on the Connected Network Identifier NE2A_Backplane_1 DeviceNet_ a EtherNetjIP_1 Changes to blue The connection status will change to On line in the status bar dis played at the bottom of the window Refer to 9 6 5 Status Bar for details on the connection status Ethernet Adapter 192 168 250 254 100M On line gt 429 Connecting Online Section 17 2 17 2 4 Connected Networks If you use the Network Configurator and an NE2A series
598. ting Check the Unit status Check from Network Configurator indications Yes 7 segment display on the CPU Unit show the program ID Identify type of Unit error from error code on 7 segment display Do the 7 segment displays on the the local node address y CPU Unit Error Determine cause of error and countermeasure from error code and detail code No Communications Units show Yes Message communications error or program error Communications Unit Error Determine cause of error and countermeasure from error code and detail code y Identify Unit with error using monitor mode y 1 0 Unit Error Identify Unit with error from detail code Identify error bit from Unit indicators Determine cause of error and countermeasure from error code CPU Unit Errors Check error history Determine cause of error and countermeasure Error codes are displayed on the 4 digit 7 segment display on the NE2A series CPU Unit The operating status of the CPU Unit program and Memory Card are also displayed Refer to 3 2 Safety CPU Unit for details on the status indicators 493 Troubleshooting CPU Unit Errors Section 19 2 Alarms and warnings that have occurred in the CPU Unit can be checked from the Network Configurator on the CPU Unit
599. ting variables from a list of defined I O tags This method saves time because variable names are defined automati cally and the variables are linked to the I O tags Section1 X Variables ax a e o Name DataType Device I O Tag Q EMO 1 BOOL Q EMO 2 BOOL amp DoorSw 1 BOOL Qy DoorSw 2 BOOL Reset BOOL YO Tag List vax B Saa NE2A SCPU0I 2B slot 1 GST4D041 S Safety Input OO e DoorSw 1 O1JP 2 DoorSw 2 02 N e No Name 5 03 N e No Name _ Standard Input Aa slot 2 GST 0D04 1 _ Standard Input Network DeviceNet_1 01 DST1 MD16SL 1 S Safety Input lw w S O0 P e EMO NC S O1NP ekEMO NC S 02 N e Safety Input 2 5 _ 03 N e Safety Input 3 3 Local I O and remote I O can be allocated to variables after completing the program The following types of variables can be used They can be linked to the I O signals indicated in the table Type Description Input Variables that can be linked to the following signals variables cal inputs Signals of Safety Input device connected to NE2A series Safety Input Units Remote inputs Signals of Safety Input device connected to Slaves on the network Status NE2A series Controller internal status signals Output Variables that can be linked to the following signals variables ocal outputs Signals of Safety Output device connected to NE2A series Safety Output Units Remote
600. tions functions by joining tag sets with connections In the following example Originator variables a b c g inputs are made into a tag set named SP1_IN and the Target variables i and ii outputs are made into a tag setnamed SP1_OUT for the connection Originator Device Target Device NE2A series Controller Connection Information e Target IP address e Target tag set e Originator tag set e Packet interval RP1 Input Tag Set Tag setname SP1 IN Connection Output Tag Set Tag setname SP1 OUT PLC status NE2A Sseries Controller status Variable b Flow of data Variable g EtherNet IP A tag set contains either input consume or output produce data Therefore one tag set cannot contain both input and output variables Furthermore one input variable cannot be registered in more than one input tag set One tag set can be assigned to one connection with the EtherNet IP Unit Variables are set for tag sets using the Network Configurator Connection Information Set for Tag Data Links The following parameters are set for Tag Data Links Connection name Sets the name for the connection Any name can be used Connection 1 0 type When using NE 2A series Controllers select from Input Only Output Only or Input amp Output Target variable Set the Target node s tag set IN Set the output produce tag set OUT Set the input consume tag set Originator variabl
601. tions stop UF 01 2081 Communica The Communications Unit stopped after a watchdog timer Communica tions Unit error tions Communica watchdog Check the power supply voltage of the NE2A PD025 Power tions a Supply Unit to see if it has dropped or is unstable i CPU Unit operation continues Servicing stops for the appli cable Communications Unit so Safety I O Communications and Standard I O Communications through that Unit stop 507 Troubleshooting CPU Unit Errors Section 19 2 Errors Related to the Program CPU Unit Network Configurator Cause Indi 7 segment Error history Displayed Recovery method cator display message Status after error MS Error Error Saved Detail Detail Function A logic error was detected in a function block of the user pro block error gram The way to cancel the error depends on the function block If the error recurs review the discrepancy time set the pro gram execution delay and download the new settings Safety Network Controller Command Reference Manual Cat No Z920 CPU Unit operation continues The PERR indicator lights red Errors Related to Message Communications CPU Unit Network Configurator Cause Indi 7 segment Error history Displayed Recovery method cator display message Status after error MS Error Error Saved Detail Detail Discard An invalid message was received and discarded Resp
602. tions will be dis abled An error will be returned for all communications requests e Data exchange refresh process with the CPU Unit will be continued Cause Recovery method Status after error Flash HO CPU Unit Connection error with The EtherNet IP Unit is connected to a CPU Unit that does ing IP unsupported device not support it red Local node Check the CPU Unit address Mount the EtherNet IP Unit properly OFF Operation stops Flash H1 Unit number setting error The unit number is duplicated or is invalid An EC 13 error ing IP may occur in the CPU Unit red Correct the unit number setting and restart the EtherNet IP Unit OFF Operation stops Monitoring is not possible with the Network Configurator Flash H2 Unit Identification Error A Unit identification error has occurred at the CPU Unit i IP Replace the CPU Unit if the error recurs when the Control re Local node ler is restarted address Operation stops OFF Hardware Setting Errors for EtherNet IP Units Communications Unit Network Configurator Indi 7 segment cators display MS Error NS Detail Flash FO ing IP ied Local node address Error history Displayed message Error Saved Detail 0211 IP Address Duplication 02 IP address Lit red Cause Recovery method Status after error The same EtherNet IP Unit IP address is set for another node Check the IP addresses of other nodes Change
603. to allocation Register Device List Product Name EPI Feactio Typ CORE as Safety Input Assembly 1 Oms 35ms In Select name of the Safety Slave 2 Click the Register Unregister Button Itis possible to unregister all connections if they have already been set and register the connections and the parameters for those connections if the connections have not been set Clicking the Register Unregister Button when the Connection Is Not Reg istered Edit Device Pasameters Slave I O DeviceNet Target 1 0 EtherNet IP 170 Unit Communication Unit Mode Cycle Time Extend Mode Logic Safety Connections Safety Slave 1 0 Connections 1 160 44 a X E Anto allocation Register Device List Product Name EPI T Rea yal Automatically registered Clicking the Register Unregister Button when the Connection Is Regis tered Edit Deyice Panameters Slave 1 0 DeviceNet Target 1 0 EtherNet IP 140 Unit Communication Unit Mode Cycle Time Extend Mode Logic Safety Connections Safety Slave 1 0 Connections 0 180 Fy el aS Auto allocation Register Device List Product Name EPI Reactio Typ pH DSTADIZSLA DeviceNet nL a la A L Unregistered Note 1 To delete a Safety Slave from the Register Device List Area select the Safety Slave to delete and click the Delete Button gt 2 The program may be affected if a Safety Connection setting is changed After mak
604. to show the details of the error That error status will also be displayed when a Safety I O Communica tions timeout error occurs Operation history and error The history of operations executed by the Controller and the history of 18 3 18 4 log monitoring errors detected by the Controller are saved separately These histories can be monitored cleared and saved in a personal computer Maintenance Downloading by using a The configuration can be downloaded to the Controller or to the Control 7 2 Memory Card ler and the devices on the same DeviceNet network without requiring a personal computer Locking by using a Memory The configuration can be locked for the Controller or for the Controller 7 2 Card and the devices on the same DeviceNet network without requiring a per sonal computer Operation checking with The RUN STOP RESTART switch can be used to start and stop program 7 2 RUN STOP RESTART execution and to restart the Controller enabling operations to be checked switch onsite without requiring a personal computer Total run time management The Controller accumulates and records the time from when the power 18 2 supply is turned ON Number of contactopera With each local input or local output contact the OFF to ON count is 18 2 tions incremented and saved internally If the total count reaches a threshold value the applicable Connected Device Maintenance Flag in the con nected device maintenance status turns ON Pr
605. to the Menus Area and press the ESC Key to switch from the Menus Area to the Windows Area When you switch to the Menus Areas the File Menu will be selected Ei 0 x p alee A EY PPA a DEn APRS I PAY a AGa innn nunnnnannnnnnmnnnn an n n Menu Area F 1 SR e AAs oe Dooaaram aaa i eer eee re Window Area SRE coe 8 COL F Ep Ae x aema Aara aneen nens JE py Useervcnten to nse o f f Selecting a Window or Section Use the following procedure to switch between work windows and sections To switch between active windows press the Ctrl Tab Keys The window shown below will be displayed e If you keep the Ctrl Key pressed you can hold the display of the window shown below If you press the Ctrl lt or Ctrl Keys you can switch between Active Tool Windows group of windows and Active Files group of sections e Press the Ctrl Tab Keys to switch between windows or between sections e When you release the Ctrl Key you will be able to operate the shortcut keys in the window or section where the cursor is displayed The Active Tool Windows Area lists all the windows while the Active Files Area lists the sections displayed in the Program Window Tag 361 Logic Editor Functions Section 15 3 Switch between areas by using the Ctrl lt or Keys lt Active Tool Windows Active Files EJ Project E Function Blocks ka Library Select with the E Program Chain Ctr
606. top Tag Data Link Target connection output data will stop being sent If the CPU Unit status is set a CPU Unit error will occur The message will be discarded if the received mes sage needs to be passed to the CPU Unit Communications Errors for EtherNet IP Units Communications Unit Network Configurator Cause Indi 7 segment Error history Displayed Recovery method cators display message Status after error MS Error Error Saved NS Detail Detail El 03D3 Tem Ethernet The link between switching hubs cannot be detected IP porary ens Consider the following items Local node 0000 els the cable connected address ls the Hub power supply ON Are any cables disconnected or loose els there a lot of noise The Unit will go offline and communication will be disabled An error will be returned for all communications requests Data exchange with the CPU Unit refresh will be contin ued 527 Troubleshooting EtherNet IP Unit Errors Section 19 4 Communications Unit Network Configurator Cause Indi 7 segment Error history Displayed Recovery method cators display message Status after error MS Error Error Saved NS Detail Detail Al 2100 Partofthe The Safety Master connection supported by the IP System EtherNet IP Unit was disconnected while part of the Sys tocalhode 00 IP ak Re stopped due to a Safety I O Communications address address f Safety 0 Establi
607. top and bottom until they click into place and the Units are locked together Slide the sliders toward the back until you hear a click Be sure to mounta Power Supply Unit to the left end when adding a Com munications Unit Operation will not be performed correctly if a Power Sup ply Unit is not mounted 412 Installation Procedure Section 16 1 16 1 5 Mounting the DIN Track Mounting the DIN Track Mount the NE2A series Controller Units to a DIN Track Mount the DIN Track with screws in every three oval holes i e at a pitch of 105 mm max DIN Track PFP 50N 50 cm or PFP 100N 100 cm Mount the DIN Track with screws at a pitch of 105 mm max Mounting End Plates Always secure the Units with one PFP M End Plates on each end Hook the bottom of the End Plate on the DIN Track as shown at 1 in the fig ure hook on the top of the End Plate on the DIN Track and then pull down on the End Plate as at 2 in the figure Tighten the screw to secure the End Plate End Plate End Unit End Plate Note Be sure to secure the Controller between two End Plates one each side 16 1 6 Removing an I O Unit Removing Only the Terminal Block Release the hooks on the top and bottom of the terminal block and pull out the terminal block Pull toward you lt Release the hooks on the upper and lower parts of the terminal block 413 Installation Procedure Section 16 1 Removing Only the Main Block
608. tor created the network configuration but it can also be specified by the user Setting a Network Number A network number needs to be specified in the following cases e When multiple Network Configurators are used to set individual devices e When more than one Network Configurator is used to make settings on the same network the same network number must be set for each Net work Configurator e When more than one type of Support Software is used Note 1 If the network number is not set correctly a connection may be opened to a different device A different network number must be set for each net work domain The same network number must be set for all the devices on the same domain 2 Users do not normally need to be aware of the existence of network num bers because they can visually identify devices on the Network Configu rator 96 Communications Specifications for NE2A series Controllers Section 5 2 Setting a Node Address The node address can be set to any number between 00 and 63 as long as the same address is not set on another node in the same network A node address duplication error will occur if the same address is set for more than one node Communications will not start if this error occurs Set the node address of an NE2A series DeviceNet Safety Unit NE2A DNS21 so that it matches the setting on the rotary switches Refer to 3 6 3 Switches for how to set the node address on the rotary switches 5 2 3 Ethe
609. tor device The output assembly is data from the Origina tor device to the Target device Target device Originator device Note Up to 2 input assemblies and 2 output assemblies can be registered for a Tar get device Procedure 1 2 3 1 Select the NE2A SCPUO1 to be used as the Target device 298 Using an NE2A series Controller as a Standard Slave Section 12 7 2 Select Parameter Edit from the Device Menu You can also right click the NE2A SCPUO1 device to use as the Target de vice and select Parameter Edit from the menu Or you can double click the NE2A SCPU01 device to use as the Target device The Edit Device Parameter Dialog Box will be displayed 3 Click the Target I O EtherNet IP Tab The Target I O EtherNet IP Tab Page on the Edit Device Parameters Di alog Box will be displayed The following information is displayed on the Target I O EtherNet IP Tab Page tem Information displayed The name of the registered I O assembly and the name of the I O tag defined in the assembly 5 are displayed The type of I O assembly i e input or output and the data type of the I O tag are displayed The size of the I O assembly and the size of each I O tag are displayed Adding an Input Assembly Procedure 1 2 3 1 Click the New Input Button on the Target I O EtherNet IP Tab Page The Edit Target I O EtherNet IP Dialog Box will be displayed Edit Target MO Lthor
610. tory Device Status D 13 DeviceNet Connection Status Connection Name Type Status 13 13 Safety Input Assembly 1 DeviceN In D0 0001 D 13 Safety Dutput Assembly 1 Device Out D0 0001 Resume Resume All The status codes i e error codes can be monitored By monitoring the sta tus codes when a failure occurs in establishing a connection the cause of the failure can be checked based on the status code returned from the Target device Refer to SECTION 19 Troubleshooting for details on the status codes Also if Connection Stop Mode is selected for communications errors you can use this dialog box to restart the connection In this dialog box if you click the Resume Button after selecting the stopped connection from the Connection Status communications to the specified connection can be established again If you click the Resume All Button I O communications can be established again for all Slaves for which I O communications have stopped Repeated attempts will be made until all connections are resumed 18 2 5 Monitoring the Error History The error history of the NE2A NE1A NEOA or DST1 can be monitored from the Network Configurator An NE 2A series Controller can internally store up to 100 records in the error history If any more errors occur the oldest records will be deleted The errors that are stored in the error history include errors that are saved in the non volatile memory and are not deleted even whe
611. trical engineer or the equivalent e Personnel in charge of introducing FA and safety systems into production facilities e Personnel in charge of designing FA and safety systems e Personnel in charge of managing FA facilities e Personnel who have the qualifications authority and obligation to provide safety during each of the following product phases mechanical design installation operation maintenance and disposal General Precautions Z N WARNING Z N WARNING The user must operate the product according to the performance specifica tions described in the operation manuals Before using the product under conditions which are not described in the manual or applying the product to nuclear control systems railroad systems aviation systems vehicles combustion systems medical equipment amuse ment machines safety equipment and other systems machines and equip ment that may have a serious influence on lives and property if used improperly consult your OMRON representative Make sure that the ratings and performance characteristics of the product are sufficient for the systems machines and equipment and be sure to provide the systems machines and equipment with double safety mechanisms This manual provides information for programming and operating the Unit Be sure to read this manual before attempting to use the Unit and keep this man ual close at hand for reference during operation It is extremely important t
612. ts have already been set using the procedures in 14 3 Setting the I O Configuration from the Wizard and 14 4 Setting the I O Configuration of Individual I O Bits can be copied This helps increase efficiency when setting the same Safety Device configuration for more than one I O Unit 1 Inthe I O Unit Tab Page of the Edit Device Parameters Dialog Box select the slot of the I O Unit to be copied and then click the Copy Button 2 Selectthe slot where the I O Unit copy is to be created and click the Paste Button If you select a slot that has already been set a message box will be dis played to allow you to confirm overwriting Setting the I O Unit Configuration Section 14 2 Edit Device Parameters Communication Unit Mode Cycle Time Extend Mode Logic Safety Connections Memory Info Safety Slave 1 0 Slave 1 0 DeviceNet Target 1 0 EtherNet IP 170 Unit Configuration Slot Unit Type 02 03 o 05 06 o7 08 03 10 n 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 NE2A OD04 1 NE2A OD04 1 NE2A ID04 1 NE2A ID04 1 Cancel Edit Device Parameters E Communication Unit Mode Cycle Time Extend Mode Logic Safety Connections Memory Info Safety Slave 1 0 Slave I O DeviceNet Target 1 0 EtherNet IP 1 0 Unit Configuration Slot Unit Type ot NE24 OD04 1 02 NE2A OD04 1 03 NE24 ID04 1 NE24 ID04 1 04 C NNE24 0004 1 v 06 07 08 093 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 335 Setting
613. ts is 6 including DeviceNet Units and EtherNet IP Units Up to three EtherNet IP Units can be con nected A Power Supply Unit is required when one or more Communica tions Units are mounted 19 Devices in the System Configuration Section 2 1 System Configuration with an NE 2A series Controller 9 Network Configurator cz e 2 12 CS1 C 1 PLC 2 15 EtherNet IP DeviceNet Router DeviceNet 7 14 Ethernet Switch Ca 2 NE2A 3 CS1 C 1 PLC 1 10 Safety 13 Standard Controller Slaves 11 Safety Slaves 20 Safety Control System Configuration Section 2 2 2 2 Safety Control System Configuration This section describes the points to be considered and the restrictions when determining the system configuration 2 2 1 Network System Configuration The following communications networks can be used by the NE2A series Controllers DeviceNet Safety Communications DeviceNet Standard Commu nications EtherNet IP Safety Communications and EtherNet IP Standard Communications Controller signals can be monitored from a Standard PLC This makes it pos sible to build a system that integrates device control and Safety Control CS1 C 1PLC 2 EtherNet IP DeviceNet Router Ao reef DeviceNet Safety Communications gt EtherNet IP Safety Communications DeviceNet 7 i CS1 C 1PLC 1 DeviceNet Standard Communications EtherNet IP Standard Communications NE2A 1 DeviceNet 3
614. ts will be made to establish the Standard I O Connection again Other operations will be continued Troubleshooting DeviceNet Unit Errors Communications Unit Network Configurator Indi cators 7 segment display Error history MS NS Error Detail d9 Target node address Error Detail 0345 01 Slave node address Saved Displayed message Standard I O Connection Timeout Section 19 3 Cause Recovery method Status after error A timeout occurred during remote I O communica tions with the Master Consider the following items eis the Standard Slave power supply OFF Are baud rates for the Standard Master and Stan dard Slaves on the network the same Are the cable lengths branch main lines suitable Are any cables disconnected or loose els there a terminator at each end of the main line els there a lot of noise Repeated attempts will be made to establish the Standard I O Connection again Other operations will be continued dA Target node address 2102 01 Safety Slave node address Safety I O Con nection Time out A communications timeout occurred during Safety 1 0 Communications with the Slave device Consider the following items els the Safety Slave node address correct els the Safety Slave configuration correct The recovery method depends on the setting for when an error occurs in Safety Communications Connection Stop Mode
615. tus Network type Communications Connection Num lock being built interface status caps lock Type of connected network ANS 0C The following table describes the information displayed on the status bar Name Description Indicates the Network Configurator status and gives a descrip tion of the menu and toolbar A menu description or toolbar icon description is displayed when the mouse is moved to a menu or toolbar icon Network type Displays the network type DeviceNet EtherNet IP or being built L NE2A_Backplane of the network in the Network Configuration Pane Type of connected Displays the network type of the connected main network network T DeviceNet EtherNet IP or NE2A_Backplane Unknown will be displayed when offline Communications Displays details on the interface used for the connection For fur interface ther information refer to the following table Connection status Indicates the connection status of the Network Configurator to the network On line The blue icon indicates that the Network Configu rator is connected to the network Off line The gray icon indicates that the Network Configu rator is not connected to the network CAP will be displayed when the Caps Lock Key is ON nothing will be displayed when the Caps Lock Key is OFF NUM will be displayed if the Num Lock Key is ON nothing will be displayed when the Num Lock Key is OFF 228 Main Wind
616. ty Outputs or test out puts Do not connect loads beyond the rated value to the Safety Outputs and test outputs Serious injury may possibly occur due to loss of required safety functions Wire the NE2A series Controller properly so that the 24 VDC line does NOT touch the outputs accidentally or unintentionally and cause the load to turn ON due to short ing of the 24 VDC line Serious injury may possibly occur due to loss of required safety functions Ground the 0 V line of the power supply for external output devices so that the devices do NOT turn ON when the Safety Output line or the test output line is grounded Serious injury may possibly occur due to loss of required safety functions Use appropriate components or devices according to the requirements given in the following table oO Oo Control device Requirements Contactor Use contactors with a forcibly guided mechanism and monitor the auxiliary NC contacts to detect contactor failures For feedback sig nals use devices with contacts capable of switching microloads of 4 mA at 24 VDC Other devices Evaluate whether devices used are appropriate to satisfy the requirements of the safety category level Note e Separate I O cables from high voltage lines and power lines e Use I O cables of 100 m or less Do not apply power to the output terminals Doing so may result in prod uct damage or burning 65 Safety Output Units Section 3 9 3 9
617. ty Sensor If the channel mode is set to Test pulse from test output select Single beam Safety Sensor as the test output mode for the test output terminal A 24 VDC semiconductor output such as an OSSD output from a Single beam Safety Sensor is input to the Safety Input terminal The following errors can be detected using the test output signal e Input signal contact with the power supply line positive side e Ground faults of input signal Operation errors of externally connected device The sensor is connected to input IN1 Connecting a Single beam Safety Sensor Example Receiver 144 Safety Input Functions Section 6 2 Connecting a D40A Non contact Switch If the channel mode is set to Test pulse from test output select D40A Non contact Switch as the test output mode for the test output terminal The OMRON D40A Non contact Door Switch output is input to the Safety Input terminal The following errors can be detected using the test output signal Input signal line contact with the power supply line positive side e Ground faults of input signals Too many connected devices Connecting an OMRON D40A Non contact Door Switch Example n 30 max Ni 0 White Black White Black White Black INO Blue Blue Blue 17 2 M n Brown Brown Brown 24VDC OV Note The OMRON D40A Non contact Door Switch output is a single signal line Create a
618. uipment and Technology for performing work to lay networks Itis recommended that work for laying the network be performed by a ser vice provider that is familiar with the safety measures and specifications Do not install Ethernet network devices near devices that generate noise If devices must be installed in an environment that is subject to excessive noise always take measures against noise such as by storing each net work configuration device in a metal enclosure or using optical cable for part of the system e If increased communications traffic can be expected due to Tag Data Links when the EtherNet IP network is laid together with a data network it is recommended to make a network configuration that will not be affected such as by using a separate Ethernet segment for the data for the EtherNet IP network 419 Wiring Section 16 2 Precautions for Laying Twisted pair Cable e The level of noise resistance may decrease due to a grounding loop caused by how the shields are connected or how the devices are grounded Connect the shields as shown in the following figure i e con nect each shield at only one point Do not connect the connector shield on the EtherNet IP Unit Connect each shield at only one end of the cable that connects two hubs together Hub Hub Connector Connector Connector Connector Connector Connect shield X Do not connect shield EIP Unit Power Supply Un
619. ultiple variables in a program can be monitored at the same time Force setting resetting vari ables Input signals to and output signals from the user program can be set turned ON or reset turned OFF regardless of the status of external input devices or the results of user program execution Cycle time calculation The instruction execution cycle time and peripheral servicing cycle time are automatically calculated by the Network Configurator according to the configuration such as the size of the program the number of I O Units the number of Communications Units and the connection settings Program execution start delay This function delays program execution until Safety I O Communications are started A logic error may occur at the function block if the program is executed without waiting for the start of Safety I O Communications Logic errors can be prevented by using this function Security Project file protection Passwords can be Set for project files to prevent unexpected changes These passwords are called project file passwords Parameter protection Passwords can be set to restrict access to NE2A series Controller parameters including programs to prevent unexpected references and changes These passwords are called parameter passwords Device protection Passwords can be set for devices to prevent unexpected parameter and program downloading or to prevent changes to operating status
620. unction Block Type Canon iR C5870 LIPSLX is 1 0 Urits Where IP_10 6 135 14 Status Ready E System Parameter Comment Print to file MS Slave 1 0 Copies Number of copies 1 rijei OK Cancel What happens after clicking the Property Button varies with the type of printer so no description is given here 2 Select the information to be printed The print information is listed in the following table Print information NE2A SCPUO1 Variable Sets whether to print information on variables Section Sets whether to print sections User defined Function Block Sets whether to print user defined function blocks I O Unit Sets whether to print I O Units System Settings Sets whether to print the system settings Slave I O Sets whether to print Slave 1 0 Printer Printer Sets the printer Status Displays the status of the selected printer Type Displays the type of the selected printer Location Displays the location of the selected printer Comment Displays the comment for the selected printer Output to file Sets whether to output the information to a file No of Copies No of copies Sets the number of pages to print Printin sections Sets whether to collate the copies 3 Click the OK Button to begin printing e Click the Cancel Button to stop the printing process e Click the Preview Button to display the Print Preview Window e Refer to 15 10 2 Print
621. uration file of the network The Confirm Password Dialog Box will be displayed Confirm Password Please input the password for TESTOSO00708 003 Password Cancel Enter the password and click the OK Button The Select Network Dialog Box will be displayed Select Target Network Target Network MEZA Backplane 1 EtherNet IP_1 DeviceNet_1 ok Cancel Selectthe networks to use Clear the selection of any network that you will not use Click the OK Button The data of the selected networks will be read 213 Saving and Reading Network Configuration Files Section 9 5 Reading Network Configuration Files by Device Procedure 1 2 3 1 Place the same model of device in the virtual network as the device that data will be read from 2 Select the device and select Parameter Read from the Device Menu You can also press the shortcut key and select Parameter Save from the menus The Open Device Parameters Dialog Box will be displayed Open Deyice Parameters Look in LJ NE24_ DATA Ja NE2a ScPLOI File name Operi Files of type Configurator Device Parameters File dwf hd Cancel 3 Name the file and click the Open Button The configuration data for the de vice will be read and set for the selected device 9 5 3 Password Protection for Network Configuration Files Passwords can be set for network configuration files The password is encrypted and saved in the file Setting a pa
622. uration restore file Note The error display will disappear when the Memory Card is removed The relevant function is not executed and other operations continue Switch changed during operation Either the MC DOWNLOAD or MC LOCK pin on the Memory Card DIP switch was turned ON during operation Note Turning OFF the DIP switch pin in CONFIGURATION RESTORE Mode will not affect operation Change the switch pin back to OFF Note The error display will disappear when the pin is turned OFF The error will be displayed only Operation will continue Switch Failure The RUN STOP RESTART switch setting is invalid The switch setting is not applicable The error is displayed only It does not affect operation The RUN STOP RESTART switch operation will be ignored Restart the CPU Unit Replace the CPU Unit if the error recurs when the Controller is restarted The error will be displayed only Operation will continue Errors Related to Configuration CPU Unit Network Configurator Cause Indi 7 segment Error history Displayed Recovery method cator display message Status after error MS Error Error Saved Detail Detail 0012 Non volatile One of the following Standard Parameter errors was Memory detected despite the configuration being completed Refer to Error Error history detailed information Cause 0001 CPU Unit system setting Standard Parameters only 0002 Name information
623. us human injury 17 8 2 Reset Types and Device Status Depending on the reset type and the device status resetting may not be pos sible Device status Safety Connection not established Safety Connection established Reset type Emulate cycling power Configuration unlocked Able to reset Return to the default configuration and Configuration locked Able to reset Not able to reset Configuration unlocked Able to reset Configuration locked Able to reset Not able to reset then emulate cycling power Return to the default configuration except to preserve the following parame ters and then emulate cycling power 1 Stopping Safety I O Communications is checked to check safety when the reset is executed Network Configurator The safety 1 6 communication is running il Tt will be reset after stopping the safety I O communication OK 455 Changing Device Parameters and Operating Modes Using a Memory Card Section 17 9 17 9 Changing Device Parameters and Operating Modes Using a Memory Card Itis possible to set parameters lock the configuration and change the operat ing mode of CIP compatible safety devices on the DeviceNet network of a NE2A series Controller by inserting a Memory Card that contains a configura tion restore file 17 9 1 Creating and Checking the Configuration Restore File A configuration restore file is a file that contai
624. usting the System Response Performance Section 8 6 192 This section describes how to use the Network Configurator with a NE2A series Safety Network Controller 9 1 9 3 9 4 9 5 Checking before Installation 0 0 0 e eee eee eee 9 1 1 9 1 2 System Requirements 0 00 c cece eee eee eee Required Software Installations 0 00000 Installing the Network Configurator 00 0 0 e eee eee 9 2 1 9 2 2 Installing the Network Configurator 00 Uninstalling the Network Configurator Installing the USB Driver 00 0 2 9 3 1 Installing the USB Driver 0000000002 eee Starting and Exiting the Network Configurator 9 4 1 9 4 2 Starting and Exiting the Network Configurator Checking the Version 00 0 c eee eee ee eee Saving and Reading Network Configuration Files 9 5 1 9 5 2 9 5 3 9 5 4 9 5 5 Saving Network Configuration Files 0 2 Reading Network Configuration Files 0 Password Protection for Network Configuration Files Protection Mode 0 0 eee eee eens Reading Network Configuration Files Created with Network Configurator Version 2 L or Lower Main Window and Menus 0 0 00 ccc cee eee eens 9 6 1 9 6 2 9 6
625. ut terminals Applying an inappropriate DC voltage or any AC voltage will disable the specified func tionality decrease safety functions damage the product or result in fire e Be sure to separate the communications cables and I O cables from high voltage and high current lines e Be careful not to get your fingers caught when attaching the connectors e Tighten the DeviceNet connector screws to the specified torque 0 25 to 0 3 N m e Incorrect wiring may lead to loss of safety functions Wire conductors cor rectly and verify operation of the NE2A series Controller before using the system in which the NE 2A series Controller is incorporated e After wiring is completed be sure to remove the label for preventing dust entry to enable proper heat dissipation NE2A Peripheral device Power supply circuit USB cable Selecting a Power Supply Use a DC power supply that satisfies the following requirements e The secondary circuits of the DC power supply must be isolated from the primary circuit by double insulation or reinforced insulation e The DC power supply must satisfy the output characteristic requirements for class 2 circuits or limited voltage circuit currents given in UL 508 e The output hold time must be 20 ms or longer e An SELV power supply that satisfies IEC EN 60950 1 and EN 50178 must be used Precautions for Removing Units e Always turn OFF the power supply before installing or removing Units or atta
626. utomat When this option is selected and the device is online its sta ically when it was connected _ tus will be automatically detected and displayed on Network Note To edit the configuration file install a plug in module or install an interface module start the Network Configurator as the system administrator Refer to 9 4 1 Starting and Exiting the Network Configurator On Window 2000 or XP these operations are not possible unless you are logged on with administrator rights On Windows Vista or 7 if the above operations are preformed when the Net 227 Main Window and Menus Section 9 6 work Configurator is started without administrator rights Windows Vista 7 user account management will redirect you to the local folder of the user that started the Network Configurator The results of these operations will there fore not be applied for other user accounts Help Menu Menu commands Description Toolbar icon Topic Searches the help topics OK OK About Displays the Network Configurator version information OK OK IMPORTANT The Network Configurator does not provide a lockout function to disable oper ation if no operations are performed for a specific period of time If a lockout function is required use the password protection function for the screen saver provided by Microsoft Windows 9 6 5 Status Bar G D CHRON 4668F 7 DRM21 10900 500K B gt Drine D __C_cABG UM_ Sta
627. value 115 EtherNet IP Standard Communications Section 5 7 116 1 When Less Than Five Originators Perform Multicast Communications Make the settings on the Edit Connection Dialog Box for the originator device on the Network Configurator Click the Show Detail Button in the Edit Con nection Dialog Box to set the advanced parameters 192 168 250 1 NE2A ENS21 Edit Connection It will add 4 connection configuration to originator device i Please configure the Tag Set each of originator device and target device Connection I O Type Input Only Y Originator Device Target Device Node Address 192 168 250 4 Node Address 192 168 250 1 Comment J1W EIP21 Comment NE24 ENS hput Tae Set Edit Tag Sets Output Tag Se EJ D00100 2Byte E InputAssembly1 2Byte Fi pian Multi cast connection Output Tae Set Input Tae Set Connection Type Hide Detail Detail Parameter Packet Interval RPD 10 70 100000 me Timeout Value Packet Interval RPD x 16 2 _Gonnestion Name default_001 Connection Structure amp 192 168 250 4 CJ1W EIP21 D00100 M 1 0ms 192 168 250 1 NE2A ENS21 S InputAssembly1 OK Cancel Connection type Target device NE2A ENS21 input data Packet interval RP 1 Timeout value The multicast group is configured by setting the connection type target device NE2A ENS21 input data packet interval RPI and timeout value to the
628. vice Parameters Window in the Net work Configurator Note The program will not be saved simply by returning to the Edit Device Parame ters Window To save the program select Save or Save As from the File Menu of the Network Configurator or save the network configuration when closing the Network Configurator 3 Click the OK Button in the Edit Device Parameters Window The Logic Ed itor will be closed 353 Logic Editor Functions 15 3 Logic Editor Functions This section describes the windows toolbars and menu structure of the Logic Editor It also describes how to change between windows using shortcut keys 15 3 1 Layout of the Logic Editor Windows The Logic Editor consists of menus windows toolbars and a status bar Section 15 3 Project Window Function Blocks Function Blocks Window Taser El Function Boots Eg Dipi Output W olx x Vs vox Library Window Program Window Click on tab to change display lt x wah den indow 354 Watch Window ox n ee Name Data Type Device Variables Window NO Tag tnt 9x as vs NE2ASCPUOT I O Tag List Window Cross Reference Function Block Section wit Cross Reference Window Fai bs ojien Noriaki 0 3072 Proxy am Size 264512000 e E Status bar Logic Editor Functions Section 15 3 Windows Program Window This window is for
629. vice in the network Set TUNID Sets the TUNID for network devices Version 3 3L or higher Maintenance Information Displays the maintenance information of a device in the network Not all devices support this function Register to other Device Registers a device to another device External Data Export Exports I O comments or device parameters to another file format Not all devices support this function Import Imports a device parameter file created with DeviceNet Configurator version 1 or 2 Not all devices support this function figuration Restore File Create Con Creates a file that can be used to restore the configura tion Change Node Address Changes a device node address Change Device Comment Changes a device name Change Device Converts configuration data for the NELA SCPUO1 to configuration data for the NELA SCPU0O1 V1 or NE1A SCPUO2 Edit I O Comment Edits the I O comment Synchronize Identity A new network can be created or selected from existing networks and the routing destination network can be specified Register to Routing Network Display Routing Network Property Note EDS File Menu Menu commands Install Displays the properties of a device Description Installs an EDS file and adds a device to the Hardware List Normally there is no need to install the EDS files Toolbar icon
630. vice is registered Unililed Network Con igurator Changing Device Addresses When a device is added to a virtual network an unused IP address between 192 168 250 1 and 192 168 250 254 will be automatically allocated to the device The IP address displayed on the Network Configurator will be used as the IP address in the configuration data It must be the same as the actual IP address of the EtherNet IP Unit Use the following procedure to change the IP address in the configuration data 289 EtherNet IP Network Settings Section 12 3 Procedure 1 2 3 1 Selectthe device for which the IP address will be changed 2 Select the device and select Change IP Address from the Device Menu You can also right click the device and select Change IP Address The Change IP Address Dialog Box will be displayed Change IP Address NewlP Address EZ 168 250 1 OK Cancel l 3 Change the IP address and click the OK Button Set the same IP address that is set on the setting switches An error message will be displayed if an attempt is made to set an IP ad dress that is being used by another device Metwork Confisuraton led r Specified 1D already used e Lo Note 1 Setthe IP address for the device according to 12 3 3 TCP IP Settings 2 Ifthe IP addresses of the EtherNet IP Units have been changed from the Network Configurator connect each Unit and download the IP address parameters for the TCP
631. viceNet SL 4 Comment DeviceNet_1 Network Number J Auto 343802161140 D Manual OK Cancel 2 Select the Manual Option in the Network Number Area and enter a value Click the OK Button to set the network number An error message will be displayed if a network number that is already used for other network is set 245 DeviceNet Network Settings Section 11 3 Network Configurator The specified network number is already exist C Note Ifthe network number is set incorrectly a connection may be opened with an unintended device Set a different network number for each network domain and always set the same network number for all devices on the same network domain Checking Network Numbers Use the following procedure to check the network numbers set for networks before you set a network number 1 2 3 1 Select Properties from the Network Menu The Network Property Dialog Box will be displayed 2 Click the Get from the actual network Button The network number of the network will be read and displayed in the Man ual Field 11 3 2 Setting Node Addresses When a device is added to a virtual network an unused node address from 0 to 63 will be automatically allocated in the order that the device is added Set the node addresses so that they match the rotary switches on the NE2A DNS 21 DeviceNet Unit Refer to 3 6 3 Switches for information of setting node addresses using the rotary switc
632. w Monitor Starts or stops monitoring variables and function blocks Editor Menu Description Toolbar Online icon Function Block Inserts a function blocks at the curser position Variable Inserts an input or output variable at the curser position Text Box Inserts a comment at the curser position Add to Watch Window Registers the selected variables in the Watch Window Function Block Help Displays help on the selected function block Properties Displays the parameter settings of selected function blocks Variable Menu Command Description Toolbar icon Add Adds a new variable Edit Edits the parameter settings for an existing variable If the change affects the program a warning will be displayed in a message window Changing Vari Changes an output variable or internal variable to an input able Usage variable If the change affects the program a warning will be displayed in a message window Output Changes an input variable or an internal variable to an output variable If the change affects the program a warning will be displayed in a message window Internal Changes an input variable or an output variable to an internal variable The actual I O allocation will be canceled if a variable is changed to an internal variable If the change affects the pro gram a warning will be displayed in a message window Imports variables from an external CSV file
633. ween Controllers that support EtherNet IP Tag Data Links and Safety Devices on a DeviceNet network via NE2A series Controllers DeviceNet Safety Communications or DeviceNet Standard Communications are used between the NE2A series Controller and the Safety Device A reece Be DeviceNet Safety communications DeviceNet Standard communications EtherNet IP Standard communications Tag Data Links Number of connections Up to 2 connections per EtherNet IP Unit targets only I O size Up to 1 024 bytes per connection Unit unit ec a EtherNet IP EtherNet IP EtherNeyik NE2A f s CS CJ series PLC 0 f S peviceNet j P NE1A DST 1 series DST 1 series DST1 series Safety Network Controller Controller Controller Controller Z N WARNING essary for safety data are not taken for this data during generation Therefore do EtherNet IP tag link communications data is non safety data The measures nec not use this data to configure a Safety Control System S IMPORTANT The NE2A series Controllers must not be connected to open transmission systems Note The NE2A series Controller can function only as a Target It cannot function as an Originator To set the Originator refer to the user s manual for the EtherNet IP Unit that will be the Originator such as a Standard PLC 113 EtherNet IP Standard Communications Section 5 7 5 7 2 Setting Tag Data Link Connections Tag Data Link communica
634. width of 640 Us will be output to diagnose the output circuit when the Safety Output turns ON Check the input response time of the control device connected to the NE2A SOD4 1 Safety Output Unit to be sure that this OFF pulse will not cause mal functions Safety Output Functions Section 6 3 6 3 3 Wiring Output Devices Refer to the following diagram to select and wire the output devices NE 2A series Controller Z N WARNING Serious injury may possibly occur due to breakdown of outputs Do not connect loads beyond the rated value to the Safety Outputs and the test outputs Serious injury may possibly occur due to loss of required safety functions Wire the 24 VDC lines so that they do NOT touch the output lines and cause the load to turn ON when there is a short circuit Serious injury may possibly occur due to loss of required safety functions Ground the 0 V line of the power supply for external output devices so that the devices do not turn ON when the Safety Output line or the test output line is grounded Serious injury may possibly occur due to loss of required safety functions Use appropri ate components or devices according to the requirements given in the following table SOO Control device Requirements Contactor Use a contactor with a forcibly guided mechanism and NC contacts as a feed back signal to detect contactor failure For feedback use a device with NC contacts capable of switc
635. will be displayed for the selected connection Checking the Communications Response Performance Note Section 13 3 01 DST1 MD16SL 1 DeviceNet_1 Edit Connection 170 Connection Name Safety Input Assembly 1 1 0 Type In 120 Size 1 Byte Open Type Configure the safety slave Check the Safety Signature Open only Connection Type Multi cast connection Single cast connection Data Expected Packet Interval EPI Tr areca es Reaction Time 84 ms OK Cancel 7 Setthe EPI using the slider in the Data Expected Packet Interval The network reaction time can be checked under Reaction Time in the Data Expected Packet Interval field 8 Click the OK Button The EPI of the selected connection will be changed Edit Device Parameters Slave 1 0 DeviceNet Target 1 0 EtherNet IP 170 Unit Communication Unit Mode Cycle Time Extend Mode Logic Safety Connections Safety Slave I O Se x Auto allocation Register Device List Product Name EPI 01 DST1 MD 16S ah Safety Input As 30 ms 84 ms n 1 Byte oh Safety Output 21ms 66 ms 1 Byte 03 NEOA SCPUG oh Input Assembly 1 10 ms 44 ms 1 Byte Gh Output Assembl 10ms 44 ms 1 Byte 00 NE24 SCPUD Input ssembly3 10ms 50ms 1 Byte Ff OutputAssembly2 10 ms 50 ms 1 Byte 02 DST1 MD165 oh Safety Input As 27 ms 66 ms 1 Byte 4 Safety Output 21ms 66 ms 1 Byte 03 DST1 MD165 E t Safety Input As 21 ms 66 ms
636. wing rights apply to operations to user defined function blocks Editing Browsing and Using user monitoring defined function blocks in programming Password Editing Browsing Activation key For details on the activation keys refer to 7 1 4 User defined Function Block Passwords To set the operation rights select the user defined function block and select the Project Menu The following settings can be made for operation rights of user defined function blocks Menu command Description Authentication Authenticates the password for a user defined function block with a password setting to enable accessing and editing the function block Change Password Changes the password required to access and edit a user defined function block Display Activation Enables checking the activation key required to reuse user Key defined function blocks from a library Note There are no operation right settings for sections 15 9 1 Creating User defined Function Blocks You can create new function blocks by combining the function blocks that are provided with the Network Configurator Procedure 1 2 3 1 Select New User Function Block from the Project Menu Or select User Function Block in the Project Window and then right click New User Function Block The New User Function Block Dialog Box will be displayed 394 Creating and Reusing Program Objects Section 15 9 New User Funct
637. words Passwords and activation keys can be set for user defined function blocks to prevent access or modifications Operating rights for user defined functions blocks are shown in the following table Access and Importing monitoring Password Modification Enabled Enabled Enabled Access Disabled Enabled Enabled Activation key Disabled Disabled Enabled Operations for Which an Access Password for User defined Function Blocks Is Required Opening user defined function blocks e Online monitoring of user defined function blocks e Forced setting resetting e Importing user defined function blocks Operations for Which a Modification Password for User defined Function Blocks Is Required e Changing user defined function blocks e Changing passwords The access password for user defined function blocks is sometimes also required Operations for Which an Activation Key Is Required The activation key enables importing a user defined function block for which an access or modification password is set The activation key can be confirmed when exporting a user defined function block or when adding a user defined function block to the library It can also be confirmed from the menus of the Logic Editor 7 1 5 Forgotten Passwords Forgotten Device Passwords If you forget a device password contact your OMRON Support Center with the following information e Vendor ID e Serial number e Counter information This information
638. work Bandwidth Best Average of Cycle Time 125K Bits 32 ms Use Rate 30 s 250K Bits 16 ms 500K Bit s 8 ms Calculate Close Note The status of network bandwidth usage shows the total bandwidth usage for Safety Connections and Standard Connections Changing the EPI Settings of Safety I O Connections The best average EPI calculated by the Network Configurator is the average value for all Safety Connections Adjust the overall network EP I such as in the following examples If a connection requires a high speed reaction time such as to connect a safety curtain decrease the EPI If high speed is not required such as to connect a door switch in a non hazardous area increase the EPI 184 Calculating Communications Response Performance Section 8 5 8 5 2 Adjusting EtherNet IP EPI and RPI Note By using full duplex communications and an EtherNet switching hub EtherNet IP enables allocating network bandwidth for individual nodes rather than sharing the network bandwidth with all nodes Communications can be performed at high speed and with stability because the nodes are not affected by the communications load on other nodes and so collisions do not occur The allowed Unit communications bandwidth 1 is one restriction on the per formance of safety I O communications and tag data link communications for EtherNet IP Shortening the EPI or RPI increases the allowed Unit bandwidth usage Conversely lengthening
639. y Click the Next Button A dialog box prompting the input of the reset key will be displayed Input the number of the reset key obtained from your OMRON representative and click the Reset Button Reset Password Please input Reset Key and reset the password Reset Key Reset 4 Back Cancel Dist If you have successfully reset the password the following dialog box will be displayed This dialog box indicates that the device is now setto the default settings in which no device password is specified Click the OK Button to close the dialog box and then exit the Password Recovery Tool Window by clicking the End Button PasswordRecovery E t Completed reset password User Test and Automatic Operation Section 17 7 17 7 User Test and Automatic Operation This section describes performing a user test the settings for locking device parameters to protect the safety control system from unintentional changes and starting operation automatically by turning ON the power 17 7 1 User Test In this step the user himself confirms the program operation and performs functional tests Always perform the user test because it is the user s responsibility to verify the system operation The user test verifies the correctness of all parameters downloaded to each safety device as well as each device s safety signature To demonstrate that all parameters and safety signatures are correct after completing the user test perfor
640. y Output 02 DST1 MD16SL 1 5 Safety Output 5 O0 P d Safety Relay 5 O1 P d Safety Relay 5 O2 N d Safety Qutput O3 N d Safety Output 3 5 O4 N d Safety Qutpuy 4 N d Safety Output 5 Remote outputs N d Safety Zutput 7 Section 4 3 Creating Variables 4 3 3 Creating Variables User Definition BE fl SL 8 Ba Project NE2A SCPU01 B Sectiont Function Blocks Jda Logic 1 AND 1 Comparator 1 Comparator2 1 EXNOR 1 ExOR 1 NAND E NOR i NOT tL or 1 AS FF 2 Sy Timer Counter 4 Counter 4 Off Delay Timer 4 On Delay Timer 1 Pulse Generator Bn nk lt There are two ways to create variables as shown below Specify the variable type name and data type When input or output variables are defined with this method the variables are not linked with I O tags Therefore after defining the variables they must be linked with local I O remote I O or status or assigned to an assembly File Edit View Project Device Editor Variable Library Window Help Ata oe aoee Aq als BS ey p TER Section1 x Variables ax o Name Data Type Device I OTag Fedak N Fekal amp EMO 1 BOOL D EMO 2 BOOL Reset ___ 5 a amp DoorSw 1 BOOL A ta za 2y DoorSw 2 BOOL ie e lL nee Reset BOOL fa yo lt mor a a gt 1 0 Tag List a as NE24 SCPUOI
641. y Tab Page 0 00 00 eee eee 484 18 4 Monitoring EtherNet IP Units 0 0 0 cee eee eee 486 18 4 1 Status Tab Page 2 2 eee eee 486 18 4 2 Error History Tab Page 00 0 2 eee ee eee 487 18 4 3 Ethernet Information Tab Page 02000000 489 463 Monitoring Programs and Force setting resetting Variables Section 18 1 18 1 Monitoring Programs and Force setting resetting Variables 18 1 1 Monitoring Programs The values of variables and the signal status of connections to function blocks can be monitored online in the Logic Editor Window Before monitoring a program online make sure that the Network Configurator is connected to the network and that the NE 2A series Controller to be moni tored is operating Starting Online Monitoring Online monitoring will start when you select Monitor from the Device Menu You can also click the Monitor Icon in the toolbar A variable or connection that is currently ON will be displayed in dark green during monitoring Fle Edb Vew Popi Denice Filter Vartio Liroy Windows Hep H J amp R Br 9 ML DODDS Rise AQ ad ats ta 2 Promt x Section x Votis ox me neasi PUM 4 So By Uses Fuerinn Blocks Nome Data Tyee Dever pus gt SINUT O DooL QINPUT_O2 BOOL amp INPUT_O9 BOOL DNI Qy INPUT_04 Bool pror r a INPUT_OS Baol ia la ST a mra gt es a a ROTIE ie on NO
642. y communications and Tag Data Link settings are all one to one unicast and multicast packets cannot be used If the multicast filter function is being used settings must be made for that function in the switching hub Mixed Execution of Safety Communications Tag Data Links and Message Communications 138 We recommend using an L3 switching hub with multicast filtering and L4 QoS By setting Safety Communications and Tag Data Link packets for higher prior ity transmission it is possible to prevent problems such as transmission delays due to message communications traffic and packet losses due to buffer overflow Settings must be made in the switching hub when using the multicast filtering function and L4 QoS function e Ask the switching hub manufacturer for the setting procedures for the switching hub e Install the switching hub so that its environmental resistance capabilities are not exceeded Ask the switching hub manufacturer for information on the environmental resistance of the switching hub SECTION 6 Local I O Control Functions The section describes the functions used to control local I O in a NE2A series Safety Network Controller 6 1 NE2A series Controller Local I O Specifications 140 6 2 Safety Input Functions 00 eee eee 141 622 1 Outline sas weaned sink PaaS OARS ERE RE ea 141 6 2 2 Setting the Channel Mode 0 0008 141 6 2 3 Connecting Input Device
643. y data Assembly data is a collection of input data or output data used to communi cate between a Master and Slave or an Originator and Target of each type of communications By predefining the data it can be transmitted without relying on user programming Variables local I O information remote I O information and status information can be freely combined and allocated to the assembly data Types of Assembly Data That Can Be Set Note Creating Assemblies Data that is input to the Master is called an input assembly and data that is output from the Master is called an output assembly The following types of assemblies can be created for a NE2A series Control ler The following table gives the maximum number of assemblies that can be created and the maximum number of data items that can be allocated for each assembly type Number of Maximum assemblies number of that can be data items created that can be allocated Safety Target I O Input assembly Safety Target I O Output assembly Slave I O DeviceNet Input assembly Slave I O DeviceNet Output assembly Target I O EtherNet IP Input assembly Target I O EtherNet IP Output assembly An input assembly produce can be used in more than one connection An output assembly consume can be used in only one connection The Network Configurator can export data names and data types allocated within the assemblies in a form that can be imported
644. yed 266 Using the NE2A series Controller as a Safety Slave Section 11 5 Edit Bit Comment Output Input _ok Cancel 2 Entera comment for each bit and press the Enter Key 3 Click the OK Button The bit comment will be set Note Up to 48 characters 48 bytes can used for the bit comment The characters that can be input are the same as those that can be input for variables Refer to Variable Specifications on page 80 Editing You can edit registered variables For information on the procedure refer to Creating New Variables on page 265 above Changing the Order of Registered Data You can change the order of registered data Procedure 1 2 3 1 Selectthe registered data that you will change the order of 2 Click the bud Button move up or gt Button move down The registered data that is selected will move Example Name Type Size Name Type Size DATA D1 BOOL 1 Bit DATA DI BOOL 1 Bit DATA 02 BOOL 1 Bit DATA D4 WORD 2 Byte DATA 03 BYTE 1 Byte DATA 02 BOOL 1 Bit DATA D4 WORD 2 Byte DATA 03 BYTE 1 Byte DATA 05 Ne DWORD 4 Byte DATA 05 DWORD 4 Byte Press the Select DATA_04 DATA_04 will move Button twice Note BOOL data can be arranged in BYTE WORD or DWORD data If longer vari ables such as BYTE variables are placed between continuous BOOL vari ables the total data size will change 11 5 3 Registering I O Assemblies from the Logic Editor You can register I O assemblies from
645. ype Size 3 DATAO1 BOOL 1 Bit DATA D1 BOOL 1 Bit DATA 02 BOOL 1 Bit IDATA D4 WORD 2 Byte DATA 03 BYTE 1 Byte DATA 02 BOOL 1 Bit DATA D4 WORD 2 Byte DATA 03 BYTE 1 Byte DATA 05 i DWORD 4 Byte DATA 05 DWORD 4 Byte Press the Select DATA_04 i Button twice DATA_04 will move Note BOOL data can be arranged in BYTE WORD or DWORD data If longer vari ables such as BYTE variables are placed between continuous BOOL vari ables the total data size will change 12 7 3 Registering I O Assemblies from the Logic Editor You can register I O assemblies from the Logic Editor Procedure 1 2 3 1 Select Setting Target I O from the Device Menu of the Logic Editor The Target S lave I O Settings Dialog Box will be displayed 2 Click the Target I O EtherNet IP Tab The Target I O EtherNet IP Tab Page will be displayed in the Target S lave Settings Dialog Box Target Slaye 1 0 Settings Safety Slave 1 0 Target 0 EtherNet IP Slave 1 0 DeviceNet Name Type Size l New Input New Output Register 0 2 Register 0 2 3 Click the New Input Button or New Output Button The Edit Target I O EtherNet IP Dialog Box will be displayed 305 Using an NE2A series Controller as a Standard Slave Section 12 7 The procedures for adding changing and deleting I O assemblies are the same as the procedures for Target devices For details refer to 12 7 1 Regis tering I O Assemblies for Target Devices 12 7 4 Settin
646. ystem Errors Related to the EtherNet IP Unit Network Configurator Communications Unit Indi cators 7 segment display Error history MS NS Lit red OFF Communications Unit Error Detail Indi cators 7 segment display MS NS Lit red OFF Error Detail Error Detail Saved Displayed message Special Unit Error Error name Special Unit Error Cause Recovery method Status after error An EtherNet IP Unit hardware error has occurred Replace the EtherNet IP Unitif the error recurs when the Controller is restarted Operation stops Cause Recovery method Status after error An EtherNet IP Unit hardware error has occurred Replace the EtherNet IP Unitif the error recurs when the Controller is restarted Operation stops Lit red OFF CPU Errors for EtherNet IP Units H3 IP Local node address Special Unit Error Communications Unit Network Configurator An EtherNet IP Unit hardware error has occurred Replace the EtherNet IP Unitif the error recurs when the Controller is restarted Indi cators 7 segment display Error history MS NS Error Detail F4 IP Local node address Error Detail Saved Displayed message Communi cations Controller Error Operation stops Cause Recovery method Status after error An EtherNet IP Unit hardware error has occurred Replace
647. ze a 01 DST1 MD16S S Safety Input s 1 Byte ah Safety Output A 1 Byte 02 DST1 MD16S Gh Safety Input As 1 Byte S Safety Output A 1 Byte 03 DST1 MD165 S Safety Input s 1 Byte Za Safety Output A s 1 Byte 04 DST1 MD16S Za Safety Input As 1 Byte Z Safety Output A 1 Byte 05 DST1 MD16S S Safety Input As 1 Byte Za Safety Output A 1 Byte 06 DST1 MD165 Z Safety Inout As 1Bwe Register Unregisterd 190 Checking and Adjusting the System Response Performance Section 8 6 8 6 Checking and Adjusting the System Response Performance Check that the reaction time satisfies the necessary specifications for the safety chain based on the information in 8 2 Calculating Safety Response Performance Check that the standard response performance satisfies the necessary specifications given in 8 3 Calculating Response Performance in Standard Communications Make adjustments as described below if the reac tion time does not satisfy the necessary specifications Adjusting the Network Bandwidth EPI and Communications Cycle for Safety Communications and Standard Communications If Safety I O Communications and Standard I O Communications or Tag Data Links are both used calculate the reaction time for each type of communica tions while changing the network bandwidth usage e To decrease the EPI for Safety I O Communications and increase the communications cycle time or Tag Data Link RPI
648. zed H4 or H5 may be displayed on 7 segment display on the DeviceNet Unit If there is an error in the Communications Unit remove the cause of the error and restart If the error recurs replace the Communications Unit and CPU Unit Operation is aborted Troubleshooting CPU Unit Errors Section 19 2 Errors Related to Operation of the RUN STOP RESTART Switch 1 2 CPU Unit Error name Cause Indi 7 segment Recovery method cator display Status after error MS Error Detail C2 13 Error with downloaded parameters The configuration cannot be restored because there was an error in the parameters downloaded to the Target device Target node Check the Target device Alternatively check the operation address rights file and recreate it if itis different from the network con figuration Operation continues for the next device Errors Related to Operation of the RUN STOP RESTART Switch 2 2 CPU Unit Error name Cause Indi 7 segment Recovery method cator display Status after error MS Error Detail C1 01 Communications timeout A request for changing the mode or restoring the configura tion timed out because a Target device was missing or because of an error in the communications path See note Target node address Check the Target device and other devices that form the com munications path Alternatively check the operation rights file and recreate it

NE2A Series Safety Network Controller Operation Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents